WelcomeWelcome| 00:04 | Hello and welcome to iPhone and iPod
Touch Essential Training. I am Garrick Chow.
| | 00:08 | The iPhone is one of the most popular,
powerful, and easy-to-use smart phones
| | 00:12 | on the market today.
| | 00:13 | It's essentially a small computer you
can hold in the palm of your hand, and
| | 00:17 | the iPod Touch is basically an
iPhone without the phone, running the same
| | 00:20 | operating system and apps.
| | 00:22 | In this course we are going to take a
detailed look at all the most important
| | 00:24 | features of these incredibly useful devices.
| | 00:26 | We'll start off by exploring the
external controls and the touchscreen
| | 00:30 | interface, getting you up to speed
with essential skills, like opening and
| | 00:33 | closing apps and typing
with the keyless keyboard.
| | 00:36 | Then we'll cover the most important
and frequently-used applications in depth
| | 00:40 | from checking your email with mail,
browsing the web with Safari, enjoying
| | 00:46 | music and videos with the iPod, and of
course, using the incredibly robust phone
| | 00:51 | features including the new FaceTime video
chatting feature available on the iPhone 4.
| | 00:55 | We will also look at how to find and
install any of over 160,000 additional apps
| | 01:01 | from the App Store to further extend
and enhance the capabilities of your
| | 01:04 | device, and we will wrap up with an
in-depth look at important preferences and
| | 01:09 | settings, as well as tips for
troubleshooting your device when necessary.
| | 01:14 | Now, because the current iOS 4
Operating System does not run, or is not fully
| | 01:17 | supported on older iPhones and iPods,
the devices we're going to be covering in
| | 01:21 | this course are the iPhone 3GS, the
iPhone 4 and the 2nd generation iPod Touch.
| | 01:26 | If you have a 1st generation iPhone or
iPhone 3G, much of what we're covering
| | 01:30 | will still apply to those models,
but if something you see in this course
| | 01:33 | doesn't look or work the same on your
phone, it's most likely because it's an
| | 01:36 | iOS 4 feature and not available on
your model, but rest assured, this course
| | 01:41 | will show you all the essential skills
you'll need to not just use your device
| | 01:44 | but to use it effectively while taking
advantage of all the powerful features it has to offer.
| | 01:48 | So let's get started with iPhone
and iPod Touch Essential Training.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Upgrading to iOS 4| 00:00 | Before we get into things, first make
sure your iPhone or iPod touch is running
| | 00:03 | the latest iOS Operating System software.
| | 00:06 | You can easily determine if your
device is running the latest software by
| | 00:09 | opening iTunes on your computer and
then plugging in your iPhone or iPod touch,
| | 00:13 | which I will do right now.
| | 00:14 | We'll be looking at how to connect
your iPod or iPhone to your computer in a
| | 00:16 | later chapter, if you are
not sure how to do this.
| | 00:18 | As you can see, I get a message telling me
that new software is available for my iPod touch.
| | 00:22 | And I can choose to just download the
software, which means I can install it at
| | 00:26 | a later time, or download and
Install the software all at once.
| | 00:30 | Now, if you don't see this message, you might
have previously checked Do not ask me again.
| | 00:33 | I am just going to click Cancel so you
can see how to upgrade your software in
| | 00:36 | case you didn't see this message.
| | 00:38 | So here in iTunes, I can select my iPod
under Devices, and here, under the Summary,
| | 00:43 | tab, I can see I am currently running
Software Version 3.1.3 on my iPod, and
| | 00:48 | under Version, I can see that message
again telling me that newer version of the
| | 00:51 | iPod software is available (Version 4.0).
| | 00:54 | So to update my iPod, I just click Update.
| | 00:56 | I see a message telling me that
iTunes will update my iPod, and I will
| | 01:00 | click Update again.
| | 01:02 | You might want to read through the
information that appears here, including
| | 01:04 | information on what will be
added, feature-wise, to your device.
| | 01:07 | Then click Next, read through the
software license agreement.
| | 01:17 | So now we'll let iTunes do its thing by
downloading the latest software from Apple.
| | 01:20 | I can watch its progress from the top
part of the window here, and once the
| | 01:24 | download is complete, I will see
the message that the software is being
| | 01:26 | extracted, and then it will be installed.
| | 01:29 | Now, while the update is occurring, do
not disconnect your iPod or iPhone, and
| | 01:33 | don't touch its screen.
| | 01:34 | You will see different messages and
screens appear on the device while
| | 01:37 | the update is going on, but again,
don't touch your device until the
| | 01:40 | update is complete.
| | 01:41 | Also, we're speeding this
process up quite a bit here.
| | 01:44 | In reality, it will take
longer for all this to occur.
| | 01:46 | But once the software is installed,
your device will reboot and disappear
| | 01:50 | momentarily from the list of devices
on the left side of the screen in iTunes.
| | 01:55 | And once it comes back on, I can
select it again under Devices, and under the
| | 02:00 | Summary tab, I can see that it is
running Software Version 4.0, and under the
| | 02:03 | Version section, I get the message
telling me that the software is up to date.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
1. The BasicsA tour around the iPhone and the iPod Touch| 00:00 | Let's begin by familiarizing ourselves
with the layout of the iPhone and iPod touch.
| | 00:04 | If you're a brand-new iPhone or iPod
touch user, you will definitely want to pay
| | 00:08 | attention here because much of what
I am going to be showing you will be
| | 00:10 | referenced throughout this course.
| | 00:11 | We'll start at the top of the
iPhone 4 and work our day down.
| | 00:14 | The lone button at the top of
the iPhone is the Sleep/Wake button.
| | 00:18 | This is the button that lets you lock
the screen when the phone is on, so you
| | 00:21 | don't accidentally tap or
activate any apps or other features.
| | 00:23 | When the phone is on, press the Sleep/
Wake button once to lock the screen.
| | 00:28 | At this point, the phone is still on and
can receive calls, text messages and so
| | 00:32 | on, but it's using very
little power with the screen off.
| | 00:35 | And this way, you can't accidentally hit
any onscreen buttons because there are no
| | 00:38 | onscreen buttons when the screen is off.
| | 00:40 | Putting the phone to sleep, or locking
the screen, as it's also referred to, is
| | 00:44 | always just one press of the button.
| | 00:46 | Unlocking the screen actually happens
in two parts: first press the Sleep/Wake
| | 00:49 | button again, the screen comes back on
but to let your iPhone or iPod touch know
| | 00:54 | you didn't press the button by accident,
you have to drag your finger across the
| | 00:57 | area that says, Slide to Unlock.
| | 00:59 | This is really an ingenious system
because there is very little chance that
| | 01:02 | both the Sleep/Wake button, and the Slide
to Unlock action will happen unintentionally.
| | 01:07 | The Sleep/Wake button is also the button to
turn the phone completely off and back on again.
| | 01:10 | Where you just press the button and
release it to lock and unlock the phone, to
| | 01:14 | turn the phone off, hold down
the button for about three seconds.
| | 01:17 | You will see this message
that says, Slide to Power Off.
| | 01:22 | Again, this is to make sure you
don't accidentally turn the phone off.
| | 01:25 | Just slide your finger across the
display, and the phone will power down, and in
| | 01:29 | just a few moments the phone will be
completely off and unable to receive calls,
| | 01:32 | text messages, emails or
any other communications.
| | 01:36 | Anyone calling your phone while it's off
will be sent directly to your voicemail.
| | 01:39 | To turn the phone back on, just hold
the Sleep/Wake button for about three
| | 01:42 | seconds again, and just so you know,
so far everything about the Sleep/Wake
| | 01:47 | button I've shown you is how the
button on the iPod touch works as well.
| | 01:51 | But on the iPhone, the Sleep/Wake button
is also used for managing incoming calls.
| | 01:54 | For instance, you can use it to send
incoming calls directly to your voicemail,
| | 01:58 | but the iPod touch, not being a phone,
obviously doesn't have this feature.
| | 02:02 | I will talk more about redirecting and
managing incoming calls in an upcoming movie.
| | 02:06 | Also, on the top of the iPhone
is the Headphone/Microphone Jack.
| | 02:10 | This is where you plug in the earbud
headset that came with your phone, or any
| | 02:13 | other third-party headphone set.
| | 02:14 | Starting with the iPhone 3G, the
headset jack was made flush with the edge of
| | 02:18 | the phone, so you can use any
headphones with a mini jack connector and not
| | 02:22 | just the Apple headset.
| | 02:23 | But this is also a microphone jack,
so you can use headsets with integrated
| | 02:27 | microphones, including the headset that
comes with the phone, letting you make
| | 02:30 | calls with your headset, as well.
| | 02:31 | On the iPhone 4, there is also a secondary
microphone right next to the headphone jack.
| | 02:35 | It's a tiny hole right here.
| | 02:37 | This microphone is used by the phone
to determine how noisy or quiet the
| | 02:41 | environment you are currently in is,
and it uses that information to make your
| | 02:44 | calls less noisy for the people you are calling.
| | 02:46 | The main microphone used during phone
calls is on the bottom of the phone, and
| | 02:49 | we'll look at that momentarily.
| | 02:51 | Moving down the right side of the
iPhone 4, you will find the SIM card slot.
| | 02:55 | The SIM card is where your account
information with your cellular provider is stored.
| | 02:59 | In most cases, you will never have to
access your SIM card, but it's handy to
| | 03:02 | know where it is in case you ever want
to swap another SIM card in there, or take
| | 03:06 | yours out to put into another phone,
which you might need to do if you have to
| | 03:08 | send your phone in for repairs.
| | 03:10 | Since the SIM card has all your
cellular account information, you can put it
| | 03:14 | into any compatible phone from your cellular
provider and make and receive calls right away.
| | 03:18 | Also, this is a new location
for the SIM card on the iPhone 4.
| | 03:22 | On previous iPhones, the SIM card is
found at the top of the phone, between the
| | 03:25 | Sleep/Wake button and the headphone jack.
| | 03:27 | Moving down the left side of the
iPhone, we next have the Silencer switch.
| | 03:31 | The sole purpose of this switch is
to put your phone into Silent mode.
| | 03:35 | On other phones, you often have to
browser through a series of menus, or set a
| | 03:38 | button to set your phone to Vibrate or Silent.
| | 03:41 | But here on the iPhone is an actual,
physical switch, making it super easy and
| | 03:44 | quick to silence your phone, even
while keeping it in your pocket.
| | 03:48 | Below the Silencer switch
are the Volume Control buttons.
| | 03:51 | Depending on what you are doing with the
phone, the Volume controls do different things.
| | 03:54 | If you are listening to music or
watching a video, the Volume control turns
| | 03:58 | the volume up or down.
| | 03:59 | If you are on a call, it controls the
level of the caller's volume, and in all
| | 04:03 | other cases, it adjusts the
volume of your ring tone or alarms.
| | 04:06 | Here on the iPhone 4, the Volume
Control buttons are two individual buttons.
| | 04:09 | On earlier iPhones, Volume control is a
rocker switch, but the function is identical.
| | 04:14 | The only other button on the
iPhone is on its front, at the bottom.
| | 04:17 | This is the Home button, and even
though it's just one button, it's a very
| | 04:20 | important one, so it has
its own movie in this chapter.
| | 04:23 | Now, let's take a look at
the bottom of the phone.
| | 04:25 | In the center is the dock connector
where you connect the cable to attach your
| | 04:28 | iPhone or iPod touch to your computer.
| | 04:30 | There are tons of other accessories
that plug into the dock connector, as well.
| | 04:34 | To the right of the dock connector
is the built-in speaker for using when
| | 04:37 | you are making speaker phone calls, or
listening to other sounds coming from your iPhone.
| | 04:40 | The identical-looking area to the left
of the dock connector is the microphone,
| | 04:44 | again, used for when you are making
calls or with applications that record or
| | 04:47 | monitor incoming sounds.
| | 04:49 | Now, in previous iPhones the
microphone and speaker locations are reversed,
| | 04:52 | meaning the microphone is on the
right, and the speaker is on the left.
| | 04:56 | On the back of the phone,
you will find the main camera.
| | 04:58 | There is also a flash next to the
camera on the iPhone 4, which is great for
| | 05:01 | taking low light photos and videos.
| | 05:04 | Also, exclusive to the iPhone 4 is a
front-facing camera, which is this tiny lens
| | 05:08 | right here next to the earpiece speaker.
| | 05:10 | It's used for taking self-portraits
and for using the new FaceTime video
| | 05:13 | chatting feature, which we'll
look at in a later chapter.
| | 05:16 | And that's pretty much all there
is to the exterior of the iPhone.
| | 05:19 | Now, the iPod touch is similar, but there
are some key differences. Let's take a look.
| | 05:24 | To begin, the iPod touch's Sleep/Wake
button is on the left side of the top
| | 05:27 | edge, not the right as it is on the
iPhone, and because this isn't an iPhone, its
| | 05:31 | function is to sleep or wake the device
or to turn it off using that combination
| | 05:35 | of holding down the button for three
seconds and then sliding to turn it off.
| | 05:39 | Similarly, hold down the Sleep/Wake
button again to turn the iPod touch back on.
| | 05:42 | There are no other buttons on the top
of the iPod touch, and again, it's not a
| | 05:46 | phone so there is no SIM card slot anywhere.
| | 05:48 | The headphone jack is on the bottom
of the iPod touch instead of the top.
| | 05:52 | This is both a headphone and
microphone port, just like on the iPhone, but the
| | 05:55 | earbuds that come with the iPod
touch don't have a built-in microphone.
| | 05:58 | So if you want to be able to get sounds
into your iPod touch, you will need to
| | 06:01 | buy an aftermarket microphone.
| | 06:03 | Also, notice there is no speaker or
microphone area next to the dock connector here.
| | 06:07 | So there really is no microphone on the
touch, but the 2nd generation iPod touch
| | 06:11 | does have a built-in internal
speaker for playing sounds and music.
| | 06:14 | It just doesn't have an obvious
location, like the iPhone does.
| | 06:17 | But you do need to purchase a
headset with a microphone, or a dedicated
| | 06:20 | microphone, if you want to take
advantage of applications that can receive sound,
| | 06:24 | like a voice recorder app, for example.
| | 06:25 | The iPod touch does not have a built-
in camera like the iPhones, but it can
| | 06:29 | manage and display the photos you sync
to it, which we'll also look at how to
| | 06:33 | do in a later chapter.
| | 06:34 | Other than that, the iPod touch is thinner
than the iPhone, and it has a metal back.
| | 06:39 | The dark plastic area is the Wi-Fi
antenna, which is necessary since the metal
| | 06:42 | back isn't conducive to Wi-Fi signals.
| | 06:45 | So that's your basic tour of the
outside of the iPhone and iPod touch.
| | 06:48 | In upcoming movies, we'll start looking
at the essential knowledge needed to use
| | 06:52 | the phone, and its operating system.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| The Home screen and the Home button| 00:00 | In this video, I want to look at the
Home button on the iPhone and iPod touch.
| | 00:04 | This is the Home button here on the
front of the iPhone, and its primary purpose
| | 00:07 | is to immediately get you
back to your home screen.
| | 00:10 | Now when the screen is locked, as it
currently is here, pressing the Home button
| | 00:13 | is like pressing the Sleep/Wake button.
| | 00:16 | It activates your screen, but you
still have to slide your finger across this
| | 00:19 | area to unlock the phone.
| | 00:21 | This is the home screen of the iPhone,
where you can access the various functions
| | 00:24 | and apps that are available.
| | 00:26 | As we will see later, you can install
additional apps, which can be spread across
| | 00:29 | multiple screens, which you can
access by flicking the screens to the left.
| | 00:33 | Pressing the Home button instantly
brings you back to the first and main screen,
| | 00:36 | no matter how many screens deep you are.
| | 00:39 | If you are running an app, pressing
the Home button always brings you back
| | 00:42 | to the home screen.
| | 00:43 | Pressing the Home button while on the
home screen brings up the spotlight search
| | 00:47 | screen, where you can search your
entire phone for words or phrases.
| | 00:51 | This is useful for quickly looking up
info in some email or finding an address
| | 00:55 | for one of the people in your contact.
| | 00:57 | Pressing the Home button again
takes you back to the home screen.
| | 01:00 | New to the iOS 4 operating system, and
available on the iPhone 3GS, the iPhone 4,
| | 01:05 | and the second generation iPod touch,
double-clicking the Home button, meaning
| | 01:09 | giving it two quick clicks opens the
Multitasking bar at the bottom of the
| | 01:12 | screen allowing you to
switch among different apps.
| | 01:15 | We will take a closer look at the
Multitasking bar in its own movie later in this chapter.
| | 01:19 | Double-clicking the Home button
again closes the Multitasking bar.
| | 01:22 | And again, multitasking is only
available on the iPhone 3GS and
| | 01:25 | second-generation iPod, or later.
| | 01:27 | While we are here on the Home screen,
I just want to take a moment to discuss
| | 01:29 | how things work here.
| | 01:30 | We've already seen that tapping an icon
opens that app or feature, and that you
| | 01:35 | can page through your multiple screens
of apps, if you have multiple screens, by
| | 01:38 | flicking left and right.
| | 01:39 | Notice as I do that the four icons
at the bottom stay where they are.
| | 01:44 | This is where you can store up to
four apps that you always want immediate
| | 01:47 | access to, no matter which
screen of applications you are on.
| | 01:49 | We will talk about how to customize
your app placement in the chapter on apps.
| | 01:53 | Across the top of iPhone's home screen
is where we see the name of the wireless
| | 01:56 | carrier, in this case AT&T. Next to
that, we see the WiFi symbol, indicating I am
| | 02:01 | currently connected to a WiFi network.
| | 02:03 | You will see the same thing on the iPod touch.
| | 02:05 | On the iPhone, however, you may also
see a 3G here, indicating that you are on a
| | 02:09 | 3G cellular network, or possibly the letter E
indicating you are on AT&T's slower EDGE data network.
| | 02:15 | If you are not on the US, you may see
other icons or representations of your
| | 02:18 | wireless carrier's network.
| | 02:20 | On the iPod touch, you will only ever see
the WiFi symbol if you have WiFi turned
| | 02:23 | on, which we will talk about
how to do in an upcoming movie.
| | 02:26 | In the center, is the current time,
and to the right of that is the Battery
| | 02:30 | Indicator, which will show you how
much battery time remains, or if you are
| | 02:33 | currently plugged into a charger.
| | 02:35 | Other icons may appear across the top from
time to time, depending on what you are doing.
| | 02:38 | For instance, if you've turned on the
Alarm Clock function in the Clock app, you
| | 02:42 | will see a small clock,
letting you know the alarm is set.
| | 02:44 | Or if you have a Bluetooth headset
connected, you will see Bluetooth icon.
| | 02:47 | I will be pointing more of these out
as they come up throughout the course.
| | 02:51 | But for now, that's the extent of what
I wanted to cover about the Home button
| | 02:53 | and home screen in this movie.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Organizing apps on the Home screen with folders| 00:00 | New to the iOS 4 operating system is the
ability to organize your apps into folders.
| | 00:05 | This is a great feature for anyone who
likes to download and install tons of
| | 00:08 | apps, which we will learn
how to do in a later chapter.
| | 00:11 | Instead of cluttering screen after
screen with dozens of apps, you can group
| | 00:14 | related apps together into folders.
| | 00:16 | To do so, just press and hold your finger
down on any app until they start wiggling.
| | 00:20 | In this mode, you can drag apps around
to arrange them onscreen, but to create a
| | 00:24 | folder, just drag one app on top of another.
| | 00:28 | That instantly creates a folder, and your
iPhone or iPod touch even tries to give
| | 00:31 | the folder a logical name.
| | 00:32 | If that name works for you, just tap
anywhere else outside the folder to accept
| | 00:36 | it, or type the name and type one of your own.
| | 00:38 | You can then drag up to ten more apps into
the folder, for a total of 12 apps per folder.
| | 00:46 | Click the Home button when you are
done adding items to your folder.
| | 00:49 | From this point, you can then access
the apps in the folder by tapping the
| | 00:52 | folder and then tapping app you want to run.
| | 00:55 | If you want to remove an app from a
folder at anytime, just touch and hold on
| | 00:58 | the folder until the icons start wiggling again.
| | 01:01 | Then tap the folder to
open it and drag out the app.
| | 01:03 | This is also the point where you can
rename the folder, if you like, but most
| | 01:07 | likely you will find the folder
feature extremely useful and beneficial,
| | 01:09 | especially as you start to add
more and more apps to your device.
| | 01:12 | So that's how to create and use
folders on the iPhone and iPod touch.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Running apps and multitasking| 00:00 | One of the most significant new
features introduced with the release of the iOS
| | 00:03 | 4 operating system was multitasking.
| | 00:06 | Multitasking allows you to leave
multiple applications running and quickly
| | 00:09 | switch between them.
| | 00:11 | This lets you do things like start
playing games exactly where you left off,
| | 00:14 | leave GPS applications running in the
background or have music apps keep playing
| | 00:18 | music while you perform
other tasks on your device.
| | 00:20 | Multitasking is available on the
iPhone 3GS, the iPhone 4 and the
| | 00:24 | second-generation iPod touch.
| | 00:26 | Let's take a look at how it works.
| | 00:27 | I have an app called
Pandora installed on my phone.
| | 00:30 | It's a popular streaming Internet music app.
| | 00:33 | So here on my iPhone running iOS 4, I
can start some music playing, and once my
| | 00:38 | music is playing, I can start doing
other things on my phone while the music
| | 00:40 | continues to play in the background.
| | 00:42 | I will tab my Home button, and
maybe now I want to work on some email.
| | 00:53 | Or maybe I want to check the weather.
| | 00:57 | As you can hear, Pandora
continues to play music the entire time.
| | 01:00 | Now so far, I have been switching
between apps by pressing my Home button to
| | 01:03 | return to the home screen and
then tapping the app I want to run.
| | 01:07 | But another way is to use the Multitasking bar.
| | 01:09 | You invoke multitasking by double-
clicking the Home button, which opens the
| | 01:13 | Multitasking bar at the bottom of the screen.
| | 01:15 | Here, you will find the icons for all
the apps you have most recently opened.
| | 01:18 | Just tap an app to switch back to it.
| | 01:20 | For example, I will tap Pandora, and I
can see the status, or progress of the
| | 01:24 | music that's currently playing,
or in this case I will pause it.
| | 01:27 | Or I can double-click again to go back to
my mail and pick up right where I left off.
| | 01:33 | What you will find is that all your
most recent apps are going to appear in the
| | 01:35 | Multitasking bar, and you can access
them all by flicking the bar to the left to
| | 01:40 | browse through them.
| | 01:41 | Multitasking also comes in handy when
a call comes in, interrupting whatever
| | 01:45 | important work you are working at the time.
| | 01:46 | For example, let's say I am playing
this game, and then a call comes in.
| | 01:53 | Notice the game sort of
gets visually shuffled back.
| | 01:59 | I can answer the call, have my
conversation, and when I hang up, the last app
| | 02:04 | I was using, in this case the game, gets
shuffled back to the front, exactly where I left off.
| | 02:08 | Pretty cool!
| | 02:10 | Now this doesn't mean that every
single program here is running in the
| | 02:13 | background and eating up
processing and battery power.
| | 02:16 | First of all, apps have to be
optimized by their creators to support
| | 02:19 | multitasking, but many app creators
have already implemented the support.
| | 02:23 | Also, the apps listed here may still
have to boot up from the beginning instead
| | 02:26 | of where you left off, if you
haven't opened them for a while.
| | 02:29 | Your most recently used app should
always pick up where you left off, though.
| | 02:32 | Another use of the Multitasking
bar is for quitting applications.
| | 02:36 | Occasionally you will have an app
that starts acting funny or not working
| | 02:38 | properly, but since current apps are
always running, you may have to force it to
| | 02:42 | quit so you can reboot it.
| | 02:44 | To do this, just hold down your finger
on one the apps in the Multitasking bar
| | 02:47 | until the icon start to wiggle.
| | 02:49 | Then tap the red Close icon on the app
you're having problems with to quit it.
| | 02:53 | You can then close the Multitasking
bar and try starting up the app again
| | 02:56 | by tapping its icon.
| | 02:58 | The final features of the Multitasking
bar I want to show you can be found by
| | 03:01 | double-clicking the Home button to
invoke multitasking and then flicking to the
| | 03:04 | right, revealing music control buttons,
which can control both your iPod music
| | 03:09 | and certain enabled apps like
Pandora when they are running.
| | 03:11 | We will look at more of these controls
in the chapter on using the iPod part of
| | 03:14 | your phone, but this is also where
you will find the orientation lock.
| | 03:17 | Most applications are designed to rotate
the displays when you rotate the phone.
| | 03:21 | For example, if I open Mail, I can
read my mail in both portrait and
| | 03:25 | landscape orientation.
| | 03:29 | But sometimes you don't want
the content of the apps to rotate.
| | 03:31 | For example, if you like to read
the iPhone in bed while lying on your
| | 03:34 | side, you don't want the screen
to rotate into landscape mode.
| | 03:38 | So just double-click the Home
button to open the Multitasking bar,
| | 03:41 | flick to the right, and tap the
Orientation Lock button, which locks all apps
| | 03:45 | into portrait mode.
| | 03:47 | Then close the Multitasking bar, and
you will see the Orientation Lock icon at
| | 03:50 | the top of your screen.
| | 03:52 | Now when I open mail and rotate the
phone, the display remains in portrait mode.
| | 03:56 | So that's how Multitasking
works on the iPhone and iPod touch.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Choosing and controlling sounds| 00:00 | One of the first things you want to
get under control on your iPhone or iPod
| | 00:03 | Touch is the default
sounds and their volume levels.
| | 00:06 | Because you can set and turn on specific
sounds for specific events and actions,
| | 00:10 | you'll want to select or at least
familiarize yourself with these sounds, so you
| | 00:13 | know what your iPhone or iPod
Touch is trying to tell you.
| | 00:15 | Locate and tap the Settings icon to open
your iPhone or iPod Touch's System Settings.
| | 00:20 | On the iPhone, tab Sounds.
| | 00:23 | On iPod Touch, you'll go into
Settings > General > Sounds.
| | 00:28 | Because it's a phone, the iPhone has
more sound settings, beginning with Silent.
| | 00:33 | This determines whether your phone
is going to vibrate when you have the
| | 00:35 | silencer switch set to Silent.
| | 00:37 | Even with a phone set to Silent, it
can still make a loud sound if you have
| | 00:40 | Vibrate turned on and have your
phone on a hard surface, like a tabletop.
| | 00:44 | To prevent the phone from
making any sounds, turn Vibrate off.
| | 00:47 | Of course, this makes it impossible to
know if your phone is ringing, if you
| | 00:51 | have it silent and stored in your pocket.
| | 00:53 | So, base your settings on the
environment you find yourself in.
| | 00:56 | Next, under the Ring section we can
also choose whether you want the phone to
| | 00:59 | vibrate when it's not silenced.
| | 01:01 | I prefer to keep Vibrate on, because I
sometimes can't hear my phone ring if I'm
| | 01:04 | in a loud environment.
| | 01:05 | So, vibrate will alert me that I have
an incoming call, even if I can't hear it.
| | 01:09 | I'll also have set up a system where my
phone vibrates for a few seconds before
| | 01:13 | I hear my ringtone,
| | 01:14 | which is not an available feature of the
iPhone, but I'll show you how to set
| | 01:17 | up something like that in the chapter
on using the phone part of the phone.
| | 01:20 | Next, we have the volume slider, which
you can use to set the overall volume of
| | 01:23 | your ringtone and other sounds.
| | 01:25 | Either drag the slider on the screen
or use the volume control on the side of
| | 01:29 | the phone, and you'll see
the slider on the screen move.
| | 01:32 | This works the same way on the iPod
Touch, and this volume slider controls
| | 01:35 | the volume for the ringtone and all the other
sounds we can turn on and off here below it.
| | 01:39 | Next is the Ringtone selector.
| | 01:40 | This is where you determine the
sound that plays when someone calls you.
| | 01:44 | Tap Ringtone to select a different sound.
| | 01:47 | On this screen, all of the
iPhone's built-in sounds appear under the
| | 01:50 | Standard heading, while any custom ringtones
you've created or purchased appear under Custom.
| | 01:54 | We'll also look at custom ringtones in
the chapter on the phone part of the iPhone.
| | 01:58 | To here a sample of any ringtone, just tap it.
| | 02:01 | (Ringtone playing.)
Tapping a ring tone makes it your default ring tone,
| | 02:03 | so make sure you have your preferred
ringtone selected before you leave the screen.
| | 02:07 | I'll select Old phone and then
go back to the sound settings.
| | 02:10 | (Ringtone playing.)
| | 02:13 | The next setting determines what some
plays when you receive a text message, and
| | 02:16 | this one works just like selecting a ringtone.
| | 02:18 | Tap New Text Message and select a sound.
| | 02:21 | These sounds are completely different than
the sound you can select for your ringtone.
| | 02:24 | Notice there is option to
select Custom Text Message sounds.
| | 02:27 | So, your are limited adjust
the 6 sounds or the None option.
| | 02:31 | The rest of these options have to do
with whether or not sounds play when
| | 02:34 | certain events occur.
| | 02:36 | Each one of these sound options has a default
sound, and it's not possible to customize them.
| | 02:40 | You can only turn the sounds on or off.
| | 02:42 | Other than New Voicemail, which plays
a sound when someone leaves a voicemail
| | 02:45 | message, the rest of the options and
sounds here are identical to what you'll
| | 02:49 | find on the iPod Touch.
| | 02:51 | New Mail and Sent Mail are the sounds
that play when you receive and send e-mail.
| | 02:54 | Calendar Alerts is the sound that plays
when you scheduled the calendar app to
| | 02:57 | notify you of an upcoming appointment.
| | 03:00 | The Lock Sounds is what you hear
when you press the Sleep/Wake button.
| | 03:03 | Keyboard Clicks are the typing sounds
you hear when you're using the iPhone or
| | 03:06 | iPod Touch's keyboard.
| | 03:08 | So, take some time to listen to each
sound, so you know what they represent.
| | 03:11 | As you get used to your phone or iPod
Touch, you can come back here and decide
| | 03:15 | whether you want to hear
any of these sounds or not.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Learning finger gestures| 00:00 | One of the most important skills you
need to really use the iPhone and iPod
| | 00:03 | Touch like a Pro is to
understand finger gestures.
| | 00:06 | As you know, there are no buttons on the
front of the phone other than the Home button.
| | 00:10 | So, the majority of the things you'll
do are accomplished by tapping, sliding,
| | 00:13 | rotating or pinching your fingers on the screen.
| | 00:17 | In this video, I am going
to go over the basic moves.
| | 00:19 | There are only a few of them, but they
are part of the DNA of using the iPhone
| | 00:22 | and iPod Touch, and it's
essential to really learn them well.
| | 00:25 | Probably the most basic gesture is the
tap, and it's just what it sounds like.
| | 00:31 | You tap some part of the
screen to perform some action.
| | 00:33 | For example, I tap on any of these
applications to run them, like photos.
| | 00:40 | So, here I am looking at my Photo Library.
| | 00:42 | We'll cover how to get pictures into your
iPhone or iPod Touch in the later chapter.
| | 00:46 | Here, I'll select the photo album I
want to look at, again, by tapping.
| | 00:50 | Now, I am looking at the
thumbnails of all the photos in this album.
| | 00:53 | The next gesture is the drag, and
again, it's just what it sounds like.
| | 00:57 | To browse through these photos, I keep
my finger in contact with the screen and
| | 01:00 | I drag thumbnails up and down.
| | 01:02 | If I run out of room, I just lift my
finger and start dragging near the top or
| | 01:06 | bottom of the screen again.
| | 01:13 | Now, closely associated with
the drag gesture is the flick.
| | 01:17 | Dragging over and over again like this
can get really tedious, especially if you
| | 01:20 | have a lot of content to scroll through.
| | 01:23 | In those cases just lift your finger off
the screen as you reach the end of the drag.
| | 01:27 | Notice the content on the
screen continues to move.
| | 01:31 | The greatest thing about
flicking is that it's speed-sensitive.
| | 01:34 | So, I can flick slowly to
browse at a leisurely pace.
| | 01:36 | Here is a little secret about
scrolling in most iPhone applications.
| | 01:40 | If you tap the top of the screen, you'll
instantly scroll to the very top of the page.
| | 01:44 | This doesn't work in every single iPhone
app, but many of them do work in this way.
| | 01:49 | Now, let's select the photo by tapping it.
| | 01:52 | The next gesture is the pinch.
| | 01:54 | This is when you touch two fingers,
usually your thumb and index finger, to the
| | 01:58 | screen, and either separate them, which
is you can see, zooms in on the photo or
| | 02:02 | bring them back together, which zooms back out.
| | 02:05 | We refer to this as
pinching in and pinching out.
| | 02:07 | It doesn't matter which two fingers you use.
| | 02:10 | I can use my two pinkie fingers
to zoom in and out if I wanted to.
| | 02:16 | While zoomed in on a photo, notice I can
use the drag gesture, as well as the flick.
| | 02:22 | If I'm not zoomed in, dragging and
flicking takes me from photo to photo.
| | 02:28 | So, now we understand the tap, the
drag, the flick and pinching in and out,
| | 02:32 | which are really the most basic and commonly
used gestures on the iPhone and iPod Touch.
| | 02:36 | Now, there are additional
variations on these moves;
| | 02:39 | for example, a quick double tap
on an item often zooms in on it.
| | 02:42 | Here, in photos it zooms in on the picture.
| | 02:46 | If you're browsing a Web site in Safari,
double tapping a column of text zooms in
| | 02:50 | that column to the width of your screen.
| | 02:51 | There is also multifinger tapping,
which appears in apps like Maps.
| | 03:00 | Here, double-tapping zooms in like we'd expect,
| | 03:02 | but to zoom back out you
single tap with two fingers.
| | 03:08 | Pinching in and out is available here, as well.
| | 03:12 | Some apps require you not to tap, but to touch
and hold an onscreen button to make it work.
| | 03:16 | For example, if I touch and hold
any of the icons on my Home screen,
| | 03:21 | that puts them into Organization mode
where I can drag the icons from location
| | 03:24 | to location to rearrange them
as I like - more about that later.
| | 03:28 | For now, I'll just press the
Home button to turn that off.
| | 03:31 | You might come across other
options that iPhone app developers have
| | 03:34 | programmed into their apps,
| | 03:35 | like two-finger dragging,
two-finger rotating and so on.
| | 03:39 | Generally, you'll be taught which gestures to
use by the instructions that come with the app.
| | 03:43 | So, there you have the basic finger
gestures you need to know to really use the
| | 03:46 | iPhone and iPod Touch efficiently.
| | 03:48 | We'll touch more on various gestures
as we look at specific applications.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Connecting to a wi-fi network| 00:00 | With the iPhone and iPod Touch's
ability to let you access your e-mail and surf
| | 00:03 | Web sites with a real Web browser,
rather than some limited mobile browser you'll
| | 00:07 | find on other phones, most likely one
of the first things you want to do with
| | 00:10 | your phone or iPod Touch is to get online.
| | 00:13 | Both the iPhone and iPod Touch can
connect to Wi-Fi networks, whether they are
| | 00:17 | home networks or public
networks, coffee shops or airports.
| | 00:19 | Although the iPhone can also get online
via AT&T's 3G and Edge networks in the US,
| | 00:25 | connecting to a broadband connection
over Wi-Fi is going to be a much faster
| | 00:28 | Internet experience.
| | 00:29 | Let's start by taking a look at how to turn on
your iPhone or iPod Touches Wi-Fi capability.
| | 00:34 | Tap the settings icon to open
your System Settings; then tap Wi-Fi.
| | 00:39 | First, make sure that Wi-Fi is turned on.
| | 00:41 | Under Choose a Network, you'll see a
list of all the Wi-Fi networks your phone
| | 00:45 | or iPod detects, along with an
indicator of how strong each one's signal is, and
| | 00:49 | whether the network is
open or requires a password.
| | 00:52 | Password protected Wi-Fi
networks have a lock icon next to them.
| | 00:55 | You generally won't find too many non-
password protected Wi-Fi networks these
| | 00:59 | days, as most people have figured out
that leaving their networks open can
| | 01:02 | expose them to attacks. or just
neighbors leeching off their Internet
| | 01:05 | connection's bandwidth.
| | 01:06 | Tap the network you want to connect to.
| | 01:07 | If a password is required, enter it here.
| | 01:10 | That's pretty much all there is
to connecting to a Wi-Fi network.
| | 01:13 | Your iPhone or iPod Touch
will now remember this network,
| | 01:15 | so the next time you're within range
of it, it will connect automatically
| | 01:18 | without you having to select
it and enter the password again.
| | 01:21 | Because being connected to a Wi-Fi
network consumes battery power, the iPhone
| | 01:25 | and iPod Touch don't
remain constantly connected.
| | 01:27 | So, you don't have to worry about Wi-
Fi eating up your battery while you're
| | 01:30 | looking at photos or listening to music.
| | 01:31 | It's when you start an app that
requires an Internet connection, like the
| | 01:35 | Safari Web browser or Mail, that your device will
then attempt to reconnect to a Wi-Fi network.
| | 01:40 | First, the iPhone or iPod Touch
will look for a nearby Wi-Fi network.
| | 01:44 | If it detects one you've connected
to in the past, it will connect with
| | 01:46 | no prompting from you.
| | 01:48 | If it detects any new Wi-Fi
networks, you've never connected to,
| | 01:50 | you'll see a message pop up with the
list of the networks it's found, and ask if
| | 01:54 | you want to connect to any of them.
| | 01:56 | If you see one you recognize, or have the
password for, tap it, and you'll be connected.
| | 02:01 | You know you're connected to a Wi-Fi
network when you see the Wi-Fi icon at
| | 02:04 | the top of your screen.
| | 02:05 | Now, the iPod Touch can only connect
to the Internet over Wi-Fi and has no
| | 02:09 | other connection options.
| | 02:11 | If the iPhone fails to find a Wi-Fi
signal, or if you decline to connect to any
| | 02:15 | that it finds, it will then connect to
the Internet via your service provider's
| | 02:18 | cellular network, which in US is AT&T's
3G Network if it's available where you
| | 02:23 | are, or AT&T's much slower EDGE network.
| | 02:26 | So the iPhone does have alternate,
albeit slower, options available, if no
| | 02:29 | wireless signals are to be found.
| | 02:31 | As you can see, connecting to a Wi-Fi
network is pretty simple, but there are a
| | 02:34 | lot of other important things to know
about how the iPhone and iPod Touch deal
| | 02:37 | with Wi-Fi networks.
| | 02:38 | So, be sure to check out the
movie on Wi-Fi in the chapter called
| | 02:41 | Important Settings.
| | 02:43 | In that movie, I go for over some
crucial information that will help you
| | 02:45 | troubleshoot when you inevitably run into
problems with connecting to a Wi-Fi network.
| | 02:49 | But for now, I just wanted to make sure
you understand the basics of connecting
| | 02:52 | to a network from your iPhone or iPod Touch.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Charging the iPhone or iPod Touch| 00:01 | The iPhone and iPod Touch both have large
internal batteries that cannot be removed.
| | 00:05 | This means that unlike with other
mobile phones, you can't have a spare
| | 00:08 | battery charging on the side to swap in when
the one in your phone or iPod becomes depleted.
| | 00:12 | So, managing battery life is an especially
important part of owning iPhone or iPod Touch.
| | 00:17 | In the chapter on troubleshooting,
I'll cover several techniques on extending
| | 00:20 | the charge of your battery, but here I
just want to make sure you understand the
| | 00:23 | options for charging your iPhone or iPod Touch.
| | 00:25 | The iPhone comes with a USB cable for
connecting to your computer, as well as a
| | 00:29 | power adapter for charging your
phone from a regular wall outlet.
| | 00:32 | If you have an older iPhone, you might
have a slightly larger power adapter.
| | 00:35 | The iPod Touch does not come with this
power adapter, so initially you can only
| | 00:39 | charge it by plugging it into your computer.
| | 00:40 | But you can purchase one of these
adapters from Apple, or something similar from
| | 00:44 | a third-party vendor.
| | 00:45 | So, to charge your iPhone or iPod Touch,
plug the dock connector end into the
| | 00:50 | dock connector port of the device.
| | 00:53 | Then plug the USB end into either
your computer or into the power adapter.
| | 00:59 | Then plug the power adapter into a wall outlet.
| | 01:06 | Once plugged in, you'll see a large
charge level indicator appear when you wake
| | 01:09 | up your iPhone or iPod Touch.
| | 01:11 | When you unlock the phone, the battery
indicator in the upper right-hand corner
| | 01:14 | shows a little lightning bulb symbol,
indicating that the phone is charging.
| | 01:18 | Once the phone reaches a full charge,
the bulb changes to a plug icon,
| | 01:21 | indicating that the charge is complete, but
that it still knows it's plugged into a power source.
| | 01:26 | Your device will warn you if your
battery level is getting so low that your
| | 01:29 | device will no longer function.
| | 01:31 | First, you'll see a message saying that
your battery life is at about 20%, and
| | 01:35 | you get a similar message
when it reaches about 10%.
| | 01:36 | That's where you queue to plug in
your device as soon as possible.
| | 01:41 | Finally, when there's just no power
left, the device will shut off and be
| | 01:44 | unusable until you plug it in.
| | 01:46 | In cases of extreme depletion, you
won't be even to use the device while it's
| | 01:49 | plugged into a power source until
its charge comes up to a usable level.
| | 01:53 | You can get a more accurate read on
your battery level by going into Settings >
| | 01:56 | General > Usage, and here you
can turn on Battery Percentage.
| | 02:02 | This gives you a percentage
display next to your battery icon.
| | 02:06 | So again, with no removable battery,
it's important to have the basic tools to
| | 02:09 | keep your iPhone or iPod Touch charged.
| | 02:12 | Many people keep an extra power
adapter and cable by their nightstand and let
| | 02:15 | their phone charge overnight.
| | 02:17 | For me, charging overnight is all I
generally need, unless I'm traveling and
| | 02:20 | using my iPhone to watch videos on a
plane, or using its GPS capabilities to get
| | 02:24 | me where I need to be.
| | 02:24 | In addition to having an extra charger
for your nightstand, you should also pick
| | 02:29 | up one of many available chargers for
your car, and you may even want to look
| | 02:32 | into an accessory like an external battery pack.
| | 02:35 | Many manufacturers make battery
that plug directly into the iPhone or
| | 02:38 | iPod Touch's dock connector, which is the
same connector the regular USB cable connects to.
| | 02:43 | And you can even find cases for
your device with batteries built-in.
| | 02:46 | These are especially nice, because you
don't have something hanging out of the
| | 02:49 | phone that you might accidentally snap
off, and some of these models can almost
| | 02:52 | double your usage time.
| | 02:54 | As you spend more time with your iPhone
or iPod Touch, you'll get a better idea of
| | 02:58 | how often you really need to charge it.
| | 03:00 | It does depend on how frequently use
it, as well as whether or not you have
| | 03:03 | other settings turned on or off.
| | 03:05 | Again, see the movie on extending
your battery's life in the Troubleshooting
| | 03:08 | chapter at the end of this
course for more information.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Setting up an iTunes Store account on an iPhone or iPod Touch| 00:00 | At some point it's likely that you
want to either purchase additional
| | 00:03 | applications for your iPhone or iPod
Touch, or you'll want to purchase music or
| | 00:06 | videos from the iTunes Store.
| | 00:07 | We will be taking detailed looks at how
to make these purchases from your device
| | 00:10 | in upcoming chapters, but in order to
do so, you need to register for a free
| | 00:14 | iTunes Store account.
| | 00:15 | Now if you have ever purchased music
through iTunes on your computer, you
| | 00:18 | already have an account.
| | 00:19 | Additionally, if you subscribe to
Apple's MobileMe service, or if you have
| | 00:22 | an Apple ID, which you created if
you ever purchased anything from the
| | 00:25 | Apple Online Store, you can use that
account information as well. But if
| | 00:29 | you are completely new to
purchasing content from the iTunes Store, you
| | 00:31 | will need an account.
| | 00:32 | So in this movie, I will show you how to
create one from your iPhone or iPod Touch.
| | 00:35 | Start by locating the Settings icon and tap it.
| | 00:39 | Then scroll down and find Store.
Here, if you already have an account, is where
| | 00:45 | you can sign in, so your Phone or iPod
always remembers your account Username or
| | 00:49 | tap Create New Account to go through
the process of creating a new account.
| | 00:53 | First, confirm the
country or region you live in.
| | 00:56 | This needs to match the location of
your credit card's billing address.
| | 01:01 | Then tap Next. Here you can read through the Terms &
Conditions of service for using the iTunes Store.
| | 01:09 | I leave it entirely up to your own
judgment whether or not you want to read
| | 01:13 | through all of this.
| | 01:14 | Let's just assume we did and tap Agree.
Next, enter the e-mail address you want
| | 01:22 | to use for this account.
| | 01:23 | Your e-mail address will become your
username. Then create a password and
| | 01:31 | type it again to make sure
you didn't make any typos.
| | 01:35 | Next, create a security question
that only you know the answer to.
| | 01:40 | This is to verify your identity, if
you never forget your password or need to
| | 01:43 | recover it. And then enter your Birth Date.
| | 02:04 | This is just another identity
verification step. And lastly on the screen, decide
| | 02:09 | whether you like to receive e-mails from
Apple concerning new releases or changes
| | 02:12 | to the Store, or information about
other products and services from Apple.
| | 02:15 | I will choose that both of
these OFF for now. Tap Next.
| | 02:21 | Here's where you can enter your
credit card billing information.
| | 02:23 | This is, again, to verify that you are
real person, and to confirm your identity.
| | 02:26 | You won't be charged for anything
until you actually make a purchase, though.
| | 02:31 | And once all your information has
been confirmed, you should see this
| | 02:34 | message telling you your account has been
successfully created. Tap done, and you're Done.
| | 02:40 | You are now signed in and ready to
browse and purchase music and apps from the
| | 02:43 | iTunes Store, which again we will
be looking at in upcoming chapters.
| | 02:47 | Now before we close out this movie, I
just want to mention you can create an
| | 02:50 | iTunes Account through iTunes on your
computer, which in my opinion is much
| | 02:54 | quicker since you can use a real keyboard.
| | 02:57 | In iTunes, select the iTunes Store and
then click Sign In. In this dialog box
| | 03:03 | that appears, click Create New Account.
At this point, you can walk through
| | 03:09 | pretty much the same process we just
saw on the iPhone, but it will probably
| | 03:12 | take you much less time.
| | 03:14 | Then when you are prompted to enter your
username and password on your iPhone or
| | 03:17 | iPod Touch, when you eventually go to
make a purchase, just enter the account
| | 03:20 | information you created here in iTunes.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Printing from an iPhone using AirPrint| 00:00 | With the release of iOS 4.2 Apple
introduced AirPrint, a feature that lets you
| | 00:05 | wirelessly print from your IOS device
like your iPhone, iPod touch, or iPad to
| | 00:09 | any AirPrint enabled printer.
| | 00:11 | Now as I sit here and record this
the number of AirPrint enabled printers
| | 00:14 | is pretty small.
| | 00:15 | It's really only a handful of HP
printers, which you can see by going to
| | 00:18 | apple.com/iPhone/features/AirPrint.
| | 00:23 | But in time, I'm certain more and
more AirPrint enabled devices will start
| | 00:26 | showing up, maybe even by the
time you're watching this movie.
| | 00:29 | And the really great thing is that
there's no special setup required.
| | 00:31 | Just follow the instructions that come
with your AirPrint printer for connecting
| | 00:34 | it to your home or office's wireless
network and as long as your iPhone, iPod
| | 00:38 | touch, or iPad is on the same network
and running iOS 4.2 or later printing to
| | 00:43 | your device is super easy.
| | 00:44 | For the most part if it's a document
you can view on your device, you'll
| | 00:47 | probably be able to print it.
| | 00:49 | AirPrint works with apps such as your
Safari browser, Mail, Photos and any third
| | 00:53 | party apps in which the developer
has included printing capabilities.
| | 00:57 | Depending on which application you're
printing from, the button you use to
| | 00:59 | print might vary.
| | 01:00 | For example, if I want to print an email,
I would tap the same button I used to
| | 01:04 | reply to or forward
emails to get the Print button.
| | 01:06 | If I want to print a photo from my
photo library I tap the Share button to
| | 01:11 | get the Print button.
| | 01:13 | And third-party apps might
have other ways to print.
| | 01:16 | Just hunt around a little
and you'll most likely find it.
| | 01:18 | So for example I have this webpage open
in Safari and I just want to print out a copy.
| | 01:22 | I just tap the Share button at the
bottom of screen and one of the options
| | 01:26 | I have here is Print.
| | 01:28 | That takes me to Printer Options.
| | 01:29 | I'll tap Select Printer.
| | 01:32 | My iPhone will take a moment to search
my network for AirPrint printers, and in
| | 01:36 | this case it's found my HP D119 series printer.
| | 01:39 | If you have more than one printer
available, just select the one you want
| | 01:41 | to print to.
| | 01:42 | I only have the one, so I'll tap it.
| | 01:44 | That takes me back to the Printer
Options page where the Print button is
| | 01:47 | now available.
| | 01:48 | Now, there really aren't that
many other options to speak of here.
| | 01:51 | Basically, I can just choose
how many copies I want to print.
| | 01:54 | Just tap the plus button to add more copies.
| | 01:55 | I'm going to set that back to one.
| | 01:58 | Depending on which printer you're
using though you may see some additional
| | 02:01 | options like the range of pages you
want to print, whether you want to print
| | 02:04 | double-sided sheets, and so on.
| | 02:07 | In this case, I just tap Print and
my iPhone starts wirelessly printing my webpage.
| | 02:11 | And in just a minute I'll be able to
pull my printout out of my printer.
| | 02:15 | So that's the AirPrint feature, which
again is part of iOS 4.2, so make sure
| | 02:19 | you've updated if you want to use this
feature and remember it works with just
| | 02:22 | about any app that has a
print function built-in.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
2. Typing EssentialsUnderstanding the keyless keyboard| 00:00 | So let's begin by taking a look
at the basics of typing with the
| | 00:03 | screen-based keyboard.
| | 00:04 | For this example, I'm going
to use the included Notes app.
| | 00:07 | I will press the plus symbol to create
a new note, and now I'm looking at a new
| | 00:11 | blank note, and the keyboard has
appeared at the bottom half of the screen.
| | 00:14 | The keyboard will show up anytime you tap
into a field where you're supposed to type.
| | 00:18 | To type, just tap the letters. Notice
that while you are tapping up here above
| | 00:22 | your finger in a nice, large size, so
you can visually confirm that you are on
| | 00:25 | the letter you want.
| | 00:27 | The enlarged version of the letter
will stay there until your finger breaks
| | 00:30 | contact from the screen.
| | 00:32 | That is probably one of the most
fundamental things to know about typing on the
| | 00:35 | iPhone or iPod Touch.
| | 00:37 | Characters you type are not entered
until your finger leaves the screen.
| | 00:41 | This means that if I touched the
wrong letter, I can just slide over to the
| | 00:44 | correct one, and then release.
| | 00:47 | If I do enter the wrong letter by
accident, I can just tap the Delete key to
| | 00:51 | delete the letter or words
are I need to get rid of.
| | 00:52 | And then continue typing.
| | 00:54 | Now let's say I want to add a colon
here. Special characters and numbers are
| | 00:58 | accessed by tapping this button
in the lower left-hand corner.
| | 01:01 | And now I can enter the colon, and I
will tap Return to go down one line.
| | 01:04 | Now here's a tip directly related to
what I was saying about characters not
| | 01:08 | appearing until you left
your finger from the screen.
| | 01:10 | Let's say I want to put a
parenthesis at the beginning of this line.
| | 01:13 | I can see the open and close
parenthesis characters when I tap the characters
| | 01:16 | button, but a quick way to access the
special characters from the letter keyboard is
| | 01:20 | to touch to the characters button and
then slide my finger over to the character
| | 01:23 | I want, before I release
my finger, and then release.
| | 01:27 | The character is added to my note, and
the keyboard instantly reverts to the
| | 01:30 | letter keyboard, and I can continue
typing without having to tap to return to
| | 01:33 | the letter keyboard.
| | 01:34 | So that's the basics of working
with the keyless keyboard, and it will
| | 01:37 | definitely some practice and
getting used to it, if you are new to it.
| | 01:40 | Keep in the mind that most Apps that
use the keyboard will allow you to rotate
| | 01:43 | the phone to Landscape mode, which makes
the keys slightly larger and easier to hit.
| | 01:47 | Once you get better, you should be
able to type quickly, in both Portrait
| | 01:50 | and Landscape mode.
| | 01:52 | In the rest of this chapter, we will
look at the most important techniques and
| | 01:54 | tips for becoming an
efficient iPhone or iPod Touch typist.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Fixing typos and trusting auto-correction| 00:00 | Let's take a look at how the iPhone
can assist you with the inevitable typos
| | 00:03 | that will occur when you are using the keyboard.
| | 00:05 | I have started typing a
note of Things to do today.
| | 00:08 | On the second line, I am starting to
type the phrase, "(in no particular order)."
| | 00:11 | So I will start typing.
| | 00:13 | Notice here that that
iPhone has offered a suggestion.
| | 00:19 | I have typed enough of the word
particular, but the iPhone is guessing what
| | 00:23 | I meant to type here.
| | 00:24 | If the suggestion is correct, I just
press Space, and the word is completed for me.
| | 00:28 | If that wasn't the word I wanted, I
could have just continued typing and
| | 00:31 | ignored the suggestion.
| | 00:32 | But if you did accept these
suggestions by accident, or you change your mind,
| | 00:36 | you can tap the Delete button, and
the previous version of the word you had
| | 00:39 | typed will appear, which you can then tap.
| | 00:41 | But in this case, I do want the word particular,
| | 00:43 | so I will leave it as it is
and finish typing this line.
| | 00:46 | But the iPhone suggestions and
corrections are one of the key factors in being a
| | 00:50 | fast and efficient typist on its keyboard.
| | 00:52 | Even if you have misspelled a word, the
iPhone can usually figure out what word
| | 00:55 | you meant based on the
letters near the ones you typed.
| | 00:58 | So if I type something like Pickup
laundry, but misspell the word
| | 01:03 | "laundry," notice it immediately
suggests the correct spelling of laundry.
| | 01:08 | I just tap Space, and the
change is instantly made.
| | 01:11 | It's important to remember that
pressing Space is telling the iPhone that its
| | 01:14 | suggestion is correct.
| | 01:16 | If the suggestion is not correct,
tap the suggestion to remove it.
| | 01:19 | For example, my laundromat named
sudcity, which is obviously not a word,
| | 01:22 | so I am not going to accept the
suggestions that the iPhone suggests.
| | 01:26 | Also, the iPhone has a universal spell checker.
| | 01:28 | So in most apps, misspelled words will
be underlined with red dotted lines like
| | 01:32 | you see in many word processors.
| | 01:34 | So if I delete what I have typed so far,
up to the word laundry, and deliberately
| | 01:38 | misspell the word "laundry" again
and disregard the suggestion as I keep typing,
| | 01:45 | notice the red dotted lines appear.
| | 01:47 | When you tap any word with red
dotted lines, suggested spellings show up.
| | 01:51 | I will tap that to correct my spelling.
| | 01:55 | Also, note that the iPhone will
remember which suggestions you've ignored, and
| | 01:58 | it will also learned the words you used
most often that it doesn't recognize and
| | 02:02 | add them to its internal dictionary.
| | 02:04 | So after time, it will stop trying to
correct words that you have told it are not typos.
| | 02:07 | Now, don't take this to mean that once
you get good at this, the iPhone will
| | 02:10 | catch every typo you make.
| | 02:12 | You're still going to leave
plenty of typos behind as you type.
| | 02:14 | So, there are several typos in this list.
| | 02:16 | The last typo was the misspelling of
Wednesday at the end of the list.
| | 02:19 | Now, again, if I tap Delete to put my
cursor right after the word, suggestions
| | 02:23 | for the correct spelling will appear.
| | 02:25 | Of course, another way to fix a typo is
to simply retype it correctly, which you
| | 02:28 | will have to do if the iPhone has no
suggestions for a correct spelling.
| | 02:31 | So to fix this, I will just tap the
Delete key to delete most of the word, and
| | 02:35 | retype it correctly.
| | 02:36 | So as we have just seen, the Delete
key can be tapped once so you can delete
| | 02:42 | one letter at time, or if you want to
delete more than that, hold down the Delete key.
| | 02:46 | If you continue holding down the Delete
key, your iPhone or iPod touch assumes
| | 02:50 | you want to get rid of a lot more,
and entire words start getting deleted.
| | 02:53 | Now there are other ways to delete
entire chunks of text faster than that,
| | 02:56 | which we will look at in a following
movie, but for now that's how you use the
| | 02:59 | Delete or Backspace key.
| | 03:00 | So how do you go about fixing typos that are
way back at the beginning of what you typed?
| | 03:04 | Glad you asked.
| | 03:05 | Just hold your fingers down over the
text, and in a second, the text under your
| | 03:08 | finger shows up in this
kind of magnifying glass.
| | 03:11 | Slide your finger until the cursor
appears where you want to make a change.
| | 03:14 | Notice the Select, Select All buttons appear.
| | 03:16 | We will talk about those shortly, but
for now, the important thing is that my
| | 03:19 | cursor is where I need it to be, and I
could type an I to fix the word "writing."
| | 03:24 | And I can do the same thing in the
line above to fix the word "porch."
| | 03:27 | That's how you fix typos.
| | 03:32 | Again, you really need to learn to
trust the Auto Correction feature of your
| | 03:35 | iPhone or iPod touch, because it will
automatically fix many of the mistakes you
| | 03:38 | make. Just try to ignore typos as
you make them and keep on typing.
| | 03:42 | Here is a quick example. I am going to
type a sentence, "Be sure to remind Peter
| | 03:45 | about the meeting next week." And I
am going to type it pretty quickly.
| | 03:48 | I will most likely miss several keys,
but I am just going to plow through and let
| | 03:51 | Auto Correction do its thing.
| | 03:53 |
| | 04:10 | If you are watching closely, you should
have noticed that the iPhone pretty much
| | 04:13 | fixed every typo I made on the fly.
| | 04:15 | Now as you get more comfortable with
the iPhone keyboard, you will probably
| | 04:18 | want to graduate from tapping out words with
one fingers and move into typing with two thumbs.
| | 04:22 | Again, this is going to take practice,
but you will get better as you get more
| | 04:25 | experienced, and typing with two thumbs can be
significantly faster than using a single finger.
| | 04:29 | Just hold the phone with the fingers of both
hands, and type with your thumbs, like this.
| | 04:33 |
| | 04:53 | You might have noticed when I
type the word "let's," the iPhone added
| | 04:56 | the apostrophe for me.
| | 04:57 | I also used a shortcut of typing
two spaces after my first sentence to
| | 05:01 | automatically insert a period.
| | 05:03 | Notice that the first letter of
the second sentence was automatically
| | 05:05 | capitalized as well.
| | 05:07 | These are the default behaviors you can
find by going to Settings > General > Keyboard.
| | 05:12 | This is where you will find the
controls for Auto Correction, Auto
| | 05:17 | Capitalization, which is why my
iPhone capitalized the first letter of the
| | 05:21 | second sentence, and the period
shortcut is found here as well, and again, that
| | 05:25 | means that typing two spaces inserts a period.
| | 05:28 | The other option you can turn on
and off here is enable Caps Lock.
| | 05:31 | We will turn that on, and
we will go back to our Notes.
| | 05:37 | With Caps Lock on, a quick double-tap of
the Shift key locks the letters to All Caps.
| | 05:42 | So you can very quickly
acronym or yell at someone via text.
| | 05:50 | Tap the Shift key again to turn off Caps Lock.
| | 05:52 | One last setting I want to mention here.
| | 05:55 | Earlier, I was saying how the iPhone
and iPod touch will learn words that it
| | 05:58 | doesn't recognize, so it doesn't
constantly try to correct words you have
| | 06:01 | previously told it not.
| | 06:02 | Now there may be times when you have
typed the words in by accident that are
| | 06:04 | clearly misspelled that the iPhone
then tries to suggest since you have
| | 06:08 | misspelled them several times.
| | 06:09 | If that happens, go back to Settings, go back
to the General Preferences, and select Reset.
| | 06:15 | Here, you can tap Reset Keyboard
Dictionary, which you can see will delete all
| | 06:18 | the custom words the dictionary
learned from you, but be aware that this
| | 06:22 | means that the dictionary will also
have to relearn all the legitimate custom
| | 06:24 | words you created, too.
| | 06:26 | So don't reset your
dictionary unless you really have to.
| | 06:28 | Also, the iPhone and iPod touch will
actually notice if you haven't used
| | 06:31 | a custom word in a while, and it will
remove it from the dictionary after some time.
| | 06:35 | So if you can live with an occasional
invalid suggestion from the dictionary for
| | 06:38 | a while, eventually the misspelled word
will be deleted by the iPhone, and you
| | 06:41 | won't be bothered by it again.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Select, Copy, Paste, and Undo| 00:00 | While typing on the iPhone or iPod
Touch, you can take the advantage of the
| | 00:03 | ability to select, cut, copy and
paste text just like you can on any word
| | 00:08 | processor on a regular computer.
| | 00:10 | This is especially useful when you
need to select a longer chunk of text to
| | 00:13 | edit, delete, move or paste into
another location of your document, or even into
| | 00:17 | another application.
| | 00:18 | For example, maybe I need to
change the word Sunday to Friday.
| | 00:22 | There are two ways to make the selection.
| | 00:24 | If you want to select the
single word, double tap the word.
| | 00:27 | That highlights the word,
and the Copy menu appears.
| | 00:29 | So I am going to tap once to deselect
Sunday and then tap the screen again to make
| | 00:33 | the keyboard appear.
| | 00:35 | When I double tap the Sunday again,
notice I now also get the Cut option.
| | 00:38 | You will only see Cut with text you
can edit, and when you have the keyboard
| | 00:42 | open, in most cases, but I actually
don't want to cut or copy right now.
| | 00:45 | I just want to change the word, so with
Sunday selected, I will type Friday, and
| | 00:50 | that replaces the word Sunday.
| | 00:51 | So this is pretty much how a
regular word processor works.
| | 00:54 | Another way to select text, and the
method to use if you need to select more
| | 00:57 | than one word, or if you're trying to
select non-editable text like some words in
| | 01:00 | your Web browser for example, is to
hold on a Word until you see the magnifying
| | 01:04 | glass appear and let go.
| | 01:06 | That gives you the Select
and Select All menu options.
| | 01:09 | Select All selects everything on the page,
which is great if you want to copy everything.
| | 01:13 | I will just tap somewhere else to deselect.
| | 01:15 | Now hold on the word again, and Select
just selects just one word you held down on,
| | 01:21 | the same way double tapping editable text does.
| | 01:23 | And you get these two handles
above and below your selections.
| | 01:26 | Drag the handles to select any adjoining
words you want to include in your selection.
| | 01:31 | Then you get the Cut and Copy menu, so maybe
I want to move this list into its own note.
| | 01:35 | I will choose Copy.
| | 01:37 | Now I tap Done and the Plus
button to create a new note.
| | 01:40 | To paste the text you selected, double
tap and then tap Paste. It's that easy.
| | 01:45 | And you are not limited to pasting
your selected text into same app, either.
| | 01:48 | I could just as easily open my Mail
application and paste this list into
| | 01:51 | new e-mail message, too.
| | 01:53 | And just like on a regular computer,
you can continue pasting the text you
| | 01:56 | copied until you copy some other text,
at which point the newly copied text
| | 01:59 | becomes the text that
will appear when you paste.
| | 02:02 | Lastly, if at some point you make a
mistake, like either selecting and
| | 02:05 | accidentally erasing an entire chunk
of text, for instance if I have the
| | 02:08 | keyboard up and I hold down on a
word, Select All and tap Delete,
| | 02:13 | I can undo the deletion by shaking my phone.
| | 02:16 | That brings up the Undo Typing button,
and taping that brings my text back.
| | 02:20 | So you can use this to either bring
back text you've deleted or to remove
| | 02:23 | text you just typed.
| | 02:24 | So if I add another line to this list,
and then give my phone a shake, and tap
| | 02:34 | Undo Typing, that line of
text I just typed is gone.
| | 02:38 | It's a lot faster than selecting the
text to delete it, or holding down the
| | 02:41 | Delete key for several seconds.
| | 02:43 | Now shaking again gives me the Redo
Typing button, which when I select that,
| | 02:47 | brings my text back.
| | 02:49 | But also be aware that the iPhone and
iPod Touch are very sensitive to shaking.
| | 02:53 | So you will probably see the Undo
option more frequently if you are waking
| | 02:56 | around with your phone while
typing a text message or e-mail.
| | 02:59 | All it takes is for you to drop your
phone to side while moving, and you will
| | 03:01 | probably see the Undo or Redo buttons.
| | 03:04 | If you are texting, and you've just
send a message, you might also see a
| | 03:06 | message that it says Nothing to Undo,
but in all those cases, just tap Cancel
| | 03:10 | if you did not meant to undo or redo any typing.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Hidden shortcuts| 00:00 | Hidden within the keys of your
iPhone or iPod Touch's keyboard are some
| | 00:03 | shortcuts to cut down on your typing
time, as well as to give you access to
| | 00:07 | characters and symbols you wouldn't
otherwise be able to type unless you knew
| | 00:09 | where to access them.
| | 00:10 | We have already seen some convenient
shortcuts, like typing a double space to add
| | 00:14 | a period at the end of a sentence and
then holding down on the characters and
| | 00:17 | numbers key lets you slide over to those
characters to select them, and they get
| | 00:21 | popped right back into the alphabet keyboard.
| | 00:23 | It works the other way, too.
| | 00:24 | If I have the numbers and characters
up, and I am typing mostly numbers, I
| | 00:28 | can hold the alphabet key and slide
over to select the letter and then I pop
| | 00:32 | back into the numbers.
| | 00:33 | Also, within the numbers and characters is
another button to bring up even more symbols.
| | 00:36 | So those are the ways to access the
obvious letters and characters, but holding
| | 00:40 | down on other keys will also bring
up additional characters you can use.
| | 00:43 | Let's say I am typing the word "cafe,"
and I want to make sure it ends properly
| | 00:47 | and perhaps pretentiously
with the acute accent over the e.
| | 00:50 | So I'll type C-A-F and then I hold down
on the E. After a second a whole slew of
| | 00:56 | accent of E's appears, I just slide over to the
one I want, and just like that, it's added to my text.
| | 01:01 | You'll find these hidden symbols and
characters for any letters you need them for.
| | 01:22 | Not all keys have them, but you'll
generally find what you need by holding
| | 01:24 | down for a second to see which
symbols and characters are available for
| | 01:27 | certain letters.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Syncing a Bluetooth keyboard| 00:00 | If you do a lot of typing on your
iPhone or iPod touch, you might want to
| | 00:03 | consider getting an external Bluetooth keyboard.
| | 00:06 | The iPhone's onscreen keyboard is nice
for brief periods of typing, but if you
| | 00:10 | have to write paragraphs of text, you
are going to be much quicker and efficient
| | 00:12 | on a full-size keyboard.
| | 00:14 | The first step is to pair your
iPhone or iPod touch with the keyboard.
| | 00:18 | This setup process only has to be done
once in order for your device and your
| | 00:20 | keyboard to recognize each other.
| | 00:21 | So first you are going to want to
follow the instructions that came with your
| | 00:25 | keyboard to put it into
pairing or discoverable mode.
| | 00:27 | This is a mode that says "Here I
am!" to other Bluetooth devices.
| | 00:31 | In the case of this Apple
Bluetooth keyboard, you just turn it on.
| | 00:34 | Once your keyboard is in discoverable
mode, go to your iPhone or iPod touch and
| | 00:38 | tap Settings > General > Bluetooth.
| | 00:41 | Make sure Bluetooth is on.
| | 00:43 | In a moment, you should see your keyboard
appear in the list of available devices. Select it.
| | 00:49 | In order to complete the pairing
process, you are prompted to enter a numeric
| | 00:52 | code into the keyboard.
| | 00:53 | This is to confirm that you indeed
want the devices to recognize and work
| | 00:56 | together, and this is the only time you will
have to do this, unless you delete the
| | 01:00 | keyboard from your list of
devices on your phone. And that's it!
| | 01:03 | Once the pairing process is complete,
you can then use the Bluetooth keyboard
| | 01:06 | anytime you need to type
on your iPhone or iPod touch.
| | 01:10 | Not only that, but you also find that
the standard keyboard commands to Cut,
| | 01:13 | Copy, Paste, and Undo, work in most
applications on the iPhone as well.
| | 01:18 | These keyboard commands are Command+X
to Cut, Command+C to Copy, Command+V to
| | 01:22 | Paste and Command+Z to Undo.
| | 01:25 | You will have to use your fingers as
usual to select text though, but you can
| | 01:28 | use the Command+A
keyboard shortcut to Select All.
| | 01:31 | So, again, with the keyboard and
your iPhone paired, you can turn on the
| | 01:34 | keyboard at any time to type with it,
instead of using the onscreen keyboard.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
3. Syncing with Your ComputerMaking sure you have the latest version of iTunes| 00:00 | In this chapter, we are going to look
at how to sync your iPhone or iPod touch
| | 00:03 | with your computer, which allows you to
move content like music, videos, photos,
| | 00:07 | contacts, and so on to your device.
| | 00:10 | The tool for getting these things on
to your iPhone or iPod touch is iTunes:
| | 00:13 | the free music and video player,
and management software from Apple.
| | 00:17 | You absolutely must be using
iTunes to sync and manage your iPhone.
| | 00:20 | If you are on Mac, you most
likely have iTunes installed already.
| | 00:23 | If you are on Windows, or you don't
have iTunes installed, regardless of your
| | 00:26 | operating system, open your web browser and
go to apple.com/itunes to download a copy.
| | 00:32 | The copy you download will be the
latest version of iTunes available.
| | 00:35 | If you already have iTunes installed,
it's still important to first check to
| | 00:38 | make sure you are running the latest version.
| | 00:40 | Apple is always releasing upgrades
to iTunes to add features or fix bugs.
| | 00:44 | So it's a good idea to make sure
you are running the latest version.
| | 00:47 | Right now, I am running iTunes 9.2.1,
but by the time you are watching this,
| | 00:51 | there may have been one or
more updated versions released.
| | 00:53 | You can see which version you are
running on a Mac by choosing iTunes, about
| | 00:57 | iTunes, and here you can see I am
running version 9.2.1. If you are on
| | 01:03 | Windows, you will click the Help menu and
choose About iTunes to see that same information.
| | 01:07 | Similarly, on a Mac, to see if any
updates are available, choose iTunes > Check
| | 01:12 | for Updates, and you can see
9.2.1 is the current version.
| | 01:16 | On Windows again, you will click the
Help menu, and choose About iTunes to check.
| | 01:20 | So, in the rest of this chapter, we will
look at what you can do through iTunes
| | 01:23 | once you have connected your
iPhone or iPod touch to your computer.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Connecting your iPhone to your Mac or PC| 00:00 | To sync your iPhone or iPod Touch to
your computer, you use the USB cable that
| | 00:04 | came with your device.
| | 00:06 | Plug one end into the device and plug the
other end into an open USB port on your Mac or PC.
| | 00:11 | If iTunes isn't currently open, it may
open once your iPhone or iPod Touch is
| | 00:15 | detected, but that depends on
the setting we'll look at shortly.
| | 00:18 | If iTunes doesn't open, go
ahead and open it manually yourself.
| | 00:21 | When you first connect an iPhone or iPod
Touch to your computer, you may have to
| | 00:24 | go through a series of screens where
you're asked to agree to a licensing
| | 00:26 | agreement, or to register your iPod.
| | 00:29 | Go ahead and do all that on your own.
| | 00:30 | Eventually, you will be back in your
main iTunes window, and your device should
| | 00:33 | show up under Devices in the Source Pane.
| | 00:35 | As you can see, I currently have both
my iPod Touch and my iPhone 3GS plugged
| | 00:39 | into my Mac, and they are both showing up
under Devices here in the Source Pane of iTunes.
| | 00:43 | The first thing you should see when
you select you device in the Source Pane is
| | 00:46 | that the main part of the iTunes window
is organized into a series of tabs, with
| | 00:49 | the Summary tab selected.
| | 00:51 | Under Summary, you can find your
devices vitals, like its Name, Capacity, Software
| | 00:55 | Version, and Serial Number.
| | 00:56 | Incidentally, if you want to change the
name of your iPod, just click it in the
| | 00:59 | Source Pane and type in your name.
| | 01:01 | This might be helpful if you have more
than one of the same iPod in the house
| | 01:04 | and you want to make sure your
name is associated with yours.
| | 01:06 | Out of the Version section, you will
either see a message telling you that your
| | 01:09 | iPod or iPhone software is up-to-date,
or a message that a newer version of the
| | 01:13 | iPod software is available.
| | 01:15 | Apple is constantly releasing updates
to its iPods, sometimes fixing bugs,
| | 01:18 | other times adding major new features.
| | 01:20 | Generally, it's a good idea to update to
the latest version of the software when
| | 01:23 | it becomes available.
| | 01:24 | Just click the Update button to
download and install the software, or in this
| | 01:28 | case, I can click Check for Update,
to have iTunes check for new software.
| | 01:31 | And you can see I get a message telling
me that I'm running the current version.
| | 01:35 | This is also where you will find the
button to restore your iPod Touch or iPhone.
| | 01:38 | There may come a time when your device is
just acting plain weird; maybe it's not
| | 01:42 | booting up right, or it's locked up.
| | 01:44 | Now there are various fixing solutions
you can find on Apple's Web site, and
| | 01:47 | we'll talk more about this in
the chapter on troubleshooting,
| | 01:49 | but as a last resort you can click the
Restore button to return the iPod to its
| | 01:53 | factory new condition, and I say it's a
last resort, because restoring iPhone or
| | 01:57 | an iPod completely erases it and
installs a fresh copy of the software on it, so
| | 02:01 | you'll lose all the items stored on it.
| | 02:03 | If you back up your phone or iPod
regularly, which again, we'll talk about in
| | 02:05 | the troubleshooting chapter, you
should have copies of everything in iTunes
| | 02:08 | anyway, but it takes time to re-copy
everything back to your device, so use the
| | 02:12 | Restore button as a last measure.
| | 02:13 | Now under the Option
section we have several options.
| | 02:17 | With my iPod Touch selected, we have
Open iTunes when this iPod is attached, and
| | 02:22 | I think it's pretty self-explanatory.
| | 02:23 | With this option checked, iTunes will open
whenever you connect your iPod to your computer.
| | 02:27 | With my iPhone selected, the first
option is Automatically sync when this
| | 02:31 | iPhone is connected.
| | 02:32 | When checked, your iPhone will
automatically transfer and receive new music,
| | 02:35 | calendars, contacts and so on, that you
have added to your computer or phone.
| | 02:39 | Next, we have Sync only
checked songs and videos.
| | 02:42 | With this option checked, iTunes
won't include any unchecked files when it
| | 02:45 | copies files to your iPod, and that's
referring to the check boxes that appear
| | 02:48 | next to your files in your library.
| | 02:50 | So if you have any of these checked off,
they won't be included in anything you sync.
| | 02:55 | The next option is Manually manage
music and videos, which I selected before I
| | 02:59 | started recording this movie, so my
iPhone and iPod Touch wouldn't be copying a
| | 03:02 | bunch of files while I was recording.
| | 03:04 | This is the option that let's you
manually drag songs and videos to your iPod or
| | 03:08 | iPhone, rather than letting iTunes
move files automatically for you.
| | 03:11 | Notice on the iPod Touch, Sync only
checked songs and videos is grayed out, and
| | 03:15 | unavailable when I have Manually
manage music and videos selected.
| | 03:19 | Now the question often comes up
here as to which option is better:
| | 03:22 | manual updating or automatic syncing.
| | 03:24 | And it really depends on whether you
prefer the control of manually managing
| | 03:27 | your iPod, or if you prefer to set up
some rules and playlists to determine what
| | 03:31 | gets copied to your iPod.
| | 03:33 | We'll look at the syncing options in
just a moment, but if I do uncheck this
| | 03:36 | Manual option, that means I want iTunes
to automatically sync my songs, and that
| | 03:40 | gives me the option now to Sync
only checked songs and videos.
| | 03:43 | I am going to leave Manually
manage music and videos checked for now.
| | 03:46 | The last check box is Encrypt
iPod backup or Encrypt iPhone backup.
| | 03:52 | When you sync your iPhone or iPod
Touch to your computer, iTunes creates a
| | 03:55 | backup copy of your
device's contents on your computer.
| | 03:58 | So should you ever lose your phone or
something crashes on it and it needs to
| | 04:01 | be completely restored, you can copy
its contents and settings from your most
| | 04:04 | recent backup onto it.
| | 04:06 | If you're worried about sensitive
information from your phone being stored on
| | 04:08 | the computer you sync with, check
this option and iTunes will protect the
| | 04:11 | backup with encryption.
| | 04:13 | In the rest of this chapter, we'll
work away through the rest of the tabs and
| | 04:16 | see how to manage the contents
on your iPhone or iPod Touch.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Syncing music, movies, and ringtones| 00:00 | So let's take a look at how to get
music, videos and ringtones onto your
| | 00:03 | iPhone or iPod Touch.
| | 00:05 | Of course, ringtones are not
available for the iPod Touch
| | 00:07 | since it's not a phone,
| | 00:08 | but the process for getting music,
movies and ringtones onto your device is
| | 00:11 | pretty much the same.
| | 00:12 | Now I've set up my iPod Touch and my
iPhone 3GS both to be manually managed,
| | 00:19 | meaning I wanted the option to just drag
whatever content I want onto my iPod or iPhone.
| | 00:23 | So the way this works is once I have my
device set up this way, I can go into my
| | 00:26 | Music Library and drag
whatever content I want onto my iPod.
| | 00:30 | So I'm just going to grab a handful of
tunes here; drag it onto my iPod Touch.
| | 00:34 | I can also grab entire Playlists and
drag them onto my iPhone or iPod Touch.
| | 00:45 | So if I want this Driving Tunes playlist,
I can drag that around to my iPod Touch.
| | 00:49 | Now all the songs in that playlist will not
be copied to my device, if I have them
| | 00:52 | already previously dragged them onto my device.
| | 00:54 | Notice that even adds the
playlist itself to my device.
| | 00:57 | And that contains the exact same songs
in the exact same order as the version of
| | 01:01 | the Playlist here in iTunes.
| | 01:03 | But because I'm manually managing my
music, the version of the Playlist on my
| | 01:06 | iPod and the one in iTunes
don't stay synced together.
| | 01:10 | If I add more music to my iTunes
Driving Tunes, so if I go back up to my Music
| | 01:14 | Library, grab another song, add it to
my iTunes playlist, that song isn't going
| | 01:21 | to get automatically added to the
Driving Tunes Playlist on my iPod, and the
| | 01:25 | same is true in reverse.
| | 01:26 | You can drag songs onto your iPod
or iPhone Playlist, or even create new
| | 01:29 | Playlists on your iPod, and they
won't get copied into your iTunes library.
| | 01:32 | Now that's not really a problem as long
as you remember to re-drag your iTunes
| | 01:36 | Playlists back your iPod, and it will
prompt you and ask if you want to replace
| | 01:39 | the existing one, and I'll say Replace,
and then that other song I dragged into
| | 01:42 | the iTunes Playlist will get copied over.
| | 01:45 | But manually syncing your music really
does mean you have to drag over every
| | 01:48 | song by hand, in most cases.
| | 01:49 | Now you do have an option available,
when you're manually syncing your music, to
| | 01:53 | have iTunes do some of the work for you.
| | 01:54 | Just select your iPod or your iPhone's
Music library in the Source pane, and at
| | 01:59 | the bottom of the window, we
have an option called Autofill.
| | 02:02 | Basically, if you choose to enable
Autofill, iTunes will fill up the free
| | 02:04 | space on your device with songs from
whichever library or Playlist you've
| | 02:07 | selected from this many.
| | 02:09 | The Setting button gives you
some control over this feature.
| | 02:12 | You can choose to replace
everything on your device from Autofilling.
| | 02:15 | So if you're tired of all the music on
your iPod or iPhone, you can have iTunes
| | 02:18 | replace everything with songs
that weren't previously on it.
| | 02:21 | Choose items randomly is on by default.
Without this checked, iTunes will just
| | 02:25 | work in order down to your Playlist or Library.
| | 02:27 | And you have the option to
choose higher-rated items more often.
| | 02:30 | So if you're in the habit of rating
your music, you can check this option some
| | 02:33 | more of your favorite
songs show up more frequently.
| | 02:36 | Now this Reserve space for disk use
option is a holdover from an option that's
| | 02:40 | available for other iPods, but
not the iPod Touch or the iPhone.
| | 02:43 | With other iPod models, you can enable
disk use, which lets your iPod show up
| | 02:47 | as a hard drive on your computer, so
you can use that as an external drive to
| | 02:50 | copy files to and from.
| | 02:52 | Neither the iPod Touch or the iPhone
have this ability, but you can install
| | 02:56 | third-party software to enable this
ability, but we're not going to be
| | 02:58 | covering that here.
| | 02:59 | With other iPods, you can allocate
space to leave free in case you want to use
| | 03:02 | the iPod as an external hard drive.
| | 03:04 | You just use the slider to determine
how much space you want to leave free.
| | 03:07 | iTunes will fill up the rest of the
space with music, but again you don't have
| | 03:10 | to worry about that with your iPod, or
your iPod Touch, so you can leave that
| | 03:12 | set to zero megabytes (0 MB) and click OK.
| | 03:15 | When you're ready to go, you just click the
Autofill button, and iTunes will do its thing.
| | 03:18 | So the Autofill option is only
available if you manually manage your songs.
| | 03:22 | Now let's talk about
automatically syncing your songs.
| | 03:25 | To set that up, select your device and
go to the Music tab, and in here you want
| | 03:30 | going to check Sync Music.
| | 03:31 | Now it's very important to note here
that doing so will erase all the existing
| | 03:34 | content on your iPod because if you
want the items on your iPod and iTunes
| | 03:38 | Playlists, or whatever you're syncing,
to be identical, iTunes has to wipe off
| | 03:42 | what's already on the iPod.
| | 03:43 | You can see I'm getting this
message that pretty much tells me that.
| | 03:46 | So if you're sure you want
to do that, click Sync Music.
| | 03:48 | Now just so you see this, when I go
back to the Summary tab, you can see that
| | 03:52 | Manually manage music and
videos has been unchecked.
| | 03:55 | I can now also select Sync only checked
songs and videos, which again sets your
| | 03:59 | device so that the unchecked items in
your library won't be copied to your
| | 04:03 | device, even if you have iTunes
set to Sync your entire library.
| | 04:06 | Let's go back to the Music tab.
| | 04:09 | So entire Music library means every
single song in my Music library, excluding
| | 04:14 | unchecked songs if I have that option
selected, and it means that every single
| | 04:17 | song in Music library
will be copied to my device.
| | 04:19 | Or I can choose to Sync only
Selected playlists, artists, and genres.
| | 04:23 | Now it's entirely possible that the
size of your iTunes library may exceed the
| | 04:26 | storage capacity of your iPhone or iPod Touch.
| | 04:29 | So syncing your entire
library might not be an option.
| | 04:31 | If that's the case, just choose
Selected playlists, artists, and genres.
| | 04:35 | Now we have a column of your
Playlists, Artists and a column of Genres.
| | 04:40 | All you have to do here is make your
way through these lists and select the
| | 04:43 | items you want to Sync to your device.
| | 04:46 | The beauty of this is once you've made your
selections, you don't have to do anything else.
| | 04:50 | So for instance, if I have The Beatles
selected under Artists, all my Beatles
| | 04:53 | music will be copied to my iPod.
| | 04:55 | But if later I add a Beatles album that
I didn't previously have in iTunes, the
| | 04:58 | next time I sync my iPod that new Beatles
album will be automatically copied to my iPod.
| | 05:03 | If you want to make sure all the new
songs you've recently added to iTunes get
| | 05:06 | added to your iPod, just check the
Recently Added smart playlist, which by
| | 05:10 | default, lists all songs
added in the past two weeks,
| | 05:13 | although you can modify the smart
playlist so it finds songs added longer ago,
| | 05:16 | in case you don't sync your device that often.
| | 05:18 | Now two more options that we have
here are Include music videos and Include
| | 05:22 | voice memos, so if you've purchased
music videos from the iTunes store or if
| | 05:26 | you've added video content from
elsewhere and tagged it as a music video, those
| | 05:29 | files will be included when you sync your iPod.
| | 05:32 | Or if you've recorded any voice
memos on your iPhone or iPod Touch, which
| | 05:35 | we'll discuss in a later chapter, you
can make sure those items are copied
| | 05:38 | over to your computer.
| | 05:39 | And we have automatically fill free
space with songs, which as its name implies,
| | 05:43 | fills up the remaining space on your
device with other songs from your library,
| | 05:46 | although Apple doesn't really offer any
documentation on how it picks that content.
| | 05:50 | Personally, my thought is that if you've
gone to the trouble to select specific
| | 05:53 | playlists, artists, and genres, why
would you want a selection of random songs in
| | 05:57 | your device as well?
| | 05:58 | But if that's what you want,
you can check this option.
| | 06:00 | Once you're done making your selections,
you would click Apply, or the button may
| | 06:04 | say Sync, and iTunes will begin
copying the files to your iPod.
| | 06:08 | So that's how you can both manually and
automatically sync music to your iPod,
| | 06:11 | and it works pretty much the same way for
movies, TV shows, podcasts and iTunes U.
| | 06:17 | If you have your iPod set up for
manual updating, you can just drag all that
| | 06:20 | type of content to your iPod.
| | 06:22 | But under each of these tabs, there is
an option to sync, them and in each case
| | 06:25 | you can choose what sort of content to sync.
| | 06:28 | So if you understood how to sync music,
then you understand how to sync movies,
| | 06:31 | TV shows, podcasts, audiobooks and
iTunes U content. And if you have an iPhone,
| | 06:37 | you understand how to sync ringtones.
| | 06:39 | But the most important and basic idea
I wanted to get across here is when it
| | 06:42 | comes to syncing these items, your
choices usually boil down to copying over all
| | 06:46 | the content in each category,
| | 06:47 | for instance, if I chose Sync
ringtones, I could choose either Sync all
| | 06:50 | ringtones, or you can copy over just
content you added recently or content you
| | 06:54 | haven't watched or listened to yet,
or in this case I would choose only
| | 06:57 | selected ringtones.
| | 06:59 | So it's fairly self-explanatory, within
each one of these tabs, whether you want
| | 07:02 | to sync all of your content or only
particular items within that category.
| | 07:06 | Now when it comes to copying items like
photos, contacts and calendars to your
| | 07:09 | iPod, the process between Macs
and Windows computers is different.
| | 07:13 | So we will look at both
platforms in turn in the upcoming movies.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Syncing photos from a Mac| 00:00 | In this video, we are going to look at
how to copy photos from your Mac onto
| | 00:03 | your iPhone or iPod touch, as well as
how to copy the photos you shoot on your
| | 00:06 | iPhone on to your Mac.
| | 00:08 | I'll start with my iPhone attached
to my Mac, and with it's selected, I'll
| | 00:10 | click the Photos tab.
| | 00:12 | And all I have to do here is check Sync Photos from,
and then select where I want the photos to come from.
| | 00:17 | Now, you can only sync your photos to
one location on your Mac, so it does
| | 00:21 | matter where you store the photos you
want to copy to your iPod or iPhone.
| | 00:24 | You can choose your Pictures folder,
which is located in your Home folder,
| | 00:27 | or you can choose any other folder in your
Mac if have your photos stored elsewhere.
| | 00:30 | But you have iPhoto on your Mac,
which is part of the iLife suite of
| | 00:33 | applications, and you use it to manage
and organize your digital photos - which
| | 00:37 | you really should - select iPhoto from the menu.
| | 00:40 | Now, the default setting is to copy
all photos, albums, events, and faces to
| | 00:44 | your device, but if you have
thousands of photos in you iPhoto library, you
| | 00:47 | might not want to copy over every single photo.
| | 00:49 | In that case, choose Selected albums,
events, and faces, and then we have this
| | 00:53 | menu here to choose which
events we want to include.
| | 00:55 | We also have the option to include any
videos that are stored in iPhoto, so if
| | 01:00 | you've taken videos with your digital
still camera, and they are in iPhoto, you
| | 01:03 | can choose to have those copied over, if they
fall into one of the categories you select below.
| | 01:08 | So you can choose to copy the photos
from albums, events, or even based on faces.
| | 01:12 | Let's go over to iPhoto to see
where this information is coming from.
| | 01:15 | So here in iPhoto, you can see I have a
collection of photos that are organized
| | 01:18 | into events, as well as an
album or two I have created.
| | 01:22 | Under Faces, I have taken advantage of
iPhoto 09's face recognition technology,
| | 01:27 | where you can find photos
based on who appears in them.
| | 01:30 | So let's switch back to iTunes, and now
I can choose to copy photos to my iPhone
| | 01:33 | based on albums, events or faces,
so I'll check some of those.
| | 01:36 | I'll do the Travel album, pick Sadie
under Events, and let's do all the faces,
| | 01:43 | and that's basically it.
| | 01:45 | Now click Apply, and all my photos
are now being copied over to my iPhone.
| | 01:50 | And here on my iPhone, I can now
navigate and view the photos I just copied over.
| | 01:53 | We'll look more managing photos in the
chapter on shooting photos and video.
| | 01:57 | Notice we have the option to view the photos
in the library by Albums, Events, and Faces.
| | 02:04 | There is a fourth category called
Places that will also appear if you
| | 02:07 | take advantage of the Places feature
in iPhoto, which groups photos based
| | 02:10 | on GPS location data.
| | 02:11 | Now, it's important to keep in mind
that synching photos through iTunes is
| | 02:15 | only a one-way trip.
| | 02:16 | You are only copying photos from iPhoto
or some other location to your device.
| | 02:21 | If you shoot photos on your iPhone, or
in the case of the iPod touch, you save
| | 02:24 | photos from your web browser or from
an email you receive, you are going to
| | 02:27 | have photos on your
device that aren't on your Mac.
| | 02:30 | So let's take a look at how to copy
the images from your device to your Mac.
| | 02:33 | When you connect your iPhone or iPod
touch to your Mac, in addition to iTunes
| | 02:37 | opening, if have it set to do so, the other
application that probably opens is iPhoto.
| | 02:42 | By default, on your Mac, iPhoto should
open when you connect the camera, and as
| | 02:45 | far as iPhoto is concerned,
your iPhone is a camera.
| | 02:48 | I am going to show you how to turn that
option off in just a little bit, but for
| | 02:51 | now, we are in iPhoto, and I can see my
device sitting right here under Devices.
| | 02:55 | With the device selected,
the photos stored on it appear.
| | 02:58 | To copy these photos to my Mac, I
can either click Import All, to copy
| | 03:02 | everything I see here, or I can select
individual thumbnails, by either clicking
| | 03:06 | or dragging to select the ones I want,
and then clicking Import Selected.
| | 03:11 | So maybe I want to
select these five photos here.
| | 03:13 | Then I'll click Import Selected, and now
those photos have been copied into my library.
| | 03:18 | You are given the option then to delete
the photos of your device if you want,
| | 03:21 | or you can keep them on
both your device and your Mac.
| | 03:24 | I'll just choose to keep them in this case.
| | 03:25 | Let me select my iPhone again, and
notice it's still showing me all the photos
| | 03:30 | that we saw previously.
| | 03:31 | If you don't want to see the thumbnails
for images you already imported the next
| | 03:34 | time you copy your photos to iPhoto, you
can check Hide photos already imported,
| | 03:37 | and you can see that it hides those
photos, but they are still on my phone.
| | 03:41 | So that's how you get images from your
iPhone or iPod touch onto your Mac, and
| | 03:44 | again, we will talk more about
shooting photos and videos with your iPhone in
| | 03:47 | an upcoming chapter.
| | 03:49 | Now, what if you don't want iPhoto opening
every time you plug in your iPhone or iPod touch?
| | 03:53 | It can get kind of annoying if all you
want to do is put some songs onto your
| | 03:56 | device and iPhoto keeps opening up.
| | 03:59 | As I mentioned, iPhotos sees your
iPhone or iPod touch as cameras, and the
| | 04:02 | default behavior on a Mac is to
open iPhoto when a camera is attached.
| | 04:05 | Now to turn this off,
| | 04:07 | you are going to need to go into
your Applications folder and locate the
| | 04:10 | application called Image Capture.
| | 04:14 | So here in Image Capture, your iPhone or
iPod touch should appear under Devices.
| | 04:18 | With it selected, down below you can
see Connecting this iPhone opens, and it's
| | 04:21 | currently set to iPhoto.
| | 04:23 | So you can actually choose to have
Image Capture open or Preview or the
| | 04:28 | AutoImporter script, but you
can also choose No applications.
| | 04:31 | You have the same option available
if you have your iPod touch selected.
| | 04:35 | So with No applications selected,
whenever you connect your device, no
| | 04:38 | application will open.
| | 04:39 | So now I'll close Image Capture, but that
doesn't mean my Mac won't recognize my device;
| | 04:44 | it just means now that iPhoto won't open.
| | 04:45 | I'll still be able to import my photos
from my iPhone or iPod touch anytime I
| | 04:49 | want to by opening iPhoto manually.
| | 04:51 | So that's how we move photos to
and from your Mac and your iPhone and
| | 04:54 | iPod touch.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Syncing photos from a PC| 00:00 | In this video, we're going to look at
how to copy photos from your Windows PC
| | 00:03 | onto your iPhone or iPod Touch, as well
as how to copy the photos you shoot on
| | 00:07 | your iPhone onto your PC.
| | 00:08 | I have my iPhone attached to my PC,
I have it selected, and I'm going to
| | 00:11 | choose the Photos tab.
| | 00:12 | And all I have to do here is check Sync
photos from and then select where I want
| | 00:17 | the photos to come from.
| | 00:18 | Now you can only sync your photos to
one location on your computer, so it
| | 00:21 | matters where you store the photos
you want to copy to your iPod or iPhone.
| | 00:25 | You can choose your Pictures folder,
which you can see if you go to the Start
| | 00:28 | menu to Pictures, and in here you can
see I have three folders of images for my
| | 00:33 | trips to Australia, Southern Nevada and Taiwan.
| | 00:35 | If I go back to iTunes, you can see I
can choose to Sync All of the folders
| | 00:40 | within my Pictures folder, or I can
choose to Sync Selected folders, which lets
| | 00:43 | me choose which folders of images
I want to copy over to my device.
| | 00:46 | Maybe I want to copy my
Australia and Taiwan photos over.
| | 00:50 | So I'll check those.
| | 00:51 | But that's basically it.
| | 00:52 | I click Apply, and now my photos
are being copied over to my iPhone.
| | 00:58 | And here on my iPhone, I can now
navigate and view the photos I just copied over.
| | 01:02 | We'll look more at managing photos in
the chapter on shooting photos and video.
| | 01:04 | Now it's important to keep in mind that
Syncing photos through iTunes is only a one-way trip.
| | 01:08 | You're only copying photos
from your PC to your device.
| | 01:12 | If you take photos on the iPhone or if
you save photos to your iPod Touch from
| | 01:15 | your Web browser or from e-mail you
receive, you're going to have photos on
| | 01:18 | your device that aren't on your PC.
| | 01:20 | So let's take a look at how to copy
the images from your device to your PC.
| | 01:25 | When you connect your iPhone or iPod
Touch to your PC, in addition to iTunes
| | 01:29 | opening, if you have it set to do so, a
dialog opens up asking you what you want
| | 01:32 | to do with the camera you just connected.
| | 01:34 | Your PC sees the iPhone or iPod
Touch as a camera containing images.
| | 01:38 | I have the choice here to import the
photos using Windows, or I can use any image
| | 01:42 | editing software that's listed here.
| | 01:44 | In this case, I've Adobe
Bridge installed on this computer.
| | 01:46 | Before you click an option, check
Always do this for this device, so you don't
| | 01:50 | have to use this dialog box every time
you connect your iPhone or iPod Touch to
| | 01:53 | your PC, and then click your selection
of how you want to import your images.
| | 01:57 | In this case, I chose
Windows, and I'll click Import.
| | 02:04 | And now you can see the
photos are now been added to my PC.
| | 02:06 | Now if you change your mind on how you
want your computer to handle images from
| | 02:09 | your iPhone or iPod Touch, go to
the Start menu to Control panel.
| | 02:13 | Here on Windows 7, or if you've
Windows Vista, you'll go to Hardware and Sound
| | 02:17 | and choose AutoPlay.
| | 02:20 | At the bottom of this list under
Devices, you'll find your device, and you
| | 02:24 | can use the menu next to it to select
a different action to occur when you
| | 02:26 | plug it into your computer.
| | 02:27 | So you can see we still have the same
options that we saw in the dialog box that opened.
| | 02:31 | You can also choose Take no
action or Ask me every time.
| | 02:35 | So if I decide I want to download my
images using Adobe Bridge CS5, for example,
| | 02:39 | I could select that.
| | 02:40 | And incidentally, you can do this with
any other camera or memory card reader
| | 02:43 | you connect to your PC, if you need
to adjust how your computer works with
| | 02:46 | your photo devices.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Syncing contacts and calendars from a Mac| 00:00 | In addition to copying your music,
movies and photos to your iPhone and iPod
| | 00:04 | Touch, you can also sync all of your
contacts and calendars, so if you carry
| | 00:07 | around your iPod or iPhone all the
time, you have quick access to your
| | 00:10 | addresses, phone numbers and schedule.
| | 00:12 | The process is slightly different
between Macs and Windows, so in this movie,
| | 00:16 | we'll take a look at how it works on a Mac.
| | 00:17 | If you are a Windows user,
you can jump to the next movie.
| | 00:19 | Here in iTunes I have my iPod Touch selected,
and now I am going to select the Info tab.
| | 00:25 | When you are working on a Mac, your
Contact Information comes from your Address
| | 00:28 | Book application, found in
your Applications folder.
| | 00:31 | I have added mine to the doc here.
| | 00:32 | So I have just a few example
contacts in here, but you can see I have
| | 00:35 | also created some Address Book
groups called Family, Friends and Work.
| | 00:39 | Back here in iTunes, I can check Sync
Address Book contacts, and then choose
| | 00:43 | whether I want to copy all of my
contacts from Address Book over, or we're
| | 00:46 | just Selected groups.
| | 00:48 | If I choose groups, I can
then select which groups I want.
| | 00:51 | Maybe I want to copy over just
my Family and Friends to my iPod.
| | 00:54 | Down below we have three more check
boxes. Because you can also create new
| | 00:58 | contact info on your iPhone or iPod
Touch, you'll probably want to select
| | 01:02 | the default group to place new contacts into
when you later sync your iPhone with your Mac.
| | 01:06 | So for instance, I might check Add contacts
created outside groups on this iPod to Friends.
| | 01:12 | If you are a Yahoo Mail or Gmail user,
you can check either of these boxes to
| | 01:16 | import your contacts from
Yahoo or Gmail to your device.
| | 01:19 | I'll leave those unchecked.
And that's really all there is to syncing your
| | 01:22 | contacts over to your iPod or iPhone.
| | 01:24 | Now before I click Apply to copy the
contacts over, let's look at Calendars.
| | 01:28 | On your Mac, your calendar
information is going to come from iCal,
| | 01:31 | another application included with
Mac OS X, and it's also found in your
| | 01:34 | Applications folder.
| | 01:35 | And here I have Calendars for Home-
related events, Work-related events, and I
| | 01:40 | have Workouts, and you're always free
to create other calendars, like medical
| | 01:43 | appointments or important birthdays.
| | 01:46 | So back in iTunes, I check Sync iCal
calendars, and like with contacts, I can
| | 01:50 | choose to sync all of my
calendars or just selected calendars.
| | 01:54 | Maybe I only what my Home and
Workout schedules on my iPod.
| | 01:57 | We also have the option to check Do not
sync events older than X amount of days.
| | 02:03 | So if you don't feel the need to
carry around your events from last year on
| | 02:05 | your iPhone, or your iPod Touch, you can
keep this checked and type in a number of days.
| | 02:10 | So once I am done with my Contact and
Calendar settings, I just click Apply or
| | 02:13 | Sync to send all that info over to my device.
| | 02:16 | And here on my iPod Touch
are the contacts I synced.
| | 02:19 | And I can see my calendars by
opening the Calendar App, and when I tap the
| | 02:24 | Calendar's button, I can see that my
Home and Workout calendars have been
| | 02:27 | copied over, as well.
| | 02:28 | Now bear in mind that every time you
sync your phone, it's a two-direction sync.
| | 02:32 | So if you've created any new contacts
on your iPhone or iPod Touch, or if you
| | 02:35 | have created any new events in your
calendar on your device, those items will
| | 02:39 | get copied over to your Mac during the
sync, and you'll find your new contacts
| | 02:42 | in Address Book, and your new events in iCal.
| | 02:45 | And that remains true, even if you've
just altered any contacts or calendars on
| | 02:48 | your device, as well.
| | 02:49 | So if you've changed your friend's
phone number or moved a meeting to a
| | 02:52 | different time on your iPhone, when
you sync, iTunes will be able to see
| | 02:55 | the information on your phone as
newer and make the changes to the contacts
| | 02:58 | and events on your Mac.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Syncing contacts and calendars from a PC| 00:00 | In addition to copying your music,
movies and photos to your device, your iPhone
| | 00:04 | and iPod Touch also support the
syncing of your contacts and calendars.
| | 00:08 | So if you carry your iPod or iPhone
around all the time, you have quick access
| | 00:11 | to your addresses, phone numbers and schedule.
| | 00:13 | In this movie, we'll look at how
this works on Windows machines.
| | 00:16 | If you're on a Mac, check out one of the
previous movies for info on how to sync
| | 00:19 | calendars and contacts with your device.
| | 00:21 | Here in iTunes I have my iPhone selected,
and I am going to go to the Info tab.
| | 00:25 | So when you are working on a PC,
you can choose to sync your contact
| | 00:28 | information with Outlook 2003 or later,
or Outlook Express, if you have either
| | 00:32 | of those programs installed.
| | 00:33 | If not, on Windows Vista and on Windows
7, you also have your Windows Contacts,
| | 00:38 | which you can find it by going to the
Start menu, going to your User account and
| | 00:43 | in here you will find any
contacts you've created.
| | 00:46 | You also have the option of syncing your Yahoo!
| | 00:48 | Address Book if you are a Yahoo Mail user.
| | 00:51 | Since I'm using Windows Contacts, I'll
select that option. And here you can see
| | 00:57 | that I can choose whether I want to copy
all of my contacts from Windows over or
| | 01:00 | just selected groups.
| | 01:02 | If I choose groups, I can
then select which groups I want.
| | 01:04 | Maybe I just wanted to copy my Family
and Friend contacts over to my iPhone.
| | 01:07 | Now because you can create new contact
info on your iPhone or iPod Touch, you'll
| | 01:12 | probably want to select the default
group to place new contacts into when you
| | 01:15 | later sync your iPhone with your PC again.
| | 01:17 | So I can check Add contacts created
outside of groups on this iPhone to:, and
| | 01:21 | I'll choose Friends as the default group.
| | 01:24 | And that's really all there is to syncing
your contacts to your iPod Touch or iPhone.
| | 01:27 | Now before I click apply to copy the
contacts over, let's take a look at Calendars.
| | 01:32 | On Windows, your Calendar information
has to come from Outlook 2003 or later.
| | 01:36 | If you don't have Outlook installed,
you can't sync calendar info to your device.
| | 01:39 | So I'll check Sync contacts with, and again,
you can see my only choice here is Outlook.
| | 01:43 | And as with Contacts, I can choose to
sync all of my calendars or just selected
| | 01:47 | counters I've created.
| | 01:48 | Maybe I only want my Home and
Workout calendars on my iPhone.
| | 01:52 | We also have the option Do not sync
events older than X amount of days.
| | 01:55 | So if you don't feel the need to carry
around your events from the last year on
| | 01:58 | your iPhone or iPod Touch,
| | 02:00 | check this and type in a number of dates.
| | 02:02 | So once I am done with my Contact and
Calendar settings, I just click Apply to
| | 02:05 | send all that info over to my iPhone.
| | 02:08 | And here on my iPhone are the contacts I synced.
| | 02:10 | And I can see my calendars by
opening the Calendar App, and if I tap the
| | 02:15 | Calendars button, I can see that my
Home and Workout calendars have been
| | 02:18 | copied over as well.
| | 02:20 | Now bear in mind that every time you
sync your phone, it's a two direction sync,
| | 02:23 | so if you've created any new contacts on
your iPhone or iPod Touch, or if you've
| | 02:27 | created any new events in your
Calendar on your device, those items will get
| | 02:30 | copied over to your PC during the sync.
| | 02:32 | And that remains true if you've just altered
any contacts or calendars on your device, too.
| | 02:37 | So if you've changed your friend's
phone number or moved a meeting to a
| | 02:39 | different time on your iPhone, when
you sync, iTunes will be able to see
| | 02:42 | the information on your phone as
newer and make the changes to the contacts
| | 02:45 | and events on your PC.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
4. The Phone Part of the iPhoneBasic phone activities| 00:00 | This chapter is all about using the
iPhone to place, receive, and manage phone
| | 00:04 | calls, because after all, it's called
the iPhone, so it'd better be able to
| | 00:07 | deliver in the area of making calls.
| | 00:09 | Obviously, there will be nothing in this
chapter about the iPod Touch, since it's
| | 00:12 | not a phone, so if you are using an iPod Touch
you can skip to the next chapter. All right.
| | 00:16 | Let's begin to look at the basic
features of the iPhone's phone capabilities.
| | 00:20 | To do anything phone-related, you
start by opening the Phone app.
| | 00:24 | The Phone app is divided into
five sections across the bottom:
| | 00:27 | Favorites, Recents,
Contacts, Keypad and Voicemail.
| | 00:31 | Briefly, Favorites is where you store
your most frequently called numbers.
| | 00:35 | We'll look at how to manage
this area in an upcoming movie.
| | 00:38 | Recents is a list of every call
you've placed, received or missed.
| | 00:41 | Tapping any of these numbers
instantly dials that number back.
| | 00:44 | Tapping the blue arrow next to the
number gives you the details of the call,
| | 00:47 | which can be useful if you want to
see the time and date when the call is
| | 00:50 | placed, received or missed.
| | 00:52 | You can also filter the
list to just see missed calls.
| | 00:55 | Tapping the Clear button deletes all
recent calls. Be aware that this deletes all
| | 00:59 | the calls in the list.
| | 01:00 | It's not possible to delete only one call.
| | 01:02 | Next we have the Contacts area, and
this is essentially your address book.
| | 01:05 | From here, you can access the numbers
and addresses of all the people you've
| | 01:08 | added to the contacts on your
computer if you've sync your iPhone to your
| | 01:11 | computer, as well as to the
contacts you've created on your iPhone.
| | 01:14 | Now this Contacts section of the
Phone app is identical to the Contacts app
| | 01:18 | you'll find either on your Home screen, or
whichever screen you might have moved it to.
| | 01:22 | Personally, I never use the Contacts app,
since I can get to it from the Phone app.
| | 01:26 | But some people like being able to
access their contacts from their Home screen.
| | 01:29 | Just so you know, they
both lead to the same place.
| | 01:31 | Next we have Keypad, which as its
name implies, is the keypad for dialing
| | 01:35 | out from your phone.
| | 01:36 | Just tap the number you want to call.
If you make a mistake, tap the Backspace
| | 01:42 | button and fix your mistake.
| | 01:44 | Once you have the number entered,
you can tap Call to place your call.
| | 01:48 | This button to the left of the Call
button is for adding the number you just
| | 01:50 | typed into your contacts list.
| | 01:52 | We'll talk more about adding to contacts later.
| | 01:54 | The fifth and final section is for
checking your voicemail messages, which is
| | 01:58 | where you view and listen to the
messages left for you by people whose calls you
| | 02:01 | either missed or didn't answer.
| | 02:02 | We'll take an in-depth look at
Voicemail in an upcoming movie.
| | 02:06 | But for now those are the five
sections of the iPhone's Phone app.
| | 02:08 | You might have noticed that you can dial
your phone from each one of these areas.
| | 02:11 | So once you understand what each area
is for, you will then figure out the best
| | 02:14 | section to use when you need to place a call.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding and managing Favorites| 00:00 | The Favorites list of the Phone app
on your iPhone is to place to store and
| | 00:03 | quickly access the numbers of the
people and places you call most often.
| | 00:07 | With the numbers stored here, you don't
have to worry about navigating through
| | 00:09 | a series of screens, or manually dialing the
numbers each time you want to place a call.
| | 00:13 | You can add numbers to the Favorites
list from any of the other sections of the
| | 00:16 | Phone App, except for the Keypad.
| | 00:18 | I'll type Recents to get the list of
recently dialed, received, or missed calls.
| | 00:22 | Notice that some of the items here are
simply phone numbers, while others are
| | 00:25 | the actual names of people.
| | 00:27 | The names are the people who are already
in my contacts. I can add anyone to my
| | 00:31 | contacts to my Favorites by tapping the
blue arrow next to their name and then
| | 00:34 | scrolling down and tapping Add to Favorites.
| | 00:37 | If more than one number is available,
for example, a home or a mobile number,
| | 00:41 | you'll be asked which number
you want to make the favorite.
| | 00:43 | In this case I'll tap the work number.
| | 00:45 | Notice a small blue star appears next
to the number you added, and the number
| | 00:48 | itself is also in blue.
| | 00:50 | This just lets you know that
the number is now a favorite.
| | 00:52 | Now this is an important point.
| | 00:54 | You can only have one number per favorite.
| | 00:56 | You'll have to come back to the Contact
and tap Add to Favorites again, and the
| | 01:00 | person's name will then appear
twice in your Favorites list.
| | 01:03 | But as you can see, each Favorite
is clearly labeled so you can tell
| | 01:05 | which number is which.
| | 01:06 | Let's go back to Recents.
| | 01:08 | So to add numbers to your Favorites
from the recent calls area, the numbers
| | 01:11 | already have to appear in contacts.
| | 01:13 | If you tap the blue arrow next to any
numbers that aren't in your contacts,
| | 01:16 | you'll see this screen, where you'll
find options to create a new contact for
| | 01:19 | this number, among other things.
| | 01:21 | So from here you could create a new contact
and then add it to your Favorites, if you like.
| | 01:24 | If you go over to the Contacts area, here
you can browse through everyone in your list.
| | 01:28 | Just tap the name of the person you want to
add to Favorites and then tap Add to Favorites.
| | 01:33 | Similarly, let's go over to Voicemail.
Here I see some numbers and some names.
| | 01:36 | Again, if you see a name, that's the
person who is already in your contacts,
| | 01:39 | and you can add them to your Favorites by
tapping the blue arrow and tapping Add to Favorites.
| | 01:43 | Now as you go through adding people
to your Favorites list, the list itself
| | 01:47 | might start to get kind of long.
| | 01:48 | What you'll probably want to do is
rearrange your Favorites list, so your most
| | 01:51 | frequently called numbers in this list
are at the top of the list, so you don't
| | 01:54 | have to scroll down to find them.
| | 01:56 | Tap the Edit button and use the
handles to the right of the Favorites name to
| | 01:59 | drag the contact up and down the list.
| | 02:02 | This is also where you can
delete someone for your Favorites.
| | 02:04 | Just tap the red button next to the
name and then tap Delete to confirm that
| | 02:07 | you want to remove it.
| | 02:08 | Now this only removes the
number from the Favorites list.
| | 02:11 | The number I just deleted is still
stored in my contacts, and I can add the
| | 02:14 | number as a Favorite again if I
made a mistake or changed my mind.
| | 02:17 | So that's a Favorites list, which is
again a quick way to access the numbers to
| | 02:20 | dial the most often.
| | 02:22 | Of course, you still have to open the
Phone app to get your Favorites list, but
| | 02:25 | you can customize a shortcut to get
you even quicker access to your list.
| | 02:28 | Let's go to the Home screen and tap Settings.
| | 02:31 | Under General, you'll find Home, and
this is where you can assign shortcuts to
| | 02:35 | the double-click action of the Home button.
| | 02:37 | So if I want to click double-click of
the Home button to bring up my Favorites,
| | 02:40 | I just tap Phone Favorites.
| | 02:41 | Let's tap the Home button
again to close these settings.
| | 02:44 | Now, no matter what else I am doing, if
I am checking stocks or something, and I
| | 02:48 | need to quickly call my broker's
number in my Favorites list, I'll just
| | 02:51 | double-click the Home
button and up pop my Favorites.
| | 02:54 | I didn't have to close stocks and open
the Phone app first, and that's how we
| | 02:57 | work with our Phone Favorites.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Accessing voicemail| 00:00 | One of the big breakthroughs when the
iPhone came out was visual voicemail,
| | 00:04 | which lets you see a list of all your
voicemail messages and then just tap the
| | 00:07 | one you want to listen to.
| | 00:08 | So you don't have to navigate through a
series of audio menus, like you do with
| | 00:11 | the voicemail systems on other phones.
| | 00:12 | To hear a message, I suggest first turn
on the speakerphone by tapping Speaker,
| | 00:16 | unless you're at some place where
you are concerned about other people
| | 00:18 | hearing your voicemails.
| | 00:20 | It's much easier to browse and listen
to your voicemails over at the iPhone's
| | 00:22 | built-in speaker than it is
to bring the phone to your ear.
| | 00:25 | To listen to a voicemail, tap it
once to select it, and then tap it a
| | 00:29 | second time to play it.
| | 00:29 | (Male speaker: Hey, Garrick. I just wanted to catch
up with you about our plans for Tuesday night.)
| | 00:35 | (Male Speaker: I've got the reservations
all set and I think everything is ready.)
| | 00:39 | While it's playing, you can
tap it again to pause playback.
| | 00:43 | If you have a message you've never listened
to before, it'll have a blue bullet next to it.
| | 00:47 | To play one of those, just tap it once.
| | 00:48 | (Henry Jones: Hey, Garrick! It's Henry Jones.
I just want to double-check the time that you
| | 00:53 | (Henry Jones: need me to deliver
that sheet rock to the house.)
| | 00:57 | Tap it once more to pick up where you left off.
| | 00:59 | (Henry Jones: So if you could give me a call back
at your earliest convenience, that'd be great.)
| | 01:03 | And probably most importantly, you can
drag the Progress Bar to the right and
| | 01:07 | left to quickly jump back
and forth in the voicemail.
| | 01:10 | This is perfect for those times when
someone leaves a long-winded voicemail
| | 01:13 | message but doesn't leave his callback
number until the very end, or for when you
| | 01:16 | just didn't quite catch what your caller said.
| | 01:19 | With the iPhone, you don't have to sit
and listen through the entire message
| | 01:21 | again; just drag to the end of the message.
| | 01:24 | But of course since this is visual
voicemail, you probably won't need to listen
| | 01:27 | for the caller's callback number since
you can simply tap the Callback button to
| | 01:31 | instantly call back the number of
the person who left the voicemail.
| | 01:33 | You'll find more details about the
call by tapping the blue arrow next to the
| | 01:37 | voicemail, as well as options for
texting the caller back or for adding this
| | 01:41 | caller to your Contacts List.
| | 01:44 | Back on the main voicemail screen, you
can also tap the Delete button to delete
| | 01:47 | the selected message.
| | 01:49 | Notice you don't get any
kind of confirmation notice.
| | 01:52 | The selected message just disappears.
| | 01:54 | If you tap Delete by accident, you can
scroll down to Deleted Messages, where
| | 01:58 | you'll find your recently deleted voicemails.
| | 02:01 | You can play deleted voicemails from
here, or select it and tap Undelete to put
| | 02:05 | the message back in your Voicemail box.
| | 02:07 | Deleted Messages stay here for 30 days.
| | 02:09 | So you have plenty of time to go back
and retrieve them, or if you really need
| | 02:12 | to delete a message before then, tap
Clear All to instantly remove the deleted
| | 02:16 | voicemails in this list.
| | 02:18 | Back on the main Voicemail
screen, tap Greeting to record your
| | 02:21 | voicemail message.
| | 02:24 | This is what people will hear when
they call your phone and you don't answer.
| | 02:27 | Now the very first time you enter the screen,
you'll be prompted to create a pin number.
| | 02:31 | This is the only time you'll need to
do this, and you won't have to enter any
| | 02:34 | codes to get your voicemail after
this point because your iPhone will handle
| | 02:36 | that in the background.
| | 02:39 | All you need to do here is to make sure
you're in a quiet area and then tap the
| | 02:41 | Record button to record your message.
This is Garrick. Please leave the message.
| | 02:45 | Stop the recording and then tap
the Play button to listen to it.
| | 02:49 | (Voicemail Greeting: This Garrick.
Please leave a message)
| | 02:54 | If you are happy with the
recording, you are all set.
| | 02:56 | If you want to try again, hit the
Record button and repeat your message, or if
| | 03:00 | you want to bypass having to record
your own custom greeting, just tap Default,
| | 03:03 | and your callers will instead hear the
boilerplate message that the person at
| | 03:06 | your number is unavailable
and to leave the message.
| | 03:09 | Lastly, I just mention that the first
time you access your voicemail, you'll be
| | 03:13 | asked to enter a pin number.
| | 03:14 | But then after that, you wouldn't have
to enter the number again because your
| | 03:16 | iPhone would remember it for you.
| | 03:18 | If you do ever need to change your
voicemail password for some reason, you
| | 03:21 | can find the option for doing so
by going to Settings > Phone > Change
| | 03:31 | Voicemail Password.
| | 03:34 | Here you'll be prompted to enter your
current password, and then you'll be able
| | 03:37 | to create a new one, but most
likely, you'll never have to come in here.
| | 03:40 | That's how you work with
visual voicemail on your iPhone.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Receiving calls| 00:00 | In this movie, we are going to examine
the options you have when you receive an
| | 00:03 | incoming call on your iPhone.
| | 00:05 | Let's take a look at a couple of scenarios.
| | 00:07 | First, let's see what happens when the
phone is on but in sleep or in locked mode.
| | 00:10 | So my phone is currently on, but asleep.
| | 00:14 | A call comes in, the number or caller
ID of the person calling appears at the
| | 00:18 | top of the screen, and I see
this Slide to Answer bar appear.
| | 00:21 | To answer this call, I just slide the
handle across to unlock and answer the phone.
| | 00:27 | At this point, I put the
phone to my ear and start talking.
| | 00:30 | When I am done, I tap End Call.
| | 00:34 | If you are already using your phone, say
have the Calculator app open and then a
| | 00:41 | call comes in, this time I get two
buttons instead of the slider Bar.
| | 00:44 | I can either decline the call, which
will send the caller to my voicemail, or I
| | 00:48 | can tap Answer to answer
the phone and start talking.
| | 00:50 | When I'm done, I can tap End Call again,
and I am taken back to the app I was using.
| | 01:00 | If you are listening to music or
watching a video when a call comes in, you'll
| | 01:03 | hear the audio quickly fade out
right before your phone starts ringing.
| | 01:06 | After you hang up, the music will fade
back in again right where you left off.
| | 01:10 | Now, we just saw that if you are
using the iPhone when a call comes in, you
| | 01:13 | get the choice to either answer the call or
decline it and send the caller to your voicemail.
| | 01:17 | But if your phone is asleep when a
call comes in, you only see that Slide
| | 01:20 | to Answer bar appear.
| | 01:22 | You can still send incoming calls to
voicemail, regardless of whether the phone
| | 01:25 | is awake or asleep, by clicking the
Sleep/Wake button at the top of the phone.
| | 01:29 | You'll see the Missed Call message
instantly appear, which reminds you that you
| | 01:33 | missed or declined a call.
| | 01:36 | When you unlock the phone, you'll
see a small number on the phone icon
| | 01:39 | indicating how many messages
are in the Phone app for you.
| | 01:42 | The Phone app counts missed calls and
voicemail messages as individual alerts.
| | 01:47 | Once you view your missed call in the
Recent section of the Phone app, the
| | 01:50 | number will disappear.
| | 01:52 | Now, one potential downside of tapping
the Decline button, or double-clicking the
| | 01:56 | Sleep button to send your callers to
voicemail, is that if they heard the phone
| | 01:59 | ring once or twice on their end,
they'll know you deliberately pawned them off
| | 02:02 | on your voicemail system.
| | 02:04 | One solution is to just let your phone
keep ringing until voicemail kicks in,
| | 02:08 | which is approximately 20 seconds.
| | 02:10 | Of course, this means your phone
will continue to ring this entire time.
| | 02:13 | You can of course switch the silence
or switch to Silent, but if you have
| | 02:17 | Vibrate turned on, your phone will still
vibrate until the call is picked up by voicemail.
| | 02:21 | The better option is to simply
click one of the Volume buttons once.
| | 02:25 | This lets the phone keep ringing in the
sense that you still have what remains
| | 02:28 | of the 20 seconds to answer the phone
call, but it won't make any other sounds
| | 02:31 | at this time and voicemail will
still pick up if you don't answer.
| | 02:34 | In an upcoming movie, we will look at
what you can do during a call, but for now
| | 02:37 | that covers the things you can do
when you receive a call on your iPhone.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using the iPhone during a call| 00:00 | Now let's take a look at what you
can do with an iPhone during a call.
| | 00:03 | So, my phone is now ringing, and I'll answer it.
| | 00:06 | Whether you place the call or whether
you answered an incoming call, these are
| | 00:09 | the six buttons you'll see during your call.
| | 00:11 | The iPhone has a built-in proximity
sensor that detects when you're holding the
| | 00:14 | phone up to your ear. This sensor is
located to the left of the earpiece speaker.
| | 00:18 | Notice if I hold my finger over
that area, the screen goes dark.
| | 00:22 | This actually serves a number of purposes.
| | 00:24 | First of all, it can be distracting to
hold a brightly-lit screen to your face,
| | 00:27 | especially if you are in a dimly-lit room.
| | 00:29 | More importantly though, this also
temporarily deactivates the screen's touch
| | 00:33 | sensitivity, which prevents you from
accidentally tapping buttons with your
| | 00:36 | cheek, and of course, having the screen
turned off, especially during long phone
| | 00:40 | calls, conserves battery power.
| | 00:42 | But the second you take the phone away
from your head, the screen turns back on,
| | 00:46 | and you have instant access to your phone.
| | 00:48 | Incidentally, the iPhone's ambient
light sensor is also located in this area,
| | 00:51 | which gauges the amount of light where
you currently are, and can adjust the
| | 00:54 | screen's brightness to save power.
| | 00:55 | You can adjust the screen's Brightness
settings in Settings, and we'll look at
| | 00:59 | this in a later chapter.
| | 01:00 | By the way, if you're looking to
purchase a case for your iPhone, make sure it
| | 01:03 | doesn't cover too much of the proximity
sensor area, or that it's not so thick
| | 01:07 | that it keeps your ear a slight
distance away from the earpiece.
| | 01:10 | If your ear gets too far away from the
phone, the screen will reactivate and
| | 01:13 | some people have found that they
accidentally bump buttons, like the speaker
| | 01:16 | phone button, when they're used in certain cases.
| | 01:18 | Okay, so we're on a call.
| | 01:19 | Let's look at these buttons.
| | 01:21 | The first one is the Mute button.
| | 01:23 | Tap it once, and the person on the
other end won't be able to hear you, but
| | 01:25 | you'll still be able to hear them.
| | 01:27 | This is useful if you need to talk to
someone in the room with you without the
| | 01:30 | caller on the line hearing you.
| | 01:31 | I use this all the time
when I'm on conference calls.
| | 01:34 | I'll tap the Mute button while I'm
listening in, and I don't have to worry about
| | 01:37 | people hearing me clear
my throat or typing emails.
| | 01:40 | Tap the Mute button again to turn it off.
| | 01:42 | Similar to the Mute button is the Hold button.
| | 01:45 | On the iPhone 3GS, the Hold button
is onscreen, but on the iPhone 4, the
| | 01:49 | place where the Hold button previously
appeared has been replaced with the FaceTime button.
| | 01:53 | You can still put a call on hold on the
iPhone 4 though, by pressing and holding
| | 01:57 | the mute button for a second or two.
| | 01:59 | That turns the Mute button into the Hold button.
| | 02:01 | But when you tap the Hold button,
neither you nor the other person on the other
| | 02:05 | line will be able to hear each other.
| | 02:07 | Again, maybe you're on a conference call,
and someone comes into the room to talk to you.
| | 02:11 | You can tap the Hold button, so you're
not trying to listen to the call, and the
| | 02:13 | person in the room with you at the same time.
| | 02:15 | Tap hold again to return to the call.
| | 02:17 | Next is the keypad, which is for
those times when you need to input touch
| | 02:21 | tones during the call.
| | 02:22 | For example, if you're calling
company's customer service line, you might hear
| | 02:25 | something like, "Touch 1 for technical
support. Touch 2 for sales," and so on.
| | 02:29 | All you have to do is tap keyboard and
touching the numbers will send the touch
| | 02:32 | tones over the line.
| | 02:33 | You also have the option to end the
call from here if you're done talking, so
| | 02:36 | you don't have to first
hide the keypad to hang up.
| | 02:39 | But if you're still on your call, tap Hide
Keypad to return to the 6 in-call buttons.
| | 02:45 | Next to keypad is speaker.
| | 02:46 | This lets you turn on the
speakerphone during a call.
| | 02:49 | So, if you're on a conference call where
you're mostly listening, you might want
| | 02:52 | to tap speaker, so you can place your
phone down on your desk, and still hear
| | 02:54 | what people are saying.
| | 02:55 | Remember that both the speaker and the
microphone are along the bottom of the iPhone.
| | 03:00 | So, keep that in facing you, when you
have the phone sitting on your desk.
| | 03:03 | Tap speaker again to return the audio
to the earpiece speaker, or if you're
| | 03:07 | using the iPhone's earbud headset,
turning off speaker will return the call's
| | 03:10 | audio to your earbuds.
| | 03:12 | Now, one other thing to know about
speaker button is that it will change if
| | 03:16 | you're using a Bluetooth
headset to talk during your call.
| | 03:18 | In that case, the button will be
labeled "audio" instead of "speaker," and you'll
| | 03:21 | be able to tap it to route your call
between your Bluetooth headset and your speaker.
| | 03:25 | We'll look more at this in the
upcoming movie on using a Bluetooth headset.
| | 03:28 | Below speaker, we have contacts.
| | 03:30 | Tapping contacts opens your address
book, so you can look up numbers and
| | 03:33 | email addresses, which can be useful
if you need to give information to the
| | 03:36 | person you're talking to.
| | 03:38 | You can also make a second call from
here, if you need to talk to someone else
| | 03:40 | during your current phone
call, or set up a conference call.
| | 03:43 | We'll look more closely at
conference calls in an upcoming movie.
| | 03:46 | To return back to the in-call screen
after you've opened contacts, just tap the
| | 03:49 | green area at the top of the screen.
| | 03:51 | We've already looked at the Hold button,
so the only other button left here is
| | 03:54 | the Add Call button, which is for
creating conference calls, and again, we'll
| | 03:57 | take a look at that topic in its own movie.
| | 03:59 | Now, you're not limited to just
using these six buttons during a call;
| | 04:03 | you can press the Home button to
go to your home screen, and open
| | 04:05 | other applications.
| | 04:06 | For example, maybe you're planning a
trip with the person on the other line, and
| | 04:09 | you want to check the weather for that weekend.
| | 04:11 | Notice the green Touch to return to
call area remains at the top of the screen.
| | 04:15 | You may come across some apps that
won't work while you're on a call, but I'd
| | 04:18 | say that the majority of them do.
| | 04:20 | So, during a call, you can check
weather, refer to your calendar and do any
| | 04:24 | number of other things.
| | 04:25 | Multitasking also works during your call,
so you can just double-click the home
| | 04:28 | button to run another app.
| | 04:31 | Just touch the green area at the top of
the screen to return to the in-call screen.
| | 04:35 | Other buttons you can press during
your call include the Volume buttons, which
| | 04:38 | adjust the volume of your call.
| | 04:39 | So if you're having trouble hearing the
person on the other line, you can turn
| | 04:42 | the volume up, or if they're
too loud, turn the volume down.
| | 04:44 | The only button you want to be
careful with is the Sleep/Wake button.
| | 04:48 | Pressing that button ends your call, so
unless you mean to hang up, don't press it.
| | 04:52 | Your screen will dim itself, and
eventually turn off if you don't touch anything.
| | 04:56 | Tapping the screen once turns it back on.
| | 04:57 | But there is no way to manually put
the screen to sleep during your call.
| | 05:01 | Okay, so those are many of the options
that are available to you during a call,
| | 05:04 | with the exception of making a
conference call, but again, we'll look at that
| | 05:07 | topic in its own movie.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using FaceTime for video calls| 00:00 | New and available only on the iPhone 4
is a calling feature called FaceTime,
| | 00:04 | which is a video chatting feature that
lets you and the person you're calling
| | 00:07 | both see and hear each other.
| | 00:09 | It's a great way to have a face-to-
face conversation, or to show someone where
| | 00:12 | you're calling them from.
| | 00:14 | Now in order to use FaceTime, both
callers have to be on an iPhone 4, and both
| | 00:18 | callers need to be connected to a WiFi network.
| | 00:20 | Other than that, there's no setup
required to use FaceTime, though you may want
| | 00:23 | go into your Settings, into Phone,
and make sure FaceTime is turned on.
| | 00:30 | So to make a FaceTime call, you
first make a regular phone call.
| | 00:34 | I'm going to dial my friend
Nick from my list of favorites.
| | 00:43 | So now Nick has answered the call.
| | 00:44 | I know he has an iPhoto 4, and we're
both connected to our WiFi networks, so I'm
| | 00:48 | going to tap the FaceTime button.
| | 00:50 | Now, the person you're calling also has
to tap Accept on their end in order for
| | 00:56 | FaceTime calls to connect.
| | 00:58 | That prevents someone from just seeing
your camera by tapping FaceTime on their end.
| | 01:01 | So if Nick had tried to initiate a
FaceTime call, I would see a message in which
| | 01:05 | I can either choose to accept or
decline his invitation. All right.
| | 01:08 | So Nick has accepted my
invitation, so there he is.
| | 01:10 | Garrick: How's it goin there Nick?
Nick: Hey Garrick, how are you doing?
| | 01:13 | Garrick: Pretty good, thanks.
| | 01:15 | So now we're hearing and seeing
each other in pretty much real-time.
| | 01:18 | Now you and the person you're
calling can rotate the phone to either
| | 01:21 | landscape or portrait orientation, so
if Nick rotates his orientation, you
| | 01:26 | can see the effect there.
| | 01:27 | And I can do the same to on my end, if need be.
| | 01:31 | Now, as you saw, FaceTime defaults to the
front-facing camera, but you can switch
| | 01:35 | cameras at any point during the call,
which is great if you want to show
| | 01:38 | something to the person you're talking to.
| | 01:39 | For example, maybe I want to show
Nick the studio that we're currently in.
| | 01:43 | So I'm going to tap the Camera Toggle
button, and now I can point my camera all
| | 01:50 | around studio for Nick to check out.
| | 01:51 | Garrick: Nick, what do you think of the studio?
Nick: Pretty good!
| | 01:54 | Garrick: Thanks, appreciate that.
| | 01:56 | Now, Nick can do the same thing on his end.
| | 01:57 | If he switches his main camera, I now
see his feet and a potted plant and a
| | 02:03 | bike, so we're seeing what
his main camera is seeing.
| | 02:06 | Now we can also do a couple
other things during a FaceTime call.
| | 02:09 | We have a Mute button we can tap.
| | 02:12 | So now I can still see and hear Nick, but
he can't hear me, but he can still see me.
| | 02:17 | I'm going to turn off mute.
| | 02:20 | And you can also run other
applications while on a FaceTime chat.
| | 02:23 | So if I press the Home button, now we
won't be able to see each other at this
| | 02:27 | point, but we can still hear each other.
| | 02:29 | This might be useful if you need to
look up a contact or an address to share
| | 02:32 | with the person you're talking to.
| | 02:33 | Now, when I tap this green bar at the
top of the screen, that brings it back,
| | 02:38 | and now we can both see and hear each
other again, if I switch back to the
| | 02:41 | front-facing camera.
| | 02:43 | Now, as long as you and the person
you're FaceTime chatting with stay connected
| | 02:46 | to your respective WiFi networks, you
can keep seeing and hearing each other.
| | 02:49 | But bear in mind that once you start
a FaceTime chat, your conversation is
| | 02:53 | happening entirely over your Internet
connections, and not through your wireless
| | 02:56 | carrier's network, so if one of you
walks out of the range of your WiFi signal,
| | 03:00 | the FaceTime chat will get cut off and end.
| | 03:02 | So, I'm going to say goodbye to Nick.
| | 03:03 | See you later Nick.
| | 03:04 | Nick: See ya!
| | 03:06 | Garrick: Hang up.
| | 03:08 | So initiating a FaceTime chat is
simply a matter of tapping the FaceTime
| | 03:11 | button during a call.
| | 03:12 | You can also initiate a FaceTime
call from your contacts right away by
| | 03:16 | going into your contacts.
| | 03:17 | You can see, at the bottom of this
Contacts screen, there is a FaceTime button, and by
| | 03:21 | clicking that you can initiate the
FaceTime call right away without having to
| | 03:24 | make a regular voice call first.
| | 03:26 | So that's how to initiate a FaceTime call.
| | 03:28 | Let's see what it looks like
when you receive a FaceTime call.
| | 03:32 | So I can see that Nick
wants to start a FaceTime chat.
| | 03:35 | I can either decline or except, so I'll accept.
| | 03:37 | It's going to take a moment to
connect, and there he is again.
| | 03:43 | Welcome back, Nick!
Nick: Thanks!
| | 03:45 | Garrick: And that's all we needed from you. See ya!
Nick: See ya later!
| | 03:49 | So, that's the new FaceTime feature,
again, only available over WiFi, using
| | 03:53 | the iPhone 4.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Making conference calls| 00:00 | With the iPhone, it's easy to set up a
call with multiple people, otherwise known
| | 00:04 | as a conference call.
| | 00:05 | In fact, you can host a call between up to
six people including yourself on your iPhone.
| | 00:10 | Let's take a look at how this works.
| | 00:11 | Let's say a call comes in
from Scott. I answer it.
| | 00:14 | So it's my co-worker Scott wanting to
discuss a project we are working on.
| | 00:18 | I think we should get input from one of
our other co-workers while we are talking.
| | 00:21 | All I do is tap Add Call, which takes me
to my contacts where I can look up the
| | 00:25 | person I want to call.
| | 00:26 | I also have access to my favorites,
recent calls, and the keypad, if I want to
| | 00:30 | use any of those methods
to place the second call.
| | 00:33 | I'll call from Favorites.
| | 00:34 | Now, up until this point, the person I
was originally talking to can still hear
| | 00:37 | me, unless I tap the Hold button.
| | 00:39 | But once I dial the second number, the
first person is put on hold, so I can hear
| | 00:43 | the second person's phone ringing.
| | 00:44 | So now Nick is on the line.
| | 00:46 | Notice at the top of the screen,
I can see Scott is on hold.
| | 00:49 | If necessary, I can tap Scott to talk
privately to him, which puts Nick on hold.
| | 00:54 | I can tap Nick again to talk
to him and put Scott on hold.
| | 00:58 | To bring the three of us together into a
conference call, I tap Merge Calls, and
| | 01:02 | now we can each hear what
the other two are saying.
| | 01:04 | As I mentioned earlier, I can repeat
this process up to three more times to add
| | 01:07 | a total of five people to this call if need be.
| | 01:09 | I just tap Add Call again and call
up another contact. I'll call Ben.
| | 01:15 | After Ben answers, I can merge
him into the conference call.
| | 01:18 | Just be aware that each separate
call is counted as separate minutes
| | 01:21 | against your calling plan.
| | 01:22 | So if you're talking to five people for
10 minutes, you are eating up 50 minutes
| | 01:25 | of your plan's talk-time.
| | 01:27 | You can see everyone on your call
at anytime by tapping the arrow.
| | 01:30 | This is where you can tap the Red
button to hang up on any individual caller
| | 01:33 | without hanging up on the others, or if
you need to talk to any of these people
| | 01:36 | independently, you can tap Private,
which places all the other calls on hold,
| | 01:40 | although they'll still be able to
talk to each other while you're having a
| | 01:43 | private side conversation.
| | 01:44 | Merge the calls together again to let
everyone hear everyone else once more.
| | 01:48 | When you are done talking to everyone, just
tap End Call to hang up on everyone at once.
| | 01:52 | Now, there may be times when you're
on a call during which time you receive
| | 01:55 | another call, and maybe you don't
want to create a conference call at all
| | 01:58 | between those two parties.
| | 01:59 | So here is how that works.
| | 02:01 | So I'm currently on a call with Nick.
| | 02:03 | Now, I see that Ben is calling.
| | 02:05 | So tapping Ignore or End Call and Answer
both result in me talking to only one person,
| | 02:10 | but tapping Hold Call and Answer will
place Nick on hold while I talk to Ben.
| | 02:14 | So this looks exactly like it did
when I initiated a conference call.
| | 02:17 | I can tap between Nick and Ben to talk
to them individually, or I can tap merge
| | 02:20 | calls to create a conference
call between the three of us.
| | 02:22 | That's how you manage multiple
callers and conference calls on your iPhone.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding recent calls to your contacts| 00:00 | We've previously seen that you can
add contacts to your iPhone either by
| | 00:03 | importing them from your Mac or PC
when you sync your phone, or by manually
| | 00:07 | entering them into your phone.
| | 00:09 | Another way to enter contact information
is by grabbing that info from a recent call.
| | 00:13 | I'm currently looking at
my list of recent calls.
| | 00:15 | The calls that are listed as numbers are
people I don't currently have in my contacts.
| | 00:19 | Adding a number to your contacts is as easy
as tapping the blue arrow next to the number,
| | 00:23 | and then tapping either Create New
Contact to create a brand-new contact
| | 00:27 | entry for a new person or business
that's not already in your contacts, or
| | 00:31 | Add to Existing Contact.
| | 00:32 | So, for example, this number is from
a friend of mine whose home number I
| | 00:35 | currently have in my contacts,
but he called me from work,
| | 00:38 | I would tap Add to Existing Contact, find
him in my Address Book, and tap his name.
| | 00:42 | You may then have to tap the Edit
button and re-label that number as Work,
| | 00:46 | Home, Mobile or whatever.
| | 00:47 | Now, when it comes to creating new
contacts from recent calls, you might need to
| | 00:51 | take an additional step
to keep things organized.
| | 00:54 | On my computer, I organize my contacts into
groups like Work, Friends, Family and so on.
| | 00:59 | So when I sync my phone to my computer,
those groups appear to my phone making
| | 01:02 | it easier to find the contacts I am looking for.
| | 01:04 | There is no way to create groups on your iPhone.
| | 01:06 | When you create a new contact from a
recent call, you can't specify which group
| | 01:10 | you want the number added to.
| | 01:11 | So if you have your contacts grouped,
start by coming into your Contacts, and
| | 01:15 | selecting the group you
want to add the new contact to.
| | 01:17 | For example, I'll tap Businesses.
| | 01:20 | Now, I'll tap the plus
symbol to create a new contact.
| | 01:23 | I'll tap where it says
First, Last for the name.
| | 01:26 | In the Company field, I'll type lynda.com.
| | 01:36 | Now, I'll tap Save.
| | 01:37 | That's all I'm going to do
with this contact, for the moment.
| | 01:40 | What I've done is created a new
contact in my Businesses group.
| | 01:43 | Now, I'll go back to my recent calls,
and I can add the number to this
| | 01:47 | contact by clicking the blue arrow next to the
number, and choosing Add to Existing Contact.
| | 01:53 | I know this contact is
inside my Businesses group,
| | 01:55 | because, again, there is no way to
specify a group if you create a New Contact
| | 01:58 | directly from your Recent call list;
instead, create the contact in your
| | 02:02 | preferred group first, and
then add the number to it.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Sharing contacts| 00:00 | Occasionally, you may need to share
the contact information in your address
| | 00:03 | book with someone else.
| | 00:05 | Maybe you want to send a friend the
number and e-mail address of the contractor
| | 00:08 | you used for home repair, or the
number of the hotel you'll be staying at.
| | 00:11 | You can easily send contact information
from your iPhone to another phone or computer.
| | 00:16 | First, find the contact you want to send.
| | 00:19 | At the bottom of each contact, you'll
find the button labeled Share Contact.
| | 00:22 | You have the choice to send this
contact information via e-mail, or
| | 00:25 | multimedia message, or MMS.
| | 00:28 | Now, what we're going to send
here is referred to as a vCard.
| | 00:31 | A vCard is a small file containing all
the info from your contact, formatted so
| | 00:35 | that anyone who opens the vCard on a
device that understands that format will be
| | 00:38 | able to instantly add that
contact to their own address book.
| | 00:42 | So, whether or not the person
receiving the info you're sending can use the
| | 00:44 | vCard is going to depend on whether
they're using a phone or computer software
| | 00:48 | that can understand that vCard format.
| | 00:50 | For this example, I'll tap MMS.
| | 00:52 | This allows you to send the
vCard attached to a text message.
| | 00:55 | I'll tap the plus button to find the
person I want to send this vCard to.
| | 00:59 | If I want to add an additional message, I can
type it below, but for now I just hit Send.
| | 01:04 | And that's all there is to it.
| | 01:05 | Now, let's see what this looks
like when you're on the receiving end.
| | 01:07 | Again, you don't have to have an iPhone
to receive contact info from an iPhone.
| | 01:11 | You just need a phone that understands vCards.
| | 01:12 | I'll go back to my Home
screen and open the Messages App.
| | 01:16 | Here I have a text I received a few
minutes ago, and it has a vCard attached.
| | 01:20 | All I have to do is tap it to view its contents.
| | 01:23 | And if I want to keep it I can either
create a new contact for this information,
| | 01:26 | or add it to an existing contact on my phone.
| | 01:29 | Now, this isn't exactly how it will
look on other phones, but that's the gist
| | 01:32 | of how it'll work, regardless of whether
you're sending the vCard by MMS or over e-mail.
| | 01:37 | Now, what if the friend you're
sending the info to doesn't have a phone
| | 01:39 | that understands vCards?
| | 01:41 | In that case, go back to the
Contact with the info you want to send.
| | 01:45 | Maybe in this case my friend just
wants the phone number from this contact.
| | 01:48 | I'm going to hold down on that number.
| | 01:50 | Be careful not to tap the
number, or else you'll call it.
| | 01:52 | But you can see after a second I
get the Copy button. I'll tap Copy.
| | 01:57 | And now I can create a new e-mail
message or create a new text message.
| | 02:00 | I'll create a new text message.
| | 02:04 | And then double-tap in the text
entry area to bring up the Paste button.
| | 02:07 | I tap Paste, and now I can just
send the phone number from my contact.
| | 02:10 | Of course, this doesn't give you a
friend the ability to instantly add this
| | 02:13 | contact to his or her address book,
but this does let you send a number or
| | 02:17 | e-mail address to someone without
having to manually type it yourself.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Assigning specific photos and ringtones to your contacts| 00:00 | Like many mobile phones these days, the
iPhone supports the ability to assign
| | 00:03 | specific ringtones to your contacts.
| | 00:06 | This offers you the advantage of letting
you know who is calling as soon as the
| | 00:08 | phone starts ringing without
even having to look at the phone.
| | 00:11 | Just select the contact you want to
customize the ringtone for, then tap the
| | 00:16 | ringtone field where
mine currently says default.
| | 00:20 | From here, you can select any of the
ringtones that come with the iPhone, as well
| | 00:23 | as any custom ringtones
you've created or purchased.
| | 00:25 | (Ringtone of dog barking.)
| | 00:28 | And that's all there is to it.
| | 00:29 | From this point on, whenever this
person calls me I'll know it's them by the
| | 00:32 | custom ringtone that plays.
| | 00:34 | Another way to customize your
contacts is by adding photos to them.
| | 00:37 | So, when someone in your contacts
calls you, not only will you hear a custom
| | 00:40 | ringtone, but you'll also see
their picture appear on your screen.
| | 00:43 | Now, there are two ways to
assign a photo to your contacts.
| | 00:46 | In both cases, you can either use an
existing photo of the person or shoot a new photo.
| | 00:50 | From here in Contacts, you can tap
the Edit button, then tap Add Photo.
| | 00:55 | This gives you the options of Take
Photo, which will turn on your camera, or
| | 01:00 | choose existing photo which, will bring
up your phone's Photo Library so you can
| | 01:03 | select a picture from there.
| | 01:04 | If you're going to use an existing
photo, just tap Choose Existing Photo, which
| | 01:08 | we'll see in action in the moment.
| | 01:10 | But if you're planning on taking a new
photo, I suggest not doing it from here
| | 01:13 | because the photo will then only exist
in this contact and will not be available
| | 01:17 | from your iPhone's Photo Library.
| | 01:18 | This isn't a huge deal, but if you
think you might want to use the photo you're
| | 01:21 | about to take for something else other
than just here on this contact, just hit
| | 01:24 | Cancel here, then close
Contacts and open your Camera app.
| | 01:32 | Then you can take your photo of your
contact with the Camera app, and that photo
| | 01:35 | will be stored in your Photo Library.
| | 01:36 | I'm not going to shoot a
photo now, but you get the idea.
| | 01:39 | Let's go to the Photo Library.
| | 01:42 | From here, I can select the photo I
want to use, and I can tap this button
| | 01:47 | in the lower left-hand corner, which
gives me several different things I can
| | 01:50 | do with this photo.
| | 01:51 | I'm going to choose Assign to Contact.
| | 01:57 | That brings up my contacts list, and
then I'll find and tap the contact I want
| | 02:01 | to assign this photo to.
| | 02:02 | Now before I tap Set Photo, notice it
says Move and Scale at the top of my
| | 02:07 | screen, which let's me know I can drag
the photo around and zoom in and zoom out
| | 02:11 | until I have the photo set the way I
want it to appear when Jacob calls me.
| | 02:15 | Now, what you're actually seeing here
is a template of the screen you'll see
| | 02:18 | when your iPhone rings.
| | 02:19 | This area here at the top is where the
caller ID appears, and the area at the
| | 02:23 | bottom is where the Decline or Answer
buttons or the Answer slider will appear.
| | 02:27 | So you want to make sure that the
part of the photo you want to see is not
| | 02:30 | obstructed by these elements.
| | 02:31 | Once you have it looking the way you
like, tap Set Photo, and that's it.
| | 02:38 | Now, when Jacob calls me, I hear his
custom ringtone and I see the photo
| | 02:41 | I assigned to him.
| | 02:42 | (Ringtone of dog barking.)
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using the speakerphone| 00:00 | In this movie, I want to quickly go
over a couple of tips for effectively using
| | 00:04 | the iPhone's speakerphone.
| | 00:05 | For the most part, the built-in
speaker sounds just fine for placing calls or
| | 00:08 | even for listening to the audio
portion of a video you're watching.
| | 00:11 | But you'll still get much better sound
quality on both ends of a phone call if
| | 00:15 | you hold the phone up to your ear, or use
the ea bud headset that came with your phone.
| | 00:18 | But when you do have to use a
speakerphone, it does a pretty decent job.
| | 00:22 | As we have previously discussed, the
speaker of the iPhone 4 is to the right of
| | 00:25 | the dock port when the screen is facing
up, and the microphone is to the left.
| | 00:29 | On earlier iPhones, the speaker and
microphone positions are switched.
| | 00:32 | So if you're using the speakerphone
while your iPhone is sitting on your
| | 00:35 | desktop, just make sure the bottom
of the phone is facing towards you.
| | 00:38 | There is really no need to
hold the phone up to your face.
| | 00:40 | In fact, that may end up making things
sound really distorted and bad for the
| | 00:43 | person you're talking to.
| | 00:45 | The iPhone's speaker is pretty loud too.
| | 00:47 | You're not going to get stereo
quality sound out of it, but you should have
| | 00:50 | no problem hearing the person
you're talking to, even if you're not in a
| | 00:53 | perfectly quiet room.
| | 00:55 | If you're having trouble hearing the
sounds coming out of the speaker, try
| | 00:57 | holding the phone with your
palm facing out towards you.
| | 01:00 | In this position, your hand is a
surface for the sound to reflect and bounce
| | 01:03 | off towards your ears.
| | 01:04 | You might be surprised at how much
simply holding the hand by the speakerphone
| | 01:08 | can improve what you're hearing.
| | 01:09 | That said, you'll still get much
better sound quality using the included
| | 01:12 | earbuds or even a Bluetooth headset, which
we'll take a look at in an upcoming movie.
| | 01:17 | But these tips should help you get a
better overall experience when you do have
| | 01:19 | to use the speakerphone function of your iPhone.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using the included headset | 00:00 | In addition to using the iPhone's built-
in earpiece, or its speakerphone to hold
| | 00:03 | your phone conversations,
| | 00:05 | you can also use the earbud headset that
was packed in the box along with your phone.
| | 00:09 | The current earbuds feature a small remote
unit attached to the right earbud's cable.
| | 00:13 | On one side there is a tiny microphone and on
the other side you see plus and minus buttons.
| | 00:18 | The center portion is a button, too,
making this a three-button device.
| | 00:21 | The earbuds that came with the
earlier iPhone models only had a one-button
| | 00:24 | remote, but you can purchase
the newest earbud set separately.
| | 00:27 | This headset lets you control
functions related to phone calls, as well as
| | 00:30 | video and audio playback.
| | 00:32 | In this movie, we're going to focus on
using the headset during phone calls.
| | 00:35 | Obviously, the headset has
to be plugged into your phone.
| | 00:37 | Now you can place calls with the
headset using voice commands, but we'll cover
| | 00:42 | Voice Control a little later in this chapter.
| | 00:44 | Let's say I get an incoming call while
my headset is plugged into my iPhone.
| | 00:48 | To answer an incoming call,
simply press the center button once,
| | 00:52 | and when you're finished and want to hang
up the call press the center button again.
| | 00:57 | If you want to silence the phone but
continue to let it ring, press either the
| | 01:00 | plus or minus button.
| | 01:01 | This is equivalent of pressing the
volume controls on the side of the phone
| | 01:04 | when a call comes in.
| | 01:05 | The phone will continue to ring, in
the sense that your caller will hear
| | 01:08 | ringtones for the full 20 seconds
that takes for your voicemail service to
| | 01:10 | answer the call, and you stop the
option of answering the call at anytime
| | 01:14 | during that 20 seconds.
| | 01:16 | If you want to send an incoming call
immediately to voicemail, press and hold
| | 01:19 | the center button for
about two seconds and release.
| | 01:25 | The release part is important.
| | 01:26 | If you just continue to hold down the
button, the phone will continue to ring.
| | 01:29 | When you release, you'll hear two low beats
to confirm that you have declined the call.
| | 01:33 | You can also use the earbud remote
to toggle between two calls if you get
| | 01:36 | another call while you're talking to someone.
| | 01:39 | When a second call comes in,
press and release the center button.
| | 01:41 | That will put your current call on
hold and answer the incoming call.
| | 01:46 | At that point, you can switch back and
forth between callers by pressing the
| | 01:48 | center button on your remote.
| | 01:54 | If you want to initiate a conference
call, you'll have to use the Merge Calls button
| | 01:57 | on the phone screen.
| | 02:06 | If you're on a call and a second call
comes in and you want to end your current
| | 02:09 | call before answering the new one,
press and hold the center button for about
| | 02:12 | two seconds and release.
| | 02:13 | You will again hear two low beeps, this time
letting you know you ended the first call.
| | 02:20 | And you can always glance at your
iPhone screen to make sure you hung up
| | 02:23 | on the first caller.
| | 02:24 | And finally, if you're using an iPhone
3GS, you can use the plus and minus keys
| | 02:28 | to increase or lower the
volume of the call in the headset.
| | 02:32 | Unfortunately, the volume buttons won't
work for calls on the iPhone 3G or the
| | 02:35 | first generation iPhone.
| | 02:36 | It's important to note that you don't have to
use the earbuds to control your phone at all.
| | 02:41 | Even with the earbuds plugged in, you
can still control your iPhone from its
| | 02:44 | screen, just like you do when
you're not using the earbuds.
| | 02:46 | So, if you're not inclined to memorize
all the functions of the remote on the
| | 02:49 | headset, you don't have to.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Connecting a Bluetooth headset| 00:00 | In addition to using the iPhone's built
-in earpiece, its speakerphone or the
| | 00:04 | included earbud headset to make your
phone calls, you can also pair the iPhone
| | 00:07 | with any Bluetooth headset.
| | 00:09 | A Bluetooth headset gives you the
advantage of having no wires between your
| | 00:12 | headset and your phone, allowing you
to keep your phone in your pocket or
| | 00:15 | somewhere else nearby.
| | 00:17 | Now, in order to use a Bluetooth
Headset with your iPhone, you have to do what's
| | 00:20 | called pairing them together.
| | 00:21 | Essentially, the sets of two devices
recognize each other so you don't have to
| | 00:25 | go through any kind of lengthy
setup process after the initial pairing.
| | 00:28 | This is also how your iPhone will
distinguish your Bluetooth device from any
| | 00:32 | other Bluetooth device that might be nearby.
| | 00:35 | To pair a device together, first take a look
at the instructions that came with the headset.
| | 00:39 | Specifically, you're looking for the
instructions for making your headset
| | 00:41 | discoverable, which is a special mode
that basically sends out "I am here and
| | 00:45 | ready to be paired signal" to any nearby phones.
| | 00:47 | For this particular headset, I put it
into Discoverable mode by holding down the
| | 00:51 | main button for about four seconds.
| | 00:54 | And once the headset is discoverable, I
have to then tell my iPhone to pair with it.
| | 00:58 | So, let's take a look at how to do that.
| | 01:02 | On the iPhone, you'll want to go
into Settings > General > Bluetooth.
| | 01:09 | And if Bluetooth isn't already on,
tap the switch to turn it on.
| | 01:15 | At this point, I see the
headset that I've set to Discoverable.
| | 01:18 | This is also where you'll find a list
of any other Bluetooth devices you've
| | 01:20 | paired with your phone.
| | 01:21 | You can pair a multiple devices with
your iPhone, so if you wanted to keep
| | 01:25 | one Bluetooth set in your car, one in
your home, one at work and so on, you
| | 01:28 | could easily do so.
| | 01:29 | So, now I just tap the
headset I want to pair with.
| | 01:32 | Then I'm asked for a PIN or Passkey.
| | 01:36 | The passkey will be in your
headset's instruction manual.
| | 01:38 | Commonly, it's something easy, like 0000 or 1234.
| | 01:43 | The point isn't to make it a secure passkey,
but to make sure that you manually enter it into your
| | 01:46 | phone to confirm that you
want to pair with this headset.
| | 01:49 | So, I'll tap Connect, and just like
that I'm now paired with my headset.
| | 01:56 | Now, let's talk about how
to use the Bluetooth Headset.
| | 01:59 | I'll press the Home button.
| | 02:01 | When you're connected to your
Bluetooth device, you'll see a white or blue
| | 02:04 | Bluetooth icon at the top of the iPhone screen.
| | 02:07 | This tells you that your
phone and device are connected.
| | 02:09 | So, this active connection icon may be
white or may be blue, depending on the
| | 02:12 | background color of the
screen you're currently on.
| | 02:15 | But if the Bluetooth icon is gray, it
means that Bluetooth is turned on your
| | 02:18 | phone, but no device is currently connected.
| | 02:20 | So let's say a call comes in while
your Bluetooth Headset is connected.
| | 02:23 | To answer the call and to have the
call routed to your headset, just press the
| | 02:27 | Answer button on your headset.
| | 02:28 | You'll have to check your headset's
manual to see which button that is.
| | 02:31 | Even when your headset is connected to
your phone, you can still use the iPhone's
| | 02:34 | built-in earpiece to answer the call.
Just don't answer with your headset's
| | 02:38 | button and instead answer
using the iPhone's controls.
| | 02:41 | Notice that the button that's normally
labeled speaker now says Audio Source.
| | 02:45 | This button allows you to switch your call
between your phone and your Bluetooth Headset.
| | 02:48 | So, if you initially answer with your
phone, tap audio source and then select
| | 02:52 | your headset to switch
the call over to Bluetooth.
| | 02:54 | Or, if you find that your headset and
its battery are dying, you can then tap
| | 02:57 | Audio Source again and switch back to
the iPhone, take off your headset and
| | 03:01 | charge it, all while remaining on your call.
| | 03:03 | I'll go ahead and hang up on this call now.
| | 03:07 | Now as I mentioned, you can pair your
iPhone with multiple Bluetooth headsets;
| | 03:11 | just set your device to be
Discoverable and then return to the Bluetooth
| | 03:16 | settings on your iPhone.
| | 03:18 | This is also where you can
delete any devices you no longer use.
| | 03:21 | Just tap the blue arrow next to the
device and tap Forget this Device.
| | 03:26 | Confirm you want to do this by
tapping the red Forget your Device button.
| | 03:29 | Also note that you're not limited
to pairing your iPhone with just
| | 03:32 | Bluetooth Headsets.
| | 03:33 | You can find Bluetooth Car
Speakerphone kits, Bluetooth GPS devices, Stereo
| | 03:38 | Bluetooth Headsets for listening
to your music, and even Bluetooth
| | 03:40 | Motorcycle Helmets.
| | 03:42 | Just about any Bluetooth device made
to communicate with mobile phones will
| | 03:45 | work with your iPhone.
| | 03:46 | You will just have to hunt around
and do some research to find the right
| | 03:49 | devices for yourself.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Forwarding your calls| 00:00 | Built into your iPhone's
calling plan is Call Forwarding.
| | 00:03 | Turning on this feature lets you route
all of your iPhone's incoming calls to
| | 00:06 | another number of your choice.
| | 00:08 | This can be useful in
several different scenarios;
| | 00:09 | for example, if your iPhone's battery
is about to die, and you're expecting an
| | 00:13 | important call, you can forward your
calls to your home or office phone,
| | 00:16 | so you don't have to worry about
providing an alternate number to your callers.
| | 00:20 | To turn on Call Forwarding go to
Settings > Phone > Call Forwarding.
| | 00:26 | And all you do here is just tap
the switch to the ON position.
| | 00:29 | Next, enter the number you
want to forward your calls to.
| | 00:32 | Then tap the Back button to go back.
| | 00:35 | That's all you need to do.
| | 00:36 | Now any calls to my iPhone will be
forwarded to the number I entered.
| | 00:39 | If you have caller ID at the forwarded
number, you'll still see the ID of the
| | 00:43 | person calling you, not your iPhone number.
| | 00:45 | Now couple of things you have
to know about Call Forwarding.
| | 00:47 | You have to be in an area where you're
connected to the AT&T network in order
| | 00:51 | to turn on Call Forwarding, because the
Call Forwarding settings are not stored
| | 00:54 | on the phone itself.
| | 00:56 | What you're doing is sending a message
to AT&T, letting their system to know
| | 00:59 | that you would like all calls to be
forwarded to the number you provided.
| | 01:02 | Similarly, you won't be able to turn
off Call Forwarding unless your phone is
| | 01:05 | in an AT&T network area either.
| | 01:07 | But this also means that your
phone doesn't have to be turned on for
| | 01:09 | Call Forwarding to work.
| | 01:11 | So as long as you're on your AT&T
network when you turn on Call Forwarding, you
| | 01:15 | can turn off your phone, leave it at
home, and know that your calls will still
| | 01:18 | be forwarded to whatever number you provided.
| | 01:20 | But also note the calls forwarded
from your account still count against the
| | 01:23 | minutes in your calling plan.
| | 01:24 | So a ten-minute call forwarded to
your office, still counts as ten minutes
| | 01:27 | used on your iPhone.
| | 01:29 | When you have Call Forwarding
turned on, you'll see this phone with the
| | 01:31 | arrow icon at the top of the screen,
reminding you that your calls are being forwarded.
| | 01:35 | So remember to go back to Settings,
and turn off Call Forwarding when
| | 01:39 | you're done using it.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Turning call waiting on and off| 00:00 | Included in your iPhone's calling
plan, and turned on by default, is the
| | 00:04 | Call Waiting feature.
| | 00:05 | In case you've never used the
telephone before, Call Waiting is the feature
| | 00:08 | that lets you know a second person is calling
you while you're on the phone with someone else.
| | 00:11 | In an earlier movie, we saw how you
can switch back and forth between your
| | 00:14 | callers, and even merge to the
two calls into a conference call,
| | 00:17 | but there may be times when you
want to turn Call Forwarding off;
| | 00:19 | for example, you might be about to start
an important work related call, and you
| | 00:23 | want to make sure you're not
distracted by other callers.
| | 00:25 | By turning Call Waiting off, all callers
will be sent directly to your voicemail.
| | 00:29 | To do so, go to Settings > Phone >
Call Waiting, and here you just tap the
| | 00:35 | ON/OFF switch to turn Call Waiting on or off.
| | 00:39 | Similar to Call Forwarding, your Call
Waiting settings are not stored on your iPhone.
| | 00:42 | What you're doing here is sending a
message to AT&T, letting their system know
| | 00:46 | that you would like Call Waiting turned off.
| | 00:48 | So you have to be on in AT&T
network to use this ON/OFF switch.
| | 00:52 | Most of the time though, you'll probably
want to keep Call Waiting on, since the
| | 00:55 | iPhone is so good at managing multiple
calls by letting you easily ignore second
| | 00:58 | calls, or switch back and forth between callers.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Turning caller ID on and off| 00:00 | Caller ID is another feature
that's on by default on your iPhone.
| | 00:03 | When people call your phone, you'll see
their number appear on the screen while
| | 00:06 | the phone is ringing.
| | 00:08 | This lets you see if you recognize the number,
and decide whether to answer the call or not.
| | 00:11 | When people whose phone numbers
you've listed in your Contacts call your
| | 00:14 | phone, you'll see their names appear
in the same way you've entered them
| | 00:17 | into your Contacts.
| | 00:18 | You can't turn off the ability to see the
numbers or names of the people calling you.
| | 00:22 | Frankly, I can't think
of a good reason to do so.
| | 00:24 | But you can turn off the ability of
others to see your Caller ID information
| | 00:28 | whenever you call them.
| | 00:29 | Now whatever reason you have the hide
your entity from your callers until they
| | 00:32 | pick up is your own business.
| | 00:33 | I'm just here to show you how to do it.
| | 00:35 | Go to Settings > Phone > Show My Caller ID.
| | 00:40 | Here you can tap the switch to turn it off.
| | 00:43 | When you have Show My Caller ID off,
and you place a call, the person receiving
| | 00:47 | your call will see a variety of
messages depending on the phone you're calling.
| | 00:50 | They might see private call, or
blocked number, or caller ID unavailable.
| | 00:55 | But these days, a lot of people won't
even pick up if they don't know who is
| | 00:57 | calling, and some businesses
won't except blocked calls.
| | 01:00 | But if you ever need a turn off
Caller ID, now you know where to do it.
| | 01:03 | Just remember to turn it back on when
you're done concealing your identity.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating custom ringtones with iTunes| 00:00 | We saw, earlier, that you can select
from over two dozen ringtones built into
| | 00:03 | the iPhone, but for some people none of
these ringtones quite fully express the
| | 00:07 | personality and force of character
that all ringtones are apparently supposed
| | 00:10 | to express these days.
| | 00:11 | It seems like you can't find a cell phone that
has a ringtone that sounds like a phone anymore.
| | 00:16 | Ringtones these days seem to be all
about playing clips of your favorite song.
| | 00:19 | If you're one of these people who like
to have music play as the ringtone on
| | 00:21 | your iPhone, you'll be happy to know
that you can generate a ringtone from just
| | 00:24 | about any song in your iTunes library.
| | 00:27 | Now there are ways to create
ringtones with audio editing applications like
| | 00:30 | GarageBand on the Mac and
maybe Soundbooth on Windows.
| | 00:33 | And while those applications give you
a lot more control over the length of
| | 00:35 | the ringtone and the ability to do
things like fade in and fade out the
| | 00:38 | ringtone, teaching how to use those
applications would require a different
| | 00:42 | tutorial altogether.
| | 00:43 | And what I want to show you here is a quick
way to use iTunes to create ringtones.
| | 00:47 | So here in iTunes, you want to first
locate the song that you want to turn into
| | 00:50 | your ringtone here in your music library.
| | 00:52 | Now if you're using a song you
purchased off the iTunes Store, see the end of
| | 00:55 | this movie for important information on that.
| | 00:57 | For now, I'm going to use a song I
imported off a CD, in this case Goodnight to
| | 01:01 | Everyone, and next, you want to play
the song and note the timecode for the
| | 01:04 | section that you want to use as your ringtone.
| | 01:06 | (Music playing.)
| | 01:24 | So in this case, I'll take it to maybe
about 15 seconds, right before the vocal
| | 01:27 | comes, and I want to use the
beginning of the song as my ringtone.
| | 01:30 | So next, I'm going to right-click or
Ctrl+click on the song and choose Get Info.
| | 01:35 | Then I'm going to go to the Options
tab, and here under options, we have the
| | 01:39 | options of Start Time and Stop Time.
| | 01:41 | This is a way we can tell iTunes
which portion of the song we want to hear
| | 01:44 | anytime this track plays.
| | 01:45 | So in this case, I want the Stop
Time to be 0:15 for 15 seconds in.
| | 01:51 | I'm going to leave the Start Time as
is, since I want it to start at the
| | 01:54 | beginning of the song.
| | 01:55 | Now, this doesn't alter the song in any way.
| | 01:57 | I'm not damaging it, or anything like that.
| | 01:59 | All I'm doing is telling iTunes that I only
want to hear the first 15 seconds of the song.
| | 02:03 | So I'll click OK.
| | 02:05 | Notice the song is still
three minutes and 44 seconds long.
| | 02:08 | Next, I'm going to save a copy of this
clipped version of the song as an AAC file.
| | 02:12 | So I'm going to right-click on the
track again, and I'm going to choose
| | 02:15 | Create AAC Version.
| | 02:16 | Now if you don't see Create AAC Version,
and you see something like Create mp3
| | 02:20 | Version, or something like that,
go into your iTunes Preferences.
| | 02:23 | Here on the Mac, it's iTunes > Preferences.
| | 02:25 | On Window's, if will be Edit > Preferences.
| | 02:27 | And under the General sections, click
Import Settings and make sure you have
| | 02:31 | Import Using set to AAC Encoder
and not any of these other encoders.
| | 02:34 | I'm just going to cancel out of that.
| | 02:37 | So again, I'm going to right-click my
track and choose Create AAC Version.
| | 02:41 | That basically creates a copy of the
song, and notice this copy of the song is
| | 02:45 | only 15 seconds long.
| | 02:46 | Now at this point it's a good idea to go
back to the original track, opening Get
| | 02:50 | Info again, and turning off that Stop
Time or Start Time that you might've set,
| | 02:54 | because in the future, I'll probably want to
listen to the song in its entirety. So I'll click OK.
| | 02:57 | Now I'm going to work primarily with this
15-second version of the track I just created.
| | 03:03 | Again, I'm going to right-click on this.
| | 03:05 | and now I'm going to choose
Show in Finder here on the Mac.
| | 03:08 | On Windows, you'll choose
Open in Windows Explorer.
| | 03:11 | That reveals the file itself on my computer.
| | 03:14 | And notice in this case it's a
file named Goodnight to Everyone.m4a.
| | 03:18 | Now let me just move the iTunes window to
the side a little bit so I can see my desktop.
| | 03:22 | I'm going to bring my Finder back.
| | 03:24 | And I'm going to drag this m4a file
that I just created to my desktop.
| | 03:27 | So we're moving it from that folder.
| | 03:30 | And the trick to creating a ringtone now
is to change this extension from m4a to m4r.
| | 03:35 | R standing for ringtone.
| | 03:38 | I'm asked if I'm sure I
want to change that extension.
| | 03:40 | I'll say use m4r, and there it is.
| | 03:44 | Now all I have to do is
import this back into iTunes.
| | 03:46 | Now before I do so, the 15-second
version I created is still in here.
| | 03:50 | I'm going to right-click on that one
more time and choose Delete, because
| | 03:53 | sometimes when you try to drag in songs
that identically named to other files in
| | 03:56 | iTunes, it won't actually do it because
it thinks the file is already in there.
| | 03:59 | So I'm going to say remove, and now I'm
going to drag my m4r file back into iTunes.
| | 04:09 | And now, here in iTunes, if I go to the
Ringtones section in my library, you can
| | 04:12 | see, there it is, my 15-second ringtone.
| | 04:14 | (Music playing.)
| | 04:30 | And now I have this brand-new ringtone.
| | 04:31 | Now of course, as you saw, I couldn't
do anything fancy like fade in and fade
| | 04:34 | out the ringtone, but the
price is right for this ringtone.
| | 04:37 | And the next time I have my iPhone
connected to my computer, I can then sync my
| | 04:40 | ringtone to my phone.
| | 04:42 | Now if you're a Mac user and you
have GarageBand, you can create your own
| | 04:45 | ringtones and export them directly
into iTunes from GarageBand, so you don't
| | 04:48 | have to bother with this
file extension renaming thing.
| | 04:51 | If you're on Windows and using another
sound editing program, just be sure to
| | 04:54 | export your clip in an iTunes-
compatible format, maybe a WAV or AIF file, and
| | 04:58 | then convert it into an AAC in iTunes.
| | 05:01 | Then find the AAC file and give it
that m4r extension and reimport it into
| | 05:05 | iTunes, just like we did.
| | 05:06 | It takes more steps, but
again, it's free, and it'll work.
| | 05:09 | Now I mentioned earlier that if you
want to turn music you purchased from the
| | 05:12 | iTunes Store into a ringtone, you can
do this as long as it's music purchased
| | 05:16 | from about mid-2009 and later.
| | 05:18 | Music purchased prior to that is
protected by DRM ,or Digital Rights
| | 05:22 | Management technology, that prevented
music from being copied or played on
| | 05:25 | unauthorized computers.
| | 05:27 | Apple has since removed DRM, but if
you still have older songs you purchased
| | 05:30 | before DRM was removed, you won't be
able to use the technique I showed you in
| | 05:33 | this movie, because iTunes won't let you
create a copy of your protected music.
| | 05:37 | Now the way you can tell if you have DRM
-protected music is to select the track
| | 05:43 | and then choose Get Info by
right-clicking on it again.
| | 05:46 | And under the Summary tab,
it'll say Protected AAC file.
| | 05:50 | If it says that, it's DRM-protected and
you won't be able to convert it into a
| | 05:54 | ringtone using this technique I showed you.
| | 05:56 | Now more recently purchased music,
like this song here, says
| | 06:02 | Purchased AAC audio file.
| | 06:05 | If your song says that, you're free to
copy it as much as you'd like, and you
| | 06:08 | can make it into a ringtone, following
the steps I showed you in this movie.
| | 06:11 | So that's a quick and easy method
for creating ringtones for your iPhone
| | 06:14 | using only iTunes.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating a vibrate-then-ring ringtone| 00:00 | We saw in earlier movies that you can
use the Silent switch on your iPhone to
| | 00:03 | toggle the phone between ringing and
Silent mode, and that you can go into your
| | 00:06 | Sound preferences to determine whether
or not you want the phone to vibrate in
| | 00:09 | either of those modes.
| | 00:10 | Having the phone vibrate in Silent mode
is nice because you can still tell when
| | 00:14 | you receive a call if you have your
phone in your pocket or the phone is sitting
| | 00:16 | on a desk or other solid surface nearby.
| | 00:19 | And having Vibrate on when you are not
in Silent mode is a good way to know your
| | 00:21 | phone is ringing, in case you're in a
loud environment and might not hear your
| | 00:24 | phone ringing in your pocket.
| | 00:26 | But one ringing mode I use to find
quite useful on other phones I owned before
| | 00:29 | the iPhone was called Vibrate then Ring.
| | 00:32 | In that mode, the phone would first
vibrate for a few seconds before my selected
| | 00:35 | ringtone would start playing.
| | 00:36 | That way, if I had the phone with me,
or it was nearby, I would notice the call
| | 00:39 | coming in and be able to answer it or
send the caller a voicemail before the
| | 00:42 | ringtone actually kicked in, which
could prevent me from bothering people or
| | 00:45 | revealing I had just received a call.
| | 00:47 | But with the iPhone, the ring starts
playing immediately when you receive a call.
| | 00:51 | So in this movie, I'm going to show
you how I created my own custom Vibrate
| | 00:54 | then Ring ringtone.
| | 00:56 | I'm going to be using Apple
GarageBand, but this will work in any audio
| | 00:58 | editing application.
| | 00:59 | You want to start by importing the song or
sound effect you want to use for your ringtone.
| | 01:03 | For this example, I'm going to search
for phone in GarageBand Loops, and I'll
| | 01:08 | choose the Old Telephone Ring,
| | 01:09 | (Phone ringing.)
| | 01:13 | which sounds like that.
| | 01:14 | (Phone ringing.)
| | 01:18 | You might want to choose your
favorite song, or some other sound effect.
| | 01:21 | So I'm going to drag that into my project.
| | 01:25 | You can tell by the waveform that two
rings occurred during the sound effect.
| | 01:28 | Now the key to making a Vibrate before
Ring ringtone is simply to insert a few
| | 01:32 | seconds of silence before the ringtone begins.
| | 01:34 | From my own experimentation, I found that 4
seconds is about the right length of time.
| | 01:38 | If you're near your phone, you'll hear
it or feel it vibrating and 4 seconds is
| | 01:42 | plenty of time to pick up
or ignore an incoming call.
| | 01:44 | But if your phone is in another room,
you'll only be unable to hear it vibrating
| | 01:47 | for those first 4 seconds before the
ringtone starts playing, so you should
| | 01:50 | still have plenty of time to get to
the phone before voicemail picks up.
| | 01:53 | So in GarageBand, I'm going to switch my
measurements to Time, and all I'm going
| | 01:58 | to do is drag this clip, so that
it begins at about 4 seconds in.
| | 02:01 | I can see the 5 second mark
goes right there, so 1, 2, 3, 4.
| | 02:06 | So it's right about there.
| | 02:08 | Now the length of the ringtone goes up
to 30 seconds, even though your voicemail
| | 02:12 | will probably pick up the call
after about 20 seconds of ringing.
| | 02:15 | Still, you'll want to extend your
ringtone out to 30 seconds because shorter
| | 02:18 | ringtones will loop back and start
playing again from the beginning.
| | 02:21 | But the beginning of this ringtone is 4
seconds of silence, and I want the phone
| | 02:24 | to keep audibly ringing if I haven't
picked it up in the first 4 seconds, because
| | 02:27 | I'm probably out of range
where I can hear the vibration.
| | 02:29 | So here in GarageBand, I'm going to
loop the sound effect out to 30 seconds.
| | 02:33 | I do this by putting my cursor in the
upper right-hand corner of the Loop region
| | 02:36 | and just dragging to the right to
create another portion of looping.
| | 02:40 | I'll drag that to right about 30 seconds.
| | 02:42 | If you're using another audio program,
you can probably copy and paste the sound
| | 02:46 | effect a few times to achieve the same effect.
| | 02:48 | If you're using a song as your
ringtone that's longer than 30 seconds, you
| | 02:51 | should trim it to cut it
off at the 30-second point.
| | 02:55 | So now I have a ringtone that will
first be silent, and then start making noise
| | 02:59 | for over 20 more seconds.
| | 03:00 | Now watch what happens when I
choose Share > Send Ringtone to iTunes.
| | 03:04 | I get this message telling
me my ringtone is too long.
| | 03:08 | Just because the loop ends around 30 sounds,
doesn't mean that's the length of this project.
| | 03:12 | In GarageBand, I have to turn on
what's called the Cycle Region.
| | 03:14 | So let me click Adjust.
| | 03:16 | That automatically opens this yellow
bar area at the top of the play area.
| | 03:19 | I can also toggle it on and off with
the Cycle Region button right here.
| | 03:23 | So I'm going to highlight the area of
the project that the ringtone takes up by
| | 03:26 | dragging the end of this yellow
bar to the 30 second mark as well.
| | 03:31 | If you're using a different audio
editing application, just make sure the
| | 03:34 | audio file you're exporting is less than 40
seconds, although 30 seconds is more than enough.
| | 03:37 | So now that I have the Cycle
Region on, I can now choose Share > Send
| | 03:42 | Ringtone to iTunes.
| | 03:43 | So here it is, sitting in iTunes.
| | 03:48 | It's playing and after about 4
seconds, we start hearing the ringtone.
| | 03:52 | At this point, it's ready to be
synced or dragged onto my iPhone.
| | 03:58 | All I need to do is select my iPhone,
go to Ringtones, choose Sync Ringtones.
| | 04:03 | I can either sync all of my ringtones, or
just select ringtones, and check that one.
| | 04:08 | Now if you're using a different
audio editing application, you'll have to
| | 04:10 | export your audio file in a format that
iTunes recognizes, like an MP3 or AAC or AIF file.
| | 04:16 | Then you'll need to use iTunes to
convert the file into a ringtone format.
| | 04:19 | See the earlier movie on creating
custom ringtones to learn how to convert any
| | 04:22 | audio file in iTunes into an iPhone ringtone.
| | 04:25 | Now I can select this custom Vibrate
then Ring ringtone on my iPhone by going to
| | 04:29 | Settings > Sounds > Ringtone, and then
here under Custom, I can choose Vibe then
| | 04:37 | Ring, which is what I named my ringtone.
| | 04:38 | (Phone ringing.)
| | 04:41 | Now you just have to make sure that
here in the Sound Settings you confirm that
| | 04:45 | Vibrate is on under Ring;
| | 04:47 | otherwise, you really just get 4
seconds of silent ringing before your
| | 04:50 | ringtone starts playing, and you
won't have the vibration to alert you that
| | 04:53 | somebody is making a call.
| | 04:54 | So make sure that Vibrate is on.
| | 04:56 | So now when I get a call, the
phone first vibrates before it rings.
| | 04:59 | (Phone vibrating.)
| | 05:02 | (Phone vibrating and ringing.)
| | 05:08 | But there you have a quick way to
create a Vibrate then Ring ringtone for
| | 05:11 | your iPhone.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Voice dialing| 00:00 | With the iPhone 3GS, Apple introduced
Voice Control, which lets you control your
| | 00:04 | iPhone using spoken words instead
of tapping buttons on your screen.
| | 00:08 | This feature is not available on
the original iPhone or the iPhone 3G.
| | 00:12 | When Voice Control was first
introduced, you could only use it by speaking
| | 00:15 | within range of your
iPhone's built-in microphone,
| | 00:17 | but in an update released later,
Apple enabled Voice Control with
| | 00:20 | Bluetooth headsets,
| | 00:21 | although you will most likely have to
check with your headset manufacturer for
| | 00:24 | compatibility information. But let's
take a look at how voice dialing works
| | 00:28 | without using a Bluetooth headset.
| | 00:30 | Voice Control is divided into two categories:
| | 00:32 | controls for the phone part of the iPhone
and controls for the iPod part of the iPhone.
| | 00:36 | We'll talk more about voice
controlling your iPod in a later chapter.
| | 00:40 | But just know that you start Voice
Control the same way for both categories.
| | 00:43 | Whether your iPhone is awake or asleep,
just as long as it is not turned off,
| | 00:47 | you press and hold the Home
button for about three seconds.
| | 00:49 | You can also press and hold the Center
button of the earbud headset, or the Call
| | 00:53 | button of your Bluetooth
headset to invoke Voice Control.
| | 00:55 | So I'll hold down the
Home button on my iPhone 3GS.
| | 00:58 | The Voice Control screen appears.
| | 01:06 | When you speak, the wavy lines in the
center of the screen will react to your
| | 01:09 | voice, so you know the phone is hearing you.
| | 01:11 | Notice the words going across the background.
| | 01:14 | These are all words you can
say to control your phone.
| | 01:16 | When it comes to placing calls, you can
either say "call" or "dial," followed by the
| | 01:20 | name of the person you want to call.
| | 01:22 | The person you're naming has to exist
in your Contacts list; otherwise your
| | 01:25 | iPhone will give you a no match found message.
| | 01:28 | Also, it's best to say the full name
of the person you're calling, unless
| | 01:31 | the person's first name is the only
instance of that name appearing in your Contacts.
| | 01:35 | After you say the call or dial,
and the person's name, specify which
| | 01:39 | phone number to call.
| | 01:40 | So can say things like home, or work, or mobile.
| | 01:44 | It's important to remember to say mobile
and not cell or cell phone, because the
| | 01:48 | iPhone doesn't recognize those words.
| | 01:50 | If you just say the person's name
without specifying which number to call,
| | 01:53 | you'll hear a message telling you
that that person has multiple numbers.
| | 01:56 | You'll be asked to name
the one you want to dial.
| | 01:58 | So let's try placing a call with voice dialing.
| | 02:01 | Call Jacob Cunningham.
| | 02:03 | (Female Speaker: Jacob Cunningham: home or work?)
| | 02:07 | Now it turns out, I have multiple numbers
for Jacob. So I'll say "work."
| | 02:12 | (Dinging sound)
(Female Speaker: Calling Jacob Cunningham: work.)
| | 02:15 | I hear a tone telling me
that my iPhone heard me, and
| | 02:18 | I get spoken and visual confirmation of
the number the iPhone is going to dial.
| | 02:22 | Then I will just tap End
Call to cancel that call.
| | 02:25 | Now at the moment after the iPhone
repeats your command before it dials,
| | 02:28 | if you see the iPhone is dialing a
number different than the one you wanted, you
| | 02:32 | can say "No," "Wrong," "Nope," "Not That," or
"Not That One" to cancel the call, or just
| | 02:38 | press End Call, if it's too late.
| | 02:40 | You can also speak entire phone numbers
if the person is not in your Contacts list.
| | 02:44 | Each number must be spoken individually.
| | 02:46 | So don't say something like
five, five, five, twenty-three hundred.
| | 02:49 | Say five, five, five, two, three, zero, zero.
| | 02:52 | The only exception is you
can say eight hundred instead of eight, zero, zero.
| | 02:56 | Now voice dialing is far from perfect.
| | 02:58 | Its success does depend on how
quiet an environment you're in.
| | 03:01 | But if you're in a quiet room or in
your car, voice control should work just
| | 03:04 | fine once you get the hang of it.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Sending, receiving, and managing text and MMS messages| 00:00 | Unless you've been living in a cave or
remote island for the past several years,
| | 00:03 | you would probably know what texting is.
| | 00:05 | But briefly, texting or as it's official
known, short messaging service or SMS, is
| | 00:10 | a service for sending short messages,
usually under 200 characters or a few
| | 00:13 | sentences, from one phone to another.
| | 00:15 | The idea behind texting is that it's
an immediate communication in same sense
| | 00:20 | that a phone call is immediate, but it's also
less formal than sending an e-mail to someone.
| | 00:24 | Texting is for those times when you
want to ask a question or say something to
| | 00:27 | your friend or coworker, but don't want
to speak on the phone either because it
| | 00:30 | would be unnecessary or because you,
or your recipient are in an environment
| | 00:34 | where talking on the phone is
just not possible, or inconsiderate.
| | 00:38 | When the iPhone and iPhone 3G first
appeared on the scene, text messages were
| | 00:41 | all that was available.
| | 00:43 | You couldn't send or receive MMS, or a
multimedia messaging service messages, to
| | 00:47 | or from your friends
with other brands of phones.
| | 00:50 | It was really annoying.
| | 00:51 | Thankfully, Apple and AT&T finally
opened the MMS doors in 2009, and now you can
| | 00:56 | send and receive photos via text
messaging, and on the iPhone 3GS, you can even
| | 01:00 | send and receive short video clips.
| | 01:02 | So let's take a walk
through the texting on the iPhone.
| | 01:05 | To send a text message from
your iPhone, tap the Messages icon.
| | 01:08 | If you've never sent a text message
before ,the first thing you'll see will be a
| | 01:11 | New Message screen asking you to enter the
name or number of the person you want to text.
| | 01:15 | If you have received text before, you'll
see a list of all your past and current
| | 01:19 | conversations, in which case tap the New
Message button to create a new message.
| | 01:22 | Again, this is the same screen you'll see
if you've never sent a text message before.
| | 01:27 | Start typing a name or a number.
| | 01:29 | If the person's name appears in your
Contacts, the iPhone will suggest it.
| | 01:32 | If the suggestion is correct, tap the name,
| | 01:34 | so you don't have to type the entire thing out.
| | 01:36 | Additionally, you can tap the plus
symbol to go right to your Contact's list and
| | 01:39 | browse the person you want to send the text to.
| | 01:42 | You can even send the text
message to multiple recipients;
| | 01:45 | for instance, maybe you're on a
vacation and you want to text to three other
| | 01:47 | people you're traveling with to
let them know you're in hotel hobby.
| | 01:51 | Just enter another number or browse
through your Contacts list, but be aware
| | 01:55 | though that if you text multiple
recipients, their replies will only come to
| | 01:58 | you and not to the other people
you've texted, unless you tell them that
| | 02:01 | you've texted multiple people and they in turn
create a message to each person, as well.
| | 02:05 | So it's not as easy as hitting
Reply All in an e-mail conversation.
| | 02:08 | Next, type out your message by
clicking in the text field, so I've just typed
| | 02:15 | "I'm waiting in the lobby.
Let's go!" Then tap Send.
| | 02:18 | And that's all there is to it.
| | 02:20 | Within moments, your recipient will
receive your text message, as long as your
| | 02:23 | recipient's phone is turned on, of course.
| | 02:24 | If the phone is currently turned off,
they will receive the message when
| | 02:28 | they turn it back on.
| | 02:29 | If the person I'm texting sends the
message back to me while I'm still in the
| | 02:32 | Message app, it appears like this.
| | 02:35 | If you use iChat on the Mac,
this should look familiar.
| | 02:37 | Your text message conversations are
laid out to look like a back and forth
| | 02:40 | conversation in these word bubbles.
| | 02:42 | Now if I'm not currently in the
Messages app, let's say I'm checking out the
| | 02:45 | weather, and I receive a text message,
I have the option to either ignore this
| | 02:49 | message by clicking Close, which will
leave me in the Weather app, or I can tap
| | 02:53 | reply to close Weather and go back
to my conversion to type my reply.
| | 03:01 | And that's the gist of texting, really.
| | 03:02 | Now when it comes to sending a
picture or a video, all you need to do is tap
| | 03:06 | this little Camera icon.
| | 03:07 | That gives you the choice of
shooting a new photo or video, or choosing an
| | 03:11 | existing one from you photo library.
| | 03:13 | Personally, I prefer to shoot a picture
with the regular Camera app, which then
| | 03:16 | saves the picture to my iPhone's Photo Library.
| | 03:18 | I can then open Messages and
choose the existing photo to send.
| | 03:22 | If you take the photo from right here
in messages, this is the only place that
| | 03:25 | photo will exist, and eventually it will
get erased from your phone as you start to
| | 03:28 | pile on text messages, since
only 50 messages are saved at once.
| | 03:32 | You can access older messages, but there's
no guarantee that the photos will remain.
| | 03:36 | So unless you're in a huge hurry, shoot
the photo with the Camera app first, so
| | 03:39 | you have it stored on your phone.
| | 03:40 | Then just tap Choose Existing, browse
for the photo you want and then tap Choose.
| | 03:46 | If you want to type a caption, your
reason for sending the photo, or some other
| | 03:50 | text to go allow with it, go ahead,
and then tap Send. And that's it.
| | 03:59 | On the iPhone 3GS, you can do
the same thing with short videos.
| | 04:02 | Just select a video clip
instead of a still photo.
| | 04:05 | Just be aware that the video will be
compressed and won't look nearly as nice and
| | 04:08 | sharp on your recipient's
phone as it does on your iPhone.
| | 04:11 | You're also limited to sending
clips that are only about a minute long,
| | 04:14 | but you use the iPhone 3GS's Editing
tools to trim down your clips before
| | 04:17 | sending them. And of course, you can
receive MMS messages from your friends, as well.
| | 04:21 | They don't have to have iPhones to send
and receive photos to and from your phone.
| | 04:25 | They just need to have a phone and a
plan that accommodates text and MMS.
| | 04:28 | Now as I mentioned earlier, only 50
messages are so stay in your message list at
| | 04:32 | once, so if a friend sends you a photo
or video and you want to keep it, tap the
| | 04:36 | image to view it at full size, then
tap this button in the lower left-hand
| | 04:39 | corner and tap Save Image.
| | 04:42 | That stores the image in your Photo
Library where you can access it at any time.
| | 04:46 | Okay so that's how we send and
receive text and multimedia messages.
| | 04:49 | Let's finish here by looking at
how we manage our text conversations.
| | 04:52 | Here, Messages is a list of all the
text conversations you've had, or more
| | 04:56 | accurately this is a list of all the
people you've had text conversations with
| | 04:59 | in chronological order, with the
most recent conversations at the top.
| | 05:03 | This is nice because the people you chat
with the most frequently will always be
| | 05:06 | at the top of this list.
| | 05:07 | So if you want to send one of these
people a text message, you don't have to type
| | 05:10 | in their number or
search through their contacts.
| | 05:13 | Just find the previous
conversation you had and tap it.
| | 05:15 | Even if the previous conversation happened
three weeks ago, their information is still here,
| | 05:19 | so you can just type your message and hit Send.
| | 05:21 | To go back to the Message
list, tap the Messages button.
| | 05:24 | Now you can also delete
conversations from this list if you need to.
| | 05:27 | Either swipe your finger across the
conversation you want to delete, which
| | 05:30 | reveals the Delete button -
| | 05:31 | I'll cancel that that by tapping Done -
or tap Edit and tap the little red icons
| | 05:37 | next to the messages you want to delete.
| | 05:38 | Again, I'll cancel that.
| | 05:40 | Similarly, you can delete
portions of individual conversations.
| | 05:43 | Maybe, for example, your buddy sent you
an embarrassing photo from the weekend.
| | 05:46 | You can't do anything about the fact
that your buddy has this photo, at least not
| | 05:49 | with your iPhone, but you can at
least get the copy off of your phone.
| | 05:53 | Just tap Edit in the message and
check the circles next to any parts of the
| | 05:56 | conversations you want to
delete. Then tap Delete.
| | 05:59 | Lastly, you'll sometimes come to the
point where it becomes apparent that texting
| | 06:02 | is not the proper medium for
the conversation you're having.
| | 06:05 | Maybe things are getting heated, or it
could just be that there are too many
| | 06:07 | details or too much to type.
| | 06:09 | Just scroll up, or tap the top the
Conversationscreen to go to the very top
| | 06:12 | of the conversation.
| | 06:13 | Here you can tap Call to immediately
place a call to this person, so you don't
| | 06:18 | have to close Messages and
open the Phone app to do so.
| | 06:20 | Notice here that you can also tap
Contact Info to see the person's information.
| | 06:24 | You may also see a link that says Load
Earlier Messages, if you want to view
| | 06:27 | more than this saved 50
messages currently on your phone.
| | 06:30 | And that, in a nutshell, is
texting with your iPhone.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
5. EmailImporting email accounts from your computer| 00:00 | In this chapter, we're going
to look at all things e-mail.
| | 00:03 | The iPhone and iPod Touch
both come with the Mail app,
| | 00:06 | a full-fledged e-mail client for reading,
sending and managing your e-mail accounts.
| | 00:10 | The first thing you need to do is set up
your e-mail account, or accounts, on your device.
| | 00:14 | Probably the easiest way to do this is
to just sync your iPhone or iPod Touch
| | 00:18 | with your Mac or PC and copying
over your account information.
| | 00:21 | That way, there's no need to do any kind of
manual setup on the iPhone or iPod Touch.
| | 00:26 | Now in order for this to work on the
Mac, you have to be using either OS X's
| | 00:29 | built-in Mail Application or
Microsoft Entourage as your e-mail program.
| | 00:32 | If you're on Windows, you'll need to
be using Microsoft Outlook, Outlook
| | 00:36 | Express or Windows Mail.
| | 00:38 | iTunes will detect the e-mail
accounts you manage from these programs.
| | 00:42 | So with my iPhone selected here on
iTunes, I can select the Info tab and scroll
| | 00:49 | down to Mail Accounts, and here I
can check Sync selected Mail accounts.
| | 00:55 | And below, it lists the two
accounts is detected in my mail program.
| | 00:59 | All I have to do is just check the accounts
that I want to have access to on my iPhone.
| | 01:03 | In this case, I'll just
leave both of them checked.
| | 01:05 | But it's important to
know what it says below here.
| | 01:07 | Notice it says Syncing Mail accounts syncs
your account settings but not your messages.
| | 01:12 | To add accounts or to make other
changes, tap Settings then Mail, Contacts,
| | 01:15 | Calendars on this iPhone.
| | 01:16 | Now we'll take at the settings on your
iPhone or iPod Touch in upcoming movies.
| | 01:21 | But basically what this is telling
us is we're only syncing our account
| | 01:24 | settings, meaning we are syncing the
username and password and connection info
| | 01:28 | needed to access these e-mail
messages, but not the messages themselves.
| | 01:32 | If you want to make sure that the
messages on your computer and phone are the
| | 01:35 | same, you will have to do that by
setting certain options up in your e-mail
| | 01:38 | accounts, and again we'll take a look
at how to do this in an upcoming movie.
| | 01:41 | But for now this is all I have to do to
get my e-mail account info onto my phone.
| | 01:45 | Once I click Apply or Sync, I'll be
able to send and receive e-mails from these
| | 01:49 | accounts on my iPhone.
| | 01:50 | If you have an e-mail account that
you don't manage on your computer, or
| | 01:53 | you've created an e-mail account
that you want to use exclusively on your
| | 01:55 | iPhone or iPod Touch for some reason, you'll
have to set that account up on the device itself.
| | 02:00 | And we'll take a look at how
to do that in the next movie.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Setting up Exchange, MobileMe, Gmail, Yahoo, and AOL email accounts| 00:00 | Now let's take a look at how to set up
your e-mail account on iPhone or iPod
| | 00:03 | Touch without having to
sync it with your computer.
| | 00:06 | Start by tapping the Mail app.
| | 00:08 | If you're currently not managing any e-
mail accounts on your device, you'll see
| | 00:10 | this screen, which lists five of the
most popular e-mail services around:
| | 00:14 | Microsoft Exchange, MobileMe,
Gmail, Yahoo Mail and AOL.
| | 00:19 | You'll most likely only have an
Exchange account if that's the e-mail
| | 00:23 | system your company uses.
| | 00:24 | MobileMe is Apple's $100 year
collection of Web-based services, including
| | 00:28 | Web hosting and e-mail.
| | 00:30 | Gmail is Google's free e-mail system.
| | 00:32 | And you can also get free
accounts from Yahoo and AOL.
| | 00:35 | Now you can't register for a new
e-mail account from this screen.
| | 00:37 | This screen is only for setting
up an existing e-mail account.
| | 00:40 | If you'd like to set up a new account,
you'll have to visit one of these
| | 00:43 | services on your Web browser and sign up.
| | 00:45 | Once you have an account you want to
manage on your iPhone or iPod Touch, you
| | 00:48 | can come back to this screen.
| | 00:50 | Now these are the most popular services,
| | 00:51 | so Apple has made it easy to enter just a few
pieces of information to set up your accounts.
| | 00:55 | If you have an e-mail account with the
provider not listed here, you'll just tap
| | 00:59 | Other and go through a slightly
longer process, but we'll look at the other
| | 01:02 | options in another movie.
| | 01:04 | If you do have an account from one
of these five services, setting up
| | 01:07 | your e-mail is easy.
| | 01:08 | So let's say I have a MobileMe account.
| | 01:10 | I'll just tap MobileMe, and all I
have to do here is fill in four fields.
| | 01:15 | First, I'll type my name in the Name field.
| | 01:22 | This is the name that will appear in
the From field when other people receive
| | 01:25 | the e-mails you send them.
| | 01:26 | So decide whether you want them to see your
full name, just your first name or some nick name.
| | 01:30 | I've typed my first and last name.
| | 01:32 | Then I fill in my MobileMe Address.
| | 01:34 | Notice it has to include the @me.com,
which the iPhone has filled in for me.
| | 01:44 | Next, I tap my Password.
| | 01:46 | And in the Description field, I can
decide how I want this account to show up in
| | 01:48 | my list of e-mail accounts,
which we'll see shortly.
| | 01:50 | I'll going to change this to MobileMe.
| | 01:53 | Now when I tap Save, my iPhone will
attempt to access my account based on the
| | 02:01 | information I've provided.
| | 02:02 | If I type something wrong, I'll see a
message telling me it couldn't access my account.
| | 02:06 | But if I typed my everything correctly,
I'll now see these options to determine
| | 02:09 | which portions of my MobileMe
account I want to sync with my iPhone.
| | 02:13 | This part is unique to
setting up a MobileMe account.
| | 02:15 | We'll look at another
type of account in a moment.
| | 02:17 | For now, I'm going to turn everything off
because I just want to sync with my mail.
| | 02:21 | And I'll tap Done.
| | 02:23 | That takes me right to my Inbox
where I can now see my incoming mail and
| | 02:26 | read and respond to it.
| | 02:28 | Okay, let's set up another account.
| | 02:29 | Once you've set up one account, you
no longer open the Mail app to set up
| | 02:33 | additional accounts; instead click your
Home button to close Mail and open Settings.
| | 02:40 | Then tap Mail, Contacts,
Calendars, and in here tap Add Account.
| | 02:46 | Now you get the same Add
Account screen we saw before.
| | 02:48 | I'll select Gmail this time
and set up my Gmail account.
| | 02:53 | Just like before, I enter my Name,
e-mail Address, Password and the Description,
| | 02:57 | and my iPhone will handle the rest
of setting the account up for me.
| | 03:03 | And once my account information
has been filled out, I'll tap Save.
| | 03:06 | And I now see both my
accounts listed here in Settings.
| | 03:10 | Let's click the Home button.
| | 03:12 | Notice the badge that appears on the
Mail icon; this lets me know how many new
| | 03:17 | messages are waiting for me in my
various e-mail accounts. Let's open Mail.
| | 03:20 | To access the e-mail from either of
these accounts, just tap the accounts
| | 03:24 | name, and these are the names that I entered
in description fields, and then tap the Inbox.
| | 03:30 | And that's how you set up your e-mail
on your iPhone or iPod Touch, if you use
| | 03:34 | Exchange, MobileMe, Gmail, Yahoo or AOL Mail.
| | 03:37 | We'll look at how to set up e-
mail accounts other than these in an
| | 03:40 | upcoming movie.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Setting up other types of email accounts| 00:00 | If you have an e-mail account that isn't
one of the five types of the iPhone and
| | 00:03 | iPod Touch can set up automatically for you,
| | 00:05 | maybe your e-mail account is through your
Internet Service Provider or through the
| | 00:08 | company you work for,
| | 00:10 | you can still manage e-mail on your device.
| | 00:12 | If you haven't yet set up an e-mail
account in your device, you'll you see the screen
| | 00:15 | when you open the mail App.
| | 00:16 | If you have already set up an
account and you need to set up another one,
| | 00:19 | start by opening Settings, then tap Mail,
Contacts, Calendars, and in here, tap Add account.
| | 00:28 | To set up your e-mail, tap Other
and then tap Add Mail account.
| | 00:34 | Then complete these four fields.
| | 00:36 | In the Name field, type the name that
you want to appear in the From field when
| | 00:39 | other people receive the e-mails you sent them.
| | 00:41 | So decide whether you want them to see your
full name, just your first name or some nickname.
| | 00:45 | I'll type my first and last name.
Then I enter the e-mail Address.
| | 00:48 | I want to manage from my iPhone, then
I enter my Password. And I can either
| | 00:57 | leave the Description field as is with
my e-mail address in it, or type in some
| | 01:01 | other description. I'll leave it as is and tap Save.
| | 01:05 | At this point, the phone tries to
figure out if you can determine the other
| | 01:08 | settings it needs to access this e-mail
based on your e-mail Address and Password.
| | 01:11 | If you have an e-mail Address from a
large and well-known company, this might
| | 01:14 | be all you need to do.
| | 01:16 | But if your iPhone or iPod doesn't
recognize your e-mail provider, you will see
| | 01:19 | this next screen in which you have
to complete some more information.
| | 01:22 | All the information you enter here will
beginning to you by your e-mail providing service.
| | 01:25 | So you what you enter here will be
completely different than what I'm
| | 01:27 | typing this example.
| | 01:29 | The first choice here is to pick either IMAP or POP.
| | 01:32 | Again, in many cases your e-mail
provider will tell you which of these types of
| | 01:36 | e-mail protocols it uses.
| | 01:37 | Many providers offer you a choice.
| | 01:39 | I will go into a lot more detail
about IMAP and POP in the upcoming movie on
| | 01:43 | keeping your iPhone e-mail Sync with
your computer, but I will say here that if you're
| | 01:46 | adding an e-mail account to your iPhone or
iPod Touch, and you also read and manage
| | 01:50 | that e-mail on your computer, you
should choose IMAP, if you have the choice.
| | 01:53 | It's going to make it much, much easier
to keep your e-mail organized across your
| | 01:57 | computer and your iPhone.
| | 01:59 | Next, complete the sections under
Incoming Mail Server and Outgoing Mail Server.
| | 02:04 | Again, you will have to get this
information from your e-mail provider.
| | 02:09 | Tap Save when you're done.
| | 02:11 | Your iPhone or iPod will attempt to
connect to your e-mail service based on the
| | 02:13 | information you entered.
| | 02:14 | If you get any kind of error message,
double-check your Settings and try again.
| | 02:18 | If all goes well, you're done, and you can
now access your e-mail on your device.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Keeping your iPhone or iPod Touch email synced with your computer| 00:00 | One issue that can arise whenever you
read and manage e-mail on more than one
| | 00:03 | device whether includes a second
computer, your iPhone or an iPod Touch, is the
| | 00:08 | issue of how to keep the e-
mail on your devices synced.
| | 00:10 | For example, if both your main computer
and your iPhone are set up to check for
| | 00:14 | and download new e-mail messages
periodically, it's possible to end up with some
| | 00:18 | messages stored on your phone and
not on your computer or vice versa.
| | 00:22 | Now, this is generally a problem
that comes up when you're managing a POP
| | 00:25 | type e-mail account.
| | 00:26 | Previously, when we were looking at how
to set up e-mail accounts, we saw that
| | 00:30 | the two main types of e-mail
protocols are POP and IMAP.
| | 00:33 | POP is the most common type of e-
mail service used by Internet hosting
| | 00:37 | providers, and it basically works like this.
| | 00:38 | E-mail that's sent to your account is
stored on your e-mail server's server until
| | 00:42 | your e-mail program, whether it's an e-
mail program on your computer, or your
| | 00:45 | iPhone notices the message
and downloads it off the server.
| | 00:48 | Once, the message has been downloaded
from the server it's usually deleted
| | 00:51 | anywhere from immediately
to within one to two weeks.
| | 00:54 | At, that point the only copy of the e-
mail is found on your computer or phone.
| | 00:58 | Similarly, when you send an e-mail
through a POP account, a copy of the sent
| | 01:02 | message is only stored on
the computer you sent it from.
| | 01:05 | If you only manage your e-mail from one
computer, this isn't usually a problem.
| | 01:08 | But imagine if you use your iPhone
or iPod Touch to also check for and
| | 01:11 | download your e-mails.
| | 01:13 | If your computer detects a new e-mail
and downloads it before your iPhone does,
| | 01:16 | you won't have the copy of that e-
mail on your iPhone or if your iPhone
| | 01:19 | downloads the e-mails first, you won't
have a copy of the e-mail on your computer.
| | 01:22 | So, it's very easy to end up with
some e-mails on your computer and some
| | 01:26 | e-mails on your iPhone.
| | 01:27 | You'd have to search on both if you were
looking for a specific message you received.
| | 01:31 | Now, this issue is partially addressed by
default in the iPhone or iPod Touch's settings.
| | 01:35 | Go to Settings > Mail, Contacts,
Calendars and select your POP account.
| | 01:40 | Now, I'll tap Advanced, and here under
Incoming Settings, notice that Delete
| | 01:46 | from server is set to Never.
| | 01:48 | This means that when my iPhone grabs
new messages from the server, it leaves a
| | 01:51 | copy on the server, which is then still
recognized by my home computer as a new message.
| | 01:55 | So, it will be downloaded
to my home computer as well.
| | 01:58 | But this is only useful if my iPhone
sees new a message before my computer does.
| | 02:02 | If my computer sees the new message first,
it might grab it and delete it off the
| | 02:05 | server before my iPhone downloads it.
| | 02:06 | So, to make sure that e-mail on your
iPhone and computer stay synced, you have
| | 02:10 | to set up a similar preference on
your computer's e-mail client as well.
| | 02:13 | Essentially, what you want to find
is the preference that tells your
| | 02:15 | computer's e-mail program to leave
messages on the server just like the
| | 02:19 | setting on the iPhone does.
| | 02:20 | If you're using mail on a Mac, go to
Mail > Preferences > Accounts and then
| | 02:26 | select your account.
| | 02:28 | Then under the Advanced tab uncheck Remove
copy from server after retrieving a message.
| | 02:33 | If you're using Microsoft Entourage on
you Mac, select Tools > Accounts, then
| | 02:40 | double-click your account name, and
under Options, check Leave a copy of each
| | 02:45 | message on the server.
| | 02:48 | On Windows, if you use Outlook,
you'll go to Tools > Accounts Settings.
| | 02:52 | Then under the Email tab, select
your e-mail account and click Change.
| | 02:56 | Then click More Settings and under
the Advanced tab, check Leave a copy of
| | 03:01 | messages on the Server.
| | 03:02 | Now, if you use an e-mail program I
didn't mention, you should still be able to
| | 03:05 | find the settings can
leave messages on your server.
| | 03:07 | So, basically with both your iPhone
and your computer leaving new messages
| | 03:11 | on the server, both should have identical
copies of incoming messages in their inboxes.
| | 03:16 | But of course this doesn't address the
issue of sent messages being stored on
| | 03:19 | two separate devices.
| | 03:20 | So, if you compose an e-mail and send
it from your iPhone, a copy of the sent
| | 03:23 | message will not be on your home
computer, and you'll have to look on your
| | 03:26 | iPhone if you need to check what you wrote.
| | 03:28 | Really, POP e-mail can be a huge headache
when you're managing e-mail on multiple devices.
| | 03:32 | That's why most e-mail providers
and e-mail users are switching to the
| | 03:35 | IMAP e-mail protocol.
| | 03:37 | Unlike POP e-mail, IMAP e-mail
is kept and managed online.
| | 03:41 | So, if you read a new incoming message
on your computer, your phone will still
| | 03:44 | download a copy of the message as well.
| | 03:46 | It just won't show up as a new
message since you already read it on your
| | 03:49 | computer, and that will be
reflected on the IMAP server.
| | 03:51 | But that's actually a good thing,
because once you read an e-mail message on
| | 03:54 | your computer, you don't want to get a
notification on your phone that you have
| | 03:57 | a new e-mail message only to find
that it's the one you already read.
| | 04:00 | The important thing is that your e-
mail messages both received and sent will
| | 04:04 | remain synced across your devices
if you're using an IMAP account.
| | 04:07 | Like I said, many e-mail
providers have both POP and IMAP services
| | 04:11 | available these days.
| | 04:12 | So, if you a choice, I
definitely recommend going with IMAP.
| | 04:15 | You won't have to go in and change any
of those preferences we were just looking
| | 04:18 | at in your computer's e-mail
programs or on your iPhone.
| | 04:21 | Managing and reading e-mail will be a
lot less time-consuming, because you have
| | 04:24 | identical information on both
your computer and your device.
| | 04:27 | Now, as a footnote here, if you have
an e-mail address through your work
| | 04:31 | and it's a Microsoft Exchange service, then
you don't have to worry about any of this.
| | 04:35 | All the e-mail on all devices you
manage your Exchange account info on
| | 04:37 | will always be synced.
| | 04:39 | The info I discussed in this movie is
really only to explain the differences
| | 04:42 | between POP and IMAP accounts, and the
impact they have on e-mail management.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Composing email| 00:00 | You can compose email from any screen
in the Mail App by tapping the Compose
| | 00:04 | button in the lower right-hand corner.
| | 00:06 | This opens a new, blank message.
| | 00:08 | You can fill out the fields here in any order
you like, but let's work our way from the top.
| | 00:12 | In the To field, either start typing
the address of the person you want to send
| | 00:15 | the email to, or press the Plus button to
browse through your contacts and select
| | 00:18 | your recipients from there. Or if you
choose to type the address, mail will
| | 00:21 | suggest names for you from your address book.
| | 00:24 | Just tap a suggestion to choose that address.
| | 00:27 | If you want to send the email to more
than one recipient, just type another name.
| | 00:30 | Notice we also have a CC and BCC field.
| | 00:33 | Generally, CC is used to send a copy of
email to another person, just so that you
| | 00:37 | know sent it to the main recipient.
| | 00:39 | For instance, you might be sending
an email to a customer, but CC your
| | 00:42 | supervisor to keep him or her in the loop.
| | 00:45 | BCC is used when you want to send a
copy of the email to someone else, but
| | 00:48 | without the main recipient knowing.
| | 00:50 | If you don't need to use those
fields, just leave them blank.
| | 00:53 | Next, type a Subject for your email.
| | 00:55 | It's considered a good form and a
courtesy to include a subject line in you
| | 00:58 | emails, so your recipient know what
the email is about, and also so they have
| | 01:02 | an additional way of searching for the email
later should they need to refer back to it.
| | 01:06 | Then all that's left is to type your message.
| | 01:07 | Bear in mind that as with most other
applications in which you can type, you can
| | 01:12 | rotate the iPhone or iPod touch to type
in Landscape mode, which you might find
| | 01:16 | easier and more comfortable.
| | 01:17 | When you are done tying you can tap,
Send to send it off, or if you need to save
| | 01:21 | the massage until you have more time
to finish it, you can tap Cancel which
| | 01:24 | gives you the option to
either Save or Discard the message.
| | 01:28 | Tap Save Draft, if you want to get
back to it later. That places it in the
| | 01:31 | Drafts folder where you can access it again
by navigating out to the main Mail screen,
| | 01:35 | tapping the Account in which you were
composing the message, tapping Drafts and in
| | 01:40 | here, you'll find your saved message.
| | 01:42 | Just tap it to open it again.
| | 01:43 | Here, you can finish your thoughts
and then send it off by tapping Send.
| | 01:49 | So, that's how you
compose a message from scratch.
| | 01:54 | Now, other ways to create a new
message include replying to a received email,
| | 01:58 | which you do is simply by opening a
message you've received, and tapping the
| | 02:05 | curved arrow button.
| | 02:06 | You're given the choice to Reply and
write a message back to the sender or
| | 02:10 | Forward if you want to send the email
to someone else. We'll just cancel for now.
| | 02:14 | You can also send emails from various
apps like your photo library, or from
| | 02:17 | Safari, if you want to send a photo
or a link to a web site to someone.
| | 02:21 | In fact, you can't attach photos
to a new message from the Mail App.
| | 02:24 | If you want to send a photo to someone,
you have to first find the photo in
| | 02:27 | your photo library, tap the button in the
lower left-hand corner and choose Email Photo.
| | 02:38 | That opens a new message with the
photo attached. Again, I'll just cancel this
| | 02:41 | for now and click Delete Draft.
| | 02:45 | Similarly, if I come across a web page
I want to forward to someone, I tap the
| | 02:50 | Plus button and choose Mail Link to this Page.
| | 02:55 | Again, a new message opens and notice
the subject has been filled in with the
| | 02:59 | title of the web page, and the
address appears in the body of the message.
| | 03:03 | So, those are some of the ways you can
create a new email message and how you
| | 03:06 | can add attachments like photos and web links.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Receiving and reading email| 00:00 | Now, let's talk about how the iPhone and
iPod touch check for new e-mail, and what
| | 00:04 | you can do with those
e-mails when you receive them.
| | 00:06 | Depending on the type of e-mail account
you have, either your messages show up on
| | 00:09 | your iPhone or iPod as soon as they
arrive on your e-mail's server, or your device
| | 00:13 | is set to check for new
messages at set durations of time.
| | 00:16 | Email system such as Microsoft Exchange,
Yahoo!mail and MobileMe are what are
| | 00:20 | known as push e-mail.
| | 00:22 | Instead of waiting for your phone to
check if new messages are on the server,
| | 00:25 | the server pushes the new messages
to your phone so they show up almost
| | 00:28 | immediately after the person sending
you the e-mail hits the Send key on his or
| | 00:32 | her computer, barring of course any network
traffic that might be clogging things up.
| | 00:36 | Now, this does depend on how
you have certain options set.
| | 00:39 | Let's look in Settings > Mail, Contacts,
Calendars, and in here I'll tap Fetch
| | 00:44 | New Data, and this where you
find the On/Off switch for Push.
| | 00:48 | If you don't have any e-mail accounts
that support Push, turn it off because
| | 00:51 | having Push on does tax your
battery more than having Push turned off.
| | 00:54 | So, even if you do have Push e-mail
accounts, you might occasionally want to turn
| | 00:57 | Push off as a battery conservation step.
| | 00:59 | When Push is off, or if your e-mail
account doesn't support Push, mail checks for
| | 01:03 | new messages on your server based on
the settings selection under Fetch.
| | 01:07 | So, you can choose Every 15, 30 or 60 minutes.
| | 01:10 | Notice it says here that checking
for new mail less frequently will also
| | 01:13 | conserve battery life.
| | 01:15 | If you select Manually your iPhone or
iPod touch will not check for new mail
| | 01:18 | until you open the mail application.
| | 01:20 | Additionally, you can tap Advanced
to assign different Fetch Settings to
| | 01:23 | individual accounts.
| | 01:25 | So, for instance, if you want to make
sure your work e-mail get to you immediately,
| | 01:28 | you can set it to Push, but leave your
personal e-mail address set to Fetch, even
| | 01:31 | if it supports Push.
| | 01:33 | Okay, so those are the ways
mail checks for new messages.
| | 01:35 | Now, let's take a look what we
can do with messages we receive.
| | 01:38 | Let's leave Settings and open Mail.
| | 01:40 | Here, on the main Mail page you
first see a list of all your inboxes.
| | 01:44 | This lets you quickly scan all your
mail accounts and see how many new
| | 01:47 | messages are in each one.
| | 01:48 | Now, you could just tap each
individual Inbox to see just the messages in it.
| | 01:53 | But by reading your e-mail that way you,
have to keep returning to the main mail
| | 01:56 | screen to access your other e-mail inboxes.
| | 02:00 | A sometimes more convenient
alternative is to tap All Inboxes which lists the
| | 02:05 | contents of all your account inboxes in
chronological order so you can read all
| | 02:08 | your incoming e-mail, regardless of
which of your accounts it was sent to.
| | 02:12 | Let's go back to the main screen for a moment.
| | 02:14 | Under the Inboxes section is Accounts,
and it's here where you can access your
| | 02:17 | various account folders in full.
| | 02:19 | So, if I tap MobileMe, I can access
all the folders associated with this
| | 02:23 | account, not just my Inbox.
| | 02:25 | So, if you need to access your other
folders, that's how you get to them.
| | 02:28 | Let's go back to the main mail screen again.
| | 02:30 | Now, let's take a look at some
specifics of reading your messages.
| | 02:33 | I'll go into one of my e-mail inboxes
and again you can browse through your
| | 02:36 | messages by scrolling through.
| | 02:38 | Now, any messages with a number beside it
indicates a threaded message, meaning
| | 02:42 | it's a collection of multiple, related messages.
| | 02:44 | I'll show you how to turn threaded
messages turn on and off later in this chapter.
| | 02:48 | So, to read any message in, full just tap it.
| | 02:51 | Mail can be read in both
portrait and landscape mode.
| | 02:55 | I prefer to read my mail in
portrait most of the time.
| | 02:57 | But also remember you can turn on
Orientation Lock if need be by double-clicking
| | 03:01 | the Home button to open the Multi-
tasking toolbar, flicking it to the right and
| | 03:06 | then taping the Orientation Lock button.
| | 03:07 | This can be convenient if you like to read
your e-mail while lying on your side in bed.
| | 03:11 | But if you are sitting or standing up,
it's nice to be able to rotate your device
| | 03:14 | to landscape to make the text bigger.
| | 03:16 | I'll leave Orientation Lock off for now.
| | 03:18 | Now, while in mail, you can use the
standard finger gestures, swipe up and down
| | 03:22 | to scroll, pinch in and out to zoom in and out.
| | 03:25 | You can double-tap text to go back to
the standard size, and you can Reply to or
| | 03:29 | Forward e-mail by tapping
the curved arrow button.
| | 03:31 | We'll look at these options later in
the chapter, but incidentally, if you want
| | 03:35 | to quote a line of text in your reply,
you can double-tap a word to make a
| | 03:38 | selection, adjust your selection and
when you tap Reply, only the selected text
| | 03:44 | will be quoted in your reply, which is
pretty much how this works in regular
| | 03:47 | e-mail program on your computer.
| | 03:49 | We'll just cancel this for now.
| | 03:51 | If on your computer, or through your
e-mail host's web site, you've created folders
| | 03:55 | to store your messages, you can tap
the Folder button to move the message you
| | 03:58 | are reading into one of those folders.
| | 04:00 | You can't create folders using your
iPhone or iPod touch, so these have to be
| | 04:03 | created on your computer beforehand.
| | 04:04 | I'll just cancel for now.
| | 04:06 | You can also delete messages by tapping
the Trash Can button. The message gets
| | 04:09 | sucked on into the Trash button.
| | 04:11 | Now, if you tap Trash accidentally,
navigate out to your accounts list of folders
| | 04:15 | as we've looked at earlier,
| | 04:20 | tap Trash to find your message, and
then select that message, and then use a
| | 04:25 | folder button to move the file back into
your Inbox, or any other folder of your choice.
| | 04:29 | Now, if I go back to my Inbox, I'll
see the message has been moved there.
| | 04:34 | If you want to delete or move a bunch
of messages all at once, tap the Edit
| | 04:37 | button, then tap each message you
want to delete or move, and then tap
| | 04:41 | either Delete or Move.
| | 04:42 | Again, I'll just cancel for now.
| | 04:43 | Let's go back and look at the original message.
| | 04:46 | If the message you receive contains any
links to web pages, like this one does,
| | 04:50 | you can just tap the link to open the web page.
| | 04:52 | That opens Safari and takes me to the web site.
| | 04:55 | Let's go back to Mail.
| | 04:56 | Similarly, if the message contains
an address or a phone number, Mail will
| | 05:00 | recognize them as such, and you'll be
able to tap the address to open the Maps
| | 05:03 | App or tap the phone
number to immediately dial it.
| | 05:07 | Again, we'll cancel.
| | 05:09 | If the e-mail contains any multimedia
attachments, such video or audio files, you
| | 05:13 | can tap those attachments to play
them, and if the e-mail contains a photo
| | 05:16 | attachment that you would like to save,
just hold your finger down on the image.
| | 05:20 | And after a second, you'll see buttons
to either Save the Image, which places a
| | 05:24 | copy of the image in your Photo
Library, or Copy which lets you copy the image
| | 05:27 | so you can paste it into another e-mail message,
an MMS text message, or some other application.
| | 05:32 | Again, we'll cancel.
| | 05:34 | Lastly, when you read an e-mail it gets
marked as a read message, and the blue
| | 05:37 | dot next to it in your e-mail list is removed.
| | 05:40 | Occasionally, you might want to
remind yourself to read a message more
| | 05:42 | closely or at a later time.
| | 05:44 | Now, you might have created a folder
for important messages that you can move
| | 05:47 | it to, but one way I like to remind
myself to get back to a message soon is to
| | 05:51 | tap Mark as Unread.
| | 05:52 | That's places the blue dot back next
to the message, as well as counts the
| | 05:56 | message among the number of unread
e-mails on the Mail icon, making it very
| | 06:00 | obvious to me that I need to go
back to my Inbox and read my messages.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Searching your mailboxes| 00:00 | There will be times when you need to
refer back to a previously received e-mail,
| | 00:03 | but you might not remember which out of
the scores, or even hundreds, of e-mails in
| | 00:06 | your inbox the information you need is in.
| | 00:08 | That's when the mail
search bar comes to the rescue.
| | 00:11 | The search bar is actually hidden at
the very top of the list of e-mails in your
| | 00:14 | inbox, or any other folder of
e-mails you happen to be looking in.
| | 00:16 | To reveal it, just drag the list down.
| | 00:19 | Or if you scrolled all the way down in
your list, remember you can tap the top of
| | 00:22 | most screens on your iPhone or
iPod touch to jump back to the top.
| | 00:26 | Also, if you want to search all of
your inboxes simultaneously, tap the back
| | 00:30 | button and then All Inboxes.
| | 00:33 | From here, pull down to reveal the search box.
| | 00:36 | To perform your search, tap in
the Search field and begin typing.
| | 00:38 | You can search the From, To, and
Subject fields of your e-mails or tap all to
| | 00:44 | search all three simultaneously.
| | 00:46 | Unfortunately, there's no way to
search the actual body or content of your
| | 00:49 | e-mails at this time.
| | 00:51 | But here you can see that the messages
that match my search are now listed, and
| | 00:54 | I can tap any one to read them.
| | 00:56 | Now if you use an IMAP e-mail account,
and you didn't find the message you were
| | 00:59 | looking for, one possibility is that the
message is old enough that it is no longer on your phone.
| | 01:03 | So if I do a search on this account for
a word that I know doesn't exist on my
| | 01:06 | phone, like Toboggans -
| | 01:14 | this works for IMAP and Exchange accounts -
| | 01:16 | you'll see that the option to
continue the search on the server appears.
| | 01:20 | This let's you tell your iPhone or
iPod to connect to your e-mail server and
| | 01:23 | search the older messages there.
| | 01:25 | You can actually control how many
messages are stored on your phone, and we'll
| | 01:27 | take a look at how to do
that in an upcoming movie.
| | 01:30 | But what I wanted to get across here is
that if you have an IMAP account, you can
| | 01:32 | still access older e-mails on your
server from your iPhone or iPod.
| | 01:36 | But if you are using a POP e-mail
account, older messages will be deleted off
| | 01:40 | your phone, but no longer
be accessible on the server.
| | 01:42 | Most likely you'll find them on your computer,
inside whichever e-mail program you use there.
| | 01:46 | As I mentioned earlier, if you have
the option to switch to IMAP e-mail,
| | 01:49 | I recommend doing so.
| | 01:50 | One last thing I want to mention about
search is to remind you that you can also
| | 01:54 | search your e-mail from outside of the Mail app.
| | 01:57 | From your home screen, just flick
the screen to the right to reveal the
| | 02:00 | Spotlight Search Area, which
searches your entire device.
| | 02:03 | Here, you can type your search term,
and notice that possible matches of not
| | 02:08 | just e-mail, but other
applications begin to appear.
| | 02:10 | I can keep typing to
continue narrowing down the results.
| | 02:15 | If you find this has resulted in
Spotlight too busy with all the different types
| | 02:18 | search results you can have, go to
Settings > General > Search Results.
| | 02:24 | Here you can tap to uncheck and check the
kind of items you want to see results for.
| | 02:28 | You can even drag their handles
up and down to prioritize the list.
| | 02:32 | So those are the ways you can search
your e-mails, as well as the rest of your
| | 02:34 | iPhone or iPod touch.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Setting mail options| 00:00 | Now let's take a look at some
important settings you should be aware of for
| | 00:03 | managing your e-mail on
your iPhone or iPod touch.
| | 00:06 | Let's go to Settings > Mail, Contacts,
Calendars, and scroll down to the items
| | 00:12 | under the Mail heading.
| | 00:15 | In the previous movie, I mentioned that
you can control, to some extent, how many
| | 00:18 | messages are stored in your e-mail
inbox on your phone or iPod touch.
| | 00:22 | By tapping Show, you can choose to save
between 25 to 200 of your most recent messages.
| | 00:28 | If you are using IMAP or Exchange e-mail,
your older messages will still be on
| | 00:32 | your server and accessible from your
phone by scrolling down to the bottom of
| | 00:35 | your e-mail list and tapping Load More Messages.
| | 00:38 | If you are using a POP e-mail account,
you most likely won't have access to the
| | 00:42 | messages on your e-mail server, because
POP messages are usually deleted from the
| | 00:45 | server once you download them.
| | 00:47 | Now before we go back to Settings,
note how each of my messages displays two
| | 00:50 | lines of text from the body of the e-mail.
| | 00:53 | This let's you preview the
contents of the e-mail before you open it.
| | 00:56 | Let's go back to Settings.
| | 00:59 | Here, I'll tap Preview.
| | 01:00 | You can choose top preview between 0
and 5 lines of the body of your e-mail.
| | 01:04 | Just be aware that the more lines you
preview, the more space each message will
| | 01:07 | take up in your list, meaning you
might have to spend more time scrolling to
| | 01:10 | get the older messages.
| | 01:12 | Next, we have Minimum Font Size, which
is for adjusting the size of the text
| | 01:17 | when you are reading your e-mail.
| | 01:19 | Some people have trouble
reading the text at its default size.
| | 01:21 | If that includes you, you can
choose one of the larger sizes.
| | 01:24 | Next, we have the option To/Cc
Label on and off. I'll turn it on.
| | 01:28 | Now let's go back to Mail to see the results.
| | 01:31 | Notice that places a little To
label in the preview area of the e-mail.
| | 01:37 | This is a quick way to see if the
e-mail message is addressed to you or if you
| | 01:39 | were Cced in the e-mail, which can help
you to prioritize which e-mails are the
| | 01:43 | most important ones.
| | 01:44 | Generally, the ones in which you are
in the To field might be the ones you
| | 01:47 | want to get to first.
| | 01:48 | Let's go back to Settings again.
| | 01:51 | Next, we have Ask Before Deleting,
which just determines when you see a
| | 01:54 | message asking you to confirm that you
want to delete a message when you tap
| | 01:57 | the Trash button in Mail.
| | 01:58 | In a previous movie I showed you
how to get deleted messages back.
| | 02:02 | So I tend to leave this option off, so it
doesn't take two steps to delete a message.
| | 02:06 | If the e-mails you receive contain
embedded images that require mail to load them
| | 02:10 | over the Internet, your setting here
determines whether Mail will do so or not.
| | 02:14 | Some people prefer not to download
things like company logos and other sorts of
| | 02:17 | images that may appear in
the e-mails they receive.
| | 02:20 | Next is the Organize by Thread
option, which is on by default.
| | 02:24 | This let's you keep related messages
group together when viewing them in mail.
| | 02:27 | That way you can easily read through a
multiple-e-mail conversation, even one that
| | 02:31 | occurs over several responses, over
several days without having to scroll
| | 02:34 | through your inbox in chronological order.
| | 02:36 | Threaded e-mails keep all
the responses in one thread.
| | 02:39 | Let's go back to Settings again.
| | 02:40 | Next, we have also Always Bcc Myself.
| | 02:45 | With this option on, any e-mail you send
will also be invisibly sent to yourself.
| | 02:50 | Some people like this option, so they
always have a copy of any e-mail they send out.
| | 02:54 | But I think that's what the Sent folder
is for, and I prefer not to clutter up my
| | 02:57 | inbox with the e-mails I wrote myself.
| | 02:59 | So I leave this off.
| | 03:00 | Next is Signature, which is the text
that appears automatically at the end of
| | 03:04 | any e-mail you send.
| | 03:05 | By default, the message is send
from my iPhone or send from my iPod.
| | 03:09 | Some people like to put their full names
here or their phone numbers or their addresses.
| | 03:13 | Whatever you put here, I suggest keeping
some kind of message to let people know
| | 03:16 | you sent the e-mail from your iPhone or
iPod, which could explain why your reply
| | 03:20 | was brief, and it also makes the
occasional typo a little more understandable.
| | 03:24 | Basically, anything you type in here
will appear in the e-mail messages you send,
| | 03:27 | which you can see if I compose a new message,
| | 03:29 | here you can see Sent from my iPhone has
automatically been added to this message.
| | 03:36 | But you are always free to delete the
signature from individual e-mail you write.
| | 03:40 | Let's go to the last
setting, which is Default Account.
| | 03:45 | From here, you can choose which of
multiple e-mail accounts you may have will be
| | 03:47 | the default account you send messages from.
| | 03:50 | So if you click a link to send an
e-mail from a web page whichever account you
| | 03:53 | have selected here will be the
account listed in the From field.
| | 03:56 | So let's say I want to e-mail a
friend a photo from my photo library.
| | 03:59 | I go into my Camera Roll, select
the photo and choose Email Photo.
| | 04:06 | That creates a new message, and you can see
my Default Account is listed in the From field,
| | 04:11 | although you can tap the From Field
and select from any other accounts you
| | 04:14 | have on your device.
| | 04:15 | I am just going to cancel that.
| | 04:21 | Now if you are in the Inbox of any of
your accounts - for instance I am in the
| | 04:26 | inbox of my MobileMe account - tapping
the Compose button places the address of
| | 04:31 | the account you are
currently in in the From field.
| | 04:34 | Speaking of multiple accounts, if you
ever need to deactivate account, maybe it's
| | 04:37 | the weekend, and you don't want to
receive any work e-mails, go back to Settings
| | 04:40 | > Mail, Contacts, Calendars.
| | 04:44 | Tap the account you want
to temporarily turn off.
| | 04:47 | If it's an IMAP, MobileMe, or Exchange
account, slide the Mail switch to Off.
| | 04:51 | It it's a POP account,
slide the Account switch to Off.
| | 04:55 | But whether you disable a MobileMe,
Exchange, or other account, all of your
| | 04:59 | e-mails and setting for those
accounts will remain on your device.
| | 05:02 | They'll just be inactive until
you can turn the account back on.
| | 05:06 | If you really want to completely
delete an account off your phone, maybe you
| | 05:09 | just don't use that address anymore,
scroll down and tap Delete Account.
| | 05:14 | Be aware that this will erase all messages
in the settings pertaining to this account.
| | 05:17 | So make sure you really do want to delete
the account and not just make it inactive.
| | 05:21 | Those are the settings you should
be aware of when using the Mail app.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
6. Surfing the WebWeb browsing with Safari| 00:00 | Probably one of the most exciting
features of the iPhone when it was first
| | 00:03 | released was inclusion of a real Web browser.
| | 00:06 | Until that point, most Web browsers on
mobile phones were only able to display
| | 00:09 | stripped-down versions of most Web
sites where what you saw was rarely what
| | 00:13 | the Web page's designer had in mind
and trying to click links to move from
| | 00:16 | page to page involved using directional
arrow keys on your phone's keyboard to
| | 00:20 | navigate from link to link.
| | 00:21 | The iPhone and the iPod Touch, however,
have Safari, the mobile version of
| | 00:25 | the same Safari browser from Apple
that runs on both Mac OS X and Windows, so
| | 00:29 | you get to see most Web pages exactly as they
look when you view them on an actual computer.
| | 00:33 | I say "most Web pages" because
although Safari does work much like your
| | 00:37 | computer's Web browser, it
does like certain capabilities,
| | 00:40 | most notably it doesn't support Flash,
and you also can stream music or videos
| | 00:44 | through the Web browser, and you
can install any additional plug-ins.
| | 00:47 | Whether this affects you a lot or little
depends on the sort of Web pages you tend to visit.
| | 00:51 | Speaking from my own personal experience,
I find that I don't usually browse too
| | 00:54 | many Web sites where Flash is required
when I'm on my iPhone, but that could be
| | 00:57 | just me and your own
experience might be different.
| | 01:00 | So, in this chapter, we're going to
look at using Safari to browse the Web,
| | 01:03 | as well as some other cool tricks you can do
while you're surfing around on the Internet.
| | 01:06 | Let's begin with a quick tour of Safari.
| | 01:08 | You launch Safari by tapping its icon.
| | 01:11 | In this example, my Bookmarks list pops open.
| | 01:13 | I'll tap Done to close it.
| | 01:15 | We'll talk about bookmarks in an upcoming movie.
| | 01:17 | If you've previously used Safari,
you'll most likely see the last page you were
| | 01:20 | browsing when you reopen it.
| | 01:22 | Now, let's start our tour at the top
of the screen and work our way down.
| | 01:25 | First, we have our address bar.
| | 01:27 | Just tap in the field once and
tap in the Web site's address.
| | 01:31 | For this example, maybe
I want to visit lynda.com.
| | 01:33 | I could tap Go right now to go to lynda.com,
but notice we also have a .com button here.
| | 01:38 | So, you can just tap that once,
to add the .com to your address.
| | 01:42 | Now, before I visit lynda.com, I'm
going to delete that .com and show
| | 01:46 | you another cool tip.
| | 01:48 | If you hold down the .com button, after
a second notice that you also get the
| | 01:51 | other options of .net, .edu, and .org.
| | 01:55 | So, you also don't have to type
those options out if the Web site you're
| | 01:57 | visiting is a .net, .edu, or .org address.
| | 02:00 | But I do want to go to lynda.com in this case.
| | 02:02 | So, I'll choose that and then tap Go.
| | 02:04 | So, now I'm looking at lynda.com on my
iPhone and I'm seeing it exactly as it
| | 02:09 | looks on a browser on a computer.
| | 02:10 | Notice how quickly it loaded too.
| | 02:12 | When you're on a WiFi network, Web
pages will load just about as fast on your
| | 02:15 | iPhone or iPod Touch, as
they do on your computer.
| | 02:18 | If you're on an iPhone and you're
connected to AT&T's 3G network, they'll load
| | 02:22 | a little more slowly.
| | 02:23 | If you're only on AT&T's Edge network,
be prepared for a much longer wait.
| | 02:27 | Still, it beats not having any
Internet connection at all.
| | 02:30 | Okay, so that's the address bar where
you type in the addresses of the Web
| | 02:32 | pages you want to visit.
| | 02:34 | The other thing I want to mention about
the address bar right now is that this
| | 02:37 | is also where you'll find the button to
reload or refresh the page, which is the
| | 02:40 | circular arrow you see on
the right side of the field.
| | 02:43 | If you need to reload the page, maybe
you want to see if it's been updated since
| | 02:46 | you last loaded it, just tap the Reload button.
| | 02:48 | Notice while the page is loading,
the Reload button turns into an X, which
| | 02:52 | is the Stop button.
| | 02:53 | You can tap the Stop button
to stop the page from loading.
| | 02:56 | But in this case, I do want to load lynda.
com completely, so I'll tap Reload again.
| | 03:01 | Lastly, when you tap in the address
bar to type an address, notice we have an
| | 03:04 | X in a circle here.
| | 03:07 | That's the button to clear the entire
address field, so you have an empty field
| | 03:10 | to type in without having to
hold down the Delete button.
| | 03:12 | But I do want to stay on this
page right now, so I'll tap Cancel.
| | 03:14 | Okay, so that's the address bar.
| | 03:17 | To the right of that is the search bar.
| | 03:19 | By default, Safari uses Google as its
built-in search engine, so any term or
| | 03:22 | phrase you type into the search
field will be submitted to Google.
| | 03:25 | I'll tap in the search field,
and let's search for Lynda Weinman.
| | 03:33 | Then I'll tap Google.
| | 03:34 | Now notice in the address bar that we're
looking at the search result at Google.com.
| | 03:39 | Google is one of many Web sites that
recognizes when you're visiting the site on
| | 03:42 | an iPhone or iPod Touch, and then
presents you with the page formatted to look
| | 03:45 | good on your device.
| | 03:46 | Notice I don't have to scroll left
and right or zoom in to view my results.
| | 03:50 | I can just scroll up and down.
| | 03:51 | So, to visit any link on
a Web page, just tap it.
| | 03:55 | Now, we're looking at lynda.com again.
| | 03:59 | Now, it's not very easy to
read the page at this size.
| | 04:02 | Most Web pages are designed to be
viewed on computer monitors, which are
| | 04:05 | wider than they are tall, and we're
currently browsing on the iPhone in
| | 04:08 | Portrait orientation.
| | 04:09 | You might find it easier to flip
the phone to Landscape view when
| | 04:12 | you're browsing Web pages.
| | 04:13 | That makes things a little easier to
read, but the only thing about Landscape
| | 04:16 | mode is that you might find it more
difficult to comfortably hold the phone or
| | 04:19 | iPod Touch in Landscape than in Portrait.
| | 04:21 | Let's flip it back to Portrait, and
I'll show you a few other ways to make Web
| | 04:24 | pages easier to read.
| | 04:25 | First thing, I'm going to tap the link
to the lynda.com blog at the bottom of
| | 04:29 | the screen, so we have
some more text to look at.
| | 04:31 | So the text in the main portion of
the blog on the left side of the screen
| | 04:35 | is really tiny right now, because Safari
loads pages so you can view thire entire width.
| | 04:39 | Now, as you might expect, you could
pinch out and drag to resize and position
| | 04:42 | the column of text you want to read,
but a much easier and quicker method is to
| | 04:47 | simply double-tap the
column of text you want to read.
| | 04:50 | Just like that, it's resized and
repositioned perfectly on your screen.
| | 04:53 | I think you'll agree that the text
is much easier to read at this size.
| | 04:56 | Double-tapping the text again zooms
back out to the full-page width view again.
| | 05:01 | Now, one of the things about double-
tapping Web pages that I want to mention:
| | 05:04 | When you're zoomed in, double-tapping
near the top or the bottom of the screen
| | 05:08 | will scroll the page up or down.
| | 05:10 | The closer you tap to the top or the
bottom, the more the page will scroll,
| | 05:13 | which is pretty cool.
| | 05:14 | But if you double-tap too close to
the center of the screen, the page will
| | 05:17 | just zoom out again.
| | 05:18 | So, it does take some practice to
figure out exactly where to double-tap to
| | 05:21 | scroll and where to double
-tap to zoom in and out.
| | 05:23 | All right, now let's look at the
buttons across the bottom of the screen.
| | 05:27 | The triangle in the lower left corner
is the Back button, which works just like
| | 05:31 | the Back button in any other Web browser.
| | 05:33 | Tap it once to go back to the previous page.
| | 05:35 | Once you've done that, the
Forward button becomes available.
| | 05:38 | Tap it once to go to the page you were just on.
| | 05:40 | The next two buttons are for activities
like adding bookmarks and viewing your
| | 05:42 | history, which are
a pretty robust set of features.
| | 05:45 | So, we'll look at them in
their own upcoming movie.
| | 05:47 | Final button in the lower right-hand
corner of the screen is the Pages button.
| | 05:51 | Sometimes you want to visit another Web
site or Web page without losing the page
| | 05:54 | you're currently viewing.
| | 05:55 | Just tap the Pages button.
| | 05:57 | Here, you can tap New Page to
generate and open a new blank browser page.
| | 06:00 | I'll tap in the address field,
and let's visit Apple.com.
| | 06:09 | Notice the pages icon now has a little
number 2 in it, indicating that I have
| | 06:12 | two Safari windows open.
| | 06:15 | Another scenario in which you might
want to open a new window is if you want to
| | 06:17 | follow a link on a Web page, but again
without closing the current Web page.
| | 06:21 | I'm just zooming in
a little bit on the page here.
| | 06:23 | So, for example, maybe here on Apple's
page, I want to tap the iPhone button,
| | 06:28 | but I also want to leave
the Apple homepage open.
| | 06:30 | All I have to do is hold down on that link,
and after a second, some buttons appear.
| | 06:35 | Select Open in New Page, and as you
can see that generates a new page and
| | 06:39 | loads the linked page.
| | 06:41 | You can now see that the Pages
button indicates I have three pages open.
| | 06:44 | I can switch back and forth between
my open Web pages by tapping the Pages
| | 06:48 | button and then flicking to the page
I want and then tapping to view it.
| | 06:52 | You can have up to eight pages open at once.
| | 06:55 | Once you reach your eight-page limit,
or if you just want to close the page you
| | 06:58 | no longer want opened, tap the Pages
button, and navigate to the page, and tap
| | 07:03 | the X button to close it.
| | 07:05 | Even if you only have one page open,
you can still tap the Pages button and tap
| | 07:08 | the X button to close it, leaving you
with just a single blank browser page. Okay!
| | 07:12 | So, that's the basics of loading
and browsing Web pages in Safari.
| | 07:15 | In the rest of this chapter, we'll look
at other things you can do while using
| | 07:18 | Safari to surf the Web.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Saving bookmarks and viewing the History list| 00:00 | As with all other Web browsers you can
save your favorite or frequently visited
| | 00:04 | Web pages in Safari as bookmarks,
which lets you load those Web pages with
| | 00:07 | a single tap rather than having to
manually type in their addresses each time.
| | 00:11 | To create a bookmark, first browse
through the page you want to bookmark.
| | 00:13 | In this case, I am on the lynda.com homepage.
| | 00:17 | Tap the Plus button at the bottom of the screen.
| | 00:19 | From the list of option that
appears here, tap Add Bookmark.
| | 00:22 | That opens the Add Bookmark screen.
| | 00:26 | The first field is for
giving your bookmark a name.
| | 00:28 | The text Safari has placed in here
is the title of the current Web page.
| | 00:31 | But in this case this is
probably a little too verbose.
| | 00:33 | Now tap the X button to clear
the field, and then I will type
| | 00:38 | lynda.com homepage.
| | 00:43 | Below the name is the actual
address of the page you are bookmarking.
| | 00:46 | This can't be edited.
| | 00:47 | Notice something happens when I tap it.
| | 00:48 | This is basically just here to confirm
that this is the page you want to save,
| | 00:51 | Below that is where you can decide
which folder to save the bookmark in.
| | 00:55 | Now if you didn't choose to sync your
iPhone or iPod Touch with the version of
| | 00:58 | Safari on your computers through iTunes,
then you only have the Bookmarks folder in here.
| | 01:02 | You can generate new folders here in
Safari on your device, but first let me
| | 01:06 | show you the option in
iTunes that I am talking about.
| | 01:09 | Here in iTunes, with your device
selected, click the Info tab and here's where
| | 01:13 | you will find the option to
check Sync Safari bookmarks.
| | 01:16 | If you are on Windows, you have the
choice of syncing with either your Safari,
| | 01:19 | or Internet Explorer bookmarks.
| | 01:21 | If you check this, then any folders
you create in your browser bookmarks will
| | 01:24 | also appear on your iPhone or iPod Touch.
| | 01:27 | Okay, but for now I am just going to
save this bookmark I am creating in the
| | 01:30 | main Bookmarks folder on my iPhone.
| | 01:31 | So I will tap Save, and that's
all there is to saving a bookmark.
| | 01:36 | To access your bookmarks, tap the book icon.
| | 01:38 | Here you will find all the bookmarks you
have created as well as any folders you
| | 01:42 | sync from Safari, or Internet Explorer
if you are on Windows, on your computer.
| | 01:46 | Towards the bottom of this list you
will also find a small selection of
| | 01:48 | bookmarks that are included by default
in Safari like Apple, Yahoo, Google, as
| | 01:53 | well as bookmarks to the mobile
versions of Apple's iPhone User Guide.
| | 01:56 | To load any bookmarked page, just tap
it. In a moment the page comes up and
| | 02:01 | that's all there is to that.
| | 02:03 | Now, as your bookmarks list starts
to grow, you might want to do some
| | 02:05 | housekeeping now and then. Just tap
the Bookmarks button and then tap Edit.
| | 02:10 | Now you are free to rearrange the
order of you Bookmarks list by dragging the
| | 02:14 | handles next to any
bookmark up or down in the list.
| | 02:19 | Notice the ones you can't move are the
ones that come by default on your device,
| | 02:22 | for instance Apple or Google.
| | 02:24 | Those always stay at the
bottom of your Bookmarks list.
| | 02:27 | And if you want to delete any bookmarks,
just tap the red delete symbol next to
| | 02:30 | it and then tap Delete.
| | 02:33 | This is also where you can create
new folders to organize your bookmarks.
| | 02:36 | Just tap New Folder, and may be I want
to create a folder called Reference to
| | 02:40 | store Web pages I use to look up information.
| | 02:43 | I will just type the work Reference
in the Title field, and if I wanted to
| | 02:48 | put this folder inside another folder,
I could tap Bookmarks to navigate
| | 02:51 | into another folder.
| | 02:52 | But in this case I do want this to be
in the main folder, so I'll go back to the
| | 02:55 | Edit Folder area and tap Done.
| | 02:59 | Now I have a Reference folder
at the top of my Bookmarks list.
| | 03:02 | You could also tap any bookmark to
rename it or to move it to another folder.
| | 03:06 | For instance, I will tap my lynda.com
bookmark and really there is no reason for this to
| | 03:09 | say lynda.com homepage.
| | 03:11 | Let's just make it lynda.com.
| | 03:13 | I will tap Bookmarks again to go back
to my Folders, and I will select the
| | 03:17 | Reference folder I just created.
| | 03:19 | So now this bookmark is going to be
stored in the Reference folder, and I will
| | 03:22 | tap Done, and I will tap Done
again on the main Bookmarks page.
| | 03:26 | And now if I access my References
folder, I can see my lynda.com bookmark I
| | 03:31 | stored here. Pretty cool.
| | 03:32 | Let's tap Bookmarks again to go
back to the main Bookmarks list.
| | 03:37 | Now the other folder you will
find in here by default is History.
| | 03:40 | And the like the history list you
will find in all other Web browsers,
| | 03:43 | this gives you a list of all
the pages you recently visited.
| | 03:46 | The top of the list shows you the
pages you have most recently visited today.
| | 03:49 | And if you scroll down, you will
find folders that have been generated
| | 03:52 | containing links to the pages you
visited earlier today as well as to the pages
| | 03:55 | you visited prior to today.
| | 03:57 | This is really convenient to have when
you want to return to a page you visited
| | 04:00 | earlier but just can't remember the address.
| | 04:02 | In that case open Bookmarks and
browse through your History list.
| | 04:05 | Of course, there may be reasons you
might not want Safari to store list of
| | 04:08 | the pages you visited.
| | 04:09 | I will leave those reasons to your imagination.
| | 04:10 | But you can erase your
History list by tapping Clear.
| | 04:13 | Notice that you have no
options to clear just a single entry.
| | 04:17 | If you tap Clear History, it will erase
every item in your History list as well
| | 04:20 | as your Google Search History.
| | 04:22 | Let's cancel that for a moment.
| | 04:24 | What I mean by your Google Search
History is that Safari also remembers your
| | 04:27 | most recently searched terms.
| | 04:29 | So if I close Bookmarks by tapping Done
and then tap in the Search field and
| | 04:34 | type the letter l, notice that
Lynda Weinman appears as a suggestion.
| | 04:39 | That's because I did a search
for Lynda Weinman previously.
| | 04:42 | So again clearing your History also
clears out these Google Searches, which again
| | 04:45 | may be a good or bad thing.
| | 04:47 | Now before you wrap this movie up, let
me show you one more way to clear history.
| | 04:50 | I am going to press the Home button to
close Safari, and now I will go in to
| | 04:54 | Settings, and I am going to find Safari
Settings, and if I scroll down here,
| | 05:00 | I will find the option to
Clear History from here as well.
| | 05:03 | This is identical to
clearing your history in Safari.
| | 05:06 | What we will also find here are the
buttons to Clear Cookies and Clear Cache.
| | 05:10 | Cookies are small pieces of data that
Web sites store in your browser usually to
| | 05:14 | personalize your experience.
| | 05:16 | That's how sites like Amazon.com can
display your name at the top of their page
| | 05:19 | when you visit them.
| | 05:20 | If you have an account with Amazon,
they placed the cookie in your browser so
| | 05:23 | the Web site knows it's you
when you visit the next time.
| | 05:26 | Clearing Cookies stops that from happening.
| | 05:28 | The browser's cache is
saved data from Web sites.
| | 05:31 | That includes things like buttons,
banners, and other images that are stored on
| | 05:34 | your device, so they don't have to
downloaded each time you visit the site.
| | 05:38 | If you find the site you are looking
at is behaving or looking strange, you
| | 05:41 | can come in here and try tapping
Clear Cache to remove the stored data from
| | 05:44 | Safari, making it so it has to
download fresh data from the Web site, which
| | 05:48 | could clear up your problems.
| | 05:49 | Okay, so there's your lesson on
bookmarks, history, and clearing your Safari
| | 05:52 | history, cookies, and cache.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Saving images| 00:00 | Occasionally you might come across an
image on a Web page that you'd like to
| | 00:03 | save on your iPhone or iPod Touch.
| | 00:05 | For example, I am on the Sports page of
the New York Times Web site and maybe I
| | 00:08 | want to keep a copy of this photo on my iPhone.
| | 00:10 | To do so I just hold down on it and
after a second several options appear.
| | 00:16 | Now because this particular image is
also a link, I see the option to open,
| | 00:20 | which means I want to follow this link
to the page it's linked to, or to open it
| | 00:23 | in a new page, which again follows a
link but opens a new browser window.
| | 00:27 | If the image you hold down on isn't a
link, you wont' see those first two options.
| | 00:31 | But the one I am interested in here
is Save Image, so I will tap that.
| | 00:34 | And what's happened is that a copy of
that image has now been saved my Photo
| | 00:37 | Library on my iPhone.
| | 00:38 | I will press the Home button to
close Safari and open my Photo Library.
| | 00:44 | And here in my Camera Roll, I find the
image. It doesn't get much easier than that.
| | 00:48 | Let's go back to Safari.
| | 00:53 | I will hold down on this image again,
and this time I will choose Copy.
| | 00:58 | Copy is useful if you want to place the
image into another application or maybe
| | 01:01 | send it in an e-mail, but there is
one thing you have to be aware of.
| | 01:04 | For example, I will open Mail and I will
create a new message, and I'll double tap
| | 01:11 | in the body of the message and select Paste.
| | 01:16 | Now notice what's happened here is
that Web address of the page the image was
| | 01:19 | linking to got pasted into my message.
| | 01:21 | That's not what I wanted.
| | 01:22 | I wanted a copy of the image here, but
because the image is also a link on the
| | 01:26 | Web page, I can't do it by copying and pasting.
| | 01:29 | What I have to do in this case is first
save image to my Photo Library, which I
| | 01:32 | already did, go back and
look in my Photo Library.
| | 01:39 | There is the image I saved, and I can
tap the button in the lower left-hand
| | 01:43 | corner and here is where I can
choose E-mail Photo, which generates a new
| | 01:49 | message and places the photo as an attachment.
| | 01:51 | Again, this the only way to
send a photo that's a link.
| | 01:54 | You can't do it directly from Safari.
| | 01:56 | But if the photo isn't a link,
Copy works the way you would expect.
| | 01:59 | Let's cancel this message and go back to Safari.
| | 02:04 | Here I'll follow the link to the
article it's linking to by tapping it.
| | 02:10 | So the photo on this page is not a link.
| | 02:12 | Notice when I hold down on it,
I only get the two options to either save
| | 02:17 | the image or copy it.
| | 02:19 | Let's choose Copy, and now I will go
back to Mail and in the message I was
| | 02:25 | previously working on,
I will double tap and choose Paste.
| | 02:29 | And you can see now the
image itself gets pasted in.
| | 02:34 | So that's how you save images you come
across in Safari and those are some of
| | 02:38 | the options and workarounds you have
for mailing the images to someone else or
| | 02:41 | for pasting the images into other applications.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Filling out forms and using auto-fill| 00:00 | Because browsing the Web on your
iPhone or iPod Touch is so similar an
| | 00:03 | experience to browsing on your computer,
you'll probably find yourself visiting
| | 00:07 | and using sites you might not otherwise
attempt on other mobile devices, such as
| | 00:10 | your banking Web site or online stores.
| | 00:12 | When it comes to ordering items or
managing various bank or credit card
| | 00:16 | accounts, you often have to fill in
various form fields, which frankly can get
| | 00:19 | a little tedious and time-
consuming on the iPhone keyboard.
| | 00:22 | Fortunately, like its full-fledged
counterpart on your computer, Safari for the
| | 00:26 | iPhone and iPod Touch includes an
AutoFill feature, which fills in your name,
| | 00:30 | address, and passwords
automatically when you tap in form fields.
| | 00:33 | To activate the AutoFill feature, go to
Settings > Safari, and then tap AutoFill.
| | 00:40 | Here, you have two options to turn on and off.
| | 00:43 | The first is Use Contact Info.
| | 00:46 | By tapping it on, you're telling
Safari to use the contact information for
| | 00:49 | yourself in your list of contacts.
| | 00:51 | Make sure it's your name that
appears in the My Info area.
| | 00:54 | If it doesn't, tap My Info, which opens
up your contact list, and then find your
| | 00:59 | personal info and tap it.
| | 01:02 | As long as you leave Use Contact Info
on, anytime you tap into a field where
| | 01:06 | you have to enter your name, address,
phone number and so on, you'll be able to
| | 01:09 | tap an AutoFill button, which will
fill out the form with the info from your
| | 01:12 | contact information.
| | 01:13 | We'll see this in action in a moment.
| | 01:15 | The second option here is Names & Passwords.
| | 01:18 | With this option on, Safari will offer
to remember names and passwords you enter
| | 01:22 | on Web sites, so you won't have to
type them manually again in the future.
| | 01:25 | So, let's leave both of
these options on for now.
| | 01:28 | I'll press the Home button to
close Settings and now I'll open Safari.
| | 01:31 | Here, I have a form at lynda.com for
signing up for a promotional pass to the
| | 01:35 | online training library.
| | 01:36 | As you can see, there are
several fields to fill out here.
| | 01:38 | I'll tap in the First Name field.
| | 01:42 | Notice in addition to the keyboard
appearing, above it I have some buttons
| | 01:45 | that include AutoFill. I'll tap AutoFill.
| | 01:50 | Just like that, most of the
information has been completed.
| | 01:54 | Conveniently, the fields that Safari
fills out for you are highlighted in
| | 01:57 | yellow, so you can make sure the
information went into the correct fields.
| | 02:01 | If you need to change anything, just
tap into the field you need to edit.
| | 02:04 | You could also use the Previous and Next
buttons to jump from field to field, so
| | 02:08 | you don't have to constantly tap
the fields before you type in them.
| | 02:10 | Again, the information that's filled
out here is the information from your
| | 02:15 | contacts, so only the info that you have
in contacts can be used to autofill a form.
| | 02:19 | Now, let's look at the Names
& Passwords feature in action.
| | 02:22 | I have the Log In page for Twitter open
on another page, so let's switch to that.
| | 02:26 | Here, I need to enter my username and
password to access my Twitter account.
| | 02:29 | When I tap Go, I'm asked by Safari
if I want to store this information.
| | 02:33 | You want to tap Yes to accept, Never
for this Website, which will set it so
| | 02:38 | Safari will never bug you to remember
this password again, or Not Now if you
| | 02:41 | don't want to save the username and
password at this time, but want the option
| | 02:44 | to do so in the future. I'll tap Not Now.
| | 02:49 | If you do have Safari save passwords
for you, you should probably be cautious
| | 02:52 | about which sites you allow.
| | 02:53 | If your iPhone or iPod Touch is lost or
stolen, you probably don't want anyone
| | 02:57 | being able to access your
bank account info automatically.
| | 03:00 | Also, be sure to check out the movies
in the chapter on keeping your device safe,
| | 03:03 | especially the movie on passcode-
protecting your phone, if you intend on
| | 03:06 | storing the passwords to
sensitive sites on your device.
| | 03:09 | But for non-sensitive sites,
storing your login information could be a
| | 03:12 | major convenience and save you the
time of having to type your login
| | 03:14 | information manually each time.
| | 03:16 | Now, I also want to mention here that
the Name & Password AutoFill is very
| | 03:19 | inconsistent as of right now.
| | 03:21 | Sometimes, it will offer to save your
info; other times it won't pop up at all.
| | 03:24 | So, don't think your phone or iPod is
broken if it doesn't offer to autofill.
| | 03:28 | Sometimes, for some
reason, it just doesn't work.
| | 03:30 | Now, that said, if you ever change your
mind about which items you want Safari
| | 03:33 | to remember, return to your
Settings, go to Safari, tap AutoFill.
| | 03:41 | This is also where you can tap Clear All,
which will cause Safari to forget all
| | 03:45 | of the names and passwords you
previously had to remember, thereby leaving your
| | 03:47 | iPhone or iPod Touch clear
of any sensitive passwords.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating Web Clips| 00:00 | In a previous movie, we looked at how
to bookmark the Web pages you visit most
| | 00:03 | frequently, which is a convenient way
to visit those pages without having to
| | 00:07 | type in their full addresses
each time you want to view them.
| | 00:09 | But that still requires opening
Safari, opening your Bookmarks list, and
| | 00:13 | tapping the bookmark. Come on!
| | 00:14 | That's three separate steps.
| | 00:15 | There might be certain Web pages you
visit every hour or every of couple minutes.
| | 00:19 | If that's the case, you're a prime
candidate to use the Web Clips feature.
| | 00:23 | Web Clips let you place a custom icon
representing your favorite Web page right
| | 00:26 | onto your home screen and when tapped,
takes you right to that Web page.
| | 00:30 | Currently, I'm on the lynda.com blog page,
and I want to make this into a Web Clip.
| | 00:34 | Now, one of the very cool things about
Web Clips is that you can set up the zoom
| | 00:37 | level for the part of the page
that you want to make into the clip.
| | 00:40 | You can have the page completely zoomed
out like I have here, and when I tap my
| | 00:43 | Web clip this is what I'll see, but
maybe the part of the site you're interested
| | 00:47 | in is only on one
particular portion of the page.
| | 00:49 | Maybe it's your local sports team stats
displayed in the corner of the page or
| | 00:53 | maybe it's the weekend
weather on some other page.
| | 00:56 | In this example, I want to make sure I'm
zoomed into the column of blog text, so
| | 00:59 | I don't have to zoom in
each time I open the blog.
| | 01:01 | I'm going to double tap to zoom in on
my column, and I'm going to position this
| | 01:05 | so that the title of the first
article is flush to the top of the screen.
| | 01:08 | So that's how I want my page to be
displayed when I tap my Web Clip icon.
| | 01:12 | So to do this, I'm going to tap the plus
button and here I'll tap Add to Home Screen.
| | 01:16 | Now this screen gives your
Web clip a short concise title.
| | 01:20 | I'm going to clear the field by pressing
the X button, and I'll call this lynda blog.
| | 01:25 | Notice we also see a preview of what
the icon we're creating will look like.
| | 01:31 | Now this might not be the most
appropriate image for your icon, but
| | 01:34 | unfortunately, there's not a way to change it.
| | 01:36 | The image here is based on the
appearance of the screen when you tap the Add
| | 01:38 | to Home Screen button.
| | 01:40 | So now, I'll tap Add and just like
that, the icon is added to the first
| | 01:45 | available space on my screens, and when
I tap it I'm taken right to the view of
| | 01:50 | the page we were just looking at.
| | 01:53 | So that's pretty much the fastest way
to open a Web page or a portion of a Web
| | 01:57 | page that you frequently visit.
| | 01:58 | If you ever want to get rid of a Web
clip, just hold down on its icon or any
| | 02:02 | other app's icon for that matter to
enter into the Organizational mode.
| | 02:06 | Then just tap the X icon and confirm
that you do want to delete the Web clip.
| | 02:12 | Press the Home button to
leave Organizational mode.
| | 02:14 | Also, there's no way to edit a Web clip.
| | 02:16 | So if the page you created the clip
for changes its layout or if you want to
| | 02:19 | save a clip for a different portion of
the page, you have to delete your current
| | 02:23 | clip and create a new one from scratch.
| | 02:24 | But as you just saw, that's very easy to do.
| | 02:27 | So there you have the Web Clip
feature, a very quick way to load your
| | 02:30 | favorite Web pages.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Internet tethering (Mac)| 00:00 | Surfing the web from your iPhone is
great, but without question, sometimes you
| | 00:03 | just need to use your regular
computer to access the Internet.
| | 00:06 | Maybe you have a file you need e-mail
from a computer, or maybe a site you're
| | 00:09 | trying to view is flash-based
and not viewable on your iPhone.
| | 00:12 | Of course, you won't always be able
to find Internet access for your computer,
| | 00:16 | especially when you're on the road.
| | 00:17 | If you need to be connected and online
at a moment's notice, or if you just want
| | 00:21 | the same convenience of your iPhone, in
terms of being able to get online over
| | 00:24 | your cellular provider's data network,
then you might want to look into the
| | 00:27 | iPhone's tethering capability.
| | 00:29 | In a nutshell, tethering your iPhone
means you're sharing your iPhone's Internet
| | 00:32 | connection with your computer.
| | 00:34 | And obviously, this is an iPhone-only
feature, since the iPod touch does not
| | 00:37 | connect to cellular networks.
| | 00:39 | Once tethering is enabled, you can then
share your iPhone's Internet connection,
| | 00:42 | either via USB or Bluetooth.
| | 00:45 | We'll look at both options, but
first let's see how to enable tethering.
| | 00:48 | On your iPhone, go into Settings >
General > Network, and here you'll
| | 00:54 | find Internet Tethering.
| | 00:55 | Now here's what currently happens when
you tap Set Up Internet Tethering, and
| | 00:58 | you're in the United States.
| | 01:00 | AT&T charges an extra fee to enable
tethering, so you see this dialog box
| | 01:03 | telling you to call them or log in to
their website to add the tethering option
| | 01:07 | to your calling plan.
| | 01:08 | Currently, this will run
you about an extra 20 bucks.
| | 01:10 | In some countries, tethering is built
into the calling plan, and you won't need
| | 01:13 | to turn on the service or pay anything extra.
| | 01:15 | Now, if you're not sure if you have
tethering or not, you can contact your
| | 01:18 | provider, but here in the US, we have
tell AT&T to turn on our service and
| | 01:22 | add it to our bill.
| | 01:23 | Also, in the US, be aware the data
transferred over your phone to your computer
| | 01:27 | counts against your monthly data
allotment, so you probably don't want to start
| | 01:30 | transferring tons of files or
streaming lots of movies over your computer
| | 01:33 | through your iPhone.
| | 01:34 | Okay, so those of the warnings, but
once you've enabled tethering, return to
| | 01:37 | your network settings
and tap Internet Tethering.
| | 01:41 | And what you'll find here
is a simple On/Off switch.
| | 01:44 | Just tap the switch to turn on tethering.
| | 01:46 | If you currently don't have Bluetooth
turned on, you'll see the message asking
| | 01:49 | you if you want to turn Bluetooth on or
if you just want to use USB tethering.
| | 01:53 | With Bluetooth on, you get both options,
so in this case, I'm going to turn it on.
| | 01:57 | That's all there is to enabling tethering.
| | 01:58 | Now you just have to decide whether to
tether to your computer via Bluetooth or USB.
| | 02:03 | Connecting over Bluetooth is nice
because no cables or wires are involved.
| | 02:07 | This lets you just open your computer
and connect to the Internet through your
| | 02:09 | iPhone without taking your
iPhone out of your pocket.
| | 02:12 | If your phone is running low on
battery power, you might want to plug it into
| | 02:15 | your computer via the USB port, which
then gives you the benefit of keeping your
| | 02:18 | iPhone charged while using
it as an Internet connection.
| | 02:21 | Let's take a look at how to use
tethering for both USB and Bluetooth.
| | 02:24 | We'll start with Bluetooth.
| | 02:25 | So first, make sure Internet
tethering is turned on, as it is here.
| | 02:29 | Then go back to your main Settings and
tap Bluetooth and make sure it's turned
| | 02:32 | on, which in this case it is since
we just turned it on a moment ago.
| | 02:35 | Now we've talked before on how to set
up Bluetooth devices, like a headset, with
| | 02:38 | your iPhone, which involves pairing
your device with your phone, and the same
| | 02:42 | thing is required here.
| | 02:43 | In order for your computer and phone to
work together, they have to be paired.
| | 02:46 | If you don't see a computer listed here
under the devices, you'll have to pair them.
| | 02:50 | Now, in order to pair with your computer,
you have to leave the Bluetooth screen
| | 02:53 | open on your iPhone, so
your computer will see it.
| | 02:56 | So here on my Mac, I'm going to go to
System Preferences and then click Bluetooth.
| | 03:02 | You're only going to see this Bluetooth
Preference pane if you have a Mac with
| | 03:04 | Bluetooth capabilities.
| | 03:06 | If you have any Bluetooth devices
paired with the Mac already, you'll see them
| | 03:09 | listed here, in which case you'll
click the Plus button to add a new device.
| | 03:12 | I don't have any added right now, so
I'm going to click Set Up New Device.
| | 03:17 | Your Mac will then scan the
Bluetooth frequency range, and you should see
| | 03:20 | your iPhone appear.
| | 03:23 | Just select it and then click Continue.
| | 03:26 | You'll then be prompted with a numerical code.
| | 03:28 | In some cases, you'll be asked to
confirm this code on your iPhone by typing it
| | 03:31 | into a keypad that
appears on your iPhone's screen.
| | 03:34 | In other cases, you might see a
message like this one, telling you to just
| | 03:37 | visually confirm that the number on your
iPhone's screen matches the one shown on your Mac.
| | 03:41 | This is a security measure to keep just
anyone from connecting to your phone via Bluetooth.
| | 03:46 | As long as the number on your iPhone
matches the one on your Mac, whether
| | 03:49 | you have to type it in or just
visually confirm it, you'll be able to pair
| | 03:52 | your devices together.
| | 03:54 | And the first time you connect your
phone your computer, you'll see this dialog
| | 03:56 | box telling you that the
Bluetooth device has not been set up.
| | 03:59 | Just click Network Preferences.
| | 04:01 | That adds the Bluetooth PAN to
your list of network devices.
| | 04:05 | In case you're wondering, PAN
stands for Personal Area Network.
| | 04:08 | And from here, just select it, make
sure your iPhone is the one selected, under
| | 04:11 | Device, and then you can click
Connect to connect your Internet connection.
| | 04:16 | But to make it so you don't have to come
into Network Preferences every time you
| | 04:18 | want to tether, click Show All, then go
back to your Bluetooth preferences, and
| | 04:23 | if it's not already checked, I suggest
checking Show Bluetooth status in menu
| | 04:26 | bar, which puts the Bluetooth
icon up here in my Menu bar.
| | 04:29 | This makes it easy to tether with
your iPhone, and you can close System
| | 04:32 | Preferences at this time.
| | 04:33 | I'll go ahead and close the
Bluetooth Setup Assistant.
| | 04:37 | So as long as Bluetooth is turned on on
both your phone and your computer, you can
| | 04:40 | connect to the Internet at anytime by
clicking the Bluetooth icon in your Menu
| | 04:43 | bar, selecting your phone, and
then choosing Connect to Network.
| | 04:48 | In a few seconds, you should see a blue
bar appear at the top of your iPhone's
| | 04:50 | screen, indicating tethering is in action.
| | 04:53 | This blue bar will be here as long as
your computer is tethered to your phone,
| | 04:56 | but you can continue using your phone,
as always, by taking calls, playing
| | 04:59 | games, or checking email.
| | 05:01 | And back on the computer, you can now
surf the Internet, check your e-mail, and
| | 05:04 | do any other web-related activities you need to.
| | 05:06 | Of course, since you're connected
through your iTunes network, you'll be
| | 05:09 | getting approximately the same speed
as your iPhone does, so don't expect
| | 05:12 | blazing-fast Internet speeds.
| | 05:13 | Still, it's pretty cool to be able to get
online wireless-ly through your phone like this.
| | 05:17 | All right. Now, let's see how to tether through USB.
| | 05:19 | I'm going to disconnect Bluetooth by
clicking the icon in the Menu bar, choosing
| | 05:24 | my iPhone, and choosing Disconnect from Network.
| | 05:26 | Now, tethering is still turned on on my
iPhone, and I'm going to connect it to my
| | 05:29 | Mac now by plugging it into the USB cable.
| | 05:32 | And again, the first time you do this,
you'll see this message telling you you
| | 05:35 | need to set up your network device.
| | 05:37 | So again, I'm going to
click Network Preferences.
| | 05:39 | And that adds iPhone USB to your
list of network devices. Click apply.
| | 05:46 | It may take several seconds, but
eventually you'll see the light next to it turn
| | 05:49 | green, telling you you're connected
to the Internet through your iPhone, at
| | 05:52 | which point you can now
start surfing around as usual.
| | 05:54 | So there really isn't
anything to tethering through USB.
| | 05:57 | Just make sure Internet tethering is
turned on on your iPhone, plug it in via
| | 06:00 | the USB cable, and in a few
moments you should be online.
| | 06:03 | But I should also warn you that if
Internet tethering is turned on, your Mac
| | 06:07 | always connect to the Internet through
your iPhone whenever you plug it in via USB.
| | 06:10 | It's not like having to choose to
connect via Bluetooth by having to go through
| | 06:13 | a series of menus here.
| | 06:15 | When he plug in your iPhone over USB
and tethering is turned on, you'll be
| | 06:18 | connected to the Internet through that.
| | 06:20 | This could potentially be an issue if
you just plug in your iPhone to sync with
| | 06:23 | iTunes and then start surfing around
eating up your data plan, thinking you using
| | 06:27 | your regular network
connection over Ethernet or Airport.
| | 06:29 | Now, as long as you are connected to
the Internet through either Ethernet or
| | 06:32 | Airport - and that's the top item in the list
here - your computer will use that connection.
| | 06:37 | It's only when you don't have any other
Internet connection that your computer
| | 06:40 | will then default to your iPhone USB connection.
| | 06:43 | But in general, it's a good idea to turn
off tethering when you're not using it.
| | 06:46 | Something else you might want to do is
to go back into Network Preferences here,
| | 06:49 | and then click the Gear icon
and choose Set Service Order.
| | 06:55 | This lets you set the priority order for
the ways you can connect to the Internet.
| | 06:58 | So, for example, you might want to drag
iPhone USB down to the very bottom of the list.
| | 07:02 | That way, if you're plugged in to your
network via Ethernet cable or connected
| | 07:05 | to wireless network through Airport
WiFi, your Mac will use those faster
| | 07:09 | connections first and only connect
through your iPhone when it can't detect
| | 07:12 | Internet connections through any of the
other methods listed above your iPhone.
| | 07:17 | So, that's how you tether your
iPhone to your computer through Bluetooth
| | 07:20 | and USB.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Internet tethering (Windows)| 00:00 | Surfing the web from your iPhone is
great, but without question, sometimes you
| | 00:03 | just need to use your regular
computer to access the Internet.
| | 00:06 | Maybe you have a file you need to
e-mail from your computer. Maybe a site you're
| | 00:09 | trying to view is flash-based
and not viewable on your iPhone.
| | 00:12 | Of course, you won't always be able to
find Internet access for your computer,
| | 00:15 | especially when you're on the road.
| | 00:17 | If you need to be connected and online
at a moment's notice, or just want the
| | 00:20 | same convenience your iPhone has,
in terms of being able to get online over
| | 00:23 | your cellular provider's data network,
then you might want to look in to the
| | 00:26 | iPhone's tethering capability.
| | 00:28 | In a nutshell, tethering your iPhone
means you're sharing your iPhone's Internet
| | 00:32 | connection with your computer.
| | 00:33 | And obviously, this is an iPhone-only
feature since the iPod touch does not
| | 00:36 | connect to cellular networks.
| | 00:38 | Once tethering is enabled, you can then
share your iPhone's Internet connection,
| | 00:41 | either via USB or Bluetooth.
| | 00:43 | We'll look at both options, but
first let's see how to enable tethering.
| | 00:47 | On your iPhone, go into Settings >
General > Network, and here you'll
| | 00:52 | find Internet Tethering.
| | 00:53 | Now here's what currently happens when
you tap Set Up Internet Tethering, and
| | 00:57 | you're in the United States.
| | 00:58 | AT&T charges extra an fee to enable
tethering, so you'll see this dialog box
| | 01:02 | telling you to call them or log in to
their website to add the tethering option
| | 01:06 | to your calling plan.
| | 01:07 | Currently, this will run
you about an extra 20 bucks.
| | 01:09 | In some countries, tethering is
built into the calling plan, and you won't need
| | 01:12 | to turn on the service or pay anything extra.
| | 01:15 | if you're not sure if you have
tethering or not, you can contact your
| | 01:17 | provider, but here in the US, we have tell AT&T
to turn on our service and add it to our bill.
| | 01:22 | Also, in the US, be aware the data
transferred over your phone to your computer
| | 01:26 | counts against your monthly data
allotment, so you so you probably don't want to
| | 01:29 | start transferring tons of files or
streaming lots of movies over your computer
| | 01:32 | through your iPhone.
| | 01:33 | Okay, so those are the warnings, but
once you've enabled tethering, return the
| | 01:37 | Network Settings and tap Internet Tethering.
| | 01:39 | And we'll find here is a simple On/Off switch.
| | 01:42 | Just tap the switch to turn on
tethering, and that's all there is to
| | 01:44 | enabling tethering.
| | 01:46 | Now you have to decide whether to
tether to your computer via Bluetooth or USB.
| | 01:50 | Connecting over Bluetooth is nice
because no cables or wires are involved.
| | 01:54 | This lets you just open your computer
and connect to the Internet through your
| | 01:56 | iPhone while leaving your iPhone in your pocket.
| | 01:59 | If your phone is running low on
battery power, you might want to plug it into
| | 02:02 | your computer via the USB port, which
then gives you the benefit of keeping your
| | 02:05 | iPhone charged while using
it for its Internet connection.
| | 02:08 | Let's take a look at how to use
tethering through both USB and Bluetooth.
| | 02:11 | We're going to start with Bluetooth.
| | 02:12 | So first, make sure Internet
tethering is turned on, as it is here.
| | 02:15 | Then go back to your main Settings and
tap Bluetooth and make sure it's turned
| | 02:19 | on. Now we've talked before on how to
set up Bluetooth devices like a headset
| | 02:23 | with your iPhone, which involves
pairing your device with your phone, and the
| | 02:27 | same thing is required here.
| | 02:28 | In order for your computer and phone to
work together, they need to be paired.
| | 02:32 | If you don't see a computer listed under
the devices here, you'll have to pair them.
| | 02:35 | Here in Windows 7, click the Start
button and then choose Devices and Printers. At the
| | 02:42 | top of the window that
opens, click Add a Device.
| | 02:44 | Your computer will then scan the
Bluetooth frequency range, and you should
| | 02:48 | see your iPhone appear.
| | 02:50 | Select your phone and then click Next.
| | 02:52 | Now, in this dialog box, you're asked
to choose a method for confirming the
| | 02:57 | pairing of the computer and iPhone.
| | 02:58 | This is sort of a generic dialog box for
all Bluetooth devices, but when pairing
| | 03:02 | with an iPhone, chose the first option,
Create a pairing code for me, which
| | 03:06 | generates a code onscreen that
you then type into your iPhone.
| | 03:09 | This is a security measure to keep just
anyone from connecting to your phone via Bluetooth.
| | 03:13 | Once you've typed in the code, you'll
see a message saying your device has been
| | 03:15 | successfully added to the computer, you
might see some drivers being installed,
| | 03:19 | and then you can click Close.
| | 03:21 | So now my iPhone and my computer are paired.
| | 03:23 | I now have to let the computer know
to use it as an Internet connection.
| | 03:26 | Go ahead and close that window and
I'll go to Start > Control Panels, and in
| | 03:31 | here I'm going to click
View network status and tasks.
| | 03:34 | And in the Network Sharing Center
here, I'm going to click Set up a new
| | 03:37 | connection or network.
| | 03:40 | And here's where you'll find Connect to
Bluetooth personal area network, or PAN.
| | 03:43 | So I'll select that and click Next.
| | 03:47 | Then select your iPhone
from your list of devices.
| | 03:49 | Now I currently have this little alert
icon next to my iPhone, but that's just
| | 03:52 | because I don't have the latest driver
installed for my computer's Bluetooth.
| | 03:55 | It has nothing to do with the phone,
so I can safely ignore that for now.
| | 03:59 | So with my iPhone selected, I'm going
to click Connect using and then choose
| | 04:02 | the only option here: Access point.
| | 04:04 | I see this message saying
that it's connecting and that the
| | 04:07 | connection's successful.
| | 04:09 | In a few seconds, you should see a
blue bar appear at the top of your iPhone's
| | 04:12 | screen, indicating tethering is in
action. This blue bar will be here as long as
| | 04:16 | your computer is tethered to your phone,
but you can continue using your phone,
| | 04:19 | as always, by taking calls, playing
games, checking email, or whatever.
| | 04:23 | And back on the computer, you can now
surf the Internet, check your e-mail, and
| | 04:25 | do any other web-related activities you need to.
| | 04:27 | Of course, since you're connected
through your iTunes network, you'll be
| | 04:30 | getting approximately the same speed
as your iPhone does, so don't expect
| | 04:33 | blazing-fast Internet speeds.
| | 04:34 | Still, it's pretty cool to be able to get
online wireless-ly through your phone like this.
| | 04:39 | To disconnect, you can either turn off
tethering on your phone or go back to the
| | 04:42 | Network Sharing Center.
| | 04:43 | You'll find that your Bluetooth
network is listed here, under network.
| | 04:47 | It's a public network, and you
can see that it's the Bluetooth
| | 04:49 | network connection.
| | 04:50 | You can click that and choose Disconnect.
| | 04:54 | In the future, when you want to reconnect,
I suggest clicking the Bluetooth icon
| | 04:57 | in the taskbar and choosing
Join a Personal Area Network.
| | 05:03 | Then you can again select your phone
and choose Connect using > Access point.
| | 05:07 | But I won't do that right now.
| | 05:09 | The point is there's no need to go
through the pairing process again since you
| | 05:12 | already did it once.
| | 05:13 | Okay, so that's tethering through Bluetooth.
| | 05:15 | Now let's take a look at how it works
through USB, but I first also need to
| | 05:18 | mention that you have to have iTunes
installed on your computer before USB
| | 05:21 | tethering will work.
| | 05:22 | You should already have iTunes
installed if you have an iPhone, but if not, go
| | 05:26 | to apple.com/iTunes and download a
copy before you attempt USB tethering.
| | 05:30 | Now tethering is still turned on on my
iPhone, but I'm going to connect it by
| | 05:33 | plugging it in via my USB dock
cable, so I'll go ahead and do that.
| | 05:37 | You may or may not see some messages
about drivers being installed, depending on
| | 05:39 | whether you've connected your phone to
your computer via USB before, but you can
| | 05:43 | see, iTunes has opened, and there's my phone.
| | 05:45 | I'm just going to go ahead
and minimize iTunes for now.
| | 05:47 | I'm also going to ignore the
AutoPlay window, since I'm not interested in
| | 05:51 | grabbing photos off my phone
right now. But guess what?
| | 05:53 | That's all there is to
setting up USB tethering on Windows.
| | 05:56 | Basically just make sure tethering on
the iPhone is turned on, plug it in via
| | 05:59 | USB, and you are connected. Don't believe me?
| | 06:01 | Well, look right here.
| | 06:02 | I'm in my Network and Sharing center,
I've got my Public network again, and I
| | 06:05 | can see Local Area Connection 2.
| | 06:07 | I'm going to click Change adapter settings.
| | 06:11 | You can see here I have Local Area
Connection 2, and you can see that it's
| | 06:13 | the Apple mobile device Ethernet.
| | 06:15 | So that's what it will look like
when you connect your iPhone via USB
| | 06:18 | when you're tethering.
| | 06:19 | And again, your iPhone should have
the glowing blue bar at the top of its
| | 06:22 | screen, and you can continue to
use it as normal while tethered.
| | 06:25 | So really, there isn't
anything to tethering through USB.
| | 06:28 | Again, just make sure Internet
Tethering is turned on, plug it in via USB, and
| | 06:31 | in a few moments you should be online.
| | 06:33 | But I should also warn you that if
Internet tethering is turned on, your
| | 06:36 | computer always connect to the Internet
through your iPhone whenever you plug it in via USB.
| | 06:40 | It's not like having to choose to
connect via Bluetooth, where you to go through
| | 06:44 | a series of windows and menus.
| | 06:46 | When you plug in your phone via
USB, your computer will tether.
| | 06:48 | This could potentially be an issue if
you just plug in your iPhone to sync it
| | 06:51 | with iTunes, and then you end up
surfing around eating up your data plan,
| | 06:55 | thinking you're using your regular
never connection over Ethernet or WiFi.
| | 06:59 | So in general, it's a good idea to turn
off tethering when you're not using it,
| | 07:02 | or if you're not syncing your iPhone
with your computer, unplug the USB cable.
| | 07:06 | Something else you might want to do is
come back to this Network Connections
| | 07:08 | window, and with this window open,
press the Alt key on your keyboard to
| | 07:12 | reveal the File menu.
| | 07:13 | Then go to Advanced and click Advanced Settings.
| | 07:18 | Here, under Adapters and Bindings,
you can set the order into which your
| | 07:20 | computer connects to its installed devices.
| | 07:22 | You can see Local Area Connection 2 is
the first installation right now, so I
| | 07:25 | might want to move that down under
Local Area Connection, the first one, which
| | 07:30 | is actually my computer's Ethernet connection.
| | 07:32 | That way if your computer detects an
Internet connection over your Ethernet
| | 07:35 | port or your wireless card, if you
have one, it will use those connections
| | 07:38 | first, and frankly they're probably
be faster than your iPhone, and it will
| | 07:42 | always use those connections before
using the iPhone's Internet connection as
| | 07:45 | its last resort, if it can't
find another Internet connection.
| | 07:48 | So that's how to tether your iPhone
to your computer via Bluetooth or USB.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
7. The iPod Part of the iPhoneBrowsing your library| 00:00 | In this chapter, we're going to look
at the iPod part of the iPhone and since
| | 00:04 | it's already called an iPod, the
music and video apps of the iPod Touch.
| | 00:08 | That's really the only difference in
operation between the iPhone and the iPod Touch.
| | 00:11 | You access your music and videos on the
iPhone by tapping iPod and on the iPod
| | 00:16 | Touch, Music and Videos are two separate apps.
| | 00:19 | But they both use the exact same way
and both allow you to carry around a lot
| | 00:22 | of music and video content to keep
yourself entertained while you are out and about.
| | 00:26 | Exactly how much you can carry around
depends on the size of your iPhone or iPod
| | 00:29 | Touch and the size of your music and
video files, but even the smallest capacity
| | 00:33 | iPod Touch can hold hours of content.
| | 00:35 | Now this chapter assumes you've already
synced your iPhone or iPod Touch with
| | 00:38 | iTunes and copy the music
and videos you want to it.
| | 00:40 | If you don't know how to do this, go
back and watch Chapter 3 on syncing your
| | 00:43 | device with your computer.
| | 00:44 | So I'll start by tapping iPod on my iPhone.
| | 00:48 | If you're using an iPod Touch, tap Music.
| | 00:51 | Unless you've already have been
playing music, you'll be taken to one of the
| | 00:57 | five categories at the bottom of the screen.
| | 01:00 | On the iPhone, I have Playlists,
Artists, Songs, Videos, and More.
| | 01:05 | If you're on an iPod Touch, you have an
Albums button instead of Video, and I'll
| | 01:08 | show you how to customize which
buttons appear down here in just a moment.
| | 01:12 | But each of these is a way of browsing
through the music stored on your device.
| | 01:16 | Playlists lets you browse through the
playlists you've created and synced from iTunes.
| | 01:21 | Artists lets you search your library by
the artist name. Songs by the songs name.
| | 01:27 | If you're on an iPod Touch, the next
section is Albums, which lets you search by
| | 01:32 | album name, and if you're on the iPhone,
Videos lets you search through your
| | 01:37 | video collection which is in turn
divided into categories like Movies, TV
| | 01:41 | Shows, and Music Videos.
| | 01:44 | And again, you can see the same layout
on your iPod Touch by opening Videos.
| | 01:49 | There is also the More category, where
on the iPhone you'll find Albums and on
| | 01:57 | both devices, you'll find Audiobooks,
Compilations, Composers, and so on.
| | 02:01 | These are just additional ways to
find the content you're looking for.
| | 02:04 | For instance, if you listen to a lot
of classical music, you might find the
| | 02:07 | Composers category more
useful than the Artists category.
| | 02:11 | You can customize which categories
appear on the bottom of the screen by tapping
| | 02:14 | Edit here in the More section.
| | 02:17 | That reveals icons for all of the
available category types and all you have to
| | 02:20 | do is drag the ones you want
to the bottom of the screen.
| | 02:22 | For instance, I'll drag Composers over
Artists and it's replaced immediately.
| | 02:29 | If I change my mind, I can just drag
Artist back over Composers and everything is
| | 02:35 | back the way it was.
| | 02:36 | One other way to browse through your
music is to flip it into Landscape mode
| | 02:39 | while you have it in any of these
categories other than Video or More.
| | 02:45 | Flipping your iPhone or your iPod
Touch into Landscape orientation takes you
| | 02:48 | into the Cover Flow mode, which
displays your music in the form of the cover
| | 02:51 | art for each album.
| | 02:53 | You can then flick left and right
to browse through your collection.
| | 02:59 | Tap a cover to flip it over
and view the songs in that album.
| | 03:01 | You can tap a song to start it playing or
tap anywhere else to flip the cover over again.
| | 03:07 | Ultimately, you can use the i
button to flip the covers over.
| | 03:13 | And that's the gist of how you browse
through your music and videos on your
| | 03:15 | iPhone and iPod Touch.
| | 03:18 | In upcoming movies, we'll look at
selecting and playing your music and videos as
| | 03:21 | well as how to control playback
and create playlists on the fly.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Playing and controlling music| 00:00 | Now let's take a look at how
to play and control your music.
| | 00:03 | I'll tap iPod on my iPhone to
enter into my music and video library.
| | 00:08 | If you're using an iPod touch, again
your music and video apps are split into
| | 00:12 | separate apps, so tap Music.
| | 00:13 | To start the song playing, first
locate it using one of the categories at the
| | 00:17 | bottom of the screen. I'll choose
Artists, and now I'll scroll through and find
| | 00:22 | the artist I want to listen to.
| | 00:23 | I'll pick The Jellybricks.
| | 00:25 | Next, I see a list of each album
from this artist I have on my iPhone.
| | 00:29 | Some of these might not be entire albums.
| | 00:31 | It depends on what you have
copied over to your device.
| | 00:34 | I'll tap Goodnight To Everyone, and now I
am seeing the list of songs on this album.
| | 00:39 | The first button at the top of the
screen is Shuffle, which you can tap if you'd
| | 00:42 | like to play the current list in
random order, or just scroll through and tap
| | 00:46 | the song you want to play.
| | 00:47 | Songs will play continuously, one after
another, so if you want to listen to the
| | 00:51 | entire album in order, just tap the first song.
| | 00:55 | That takes me to the Now Playing screen,
and the song starts playing right away.
| | 00:58 | I am going to pause it, so it's
not playing while I am talking.
| | 01:03 | So while you are on the Now Playing
screen, you see the album artwork at a nice
| | 01:07 | large size, and you have several
controls and options available.
| | 01:09 | Starting at the bottom of the screen,
the first item is the Volume slider. Drag
| | 01:14 | this to the left or right to
increase or decrease the playback volume.
| | 01:19 | You can also use the Volume Up and
Down buttons on side of the phone.
| | 01:22 | The playback controls are right above
the Volume slider, and we've just seen
| | 01:25 | that you can tap the Play/Pause
button to play and pause the music.
| | 01:29 | Tap the Back or Forward buttons on
either side to go back or forward on track.
| | 01:33 | If the song is already playing ,the Back button
will take you to the start of the current song.
| | 01:38 | If you want to jump back to the
previous song, tap the Back button twice.
| | 01:42 | You can also hold down the Back and
Fast-forward buttons to rewind and
| | 01:44 | fast-forward to the currently playing track.
| | 01:49 | The longer you hold down the button,
the faster it'll jump ahead or back.
| | 01:52 | Actually, you'll get a bit of sense of
what I mean if I tap the album cover once,
| | 01:56 | which reveals the Progress
slider at the top of the screen.
| | 01:59 | If your song has lyrics embedded in it,
you'll see them appear as well, if you
| | 02:02 | have that option turned on on your
iPod's settings, which I'll show you how to
| | 02:05 | do in a later movie.
| | 02:06 | So the Progress slider tells you how
far along you are in the song, with the
| | 02:09 | elapsed time to the left of the
slider and the remaining time to the right.
| | 02:12 | Notice if I hold down the Forward
button, the speed at which I jump ahead in
| | 02:16 | this song gradually increases.
| | 02:18 | (Music playing.)
| | 02:24 | You can also drag or scrub in the slider
itself to jump right to the portion of
| | 02:28 | the song you want to hear.
| | 02:31 | Sometimes you want to go to a very
specific section of the track you are playing.
| | 02:34 | You can adjust the sensitivity of
scrubbing by dragging your finger down.
| | 02:38 | Notice I get a display telling me that
I have turned on Half Speed Scrubbing,
| | 02:42 | Quarter Speed Scrubbing and Fine Scrubbing.
| | 02:44 | At any one of these levels, you can
start dragging left or right, and you'll see
| | 02:47 | the difference in how much the
Scrubber point moves along the bar.
| | 02:55 | We have a couple of other
buttons in the Progress slider area.
| | 02:58 | This is the Loop button.
| | 03:00 | Tap it once to repeat the selected
album or playlist over and over again
| | 03:03 | until you stop playback.
| | 03:05 | Tap it a second time to repeat just
the current song over and over again.
| | 03:08 | Notice the tiny one symbol
that appears in the icon.
| | 03:12 | Tap it a third time to turn Looping off again.
| | 03:14 | The center button is for creating Genius
playlists, but we'll about that in an upcoming movie.
| | 03:19 | And the button on the right is for
shuffling the current album or playlist, which
| | 03:22 | will play the songs in a random order.
| | 03:23 | Alternately, you can shake the entire
phone or iPod touch to play a random song
| | 03:28 | from your entire library, which can be
kind of fun if you feel like playing song
| | 03:31 | roulette. I won't do that right now though.
| | 03:33 | I'll tap Shuffle again to turn that off.
| | 03:36 | Tap the album cover once to hide the
top controls. Double-tapping the album
| | 03:40 | cover flips it over to reveal the songs on
the album, which you can then scroll through.
| | 03:44 | You can tap any song here to start it playing.
| | 03:47 | If you like to rate your songs in iTunes,
you'll be happy to know that you can
| | 03:49 | rate them on your iPod too. Just drag
your finger along the dots at the top of
| | 03:53 | the screen to rate the selected song.
| | 03:55 | In iTunes you can create playlists
based on the ratings you've assigned songs.
| | 03:59 | To return to the cover view again,
tap the tiny cover icon in the
| | 04:01 | upper right-hand corner.
| | 04:02 | Let's start the song playing again.
| | 04:05 | (Music playing.)
| | 04:17 | While this song is playing, you can
continue browsing through your library by
| | 04:19 | tapping the arrow in the upper-left
corner. This is useful if you're playing dj
| | 04:23 | and you want to find the next song
to play before the current song ends.
| | 04:26 | You can always get back to the currently-
playing songs and the playback controls
| | 04:31 | by tapping Now Playing.
| | 04:34 | You can also open other apps and perform
many other tasks while your music is playing.
| | 04:38 | I'll press my Home button. Notice a small
Play icon that appears at the top of the screen.
| | 04:44 | This is to remind you that the iPod is
currently playing currently music, which
| | 04:47 | you might not know if you have
earbuds plugged into your device, but without
| | 04:50 | them being in your ears.
| | 04:52 | At anytime, a quick double-click of the
Home button opens up the Multi-task Pane.
| | 04:55 | Select the Pane to the right to reveal
the mini controller, which is nice if you
| | 04:59 | need to pause your music quickly.
| | 05:01 | You can also use the Back and Forward
buttons to navigate your current playlist,
| | 05:05 | or tap the iPod icon to go
back to the iPod interface.
| | 05:08 | Let's start the music playing again.
| | 05:10 | (Music playing.)
| | 05:19 | To conserve your battery and to avoid
accidentally tapping buttons while you're
| | 05:22 | listening to music, click the
Sleep button to turn the screen off.
| | 05:25 | Your music will continue to play, and
the Volume buttons on the side of the
| | 05:28 | phone will continue to work as well.
| | 05:30 | Even while the screen is locked, you can
double-click the Home button to bring up
| | 05:33 | a Mini Controller, so again, you can
quickly pause your music if necessary.
| | 05:39 | So those are the controls for playing
your music on your iPhone or iPod touch.
| | 05:42 | Now before I wrap up this movie, I
want to mention that there are couple of
| | 05:46 | other control options you'll see if you're
playing back items like audiobooks or podcasts.
| | 05:49 | I'll go back to my library and play an
audiobook, and I'll pause that for the moment.
| | 05:58 | While playing an audio book, you have
the option of playing the audio back at a
| | 06:01 | slower or faster speed.
| | 06:03 | Some people like to get through their
books faster, while others have trouble
| | 06:05 | understanding fast narrators.
| | 06:07 | You can tap the Speed button to cycle
through the playback speeds of real-time,
| | 06:12 | twice as fast, or half speed.
| | 06:15 | Also convenient to audio books
is the 30-second Rewind button.
| | 06:18 | Sometimes you just zone out while
listening to an audio book and suddenly
| | 06:22 | realize you don't remember what was just read.
| | 06:23 | Instead of having to manually scrub
back or rewind, tap the 30-second Rewind
| | 06:28 | button to jump back 30 seconds in the Timeline.
| | 06:30 | If that's not far enough, just keep
tapping until you get back to a part of
| | 06:33 | the book you recognize.
| | 06:34 | And be aware that these two special
buttons are only available from the Now
| | 06:38 | Playing screen and not the Mini Controller
you see when you double-click the Home button.
| | 06:43 | And those are the controls for playing
back music and other audio files on your
| | 06:46 | iPhone or iPod touch.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Playing and controlling video| 00:00 | The controls for playing videos on your
iPhone or iPod Touch are similar to the
| | 00:03 | ones for playing music and audio files,
but there are some differences and
| | 00:07 | something is unique to video
playback that you should be familiar with.
| | 00:10 | So, in this video, we'll be
looking at playing videos.
| | 00:12 | If you are on an iPhone, you open the iPod
and tap Videos at the bottom of the screen.
| | 00:17 | If you're on an iPod Touch, tap the Videos icon.
| | 00:19 | Videos are divided into Movies,
TV Shows, and Music Videos.
| | 00:24 | Generally, any movie you copy into
iTunes to place into your iPhone or iPod
| | 00:28 | Touch is considered a movie, unless you
go in and change the info for the movie
| | 00:31 | to TV Show or to Music Video.
| | 00:33 | Or if you purchase a TV or music video
from the iTunes Store, they'll have the
| | 00:37 | correct classification when you download them.
| | 00:39 | Having your videos properly
classified isn't a huge deal, but it does make
| | 00:42 | browsing through TV Shows a lot easier,
especially if you several episodes of the same show.
| | 00:46 | You can click a show title to view all
the episodes on a separate screen instead
| | 00:50 | of having them all on your
main video page to scroll through.
| | 00:52 | In any case, to play a video, just tap it.
| | 00:54 | (Music playing.)
| | 01:00 | Videos only play in Landscape mode.
| | 01:04 | While the video is playing, single tap
the screen to show and hide the controls.
| | 01:08 | The controls will also disappear after
a few seconds if you don't touch them,
| | 01:11 | but it's faster to just tap the screen if
you know you're not going to use the controls.
| | 01:14 | (Male speaker: And I'm your host, Tom Mueller,
and this week we're going to take you on a tour?)
| | 01:18 | We have the standard Play and Pause buttons
with the Back and Forward buttons on either side.
| | 01:23 | Holding down on either button skips
backwards or forwards at increasing speed so
| | 01:26 | longer you hold them down.
| | 01:31 | Or tap the Back button to jump
back to the beginning of the video.
| | 01:35 | If the movie you're watching includes
chapter markers, tapping the Back and
| | 01:38 | Forward button will jump
you from chapter to chapter.
| | 01:41 | Volume can be controlled either by
dragging the Volume slider left and right, or
| | 01:45 | use the Volume buttons on the side of the phone.
| | 01:47 | At the top of the screen is the
progress bar with the elapsed time to the left
| | 01:50 | of the slider and the remaining time to
the right, dragging the progress bar to
| | 01:54 | go to a specific part of the video.
| | 01:55 | Although it's not noted here, you have
the same fine-tuning controls available
| | 02:00 | for videos as you do for music playback.
| | 02:02 | To be more precise about which part of
the movie you're dragging to, place your
| | 02:05 | finger on the dot in the progress
bar and drag down away from the bar.
| | 02:10 | The farther away from the bar, the
slower the dot will move when you drag your
| | 02:13 | finger left and right.
| | 02:14 | This lets you be very precise
about scrubbing through the video.
| | 02:17 | The button with the two arrows is
the Zoom In and Zoom Out button.
| | 02:21 | Since the iPhone screen is not the
same dimension as a TV screen, or many
| | 02:24 | wide-screen movies, you'll probably end
up seeing black bars above and below, or
| | 02:29 | to the left and right of your video.
| | 02:30 | This is perfectly normal, but some
people don't like seeing those black bars.
| | 02:34 | You can tap the Zoom button to zoom in
on the picture or double-tap anywhere on
| | 02:38 | the screen to zoom in and zoom out, but
that means you're actually cropping out
| | 02:41 | a visible portion of the video and I
much prefer to see all the parts of the
| | 02:44 | video as they were intended.
| | 02:46 | So, I never use the Zoom
buttons myself, but to each his own.
| | 02:49 | Some other buttons you might see depend on
how the video you're watching was formatted.
| | 02:53 | If the video includes subtitles or
chapter markers, you'll see buttons by the
| | 02:56 | playback controls to use those options.
| | 03:01 | Now, unlike with playing music, you
obviously can't keep a video playing while
| | 03:04 | you're doing something else on the phone,
because the video takes up the entire screen.
| | 03:07 | So, pressing the Home button or
putting the screen to sleep, stops the video
| | 03:11 | until you return to your
iPod and start playing again.
| | 03:14 | When you're done watching the video,
tap the Done button to return to your library.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using the included earbud controls| 00:00 | If you use the earbud headset that came
with your iPhone or iPod Touch, you can
| | 00:03 | control your music playback using the
built-in remote control attached to the
| | 00:07 | right ear bud's cable.
| | 00:09 | The iPhone 3GS comes with a headset
that includes volume controls in addition
| | 00:12 | to the center button used
for controlling playback.
| | 00:14 | The earbuds that ship with older
iPhones and the iPod Touch come with a
| | 00:17 | single-button controller
without the volume controls.
| | 00:20 | So, with your headset plugged into your
device, you still need to browse to your
| | 00:23 | music library and pick the
song or playlist you want to play.
| | 00:25 | Let's start the song playing.
(Music playing.)
| | 00:27 | All of your iPhone's audio will go
through the headphones when they're plugged in.
| | 00:33 | If you unplug the headphones,
the music will automatically pause.
| | 00:38 | This prevents your music from blaring
out of your phone if you accidentally
| | 00:41 | yank the headphones out.
| | 00:42 | If that happens, just plug them
back in and start the music again.
| | 00:45 | There are only a handful of click
actions for controlling your music playback
| | 00:48 | with the earbuds, but they're very
convenient to know if you iPhone or iPod is
| | 00:51 | tucked in your pocket and you want to
pick a different song or pause or rewind
| | 00:55 | without having to pull your device out.
| | 00:57 | Now, I'm only going to cover the
music and video playback related to
| | 01:00 | earbud controls here.
| | 01:01 | If you want to learn about the controls
for use during phone calls, go back to
| | 01:04 | the chapter on using the phone part
of the iPhone for that information.
| | 01:08 | First, play the currently selected
song by clicking and releasing the
| | 01:10 | center button once.
| | 01:12 | If you have a non-3GS iPhone or an iPod
Touch, you only have one button, but it
| | 01:16 | works the same as the 3GS's controls.
| | 01:19 | To skip to the next song or the album
in the playlist, double-click the button.
| | 01:23 | To go back to the previous song, or
depending on how far into the current song
| | 01:26 | you're in, click the center button three times.
| | 01:31 | Basically, if only two or three
seconds of the current song have passed,
| | 01:33 | triple-clicking the center button
will take you to the previous song.
| | 01:36 | But if more than three seconds have
passed, triple-clicking will start
| | 01:39 | the current song over.
| | 01:40 | To fast forward playback, press the
center button twice, but hold it down on the
| | 01:44 | second click, until you fast forward
to the point you want to listen to.
| | 01:49 | To rewind the song, triple-click the
button and hold down on the third click
| | 01:53 | until you get back to the part
of the song you want to listen to.
| | 01:58 | Basically, remember that forward
actions are double-clicks and backward
| | 02:01 | actions are triple-clicks.
| | 02:03 | Other than that, the only other
controls available in terms of your music
| | 02:05 | playback are the volume
controls on the iPhone 3GS's earbuds.
| | 02:09 | Just use them to turn the volume up and down.
| | 02:12 | (Music playing.)
| | 02:15 | The earbud controls are essentially
the same for playing back video as well.
| | 02:19 | Click once to play and pause, double-
click to jump forward to the next video in
| | 02:25 | the playlist, triple-click to go
back to the beginning of the video,
| | 02:30 | double-click and hold to fast-forward,
and triple-click and hold to rewind.
| | 02:39 | The only exception is if the video
you're watching has built-in chapter markers.
| | 02:42 | In that case, double-clicking takes you
to the next chapter and triple-clicking
| | 02:45 | takes you to the previous chapter, but
other than that, the controls for video
| | 02:48 | are the same as the controls for audio.
| | 02:50 | Now, that's the extent of what you can
control by clicking the buttons on the
| | 02:53 | earbuds, but because the earbuds that
come with the 3GS also have a built-in
| | 02:56 | microphone, you can also
control your iPod with your voice.
| | 03:00 | And we'll look at that in an upcoming movie.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Voice-controlling your music| 00:00 | With the iPhone 3GS, Apple introduced
voice control, which lets you control your
| | 00:04 | iPhone using spoken words instead of
tapping buttons on your screen or using the
| | 00:07 | button on your earbuds.
| | 00:09 | This feature is not available on the
original iPhone, the iPhone 3G, or the iPod Touch.
| | 00:14 | You can control your iPhone using its
built-in microphone, but you'll probably
| | 00:17 | have more success using the included
earbuds, which is what you'll most likely
| | 00:20 | be wearing if you're listening to music.
| | 00:22 | Now, in an earlier chapter, I covered the
voice commands for controlling phone calls.
| | 00:25 | So, if you need a refresher on voice
dialing, refer back to that chapter.
| | 00:29 | In this movie, I want to share the voice
commands for controlling music playback.
| | 00:32 | If you know the album, artist, or
playlist you want to listen to, you can
| | 00:35 | start playing your music regardless of
whether you're currently in the iPod app or not.
| | 00:39 | All you do is invoke voice control by
holding down the center button on your
| | 00:42 | earbuds or the Home button on
your phone for about 3 seconds.
| | 00:45 | Then just say the name of the artist
album or playlist you want to listen to.
| | 00:48 | For example, I want to listen to the album
"Goodnight to Everyone" by The Jellybricks.
| | 00:52 | So, I'll hold down the center button to
invoke voice control and right after I
| | 00:55 | hear the little tone that tells me the
iPhone is waiting for my command, I'll
| | 00:58 | say the words "play album,"
followed by the album's title.
| | 01:02 | Play album, "Goodnight to Everyone."
| | 01:05 | (Voice Control: Playing
album "Goodnight to Everyone.")
| | 01:10 | (Music playing.)
| | 01:15 | I'll just pause playback for the
moment by bringing up the mini controller.
| | 01:18 | (Music playing.)
| | 01:22 | So, basically you can say "play album,"
"play artist," or "play playlist," followed by
| | 01:26 | the name of the album, artist, or playlist.
| | 01:28 | You'll always hear verbal feedback from
the iPhone, so you can confirm whether
| | 01:32 | it heard you correctly.
| | 01:33 | Once you've selected some music, you
can use voice control to perform basic
| | 01:36 | playback commands, such as play or play
music to start the music playing again.
| | 01:41 | You can also say "pause" or "pause music"
to pause, or say "next song" or "previous song"
| | 01:46 | to jump forward or backwards in
the playlist or album you're listening to.
| | 01:49 | Although, if you're using your iPhone's
earbuds, it's probably faster to double
| | 01:53 | and triple-click the center button on
the controls to jump forward and back than
| | 01:56 | it is to invoke the voice
control and speak the commands.
| | 01:59 | If you want to be surprised,
you can say "shuffle" to shuffle the
| | 02:02 | currently selected playlist.
| | 02:03 | If you don't recognize the song that's
currently playing, you can invoke voice
| | 02:06 | control again, and ask, what's playing,
what song is this, who sings this song
| | 02:11 | or who is this song by?
| | 02:12 | These are all identical questions
and will get you the same information.
| | 02:15 | (Music playing.)
| | 02:27 | "What's playing?"
| | 02:28 | (Music playing.)
| | 02:30 | (Voice Control: Now playing
"Eyes Wide" by The Jellybricks.)
| | 02:33 | (Music playing.)
| | 02:38 | If you enjoy iTunes and the iPhone's
Genius feature, which lets you create
| | 02:41 | playlists of music similar to a single
song of your choice, you can invoke voice
| | 02:45 | control and say "Genius" or "play more
like this" or "play more songs" like this.
| | 02:50 | I'll discuss the Genius
feature in an upcoming movie.
| | 02:53 | Lastly, if you invoke voice control by
accident, or just change your mind, say
| | 02:57 | "Cancel" or "Stop" to make your phone
stop listening for a voice command.
| | 03:01 | Also, keep an eye on the words that
are flying by in the background of the
| | 03:04 | voice control interface.
| | 03:05 | They're not there just for decoration,
but instead give you examples of the
| | 03:09 | things you can say at that particular moment.
| | 03:11 | I've given you the majority of commands
here, but there are several variations
| | 03:14 | on things you can say which
you'll probably see scrolling by.
| | 03:17 | So, that's voice controlling
your iPhone 3GS' music playback.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adjusting your iPod settings| 00:00 | In this chapter, we have looked at a lot
of controls and behaviors of your iPhone
| | 00:03 | and iPod that are dependant on
some of their default settings.
| | 00:06 | If your own hasn't been behaving the
same as you have been seeing in these
| | 00:09 | movies, or if you would like to turn off
some of these default behaviors, I will
| | 00:12 | show where to find them right now.
| | 00:14 | If you are on an iPhone, tap
Settings, and then scroll down to iPod.
| | 00:20 | If you are on an iPod touch, you also
tap settings, but your preferences are
| | 00:23 | divided into Music and Video settings.
| | 00:25 | They are same settings that are found
on the iPhone; they are just separated.
| | 00:28 | So if you are following along on an
iPod touch right now, tap Music. And here is
| | 00:33 | where you will find most of the
preferences that will determine your iPhone's
| | 00:35 | behaviors when playing music and videos.
| | 00:37 | The first item is Shake to
Shuffle, which is on by default.
| | 00:40 | Basically if you are in the iPod app, or
the Music app on the iPod touch, shaking
| | 00:44 | your phone will start a random song
from your currently selected playlist.
| | 00:47 | Now in order for this to work, you have
to already be playing a song, and your
| | 00:51 | screen has to be on.
| | 00:52 | This prevents you from accidentally
shuffling songs if you are running with your
| | 00:55 | iPod, or it's just bumping
around on your car's dashboard.
| | 00:58 | I like this feature myself, but if you want
to turn it off just tap the On/Off switch.
| | 01:02 | Next, we have Sound Check,
which is off by default.
| | 01:05 | Inevitably some of the songs in your music
library are going to be louder than other songs.
| | 01:08 | This just has to do with the way they
were originally recorded and released, and
| | 01:12 | to some extent how they were encoded.
| | 01:13 | For example, songs recorded these
days are a lot louder than songs recorded
| | 01:17 | back in the sixties.
| | 01:18 | So if you are shuffling songs in your
collection, you might be playing an older
| | 01:21 | song that requires you to turn the
volume up so you can hear it at a descent
| | 01:24 | level, only to have your ears blown
off by the next song that was recorded in
| | 01:27 | the past year or so.
| | 01:28 | Sound Check automatically controls the
playback level of all songs, so they all
| | 01:32 | play back at relatively the same volume.
| | 01:34 | Quiet songs become a little louder and
louder songs become a little bit quieter,
| | 01:37 | and they sort of meet in the middle.
| | 01:40 | Personally I am not a fan of how
Sound Check makes some songs sound, so I
| | 01:43 | will leave this OFF.
| | 01:44 | But if you are listening to a
playlist that includes a wide range of songs
| | 01:47 | spanning several decades and you want
to make sure everything plays back at a
| | 01:50 | consistent volume level,
you can try turning it on.
| | 01:53 | Next we have the EQ options, which are
essentially a collection of preset audio
| | 01:56 | adjustment settings for tweaking the
frequencies of the music you are listening to.
| | 01:59 | Notice we have several EQ selections
to choose from, covering a wide range of
| | 02:04 | genres and scenarios.
| | 02:05 | So, for example, if you found you are
not getting the bass response you like out
| | 02:08 | of the tracks you are playing, you
might come in here and tap Bass Booster.
| | 02:12 | If you are listening to an audio book, you
might want to choose the Spoken Word EQ settings.
| | 02:17 | If you come in here while music is
playing, you will here the changes to the
| | 02:19 | sound of your music as you
tap different selections.
| | 02:22 | Just be aware though that using the EQ
setting does drain your battery a little
| | 02:25 | faster, so I will leave
my EQ setting off for now.
| | 02:28 | The next music-related setting is
Volume Limit, and this lets you say your
| | 02:32 | iPhone or iPod so the volume level
never goes louder than the limit you set.
| | 02:36 | This is good for anyone who is guilty
of listening to their music way too loud
| | 02:39 | or for parents who want to
protect their kids' ears.
| | 02:42 | You probably want to have music playing
as you drag the slider to set the limit
| | 02:45 | so you can hear the results of your settings.
| | 02:47 | Then tap Lock Volume Limit, which then
prompts you to create a 4-digit passcode.
| | 02:52 | That way if you are setting a volume
to protect your kids' ears, they won't be
| | 02:55 | able to turn off the Volume
Limit unless they know the passcode.
| | 02:57 | I will just cancel this for now.
| | 02:59 | The last setting here is
Lyrics and Podcast Info.
| | 03:03 | If you have songs that include embedded
lyrics, you will see the lyrics appear
| | 03:07 | when you play them. Or if you have
podcasts which include embedded show
| | 03:11 | information, you will see that
information appear when you play the podcast.
| | 03:15 | If you don't see the lyrics or
podcast info, that information is either not
| | 03:18 | included, or try tapping the album or
podcast outwork to make them appear, and of
| | 03:23 | course, if you don't want to see any of
that stuff, go back to Settings and turn
| | 03:27 | Lyrics and Podcast Info off, and
that does it for the music preferences.
| | 03:32 | Next we have two video preferences.
If you are using an iPod touch, go back to
| | 03:36 | Settings and tap Video to see these preferences.
| | 03:38 | The first item is Start Playing, and all
this determines is where videos you had
| | 03:42 | previously been watching will pick up
from. The default choice is Where Left
| | 03:46 | off, which I think makes sense
because you will most likely want to start
| | 03:49 | watching a video where you last left off.
| | 03:51 | And if you did want to watch the video
from the beginning, you just need to tap
| | 03:54 | the Back button once, so I
will leave that how it is.
| | 03:56 | Some videos you watch will have
closed caption text embedded in them.
| | 03:59 | Here you can decide whether you want
Closed Captioning to be on or off by default.
| | 04:04 | Regardless of your choice though, you can
still turn closed captioning on and off
| | 04:07 | while you are watching a video.
| | 04:08 | This is just for setting the default behavior.
| | 04:10 | The last two options relate to when you
plug your iPhone or iPod into a TV using
| | 04:14 | a special cable you can buy
from Apple or a third-party vendor.
| | 04:17 | If you want to make sure widescreen
movies play at their proper dimensions, keep
| | 04:21 | Widescreen turned on. And TV Signal has
to do with whether you are connecting to
| | 04:25 | a TV in North America or Europe.
| | 04:26 | North American TVs use the NTSC
standard, while European TVs use PAL.
| | 04:32 | If you find yourself in Europe and
wanting to watch a video from your iPhone on
| | 04:35 | a TV, be sure to come in here and change
the setting to PAL, and that does it for
| | 04:39 | the iPod music and video playback preferences.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating On-The-Go and Genius playlists| 00:00 | If you've been using iTunes and iPods
for a while, you have most likely created
| | 00:03 | your share of playlists.
| | 00:05 | A playlist is just simply a
collection of songs that you can arrange in any
| | 00:07 | order you like, kind of like creating a mix
CD back when people did that sort of thing.
| | 00:12 | For the most part, playlists are
created in iTunes and then synced to your
| | 00:15 | iPhone or iPod touch.
| | 00:16 | But there will probably be the times
when you will want to mix up some tunes
| | 00:19 | while you're out and about with your device.
| | 00:21 | Sure, you could shuffle the songs in
your library, but that doesn't give you
| | 00:23 | much control over what comes up.
| | 00:25 | So in this movie, I'll show you how to
create two kinds of playlists: a regular
| | 00:29 | playlist and a Genius playlist.
| | 00:31 | A regular playlist is simply a playlist
that you create on your iPhone or iPod
| | 00:34 | touch away from your computer, using the
songs that are already on your device.
| | 00:38 | To create a playlist, open the iPod App,
or on the iPod touch, open the Music App.
| | 00:43 | If it's not already selected, tap
Playlist, and then tap Add Playlist.
| | 00:48 | The first thing you're prompted
to do is to name your new playlist.
| | 00:51 | I'll call mine Driving tunes.
| | 00:52 | Then I'll click Save.
| | 01:01 | Then just browse and scroll through
your library and find the songs, or videos,
| | 01:04 | for that matter, that you want to add to the
playlist, and tap the Plus symbol to add them.
| | 01:14 | When you're finished, tap Done.
| | 01:16 | Now the playlist is currently in the
order in which I added the songs, which is
| | 01:20 | basically alphabetical order, since
I just scrolled down my song list.
| | 01:23 | Tap the Edit button, and you can use
the handles to the right of the song names
| | 01:26 | to rearrange the songs
into whatever order you like.
| | 01:29 | If you want to remove a song from this list,
just tap the Delete button and then delete it.
| | 01:34 | If you want to add more songs to your
playlist, tap the Plus button at the top
| | 01:38 | of the screen and select more songs.
| | 01:42 | Then tap Done at the top of
your list when you're done.
| | 01:45 | At this point, you can start playing
your playlist by tapping the first song,
| | 01:49 | and we'll just pause that.
| | 01:50 | That's how you create a regular playlist.
| | 01:53 | If you ever want to delete the
playlist itself, go back to the Main playlist
| | 01:56 | area and slide your finger along the
playlist name to reveal the Delete button.
| | 02:02 | Deleting a playlist does not
delete the songs it contains.
| | 02:05 | It just removes the playlist itself.
| | 02:06 | I'll leave mine as it is for now.
| | 02:09 | You can create as many playlists as
you like this way just by tapping Add
| | 02:12 | Playlist to create more.
| | 02:13 | Also, when you sync your device with
your computer, the playlist will be
| | 02:16 | copied into iTunes.
| | 02:17 | The other type of playlist I want to
look at here is the Genius playlist.
| | 02:21 | This is a really cool feature that
works very much like the Genius feature in
| | 02:24 | iTunes, if you're familiar with that.
| | 02:26 | Genius builds a playlist for you, based
on an initial song of your selection.
| | 02:29 | Basically, you browse through your
library and then pick a song that fits what
| | 02:33 | you're in the mood to hear.
| | 02:34 | I'll just pause this so
I'm not trying to talk of the music.
| | 02:37 | Then tap the Genius button, which appears
directly under the playback scrubber bar.
| | 02:41 | You may have to tap the album cover to
reveal the Genius button and playback bar.
| | 02:44 | But once you click the Genius button,
in just a couple of seconds your iPhone
| | 02:49 | or iPod touch builds an entire playlist of
songs that are similar to the songs you chose.
| | 02:53 | In my experience, the iPhone does a
pretty good job of matching songs together.
| | 02:56 | You can scroll through to
see what it came up with.
| | 03:00 | If you're not thrilled with the results,
try tapping Refresh to have it pick
| | 03:03 | another batch of songs.
| | 03:04 | Obviously, the more songs you have on
your device, the greater the selection of
| | 03:07 | songs the Genius playlist
will have to build from.
| | 03:10 | If you like the list and
want to save it, tap Save.
| | 03:13 | Now if I go back to my Playlists, I
can see the Genius playlist sitting here
| | 03:16 | like any other playlist, and it's
named based on the first song I chose.
| | 03:20 | It also remains a Genius playlist,
meaning if I wanted to try selecting
| | 03:23 | another batch of songs based on this first
song again, I just tap the list and hit Refresh.
| | 03:30 | And like the regular playlists, you can
create as many Genius playlists as you like.
| | 03:33 | Just browse for other genre or type
of song and then hit the Genius button
| | 03:36 | to create your list.
| | 03:38 | Also, like regular playlists, you can
delete the playlist from your device by
| | 03:41 | dragging your finger across
its name and then tapping Delete.
| | 03:44 | That's how you create
regular and Genius playlists.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Browsing and buying with the iTunes app| 00:00 | Built into every iPhone and
iPod Touch is the iTunes store app.
| | 00:04 | Here you can browse, sample, purchase
and download music, videos, audiobooks and
| | 00:09 | if you are using an iPhone, custom ringtones.
| | 00:12 | Basically, everything that's available
through the iTunes Store on your computer
| | 00:14 | is available through the iTunes app.
| | 00:16 | If you're on an iPhone, you can even
purchase and download movies over AT&T's 3G
| | 00:20 | network when you're not
connected to a Wi-Fi network.
| | 00:22 | The exception being if the file
you're downloading is over 20 MB, which most
| | 00:26 | full-length movies certainly are.
| | 00:27 | 20 MB is the current limit, but Apple
and AT&T have increased the limit in the
| | 00:31 | past and they may very well do so again.
| | 00:33 | But you will see a message if the file
you're trying to download is too large,
| | 00:37 | telling you to connect to a Wi-Fi network or
to download through iTunes on your computer.
| | 00:40 | So to browse the Store, you can start
by tapping Music at the bottom of the
| | 00:44 | screen and here you can browse new
releases, Top 10 lists in several genres, or
| | 00:53 | browse through the genres themselves.
| | 00:56 | Similarly, tap Videos and you can
browse through Hollywood movies, TV
| | 01:00 | shows, and music videos.
| | 01:04 | If you can't find what you're looking
for through either of those screens, tap
| | 01:07 | Search and here you can type
exactly what you're looking for.
| | 01:10 | I will for the band The Jellybricks.
| | 01:19 | Here I will See All Albums, and I
will tap the album "Goodnight to Everyone."
| | 01:26 | On each album page you can sample 30
seconds of any track by tapping it.
| | 01:32 | (Music playing.)
| | 01:38 | Tap the song again to stop the sample.
| | 01:40 | If you're ready to buy the song or
video you sampled, tap its price or in
| | 01:43 | the case of the album, you can tap the
price for the entire album and then tap Buy Now.
| | 01:49 | Once you've entered your username and
password once, your iPhone or iPod Touch
| | 01:52 | will remember your username.
| | 01:54 | So in the future you'll only have to
type in your password to make purchases.
| | 01:58 | When I tap the Buy Now button you
should have noticed that it looked like the
| | 02:00 | song jumped down into the More section here,
and you could see I have a little number 1.
| | 02:03 | If I go to Downloads, this is where I
can watch the progress of the song or
| | 02:08 | video file I am downloading.
| | 02:14 | Once the download is complete, it
disappears from the Downloads area and I'll
| | 02:19 | find it in my iPod app or my iPhone
or in the Music app of the iPod Touch.
| | 02:23 | It's almost scary how easy it is to
purchase music and videos from the iTunes store.
| | 02:27 | Now, while we are outside of the
iTunes store, I want to show you where your
| | 02:29 | iTunes account info is stored on your device.
| | 02:32 | Go to Settings > Store and you will see the
account name you have stored on your phone.
| | 02:39 | From here, you can view your account
details by tapping View Account and you
| | 02:43 | can also tap Sign Out to
log off of your account.
| | 02:45 | I mentioned this because some
people have more than one iTunes account.
| | 02:49 | For instance, I have one personal
account and one for work, both with their own
| | 02:52 | associated credit cards.
| | 02:53 | So if I want to make sure my purchases
are charged to the right card, this is
| | 02:57 | where I come to sign in and out of my accounts.
| | 02:59 | Okay, let's head back into the iTunes Store.
| | 03:02 | So in the More section, you'll also
find any podcasts, audiobooks or iTunes U
| | 03:07 | content you've downloaded.
| | 03:08 | You can also tap Edit to rearrange
the items at the bottom of the screen.
| | 03:12 | So if you like to browse audiobooks
for instance, but you don't download too
| | 03:16 | many ringtones, you can drag
Audiobooks over Ringtones to replace it.
| | 03:20 | When I click Done, I now have a
quick portal to the audiobooks that are
| | 03:24 | available on the iTunes Store, and I
can still get to ringtones by going to the
| | 03:28 | More section and tapping Ringtones there.
| | 03:32 | Purchases you make on the iTunes
Store on your iPod or iPhone will
| | 03:35 | automatically get transferred to your
computer if you have your settings set up
| | 03:38 | to automatically sync content like music,
movies, ringtones, TV shows, podcasts and iTunes U.
| | 03:44 | If you manually manage your device, you
can still transfer over your purchases
| | 03:48 | by right-clicking on the device and
choosing Transfer Purchases, which will copy
| | 03:52 | all the purchases you made on your
iPhone or iPod Touch to your copy of iTunes.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using AirPlay to stream content wirelessly from an iPhone to and AppleTV or Airport Express| 00:00 | With the release of iOS 4.2
Apple introduced the AirPlay.
| | 00:04 | AirPlay is based on a previous
technology from Apple called Air Tunes, which
| | 00:08 | allow you to stream music from your
iTunes library to Airport Express WiFi
| | 00:11 | devices, but now that it has been
revamped as AirPlay, a whole world of options
| | 00:15 | is opened up, including the ability to
stream content from your iPhone, iPod
| | 00:19 | touch or iPad running iOS 4.2 to any
AirPlay enabled device like an Apple TV or
| | 00:24 | one of many third-party AirPlay
products that are hitting the market like
| | 00:27 | stereos and remote speakers.
| | 00:29 | All you have to do is make sure your
iPhone and AirPlay device are both on
| | 00:32 | the same network.
| | 00:33 | For this example I have an Airport
Express and an Apple TV all connected to the
| | 00:37 | same network my iPhone is currently on.
| | 00:39 | So let's go to my iPhone and tap the iPod app.
| | 00:42 | If you're on an iPod touch
or an iPad you'll tap Music.
| | 00:46 | And I'll start some music playing.
| | 00:51 | (Music playing)
| | 00:52 | Currently it's playing through
my iPhone but because it
| | 00:55 | detects other AirPlay devices on the
same network, I see an AirPlay button next
| | 00:58 | to the playback controls.
| | 01:00 | So by tapping that I can see all of my
AirPlay devices, like my Apple TV and my
| | 01:04 | Airport Express, which is
currently labeled living room.
| | 01:07 | So if I wanted to play the music though
my Apple TV, which might be connected to
| | 01:10 | my stereo, I can tap Apple TV.
| | 01:16 | And in just a moment, you hear the
music start playing and we can also see the
| | 01:19 | song title, the album artist, and the
album displayed in the lower left-hand
| | 01:23 | corner for a moment.
| | 01:25 | And I can continue to control
my playback through the iPhone.
| | 01:28 | So I can jump to the next song for example.
| | 01:31 | Again we see the information
pop up in the lower left there.
| | 01:34 | I can fast forward, scrub through.
| | 01:36 | I can pause the playback.
| | 01:37 | And basically control my music all
through my iPhone but have it play through
| | 01:41 | my Apple TV.
| | 01:42 | And if you are using a video enabled
AirPlay device like the Apple TV you
| | 01:48 | can also play videos.
| | 01:51 | So I'll select a video.
| | 01:54 | And again sit tarts playing on my iPhone
by default, but once again I've got the
| | 01:57 | AirPlay button so I'll select my Apple TV.
| | 01:59 | (Video voiceover playing)
| | 02:05 | It may take a couple of seconds
to buffer through your network.
| | 02:11 | (Music playing)
| | 02:14 | But now we have nice
full-screen video playing wirelessly from
| | 02:17 | my iPhone through my Apple TV,
right here onto the big screen.
| | 02:20 | This is so cool.
| | 02:24 | And again I've got the same controls available.
| | 02:26 | I can cause the playback, I can fast-
forward, rewind, scrub through the video.
| | 02:31 | And just control the playback I'm
seeing through my Apple TV right here on
| | 02:34 | my iPhone.
| | 02:36 | But wait there's more.
| | 02:37 | We can now go into photos.
| | 02:39 | Select one of our albums.
| | 02:42 | Tap a photo and we will see the AirPlay
button in the upper right hand corner.
| | 02:45 | I'll tap Apple TV.
| | 02:47 | And now I'm seeing my photos from my
iPhone being played through my Apple TV.
| | 02:55 | And I can continue to control the
playback just by flipping through the photos.
| | 03:02 | This is great if you have vacation
photos you want to show a bunch of people but
| | 03:05 | you don't want to pass
you iPhone around the room.
| | 03:07 | Just send it through your Apple TV.
| | 03:08 | Flip through your photos.
| | 03:12 | Or tap the Play button and just
let the automatic slideshow play.
| | 03:21 | So that's AirPlay, available through iOS 4.2.
| | 03:24 | Now currently as I'm recording this
AirPlay is only supported on apps made by
| | 03:28 | Apple, like the YouTube app, the iPod
app on the iPhone, or the Music and Video
| | 03:32 | apps on the iPod touch and iPad.
| | 03:34 | You may see the AirPlay button appear
next to the playback controls in other
| | 03:37 | third-party video apps you use, but
chances are you'll only be able to stream
| | 03:40 | audio until Apple lets third-
party apps stream video as well.
| | 03:43 | But even so, this is already a very cool
feature and it's probably only going to
| | 03:47 | get better and gain more
abilities in the near future.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
8. Shooting Photos and Video and Managing Your Photo LibraryShooting still photos with your iPhone| 00:00 | In this chapter, we're going to be
looking at working with photos and video on
| | 00:03 | your iPhone or iPod touch.
| | 00:05 | In this movie, we're going to take a look at
how to shoot still photos with your iPhone.
| | 00:09 | The iPod touch doesn't have a built-in camera,
| | 00:11 | so you can skip this movie and jump to
the next one on viewing and managing your
| | 00:14 | photos if you have an iPod touch.
| | 00:16 | But every iPhone since the first
generation model does have a built-in camera,
| | 00:19 | and a pretty decent one, which has gotten
better with each subsequent version of the phone.
| | 00:23 | So, if you carry your iPhone with you
everywhere, you'll always have a camera to
| | 00:26 | pull out when you need one.
| | 00:28 | Now, I'm not saying you can throw away
your regular camera, because the quality
| | 00:30 | of the photos on the iPhone greatly
depends on how well-lit the scene you're
| | 00:33 | shooting is, and whether or not
your subject, or you, are moving.
| | 00:37 | Also, only the iPhone 4 has a built-in flash.
| | 00:39 | So, it'll generally need to be in a
well-lit environment, and hold as still as
| | 00:42 | possible to get good looking
pictures if you don't have an iPhone 4.
| | 00:45 | But I'll show you some tips that will help
improve your chances of getting a decent shot.
| | 00:50 | So, start up the Camera app by tapping its icon.
| | 00:52 | If this is the first time you've used
the camera, you'll see a message telling
| | 00:56 | you that the Camera app
would like to use your location.
| | 00:59 | Basically, this message is telling you
that your photos and videos will be geotagged,
| | 01:03 | meaning the iPhone will use the same
location data it uses to figure out where
| | 01:06 | you are in the Maps app and tag
your photos with this tiny bit of data.
| | 01:10 | Unless you're trying to keep the location of
where you took your photos a secret, tap OK;
| | 01:14 | otherwise, tap Don't Allow.
| | 01:16 | But geotagging your photos is a great
way to keep a record of almost exactly
| | 01:19 | where a photo was taken, and more and
more photo management apps, like iPhoto
| | 01:23 | and Picasa, can use geotags as an additional
way for you to sort and manage your photos.
| | 01:29 | So, now we're seeing
exactly what the camera is seeing.
| | 01:32 | The default mode of the
camera is to take still photos.
| | 01:35 | You can toggle between shooting still
photos and videos with the toggle switch
| | 01:38 | in the lower right-hand corner of the screen.
| | 01:40 | But for now, we'll keep it set to still photos.
| | 01:42 | Just like with the regular camera, you
can shoot in portrait or landscape mode.
| | 01:46 | Notice that the camera icon in the
shutter button rotates to let you know that
| | 01:50 | the iPhone knows that it's been rotated.
| | 01:52 | This ensures that when you copy your
photos to your computer, you don't end
| | 01:56 | up with sideways pictures that you have to
rotate in your photo management software.
| | 02:00 | So, to take a basic photo, all I have
to do is frame up the subject on the
| | 02:03 | screen and press the Shutter button.
| | 02:05 | You'll see the picture you took for a
very brief moment before you return to
| | 02:08 | the live camera view.
| | 02:10 | This is useful in case you want to
take multiple shots in quick session.
| | 02:13 | I'll show you how to review your
photos in a moment, but first, let's look at
| | 02:18 | some things you can do to improve your shots.
| | 02:20 | First, note that the camera does not
actually take the photo until you lift your
| | 02:24 | finger off the shutter button.
| | 02:26 | So, one way to help stabilize your
phone while you're shooting is to hold your
| | 02:29 | finger on the shutter button
while you're framing your shot.
| | 02:32 | Then lift your finger to take the shot.
| | 02:35 | This can keep your phone a lot steadier than
tapping the shutter button to take your shot.
| | 02:38 | Depending on how hard you tap, the force can
shake your camera enough to blur your picture.
| | 02:42 | Notice the box that appears in the center
of the screen when I hold the phone still.
| | 02:49 | That's the iPhone telling me where its
point of focus is, meaning that area in
| | 02:53 | the box is what the camera is using
to determine the overall brightness and
| | 02:56 | colorcast of the photo.
| | 02:57 | But your subject is not always going
to be dead center in the frame, and using
| | 03:01 | the default value could make
your picture too dark or too bright.
| | 03:04 | You can manually let the camera know
what part of the picture is important by
| | 03:08 | simply tapping it on the screen.
| | 03:09 | For example, maybe Scott is
the focus of the shot I'm taking.
| | 03:12 | I just tap him with my finger and
instantly the camera reevaluates the scene
| | 03:16 | based on its measurements of that
area, and now I can take my picture.
| | 03:22 | Basically, what it boils down to is
just tap the important part of the picture
| | 03:25 | before you take your shot.
| | 03:29 | To review the photos you've taken,
tap the tiny thumbnail image of the
| | 03:31 | last picture you took.
| | 03:34 | This takes you into your Camera Roll,
which we'll look at more closely in an
| | 03:37 | upcoming movie, but here you can swipe
side to side to review your shots, pinch
| | 03:42 | open and close to zoom in and out, and
when you're done reviewing your photos,
| | 03:46 | you can tap the screen once to reveal
the interface buttons and then tap Done to
| | 03:50 | return to the camera.
| | 03:51 | I also want to mention here that the
iPhone is actually quite good at macro, or
| | 03:55 | super close-up shots, as well.
| | 03:58 | If you get the camera within four to eight
inches of your subject, it goes into macro mode.
| | 04:02 | You can get surprisingly
detailed close-ups with your iPhone.
| | 04:05 | It can tap the area of importance to
improve your exposure and colorcast.
| | 04:08 | If you can't quite get the camera to
focus on a certain area, move a little
| | 04:11 | further away from your subject and try again.
| | 04:14 | Now, if you're using an iPhone 4, you
have a couple of additional camera options.
| | 04:18 | First of all, you have a built-in Flash,
making the phone much more usable than
| | 04:21 | previous models when you're
shooting in dimly lit situations.
| | 04:25 | By default, the Flash is set to auto,
which lets the phone determine when
| | 04:27 | the Flash is needed.
| | 04:28 | If it determines the scene is
too dark, the Flash will fire.
| | 04:32 | You can also tap the Flash
button and choose Off or On.
| | 04:36 | When you choose On, the Flash
will always fire with each shot.
| | 04:43 | This might be useful if you're
shooting someone whose backlit maybe with a
| | 04:46 | sunset behind them, and you'll need the Flash
so your subject doesn't become a silhouette.
| | 04:50 | If you choose to turn the Flash off, it's
not going to fire until you turn it back on.
| | 04:59 | Turning the Flash off is useful when
you want to capture more of the natural
| | 05:02 | lighting of the scene you're shooting,
or when your subject is too far away for
| | 05:05 | the Flash to matter.
| | 05:06 | So, just because you have a Flash
doesn't mean you have to use it.
| | 05:09 | Now, the other feature unique to the
iPhone 4 is its front-facing camera.
| | 05:13 | You can toggle between the main and
front cameras by pressing the Camera button.
| | 05:16 | This is really great for taking self-
portraits since it takes all the guesswork
| | 05:23 | out of whether or not you're
framing yourself in the picture.
| | 05:25 | All you have to do is frame yourself up,
and there's our cameraman, Ben. Give us
| | 05:29 | a wave, Ben. And we'll take our shot.
| | 05:31 | Now, obviously there's no button for
the Flash when you're using the front
| | 05:36 | facing camera since the Flash is
on the other side of the phone.
| | 05:39 | Also, this camera has a slightly lower
resolution than the main camera, but it's
| | 05:42 | still great to have the second camera
for still shots as well as for using
| | 05:45 | FaceTime, which we looked at earlier,
and for shooting videos of yourself, which
| | 05:49 | we'll look at later in this chapter.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Viewing still images| 00:00 | Now, let's take a look at how to view the
photos stored on your iPhone or iPod touch.
| | 00:04 | Again, photos can be moved to your
device by syncing it through iTunes, which we
| | 00:07 | looked at how to do in Chapter 3.
| | 00:09 | Or if you have an iPhone, you can
shoot photos directly with your built-in
| | 00:12 | camera, as we saw in a previous movie,
and you can also save photos you received
| | 00:16 | via e-mail on your device, or by saving
them for web pages, as we'll see in later
| | 00:19 | chapters. But in this movie, we're going
to look at how to view your photos once
| | 00:23 | they've been stored on your device.
| | 00:24 | All of your photos are found by tapping Photos.
| | 00:28 | Initially, your photos are displayed by Albums.
| | 00:31 | On an iPhone, the first item is the Camera Roll.
| | 00:34 | This album contains all the photos
you've shot with your iPhone's camera.
| | 00:38 | If you're using an iPod touch, the
first album is called Saved Photos, which
| | 00:41 | contains all the photos you've
saved from e-mails or web pages.
| | 00:44 | Basically the iPhone's Camera Roll and
the iPod touch's Saved Photos albums
| | 00:48 | store all the images that were created
or stored from your device, and didn't
| | 00:52 | arrive here by syncing with your computer.
| | 00:54 | If you've never synced your photos with
your computer, your Camera Roll will be
| | 00:57 | the only album you'll find here.
| | 00:59 | If you have synced with your computer though,
you'll find an album called Photo Library.
| | 01:03 | This contains all the photos
you've copied over from your computer.
| | 01:06 | These are the photos found in any of
the individual albums you see below Photo
| | 01:09 | Library in the main album list.
| | 01:13 | And again, these are albums you copied
over from your computer when you synced.
| | 01:17 | So, to view the photos in any
of your albums, just tap in Album.
| | 01:21 | This displays all the photos
from the album as thumbnails.
| | 01:23 | Here, you can scroll through your images.
To view a photo at full size, tap it.
| | 01:30 | Now, I currently have my phone in portrait
orientation, and this is a landscape photo.
| | 01:35 | So, I have a lot of unused
space above and below it.
| | 01:38 | To view the photo at
fullscreen, I just rotate my iPhone.
| | 01:43 | The buttons and controls that appear
at the top and bottom of the screen will
| | 01:45 | disappear on their own after about five
seconds, but you can also single-tap the
| | 01:49 | screen to bring them back, or
tap again to hide them once more.
| | 01:53 | Single-taps show and hide the
controls when you're viewing photos.
| | 01:56 | You can browse through the photos in
this album by flicking left and right.
| | 02:01 | To get a better look at the photo,
you can zoom in on it, either by
| | 02:04 | double-tapping it to zoom in and then
double-tapping to zoom out again, or by
| | 02:09 | pinching out and in.
| | 02:13 | Now, while you're zoomed in, you
can drag the photo around to look at
| | 02:18 | different areas of it.
| | 02:19 | Note that when you're zoomed in on a
photo, you can't flick to the next or
| | 02:23 | previous photos very easily.
| | 02:25 | You either need to flick harder or drag
the image to the side to reveal the next
| | 02:29 | image, which appears at its
default size and not zoomed in.
| | 02:31 | Of course, you can always use the
Forward and Back buttons to go from photo to
| | 02:35 | photo too, regardless of
whether you're zoomed in or not.
| | 02:37 | Again, just tap once to reveal the buttons
and use them to navigate through your photos.
| | 02:43 | Also, notice at the very bottom
of the screen is a Play button.
| | 02:46 | This is for playing your
photos as an automatic slideshow.
| | 02:50 | This is a nice way to show your photos
to someone else, without having to flick
| | 02:52 | through them all manually.
| | 02:53 | Notice that the nice cross-dissolved
transition with each photo fading out as
| | 02:57 | the other one fades in.
| | 02:59 | During the slideshow, you can rotate
the phone as necessary to accommodate
| | 03:02 | portrait and landscape photos, and you
can also stop the slideshow on a picture
| | 03:08 | by tapping, which you might want to do
to let your friend take a longer look at
| | 03:11 | it, or if you want to explain
how or where the photo was shot.
| | 03:15 | Resume the slideshow by
tapping the Play button again.
| | 03:17 | Now, you can also control how the
slideshow plays your photos, to some extent.
| | 03:24 | I'm going to press the Home button to
close the photos for a moment, and now
| | 03:28 | I'll go to Settings > Photos.
| | 03:33 | Here, you can determine how long
you want each photo to be on the screen.
| | 03:37 | You can select 2, 3, 5, 10, or 20 seconds.
| | 03:41 | I would generally stick with
2 or 3 seconds for each photo.
| | 03:44 | It doesn't sound like a lot, but
it's actually a decent amount of time to
| | 03:47 | view most photos, especially if you have a
lot of photos in your album to get through.
| | 03:51 | Next, you can choose the kind of transition
you want to have occur between the photos.
| | 03:54 | We saw the default Dissolve transition,
which fades one photo out as the other fades in.
| | 03:58 | You can also choose from Cube,
Ripple, Wipe Across and Wipe Down.
| | 04:02 | Each of these are more
animated than the Dissolve transition.
| | 04:05 | I'll choose Cube, and we'll
see that in action in a moment.
| | 04:07 | Of course, you can also come in
here on your own and check out other
| | 04:10 | transitions, if you like.
| | 04:11 | The last two options are Repeat and
Shuffle, which are simple On and Off choices.
| | 04:16 | When on, Repeat starts your slideshow
over from the beginning when it reaches
| | 04:19 | the end, which might be useful if you
have your iPhone or iPod touch connected
| | 04:22 | to a TV, where you're displaying
photos in sort of a Kiosk mode setting and
| | 04:27 | Shuffle displays the photos in
your album in a random order.
| | 04:29 | I'll leave both of these off for now.
| | 04:31 | Okay, let's go back to the Photo
Library, and I'll tap the Play button, and
| | 04:39 | there's the Cube Transition Effect,
which is a little more visually active than
| | 04:42 | the dissolve transition, maybe distractingly so.
| | 04:45 | It's up to your own preferences
to select a transition you like.
| | 04:49 | To return to your album, tap the
screen and then tap the button in the
| | 04:53 | upper left-hand corner.
| | 04:55 | Now, lastly, if you've synced your
iPhone or iPod touch with a Mac, you may also
| | 04:59 | see the Events and Faces
categories at the bottom of the screen.
| | 05:02 | Events are based on the events created
in iPhoto, in which photos are organized
| | 05:06 | into the dates and times
during which they were shot.
| | 05:09 | Under Faces, your photos are organized
based on the people who appear in them.
| | 05:13 | This again, is possible because of iPhoto,
and its face-recognition capabilities.
| | 05:16 | Now, if you sync your iPhone or iPod
with a PC, you won't have the Events or
| | 05:21 | Faces categories, but you might have Places.
| | 05:24 | Places, allows you to view your photos based
on the GPS location data where they were shot.
| | 05:29 | If you've taken any photos with
your iPhone's built-in camera and you
| | 05:32 | have location services turned on,
your photos are tagged with GPS data
| | 05:35 | and will appear here.
| | 05:37 | Tapping a pin lets you see all the
photos that were taken at that location.
| | 05:41 | Also, if you sync with a Mac and have
geotagged your photos in iPhoto, they'll
| | 05:45 | show up under Places on your iPhone as well.
| | 05:47 | And that's how you view the photos in
your Photo Library on your iPhone or
| | 05:50 | iPod touch.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Customizing your wallpaper| 00:00 | One thing you might want to do with
the photos you've shot or copied to your
| | 00:03 | device is to set one of
them as your wallpaper photo.
| | 00:06 | The wallpaper photo is what you see when
you press the Home or Sleep/Wake button
| | 00:09 | while the phone is locked, and what you
see behind your App icons when you're
| | 00:12 | looking at your Home screen.
| | 00:14 | These can both be the same image or two images.
| | 00:17 | In this case, my phone's Lock Screen is
set up with this image of water drops
| | 00:21 | that comes as a part of the set of
included wallpapers, while my Home screen has
| | 00:25 | this black background.
| | 00:26 | The iPhone or iPod touch come with a
very nice collection of beautiful wallpaper
| | 00:29 | photos, but if you'd like to express a
bit of your own personality, it's very
| | 00:33 | simple to use one of your own photos instead.
| | 00:34 | Now, let me lock my screen again, and
notice when I wake it we see the time
| | 00:41 | displayed at the top of the
screen overlaying a portion of my image.
| | 00:44 | And at the bottom of the screen, we
have this slide to unlock slider, which also
| | 00:47 | covers the portion of the image.
| | 00:48 | We will see why this matters in just a
few moment, but for now I'll unlock my
| | 00:52 | phone and go to Settings > Wallpaper.
| | 01:01 | The first thing you see are thumbnail
representations of both your Lock screen
| | 01:04 | and Home screen, so you can see
what your current wallpapers are.
| | 01:07 | So we see the water drops assigned to
the Lock screen, and we just have a black
| | 01:10 | background chosen for the Home
screen wallpaper, since it looks better for
| | 01:13 | recording this course.
| | 01:14 | In any case, it doesn't matter
where you tap here, just tap one of the
| | 01:17 | thumbnails to get into your wallpaper picker.
| | 01:20 | Here's where you find the built-in
wallpaper images by tapping Wallpaper.
| | 01:26 | But again, if none of these suit your
tastes, here you can access your entire
| | 01:30 | Camera Roll and Photo Albums exactly as they
appear when you tap Photos on your Home screen.
| | 01:35 | Just tap to select an album, and then tap to
select the Photo to use as your wallpaper.
| | 01:39 | Since the iPhone's screen is in
portrait orientation when you wake it, you will
| | 01:42 | probably want to stick with a
portrait-orientated photo, but you can pick a
| | 01:45 | landscape photo and adjust its
scale and positioning if you like.
| | 01:49 | I've chosen this portrait-orientated photos.
| | 01:49 | Next, I see this Move and Scale message.
| | 01:53 | Here's what I can pinch out to zoom in on a
photo and drag it around to reposition it.
| | 02:00 | Now, note that the Move and Scale and
Cancel and Set buttons aren't just laid
| | 02:03 | out randomly over my photo.
| | 02:05 | These areas represent the items that will
be covering the photo when I wake it.
| | 02:09 | As we saw a few moments ago, normally
you have the Time and Date at the top of
| | 02:12 | the screen and the slide
to unlock bar at the bottom.
| | 02:14 | So these areas show you which portions
of your wallpaper image will be partially
| | 02:18 | obscured when you unlock your phone.
| | 02:20 | So adjust the size and positioning of
your image to make sure you're seeing the
| | 02:22 | part you want to see.
| | 02:23 | When you're done, tap Set.
| | 02:25 | Now I am prompted to assign this as
either my Lock screen or my Home screen's
| | 02:29 | wallpaper, or I can choose set both
to use a same image for both areas.
| | 02:33 | I'll choose Set Lock screen.
| | 02:35 | And that's all there's to it.
| | 02:36 | I'll put my phone to Sleep now and when
I press the Home button to wake it up, I
| | 02:42 | see my new custom wallpaper image. Pretty cool!
| | 02:46 | If you know basics of using programs
like Photoshop or other image editing
| | 02:49 | programs, you might want to design
wallpapers for your iPhone or iPod touch that
| | 02:53 | fit exactly within the space provided
and without the overlays covering any
| | 02:57 | significant portion of your image.
| | 02:59 | Fortunately, lots of other
people have wanted to do that too.
| | 03:01 | So if you do a simple Google search for
iPhone wallpaper template, you'll find
| | 03:05 | plenty of templates created by iPhone
users with all the proper dimensions and
| | 03:09 | positioning guides figured out.
| | 03:11 | These very generous people have
offered their work for free in those cases, so
| | 03:13 | you just have to download
the templates that you find.
| | 03:16 | Then you can open the template in
Photoshop or a similar program and drag in your
| | 03:20 | own images and then just size and
position it using the template as a guide.
| | 03:27 | When you're done, just hide all
your guides and export your image into
| | 03:29 | the folder where you keep the images you
want to sync with your iPhone or iPod touch.
| | 03:33 | That might be iPhoto on your Mac, or
your Photos folder on Windows. But once
| | 03:36 | it's there, you can sync it to your
device, and then it will show up in your
| | 03:39 | iPhone or iPod touch's Photo Library,
where you will be able to select it as
| | 03:43 | your custom wallpaper.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Shooting video| 00:00 | If you have an iPhone 3GS or iPhone 4,
you have the ability to shoot video as
| | 00:04 | well as still photos with the Camera app,
and unlike video that comes from most
| | 00:08 | other camera phones, video shot on the
iPhone actually looks nice and crisp, and
| | 00:11 | has a very smooth playback.
| | 00:13 | In fact, the iPhone 4 shoots in high-
definition 720 P video, which looks
| | 00:17 | fantastic in most cases.
| | 00:19 | The controls for shooting video are pretty
much identical to shooting stills photos.
| | 00:23 | Just start the camera app, but be sure
to tap the button in the lower right-hand
| | 00:26 | corner to slide the
selector to the Video Camera icon.
| | 00:30 | The icon in the Shutter button also
turns into a red dot, reminiscent of the
| | 00:33 | tiny red light on most camcorders
that let you know you're recording.
| | 00:37 | All you have to do now is frame up your subject.
| | 00:40 | As with still photos, you can shoot
videos in either portrait or landscape mode.
| | 00:44 | The iPhone will know what you are
shooting in and keep the video right-side up
| | 00:47 | when you play it back later.
| | 00:48 | But bear in mind that most standard
videos are wider than they are tall, so
| | 00:51 | while shooting in portrait mode might
not seem odd when you're recording, it may
| | 00:54 | look strange to watch a video that's
taller than it is wide later on your
| | 00:57 | computer, and even moreso on a TV.
| | 01:00 | So unless you have a specific reason for
shooting vertically, flip your phone to
| | 01:03 | the horizontal position.
| | 01:04 | Also, as with shooting still photos,
you can tap on the area of importance
| | 01:07 | in your frame to help the iPhoto set the
exposure and color balance before you record,
| | 01:12 | although the iPhone will continue to
evaluate the scene as you shoot and move
| | 01:14 | around and attempt to keep things
properly exposed. So to shoot video, just tap
| | 01:18 | the record button to start recording.
| | 01:20 | You'll hear a tiny ping sound, and the
red dot on Shutter button lights up.
| | 01:24 | You also get a time indicator in the
corner, so you can see for how long
| | 01:27 | you've been shooting.
| | 01:28 | And on a nearly empty 16 GB iPhone, you
can shoot over eight hours of footage,
| | 01:33 | and double that on a 32 GB iPhone.
| | 01:36 | When you're done recording,
just tap the Shutter button again.
| | 01:39 | Your video is moved to the Camera Roll,
just like still photos, and you can
| | 01:42 | immediately shoot another
video again, if need be.
| | 01:45 | Now if you're using an iPhone 4, you
have the option of using the built-in flash
| | 01:48 | as a light if the scene
you're shooting is too dark.
| | 01:51 | If you leave the flash setting on auto,
your iPhone will determine if it needs
| | 01:54 | to turn on the light.
| | 01:55 | You can also choose to on or off to
force the flash to turn on or off.
| | 01:59 | So if for example I wanted to shoot a
video of our producer, Nick, sitting over
| | 02:02 | here in the corner, I might want to turn
the flash on to illuminate him a little
| | 02:07 | bit, and then I can shoot our video.
| | 02:09 | Now the flash will actually stay on,
whether you're recording or not, until you
| | 02:12 | tap auto or off again, so I'll just
tap auto to turn off the flash. Now, also
| | 02:18 | with the iPhone 4, you have the front-
facing camera, which you can choose to
| | 02:21 | record with by tapping the camera icon.
| | 02:25 | This is a great way to shoot video of
yourself because it gives you a chance to
| | 02:28 | fit yourself to the frame before hitting record.
| | 02:31 | Now, unlike the main camera, this is
not a high-definition camera, but the
| | 02:35 | videos you shoot still look pretty great.
| | 02:37 | And obviously, you can't use the flash
with the front-facing camera since the
| | 02:40 | flash is on the other side of the phone.
| | 02:41 | But that's the gist of how you
shoot video with your iPhone.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Viewing and editing video| 00:00 | So we've seen that if you have an
iPhone 3GS, you can shoot some pretty good
| | 00:03 | quality video with the built-in camera.
| | 00:05 | And not only that, but you can
also edit your videos to some extent.
| | 00:09 | So in this movie we'll take a look at the
video editing process on the iPhone 3GS.
| | 00:13 | First open Photos and look
at the video you want to edit.
| | 00:21 | Tap the big Play button in the center
of the opening frame to play the video.
| | 00:24 | It's important to review your footage
so you can get an idea of which parts
| | 00:28 | you want to get rid of.
| | 00:31 | Now when you edit video on the iPhone,
you're pretty much just limited to trimming.
| | 00:35 | Meaning you can trim footage off the
beginning or the end of your clip, but you
| | 00:38 | can't remove portions of the
video within the clip itself.
| | 00:41 | So if a random stranger walks through
your vacation video in the middle of
| | 00:44 | shooting, you can't get rid of him
without loosing all the footage that came
| | 00:47 | before him or all the
footage that came after him.
| | 00:49 | If you need to do that kind of editing,
you'll need to edit your video in a
| | 00:52 | full-fledged video editing
program on your computer.
| | 00:55 | But in this case let's say I want to
trim off the first couple of seconds on the
| | 00:57 | beginning of this clip and
a few seconds off the end.
| | 01:00 | I can do this in either Portrait or
Landscape mode but it's a little easier to
| | 01:03 | trim the clips in Landscape mode.
| | 01:05 | So let's rotate the phone.
| | 01:06 | Now if you don't see the on-screen controls
just tap the screen once to bring them up.
| | 01:11 | Notice these tiny thumbnails
across the top of the screen.
| | 01:13 | These are images from your video and
notice there are handles on either side
| | 01:16 | of the thumbnail bar.
| | 01:17 | To trim the video all you have to do
is drag one or both of the handles in.
| | 01:21 | So I'll drag the
beginning handle in a little bit.
| | 01:27 | Now if you want to have finer grain
control over where the trim happens, get the
| | 01:30 | handle to approximately where you
want to make the trim and then drag your
| | 01:34 | finger down before you drag
horizontally into the thumbnails again.
| | 01:39 | Notice this stretches out the thumbnails so
you can see more frames and get a better edit.
| | 01:42 | Now when you drag horizontally, you don't
jump quite as quickly through the frames.
| | 01:47 | Now I'll do the same edit a
few seconds off the end of the clip.
| | 01:50 | Tap the Play button to check your edit and to
make sure the trims fall where you want them.
| | 01:56 | If necessary you can grab the scrubber
bar in the thumbnail area and drag it to
| | 02:02 | the end to see how the end of your clip looks.
| | 02:06 | If you're happy with the
edit, tap the Trim button.
| | 02:08 | This gives you the option of trimming
the original, which will permanently
| | 02:12 | delete the edited sections from the
clip with no way to get them back.
| | 02:16 | Or you can tap Save as New Clip to generate
a copy of this clip with your edits applied.
| | 02:21 | I'll select that option.
| | 02:23 | That way, you get to keep the original
unedited version as well have your edited version.
| | 02:28 | This might be useful if you have say a
vacation video and you want to send one
| | 02:31 | version to your friends and a
slightly edited version to your parents.
| | 02:34 | So I've tapped Save as new Clip and now
if I go back to my photo album, I'll see
| | 02:40 | the new version of my video sitting
here and you can see that it's shorter than
| | 02:43 | the original clip because I've trimmed it.
| | 02:45 | So that's how you can edit the
videos you shoot on your iPhone 3GS.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Taking screenshots| 00:00 | Sometimes the photo you want to shoot on your
iPhone or iPod Touch is of the screen itself.
| | 00:04 | Maybe your device is acting strangely,
maybe you just hit a high score in a game
| | 00:08 | you're playing and you want evidence
of your achievement to send to friends.
| | 00:10 | Maybe you want to use the still frame
from a movie or TV show you're watching as
| | 00:13 | your phone's wallpaper.
| | 00:14 | The point is that it is very easy to
take a screenshot of whatever is on your
| | 00:17 | iPhone or iPod Touch's screen.
| | 00:19 | Let's say I'm out in sunny California
where the weather is warm and pleasant,
| | 00:22 | while back home on the East Coast my
friends are freezing in the cold and snow.
| | 00:25 | I want to send them a photo of the
current temperature out here, which I'm sure
| | 00:28 | they will enjoy seeing.
| | 00:29 | I'm going to open my Weather app,
and the weather here looks fine.
| | 00:33 | So to take a screenshot, you're going
to hold down the Sleep/Wake button and
| | 00:36 | then press the Home button.
| | 00:38 | The screen flashes white,
| | 00:39 | you hear that little camera
shutter sound effect, and that's it.
| | 00:42 | Now alternately, you can press and
hold the Home button first and then press
| | 00:45 | the Sleep/Wake button to take the shot.
| | 00:47 | As long as both buttons are being pressed
out at some point, the screenshot will happen.
| | 00:51 | Okay, so to see my screenshot, I'm
going to go to my Photo Library, into my
| | 00:54 | Camera Roll, and here is my screenshot.
| | 00:57 | At this point, I could e-mail this
photo or send it off via MMS text message,
| | 01:01 | which we'll be looking at how to do in
an upcoming movie, or I could grab the
| | 01:04 | image from my computer
after I sync my phone to iTunes.
| | 01:07 | Basically, I now have a nice sharp image
of my screen that I can do anything with.
| | 01:10 | So that's how you take a still image
of your iPhone or iPod Touch's screen.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Sharing photos and video| 00:00 | Being able to store and view photos
and videos on your iPhone or iPod touch's
| | 00:03 | photo library is great, in that it
gives you immediate access to them to show
| | 00:07 | to friends or other people.
| | 00:08 | But there will be times when the
people you want to show your content to
| | 00:11 | aren't standing right next to you, so you
can just hold your device up in front of them.
| | 00:14 | So in this movie we are going to look
at some options you have for remotely
| | 00:17 | sharing your photos and videos.
| | 00:18 | Start by opening Photos, open the album
containing the image you want to share,
| | 00:25 | and then tap the photo to select it.
| | 00:28 | Next, tap the button in the lower left-
hand corner to reveal the sharing options.
| | 00:31 | Email Photo creates a new e-mail
message with the photo attached.
| | 00:35 | All you have to do here is enter an
address in the To field, type a subject, and
| | 00:39 | if you want, type some text in the
body of the message, and then send it off.
| | 00:42 | I will just cancel that and tap Delete Draft.
| | 00:46 | If you are on an iPhone, you also
have the option to send the photo as a
| | 00:49 | multimedia message by tapping MMS.
| | 00:52 | That opens a new MMS screen, where you
can enter the recipient's phone number
| | 00:55 | or tap the Plus symbol to select the
person from your Contacts to send this image to.
| | 00:59 | Again, I will just cancel here.
| | 01:01 | The third option is to Send to MobileMe.
| | 01:03 | If you subscribe to Apple's MobileMe
service, this lets you send the photo
| | 01:06 | directly to your online web photo
gallery, where visitors to your gallery can
| | 01:09 | view them right away.
| | 01:11 | This is a useful feature if you want to
share an image with multiple recipients
| | 01:14 | but don't want to send them all
individual e-mails or individual MMS messages.
| | 01:17 | Of course, you have to pay $100 a year
for the ability to use MobileMe, so you'll
| | 01:21 | have to determine if it's worth it on your own.
| | 01:24 | But all you need to do here is type a
title for your image and an optional
| | 01:26 | description, and then you will tap
Publish to send it to your online gallery.
| | 01:29 | Again, we'll just cancel.
| | 01:32 | So those are the options for sharing photos.
| | 01:34 | Let's go back to our Photo
Library and find a video to share.
| | 01:41 | Here, we tap the same button in the
lower left-hand corner, and on the iPhone we
| | 01:45 | have the same three options to
e-mail, MMS, or Publish to MobileMe.
| | 01:49 | But since this is a video, we also have
the option to publish the video on YouTube.
| | 01:53 | Your iPhone will take a
moment to compress the video.
| | 01:57 | You have to have an existing YouTube
account to do this, but once you log in,
| | 02:00 | you can enter a title and description,
just like when you are publishing to
| | 02:03 | the MobileMe account.
| | 02:04 | You can also create tags to make your video
easier to find, as well as select a category.
| | 02:08 | Once you are done, you would just tap
Publish to send the video to YouTube.
| | 02:11 | I will cancel that.
| | 02:15 | So those are most of the options you
have to share photos and videos, but you
| | 02:18 | might have noticed that each of these
methods only lets you share one photo
| | 02:21 | or video at a time.
| | 02:22 | There may be times when you want to
attach several photos to an e-mail.
| | 02:25 | To do so, go to the album containing
the photos you want to send. Then tap the
| | 02:32 | button in the upper right-hand corner.
| | 02:34 | This reveals two buttons at the
bottom of the screen: Share and Copy.
| | 02:38 | If you have your Camera Roll selected
as your album, you will also see a Delete
| | 02:41 | button down here, but you can't delete
photos from your regular album, so I only
| | 02:44 | see Share and Copy at the moment.
| | 02:46 | Now just start tapping
the images you want to send.
| | 02:49 | Notice as I tap, that a running count
of the images I am tapping appears in
| | 02:52 | each of the two buttons.
| | 02:54 | Now I currently have five images selected.
| | 02:57 | That's the limit of the amount of images I
can select if I want to use the Copy button.
| | 03:00 | Notice if I tap one more image,
the Copy button becomes unavailable.
| | 03:04 | So I will tap that image again to deselect it.
| | 03:06 | There is also a limit to how many
images you can select if you want to use
| | 03:09 | Share, and that limit is 9.
| | 03:11 | So notice if I select more images, once
I tap the tenth image, the Share button
| | 03:16 | becomes unavailable as well.
| | 03:18 | So for this example, let's
just select three images.
| | 03:23 | Now I will tap Share, which as you
can see, gives me the same Email and MMS
| | 03:27 | options I had before.
| | 03:29 | If you are on an iPod touch, you will only have
the Email option available. Let's tap Email.
| | 03:34 | So that opens a new
message with the photos attached.
| | 03:38 | Let's fill in a To address, so I can show
you what happens when you send your e-mail.
| | 03:41 | And I will just type a subject
of photos, and now let's tap Send.
| | 03:53 | So now, Mail is telling me my message
is going to be 2.3 megabytes in size, and
| | 03:58 | this is a great feature because I can
see if my files are going to be too large
| | 04:01 | before I actually send them off.
| | 04:02 | And as you can see, we have the option to
optimize the images right from here, and
| | 04:06 | each option includes an
estimate of the approximate file size.
| | 04:09 | So if, for example, you are just
sending a snapshot to a friend, you know they
| | 04:12 | are not going to print out, you can
just send them these small or medium size.
| | 04:16 | If you want them to be able to see more
detail, or have the high resolution for
| | 04:19 | printing out, choose Large or Actual Size;
| | 04:22 | I will just choose Medium,
and the message is sent.
| | 04:26 | Okay, so that's the Share option that lets
you send up to 9 images via e-mail or MMS.
| | 04:31 | Now we also saw that we have the Copy option.
| | 04:33 | So again, you can select up to five
different images. Then I will tap Copy, and
| | 04:40 | now I can switch to another app like,
again, my Mail program. I can create a new
| | 04:45 | message, and then double-tap
in the body and choose Paste.
| | 04:53 | That places all the photos
into my message as attachments.
| | 04:57 | Again, once you send this file, you will
get those options to choose smaller file
| | 05:00 | sizes for your images.
| | 05:01 | We'll just cancel this.
| | 05:05 | So those are the options for sharing
your photos, and it works pretty much the
| | 05:08 | same way for sharing video files, but
you can only have one video file selected
| | 05:12 | to use the Share button, though you can
still select up to five videos to use
| | 05:15 | the Copy button.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Geotagging your photos| 00:00 | At this point, we should be aware
that the iPhone has both a camera and
| | 00:03 | built-in GPS capabilities.
| | 00:05 | This combination of features allows you to
do what's called geotagging to your photos.
| | 00:10 | Essentially, this means that when you
shoot a photo with your iPhone, it can
| | 00:12 | encode your location
information into that photo
| | 00:15 | so you can later use one of any photo
management application on your computer to
| | 00:18 | view and display your location info.
| | 00:20 | But in order to geotag your photos,
you have to allow your iPhone to do so.
| | 00:24 | Now the first time you open your Camera
app, you probably saw a message saying
| | 00:27 | that the Camera wants to
use your location information.
| | 00:29 | You had a choice to allow or not allow that.
| | 00:32 | In order to geotag your photos, you
have to give the Camera app permission to
| | 00:35 | acquire your location information.
| | 00:37 | Regardless of whether you allowed or
disallowed it at that time, the place you
| | 00:40 | go to check your location
preferences is Settings > General.
| | 00:44 | And then here, make sure
Location Services is set to ON.
| | 00:48 | Now just because you have Location
Services turned on, it doesn't mean your
| | 00:51 | iPhone will be able to
geotag all the photos you shoot.
| | 00:54 | As we'll see in Chapter 9, several
different factors contribute to whether or
| | 00:57 | not the iPhone can get an accurate read
on your location, including the quality
| | 01:00 | of your cellular reception, the
presence of any nearby WiFi networks, and
| | 01:04 | whether you're inside or outdoors.
| | 01:06 | But if your iPhone is able to
figure out your location, it will geotag
| | 01:10 | the photos you shoot.
| | 01:11 | Unfortunately, there is no way on
the iPhone to see whether or not your
| | 01:13 | photos are geotagged.
| | 01:15 | You have to sync your photos to your
computer, and then use another application
| | 01:18 | to see your geotag information.
| | 01:19 | For example, here on the
Mac I have iPhoto open.
| | 01:23 | Here are some shots I took with my iPhone.
| | 01:26 | Now I just need to click the I button
in any thumbnail and a map is displayed
| | 01:29 | with the location of my photo marked with a pin.
| | 01:38 | iPhoto also has a feature called Places,
which lets you sort, manage, and view
| | 01:42 | your images based on their location.
| | 01:46 | If you're on Windows, you can use a
program like the free Picasa from Google
| | 01:48 | to manage your photos.
| | 01:49 | Here you can just select the photo
that's been geotagged, click Places, and
| | 01:54 | you'll see a map appear
indicating where that photo was taken.
| | 01:57 | This is all just a small
sampling of what's possible.
| | 02:00 | There are dozens of other photo
management applications out there that
| | 02:03 | support geotag information.
| | 02:04 | So if you want to keep a record of
where your photos were shot, just make sure
| | 02:08 | Location Services is turned ON on your iPhone.
| | 02:10 | Now on that note, let me
show you one more cool trick.
| | 02:13 | Your iPhone is probably not
going to be your primary camera.
| | 02:16 | You're most likely going to have a
dedicated digital camera that you use to
| | 02:18 | shoot the majority of your photos.
| | 02:20 | But unless you bought a model that
includes geotagging capabilities, the photos
| | 02:23 | you shot on your camera won't be geotagged.
| | 02:25 | Here is where your iPhone can help you out.
| | 02:27 | Anytime you're out and about shooting
photos with the regular camera, take a
| | 02:30 | shot with your iPhone too.
| | 02:31 | That way you have the location
data stored in your iPhone's photo.
| | 02:34 | Then import both your iPhone photo and
your regular digital camera photos into
| | 02:38 | your photo editing
application like Picasa in this case.
| | 02:42 | Here in Picasa, just select that photo,
then hold down the Shift, and select all
| | 02:46 | the non-geotagged photos you
shot with your regular camera.
| | 02:49 | Then go to the tools menu and
choose Geotag > Geotag with Google Earth.
| | 02:54 | Now this does require that you also
have the free Google Earth application
| | 02:57 | installed, which you can download from Google.
| | 02:59 | You can see here the Google Earth is
now zooming into the location, and right
| | 03:09 | there we see a satellite
photograph of the Hoover Dam.
| | 03:12 | Notice the dialog box that pops up
telling me to geotag a photo by navigating to
| | 03:16 | the location where you took the photo.
| | 03:18 | So you can geotag photos by hand, but
because I had one photo selected that was
| | 03:22 | already geotagged, Google Earth
automatically brought me here.
| | 03:26 | Now all I have to do is click Geotag All.
| | 03:28 | You can see that Google Earth zooms
in a little bit more, maybe a little bit more precise.
| | 03:38 | Now if I go back to Picasa, you can
see that those two other photos have not
| | 03:42 | both been geotagged with the same
information that came from the original photo.
| | 03:45 | Now if you're using iPhoto on a Mac,
start by right-clicking or Control-clicking
| | 03:50 | the photo you shot with your
iPhone, and then choose Copy.
| | 03:55 | Then select the non-geotagged
photos you shot with your regular camera,
| | 03:58 | right-click, and choose Paste Location.
| | 04:01 | That applies your iPhone geotag
data to all of your regular photos.
| | 04:04 | So you can see if I turn over these
thumbnails, they're both geotagged to the
| | 04:09 | exact same location.
| | 04:11 | Now if you use other photo management
software, you'll have to dig around to see
| | 04:14 | if it supports copying location information.
| | 04:16 | But as you can see, it's pretty easy to
do in programs like iPhoto and Picasa.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
9. Getting AroundGetting your location with Maps| 00:00 | The Maps application is one of the most useful
built-in apps on the iPhone, at least for me.
| | 00:05 | From figuring out where you are in a
strange city to locating nearby restaurants
| | 00:08 | and services, to seeing what the local
traffic conditions are like, all of these
| | 00:12 | capabilities and lots more
are built into the Maps app.
| | 00:14 | Let's tap Maps to open it up.
| | 00:17 | If you see a message saying that Maps would
like to use your current location, tap OK.
| | 00:21 | That's just to confirm that you know
your iPhone is going to try to figure out
| | 00:24 | where you are, and you'll see this
message for any app that tries to access your
| | 00:27 | location information.
| | 00:28 | Most of the time when you are using Maps,
you want to start off by figuring out
| | 00:32 | where you currently are.
| | 00:33 | Unless you're previously using
another function like getting directions or
| | 00:37 | searching for a business, Maps should
automatically hone-in on and display your
| | 00:41 | approximate location.
| | 00:43 | If it doesn't, just tap the Locate
button in the bottom left-hand corner.
| | 00:48 | After a moment, a blue dot will
appear giving you your location.
| | 00:51 | Depending where you are, which iPhone
you're using, and whether you are using an
| | 00:54 | iPod Touch, the accuracy
of your location will vary.
| | 00:58 | If you are on an iPhone 3GS like this
one here, which contains an internal
| | 01:01 | compass, tapping the Locate button
again rotates the map to orient it with the
| | 01:05 | direction you're facing.
| | 01:06 | A big help especially in cities like
New York where emerging from a subway
| | 01:09 | can be disorienting.
| | 01:11 | The beam coming out of the blue dot
indicates your direction and the more narrow
| | 01:14 | it is, the more accurate the compass heading.
| | 01:17 | If you face a different direction,
you'll see the map rotate along with you.
| | 01:23 | If you are using any device other than
the iPhone 3GS, tapping the Locate button
| | 01:27 | the second time just turns it off.
| | 01:30 | Another advantage of having a Locate
button is that you can also bring the map
| | 01:33 | back to your current location.
| | 01:34 | So if you are browsing some other
section of the map, just tap Locate to scroll
| | 01:38 | back to your current location.
| | 01:39 | Now, when you tap the Locate button at
first, the map should zoom in, but after a
| | 01:43 | couple of moments, you'll probably see a
large circle encompassing a pretty wide
| | 01:46 | area on your map around your general location.
| | 01:49 | This is Maps' first guess at where you
are at, and a blue dot inside a lighter
| | 01:52 | blue circle will appear.
| | 01:53 | There should be a more accurate
representation of your location.
| | 01:57 | If you are using an iPod Touch, this
is probably the extent of how well Maps
| | 02:00 | is going to find you.
| | 02:01 | If you're on an iPhone 3GS or 3G,
after another moment, a pulsing blue circle
| | 02:06 | around the blue dot should appear.
| | 02:07 | This is ideally what you want to see
because it indicates that the iPhone is
| | 02:10 | actively tracking your location and
the dot will move along the map as you
| | 02:14 | drive or walk around.
| | 02:15 | So how does Maps accomplish this?
| | 02:17 | Well, it depends on the device you're using.
| | 02:19 | The iPhone 3G and 3GS both contain
actual GPS chips similar to the ones found in
| | 02:24 | portable GPS devices you can get for your car.
| | 02:27 | So if you're outdoors with a clear
view of the sky, your phone should be able
| | 02:30 | to get a pretty accurate read on your
location, but if you're indoors or in a
| | 02:33 | city with lots of tall buildings, the
GPS chip won't work as well or not at all.
| | 02:38 | Fortunately, all iPhone models as well
as the iPod Touch can still find your
| | 02:42 | location using two other methods.
| | 02:44 | The first is by referencing
information from a company called Skyhook.
| | 02:47 | Skyhook has sent people all over
the world, driving down just about every
| | 02:50 | road in major cities,
collecting information on Wi-Fi networks.
| | 02:54 | Wi-Fi networks are so prevalent these
days that Skyhook ingeniously figured out
| | 02:58 | that by determining which Wi-Fi
networks are overlapping with each other, you
| | 03:01 | could figure out your approximate location.
| | 03:03 | Now, this doesn't mean that you have to
connect to any strange Wi-Fi networks.
| | 03:06 | Your iPhone or iPod Touch has the
ability to detect nearby Wi-Fi networks and
| | 03:10 | using that information, it can figure
out where you are based on the technology
| | 03:13 | Apple has licensed from Skyhook.
| | 03:15 | Of course, this means you have to
have Wi-Fi turned on and it won't work in
| | 03:19 | locations where there isn't a
heavy volume of Wi-Fi networks.
| | 03:22 | The third method that's available to
all iPhones but not to the iPod Touch is
| | 03:26 | to use the signals from nearby
cellular towers to triangulate your location.
| | 03:31 | This method works similarly to
Skyhook's Wi-Fi system, but instead use the
| | 03:35 | signals from cell towers to
figure out your general location.
| | 03:37 | If this is the only available
information to your iPhone, your location display
| | 03:41 | won't be as accurate, but it should
pinpoint your general area within a few blocks,
| | 03:44 | which is close enough for you
to find a local restaurant or business.
| | 03:48 | So those were the methods the iPhones
and iPod touch use to find your location.
| | 03:51 | Once you have your location, you
can search for all kinds of things.
| | 03:54 | We'll explore more in the upcoming movies.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Finding addresses and nearby businesses| 00:00 | Now let's take a look at the Search
feature of Maps, which offers several ways to
| | 00:03 | find the places or
businesses you're looking for.
| | 00:06 | Begin by tapping the Search tab at the
bottom of the screen if it's not already selected.
| | 00:10 | In the Search field at the top of
the screen, you can type in a complete
| | 00:13 | address, an intersection, a city, ZIP code,
or any combination of those items you have.
| | 00:18 | For example, I'll type-in Main and
Thompson 93003, which is an intersection in
| | 00:23 | Ventura, California.
| | 00:24 | Now, I have previously entered this
address before, which is why it shows up
| | 00:27 | now as a suggestion.
| | 00:29 | I can save time by just tapping that
suggestion and it will perform the search.
| | 00:35 | Just like that, the
intersection comes up on Maps.
| | 00:38 | Now, one of the great things about the
Map app is that it can help you locate
| | 00:40 | nearby places such as restaurants,
shopping centers, and other businesses
| | 00:44 | based on your current location, so you
don't have to type in an exact address
| | 00:47 | if you don't have one.
| | 00:48 | Let's say you are on a trip and
you need to find a local tire center.
| | 00:51 | Start by tapping the Locate
button to get your current location.
| | 00:54 | Then in the Search field, type tire
center and in a moment, a bunch of
| | 01:02 | pushpin icons should drop on to the
map, showing you all the nearest tire
| | 01:05 | centers Maps could find.
| | 01:06 | Tap any pin to see the name of the business.
| | 01:09 | If the name is covering up some of the
other pins, just tap the name to close it.
| | 01:13 | To see the details of one of your results,
tap the blue arrow to the right of its name.
| | 01:18 | You can tap any of these items to use them.
| | 01:19 | For instance, tap the phone number to
call the business or tap the Web site to
| | 01:23 | open Safari and browse the site.
| | 01:24 | We'll talk about getting
directions in an upcoming movie.
| | 01:27 | For now, let's tap Map to go
back to the search results.
| | 01:31 | Some results have this little
person icon to the left of the name.
| | 01:34 | This is to activate Google Street View,
which we'll also talk about in an upcoming movie.
| | 01:37 | I just wanted to mention it now in
case you accidentally tap either it or the
| | 01:42 | blue arrow and wonder what you are looking at.
| | 01:44 | Now, tapping the name of a business
or service doesn't just work around
| | 01:47 | your current location.
| | 01:48 | If you wanted to find a movie theater
in Springfield, Illinois, for example,
| | 01:52 | just type Movies Springfield, Illinois
or IL, and just in a moment up pops all
| | 02:00 | the theaters in the area.
| | 02:01 | So you can see how powerful Maps is
and how easy it can be to find the
| | 02:04 | information you need.
| | 02:05 | Now sometimes, you'll get so many
results that it may become difficult to
| | 02:08 | tap specific pushpins.
| | 02:10 | In those cases, you might want to zoom
in on the map either by pinching out or
| | 02:14 | by double-tapping the screen.
| | 02:16 | To zoom back out, pinch in or
just tap once with two fingers.
| | 02:21 | Additionally, if you just want to see
a list of all the results Maps turned up,
| | 02:24 | tap the button that looks like a
curled page in the lower right-hand
| | 02:26 | corner of the screen.
| | 02:28 | The map curls up revealing additional options.
| | 02:30 | We'll get to most of these a little later,
but notice that one of the views here is List.
| | 02:35 | Tap List and now we see all of the movie
theater results in this convenient text list.
| | 02:39 | Tap the business's name to see it on the map
or tap the blue arrow to see its information.
| | 02:43 | That's how you find addresses,
businesses, and services with Maps, whether
| | 02:48 | you're searching locally or
anywhere else in the world.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Bookmarking locations| 00:00 | If there are addresses or points of
interest that you often find yourself
| | 00:02 | returning to, it's a good idea to
bookmark those locations in the Maps app so
| | 00:06 | you can always find your way
back no matter where you are.
| | 00:09 | For example, I always rent from the
same car rental company when I fly into Los
| | 00:12 | Angeles, so I have their address
bookmarked in Maps, which means I don't have to
| | 00:15 | type it in at the end of every trip
when it comes time to return the car.
| | 00:18 | So let's take a look at
how we add bookmarks in Maps.
| | 00:20 | Let's say I am planning a trip to New
York City and I am going to arrive by
| | 00:24 | train at Penn Station.
| | 00:25 | I want to make sure I'll be able to
find my way back when my trip is over
| | 00:28 | regardless of where in the
city I happen to be at the time.
| | 00:31 | I'll do a search for Penn Station.
| | 00:40 | Maps asks me to clarify which address I meant.
| | 00:42 | Now, these all look like they are the
place I am looking for, so I am going to
| | 00:45 | tap New York Penn Station and now
Maps has pinpointed Penn Station.
| | 00:49 | I'll tap the blue arrowhead
to view the location's details.
| | 00:53 | Down at the bottom of the
screen, I can tap Add to Bookmarks.
| | 00:56 | Here I can either leave
the default name or edit it.
| | 00:58 | I'll just leave this as
Penn Station and I'll tap Save.
| | 01:01 | Now, let's go back to
Search and clear the Search Bar.
| | 01:06 | To bring up your bookmarks, tap the
Bookmarks icon in the Search Bar and then
| | 01:10 | tap the Bookmarks tab.
| | 01:11 | Now I see a list of all the locations
I bookmarked and there's Penn Station.
| | 01:14 | I tap it and up it comes on the map.
| | 01:18 | Now I can easily get directions to Penn
Station and I didn't have to go through
| | 01:20 | the whole process of typing in its
name and having to specify to Maps which
| | 01:23 | Penn Station address I meant.
| | 01:24 | Let's open up Bookmarks again.
| | 01:26 | If you ever want to remove any
bookmarks you've created, maybe you made one by
| | 01:29 | accident or just going to a particular
place anymore, just slide your finger
| | 01:33 | horizontally along the
bookmark to reveal the Delete button.
| | 01:36 | Then tap Delete to remove the bookmark
or tap anywhere else on the screen to
| | 01:39 | close the Delete button.
| | 01:41 | You can also rename and reorder
your bookmarks by tapping Edit.
| | 01:44 | From here, you can tap any bookmark
to edit its name and tap and drag the
| | 01:48 | handles to the right of the
bookmarks to move them up and down the list.
| | 01:50 | Maybe I'll move Penn Station to the
top of my list since I go there a lot.
| | 01:54 | You can also delete bookmarks while in
Edit mode by tapping the red button to
| | 01:58 | reveal the Delete button.
| | 01:59 | When you're done here, tap Done.
| | 02:01 | Here in the Bookmarks area, you can also
tap Recents to see a list of the places
| | 02:05 | you've recently searched for, which is
convenient if you need to find a recent
| | 02:08 | destination again and either forgot
to bookmark it or just don't find it
| | 02:11 | necessary to bookmark it.
| | 02:12 | You can't delete individual searches
here though, so if you're trying to cover
| | 02:15 | your tracks for some reason or another,
you'll have to tap the Clear button,
| | 02:18 | which will delete all your
recent searches from this list.
| | 02:21 | The third type here is Contacts, which Let's you
search through your contacts to find addresses.
| | 02:25 | Tapping a contact brings it up on the
map, and that's how to create and use
| | 02:29 | bookmark locations with Maps.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Getting directions| 00:00 | Now let's take a look at the
iPhone's Directions feature which gives you
| | 00:02 | step-by-step directions to
wherever you're trying to go.
| | 00:06 | If you know the exact address of your
destination, you can go right to the
| | 00:08 | Directions tab and then to
your starting and end points.
| | 00:12 | But if you don't have an exact address,
start with the Search tab and enter the
| | 00:15 | location you're looking for.
| | 00:16 | For example, maybe I am
looking for a nearby coffee shop.
| | 00:21 | I'll tap the Locate button
to find my current location.
| | 00:23 | Now, I'll do a search for coffee.
| | 00:33 | After a moment, red pins appear on
the map showing me nearby coffee shops.
| | 00:36 | Now, if you zoomed in fairly close to
your location, you might not see all the
| | 00:40 | nearby coffee shops or types of
businesses you're searching for.
| | 00:43 | Try pinching in to zoom out or
drag the map around to see if any more
| | 00:46 | results become visible.
| | 00:48 | Let's say I want to visit this coffee shop here.
| | 00:50 | I'll tap the blue arrow next to its
name and here on the Info page,
| | 00:55 | I'll tap Directions To Here.
| | 00:58 | That takes me to the Directions
section where you can see the Start point is
| | 01:01 | completed with my current location and the End
point contains the address of the coffee shop.
| | 01:06 | If you have a different starting
location or if your iPhone or iPod touch isn't
| | 01:09 | giving you your exact starting point,
you can type it in, or if you've already
| | 01:12 | traveled to the coffee shop and want to
find your way back to where you started,
| | 01:15 | tap the Reverse button to
swap the Start and End points.
| | 01:18 | But in this case, I want the
directions to the coffee shop so I'll make sure
| | 01:21 | it's my end point and I'll tap Route.
| | 01:26 | So the first thing we see is a purple
line outlining the entire route Maps is
| | 01:29 | suggesting so we can get a sense of
what the course is going to look like and
| | 01:33 | the general direction will be heading in.
| | 01:35 | Your start point is the green pushpin
and the red pushpin is the endpoint.
| | 01:39 | Notice that we can choose among
directions for going by car, mass transit or
| | 01:45 | by foot, and you get the distance and
estimated travel time based on which method you choose.
| | 01:51 | Also be aware that the mass transit
option is only available in major cities
| | 01:55 | whose public
transportation systems have been mapped.
| | 01:58 | But as I am recording this, that
includes over 400 cities in the U.S.
| | 02:02 | You can visit this Web site to see a complete
list of cities this service is available in.
| | 02:08 | So if you're in New York City, for
instance, you can get directions that will
| | 02:11 | get you there by subway and bus in
addition to driving yourself or walking, but
| | 02:15 | for this example, we're driving.
| | 02:17 | So let's make sure the car icon is selected.
| | 02:20 | Now Maps doesn't give you automatic turn-by-
turn directions like a dedicated GPS device does.
| | 02:25 | Instead you get step-by-step
directions and you have to tell Maps when you're
| | 02:28 | ready for the next set of directions.
| | 02:30 | Now, this requires reading
your iPhone during your trip.
| | 02:33 | So it's really in your best interest
to hand your iPhone or iPod Touch to
| | 02:36 | someone in your passenger seat or if
you are traveling solo, take some time to
| | 02:39 | familiarize yourself with the
directions before you start driving so you don't
| | 02:43 | have to keep referring to your phone.
| | 02:44 | Remember, be smart and be safe.
| | 02:47 | So let's start driving
and I'll tap Start to begin.
| | 02:51 | My first set of directions
appears at the top of the screen.
| | 02:54 | Maps also zooms in so I get a
better view of how far this step takes me.
| | 02:59 | On my iPhone 3GS and on the iPhone 3G,
you should also see the blue dot moving
| | 03:03 | with you as you travel as long
as you have a good GPS signal.
| | 03:06 | Once I reached the point Maps describes
in the first step, I tap the right arrow
| | 03:10 | to get the next step.
| | 03:13 | Again, the directions appear at the
top of the screen and the map shifts so I
| | 03:16 | can see the next portion of the trip.
| | 03:19 | I just continue tapping the right
arrow each time to go to the next step.
| | 03:23 | If at any time you think you missed
the turn or you want to peek ahead of the
| | 03:26 | next turn you have to make, you can
use the Back and Forward arrows, or tap
| | 03:33 | the curled page button and select List to
see the complete list of directions in order.
| | 03:39 | You could tap Route Overview to return
to the map or tap any one of the steps to
| | 03:43 | jump to that point on the map.
| | 03:53 | Just like that, Maps has gotten me to
my destination and again, if I want to
| | 03:57 | head back to where I started from, I
can just go to Directions and tap Edit and
| | 04:01 | the Reverse button to map out my return trip.
| | 04:05 | Also worth mentioning here is that you
can access your bookmarks directly from
| | 04:08 | the Directions screen by first
clearing the Start or End fields.
| | 04:11 | That reveals the Bookmarks button,
which you can then tap to select any of your
| | 04:14 | bookmark locations or switch to
Recents to view any recent directions or
| | 04:19 | Contacts to find directions to
an address in your Contacts list.
| | 04:25 | Lastly, if you know the general
location of your destination but you don't know
| | 04:29 | the address and it's not a location
or business the Maps can find, you can
| | 04:32 | still get directions.
| | 04:34 | If you're still on the Directions screen,
tap Cancel and go to the Search tab.
| | 04:38 | Then tap the curled page icon and tap Drop Pin.
| | 04:45 | That places a purple pin on your map.
| | 04:47 | Tap and drag this pin to the location
or intersection you are trying to get to.
| | 04:51 | Notice that Maps gives me an
approximate address for the place I drop the pin.
| | 04:55 | Now I just tap the blue arrow and
then tap Directions To Here, and that's
| | 04:59 | all there is to it.
| | 05:00 | Once I tap Route, Maps maps out
throughout for me just like it did when I had a
| | 05:04 | specific location or address.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Showing traffic and alternate maps| 00:00 | In addition to the map that you see
when you first open the Maps application,
| | 00:03 | there are a couple of other types of
maps, views, and enhancements available.
| | 00:07 | Tapping the curled page button reveals
some more views like Satellite, which
| | 00:11 | gives you satellite imagery of your locations.
| | 00:13 | Besides being fun to look at, the
Satellite View can give you a better idea
| | 00:17 | of the layout of your locations in terms of
the arrangements of the buildings and landscape.
| | 00:21 | But in this view, you don't see any
street names so you can tap the curled page
| | 00:24 | button again and select Hybrid, which
gives you the satellite view with street
| | 00:28 | and highways overlaid on top of it.
| | 00:29 | It can be kind of fun to just keep
double-tapping the satellite or hybrid maps
| | 00:33 | just to see how much detail is
found in the satellite photographs.
| | 00:36 | Although if you go in too far, you'll
either see a "no images" message or zooming
| | 00:41 | further will just not be possible,
which basically means that you're zoomed in
| | 00:44 | too far to reveal any more detail.
| | 00:46 | Pinch in or two-finger
tap to zoom back out again.
| | 00:50 | Now a particular helpful view
of Maps is the Traffic Overlay.
| | 00:54 | To make this a little easier to see,
I am going to switch back to the regular
| | 00:56 | map and then I'll tap Show Traffic.
| | 00:59 | Now what we are seeing is
real-time traffic information.
| | 01:03 | Now this only works on roads and
highways that are mostly around major cities,
| | 01:06 | but if traffic information is available
for the area you're viewing, you'll see
| | 01:10 | green, yellow, or red
lines representing the traffic.
| | 01:13 | Green means the traffic is moving
smoothly at at least 50 miles per hour.
| | 01:17 | Yellow means traffic is little heavier,
somewhere between 25-50 mile per hour
| | 01:22 | and red usually means very slow moving
traffic, under 25 miles per hour, probably
| | 01:26 | with lots of stopping and starting.
| | 01:28 | If you don't see any colors,
traffic isn't available for that road.
| | 01:31 | So again, real-time traffic isn't
available everywhere, but if it's available
| | 01:35 | where you are, it can be really
helpful when you're about to hit the road and
| | 01:38 | want to see what the traffic on
certain roads is looking like.
| | 01:41 | If you see a lot of red along your
planned course, you might want to consider
| | 01:44 | traveling a different way.
| | 01:45 | Also, you'll probably want to hide
traffic when you don't need it because the
| | 01:48 | colored lines can end up
covering highway names sometimes.
| | 01:51 | So tap the curled page button again,
and then Hide Traffic to turn off
| | 01:54 | the Traffic Overlay.
| | 01:56 | So those are some of the other
options available when you are viewing maps.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using Street View| 00:00 | Let's take a quick look at what might be
one of the coolest features of the Maps app.
| | 00:04 | Let's say I am headed to a city I have
either never been to before or at least
| | 00:06 | to a section of a city I have never
been to, and I want to get the lay of the
| | 00:09 | land so I can find my way
around once I get there.
| | 00:12 | Enter Google Street View.
| | 00:13 | Since 2007, Google has sent out fleets
of cars and vans equipped with 360 degree
| | 00:18 | cameras setups to drive all over the
roads of the world and photograph them
| | 00:21 | while noting their GPS position.
| | 00:23 | This resulted in Google Street View,
which instead of the typical top-down
| | 00:27 | view of a map or satellite image,
lets you see your destinations or other
| | 00:30 | locations at street level.
| | 00:32 | It's a fantastic tool for seeing where
the entrance to a Center City parking
| | 00:34 | garage is, or what your friend's
apartment door looks like, or whether the area
| | 00:38 | around the hotel you are thinking
of staying in looks kind of seedy.
| | 00:41 | You could even use it to see which
shops or store fronts are near the part of
| | 00:43 | town you are planning on visiting.
| | 00:44 | So let's see how we access
Street View in the Maps app.
| | 00:47 | Let's say I am going to be staying at a
hotel near Market and 4th Street in San Francisco.
| | 00:52 | I'll enter that intersection into the
Search field and here's the address in
| | 00:56 | the regular Maps View.
| | 00:59 | Any time your location has this little
person icon to its left, it tells you
| | 01:02 | that Street View is available for this location.
| | 01:05 | Tap the person icon.
| | 01:06 | That zooms me into Street View and the
view is rotated to Landscape orientation.
| | 01:10 | Now I can see exactly what this
intersection looks like in real life.
| | 01:14 | By simply dragging around, I can
look in 360 degrees from this point
| | 01:18 | including above and below.
| | 01:19 | Double-tapping zooms in the picture,
if I want to better look at a sign or a
| | 01:23 | window and double-tapping again zooms back out.
| | 01:26 | Notice as I rotate around, the
little map in the corner shows me which
| | 01:30 | direction I am facing.
| | 01:31 | Also notice the arrows along the street.
| | 01:34 | Tapping those arrows takes you
in that direction down the street.
| | 01:37 | And bear in mind that you don't have to
know an exact address to use Street View.
| | 01:40 | Let's tap the mini map to
go back to the main map view.
| | 01:43 | Maybe I want to check out the
view from the Golden Gate Bridge.
| | 01:51 | I'll tap the curled page button to drop
a pin on my map, and then I'll just drag
| | 01:55 | my pin on to the bridge.
| | 01:58 | The Street View icon is available so
I'll tap that, and there is a great view
| | 02:03 | from the Golden Gate Bridge.
| | 02:04 | Now I can rotate around, move
across the bridge, and so on.
| | 02:11 | When you are done with Street View, tap Done.
| | 02:14 | So that's the Street View option in Maps.
| | 02:16 | A great way to get your bearings on a
location before you actually arrive there.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using the Compass app (iPhone 3GS only)| 00:00 | As I mentioned in an earlier movie,
with the iPhone 3GS Apple included a
| | 00:04 | built-in digital compass.
| | 00:06 | This compass is what allows the 3GS to,
among other things, show you which way
| | 00:10 | you are currently facing in the Maps app,
but it also powers the included Compass app.
| | 00:14 | As you can see, the Compass app is
designed to look and act like a real
| | 00:17 | compass, and it acts like a real
compass because it is a real compass, running
| | 00:21 | off a real magnetometer.
| | 00:23 | So as I rotate the phone around,
the compass continues to point north,
| | 00:26 | while also displaying my heading as well as
my current longitude and latitude position.
| | 00:31 | Now if you are familiar with using
compasses, you know there is a difference
| | 00:33 | between True North and Magnetic North.
| | 00:36 | Magnetic North is where traditional
compasses point towards, which happens to
| | 00:39 | be about 11 degree shy of True North,
which is where the most northern point of
| | 00:43 | the earth's axis lies.
| | 00:45 | If you have a strong preference one
way or another, tap the Info button and
| | 00:49 | choose either True or Magnetic North. Tap Done.
| | 00:53 | Really though, I doubt most iPhone users
are using the Compass app for much other
| | 00:56 | than showing off this
cool feature of their phone.
| | 00:58 | I don't know many people who even know
how to navigate with a compass anymore.
| | 01:02 | If you do know how to navigate with a
compass, this can be an incredibly useful
| | 01:04 | app to have, but where the compass
really comes in handy for most people is when
| | 01:08 | it's used in conjunction with Maps,
which you can access directly from the
| | 01:11 | Compass app by tapping the Locate button.
| | 01:14 | That opens the Maps app, and in here,
I tap the Locate button twice and just
| | 01:18 | like that the map rotates to reflect
the direction I am currently facing, which
| | 01:22 | can be a great help in a strange city
where tall buildings can otherwise make it
| | 01:25 | impossible to figure out
which direction you are facing.
| | 01:28 | Now quick note here, because the
iPhone 3GS's digital compass is essentially
| | 01:32 | a magnetic field sensor, it could be
thrown off if you are trying to use it
| | 01:35 | near large mass of metal like a car or
anything magnetic like a large set of PA speakers.
| | 01:40 | In those cases, you may see a message
pop-up in either the Compass app or in
| | 01:43 | Maps telling you that the compass is
experiencing interference and to wave the
| | 01:47 | iPhone in a figure 8 motion.
| | 01:49 | The idea is to help the iPhone get a
better idea of exactly where it is, and if
| | 01:53 | you can, try to move away from the
source of the interference which can be kind
| | 01:56 | of hard to do if you are in the car but
you can move the iPhone away from your
| | 01:59 | doors or car speakers which
could help with the interference.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
10. Managing Your TimeAdding events to your calendar| 00:00 | Back in Chapter 3, we looked at how
to sync your calendars on your computer
| | 00:03 | whether you use iCal, Outlook or
Entourage with your iPhone or iPod.
| | 00:07 | But if you use the Calendar app on
your iPhone or iPod, you are most likely
| | 00:10 | going to need to add events and
appointments to your schedule while you are
| | 00:13 | away from your computer.
| | 00:14 | So let's take a look at how to
create events with the Calendar app.
| | 00:17 | Before I tap the Calendar app to open it,
I just want to take a second to point
| | 00:20 | out that its icon always shows the
current day and date, which is a nice touch
| | 00:24 | and it's nice to be able to see that
information with a quick glance at the icon
| | 00:27 | without having to open any apps.
| | 00:29 | Okay, so now we'll tap the icon.
| | 00:31 | There are three main views in the Calendar app.
| | 00:33 | List, which as its name implies gives
you a scrolling list of every appointment
| | 00:37 | stored in your calendar.
Just scroll through to view them.
| | 00:40 | To jump back to the events for today, tap Today.
| | 00:43 | The Today button is available at all
times and works in all three views.
| | 00:46 | The next view is Day, which
shows you just the events for today.
| | 00:50 | This view is divided hourly and you
also see all day events listed at the top.
| | 00:54 | You can use arrows on either side of the
date to jump forward and back one day at a time.
| | 01:00 | And the third view is Month,
which shows you the entire month.
| | 01:04 | Dates with dots in them indicate
events scheduled on those days.
| | 01:07 | You can use the arrows to jump forward
or back to the next or previous months.
| | 01:11 | In all three of these views
tapping any event displays the details.
| | 01:15 | If you are in Month view, the events
for that date will be listed at the
| | 01:17 | bottom of the screen.
| | 01:19 | Tapping the events there
will show you the details.
| | 01:22 | If you are in Day or List view,
tapping an event will take you right to
| | 01:26 | those details right away.
| | 01:29 | Okay, so that's how you view your calendars.
| | 01:31 | Let's take a look at how to create a new event.
| | 01:34 | Now you can create new events in any
of these three views, but I prefer Month
| | 01:38 | view because it's the easiest way
to see the widest range of dates.
| | 01:41 | So let's say I have a dentist
appointment on May 7th. I'll tap Forward to May,
| | 01:45 | and then tap the 7th to select it.
| | 01:48 | To create a new event, I tap the Plus button.
| | 01:50 | Now I see the screen where I can add
the details of my event or appointment.
| | 01:54 | You don't have to fill in all these
fields or make selections of all them, but
| | 01:57 | you should at the very least add a
title so you will remember what you are
| | 01:59 | supposed to do on this date.
| | 02:01 | So I'll tap Title & Location.
| | 02:04 | And in the Title field, I'll type Dentist.
| | 02:10 | If I need to remember where this
appointment is, I can tap Location and in
| | 02:15 | here, I'll type Downtown office.
| | 02:22 | Feel free to leave this field blank if
you don't think you need it. I'll tap Done.
| | 02:27 | Next we have the Start and End Time.
| | 02:29 | So if your appointment is occurring
at a specific time, this is where you
| | 02:32 | enter that information.
| | 02:33 | Maybe my appointment starts at 10:30
AM, and it is supposed to last an hour.
| | 02:43 | The End Time is always an hour later by
default, so I don't need to change that here.
| | 02:47 | Now if the event is an all-day event,
like a birthday you need to remember or
| | 02:51 | your anniversary, you can turn All-day on.
| | 02:53 | Notice I've changed the Start and End field
so that they only show dates instead of times.
| | 02:58 | You would use these fields if the
event you are putting on your schedule
| | 03:01 | spanned more than one day.
| | 03:02 | For example, if I was attending a two-
day conference on May 7th, I might change
| | 03:06 | the End field to May 9th.
| | 03:09 | But in this example, I am scheduling
a one-hour dentist appointment so I'll
| | 03:11 | turn off All-day, make sure that my Start time
and End times are correct, and then tap Done.
| | 03:19 | The next field is Repeat.
| | 03:23 | You can see here that we have the
option to repeat the event, Every Day, Every
| | 03:27 | Week, Every Two Weeks,
Every Month or Every Year.
| | 03:30 | So for example, if you have a weekly
staff meeting every Tuesday at 2:00 PM,
| | 03:34 | you could create an event for it once
and then just have it repeat every week.
| | 03:37 | Or if you are putting a friend's birthday on
your calendar, you can have it repeat every year.
| | 03:40 | I am going to cancel out of this
though since I am just scheduling a
| | 03:43 | dentist appointment.
| | 03:44 | Next, we have Alert.
| | 03:46 | This is a very nice feature that
allows you to set an alarm so your iPhone or
| | 03:50 | iPod Touch will alert you
as the event approaches.
| | 03:52 | Maybe I want to make sure I get a reminder
about my appointment the day before it happens.
| | 03:56 | I'll tap 1 day before and then Done.
| | 03:59 | Notice this has created a second alert field.
| | 04:04 | You can have up to two alerts for each event.
| | 04:07 | Maybe I also want to have a second
reminder right before the appointment.
| | 04:09 | I know it takes me about 15 minutes
drive to my dentist's office so I'll tap 30
| | 04:14 | minutes before so I'll have plenty of time
to make it over there, and then I'll tap Done.
| | 04:19 | Now, the day before and 30 minutes
before my appointment a message will
| | 04:23 | appear on my screen along with an
accompanying alert sound reminding me of my appointment.
| | 04:28 | I don't have to be in the
Calendar app at the time either.
| | 04:30 | As long as my phone is on,
I'll get the reminder.
| | 04:32 | The last field here is the Notes field,
and this is just replacing any notes you
| | 04:36 | want or need pertaining to your appointment.
| | 04:38 | If I were scheduling a meeting, I might
want to put the list of people who are
| | 04:41 | supposed to attend here in the Notes field.
| | 04:43 | You can type anything you like in this
field, but I'll leave mine empty for now.
| | 04:46 | Once you have added all the necessary
information about your event, tap Done.
| | 04:50 | Now here in Month view, I can see the
dot on the 7th indicating I have one or
| | 04:53 | more events on that date.
| | 04:54 | If I switch to Day view, there is
the event between 10:30 and 11:30 AM.
| | 04:59 | I will also find the appointment in List view.
| | 05:03 | Tapping the event in any of the
three views brings up the details.
| | 05:05 | If you need to make any changes to an
existing event, just click the Edit button
| | 05:10 | on its details screen.
| | 05:12 | Maybe my appointment got
moved to 1:30 that afternoon.
| | 05:15 | So I'll tap Starts Ends and make the change,
and then tap Done and my change is saved.
| | 05:23 | If you need to completely delete an
event, maybe an appointment or meeting was
| | 05:26 | cancelled, tap Delete Event.
| | 05:28 | Then confirm that you really want to
delete the event by tapping Delete Event or
| | 05:31 | Cancel to leave the event as is.
| | 05:34 | And that's how you create and
edit events in the Calendar app.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Subscribing to calendars| 00:00 | The Calendar app on the iPhone or iPod
Touch supports subscriptions to CalDAV accounts.
| | 00:05 | Basically this means you can enter a
server address and if necessary a username
| | 00:08 | and password to automatically sync to
your company's calendar or some other
| | 00:12 | organization's calendar with
your Calendar app on your iPhone.
| | 00:15 | For example, maybe you have set up a
calendar for your family's schedule
| | 00:18 | using Google Calendar.
| | 00:20 | You could link your iPhone to that
calendar so you'll always have quick access
| | 00:23 | to see and create events and appointments on it.
| | 00:25 | So if you have an online calendar
that supports CalDAV like Yahoo!
| | 00:28 | or Google Calendars, you can subscribe
to that calendar on your iPhone by going
| | 00:31 | to Settings > Mail, Contacts, Calendars,
and here tap Add Account just like you
| | 00:37 | would if you were adding a new e-mail account.
| | 00:40 | But instead choose Other and
then tap Add CalDAV Account.
| | 00:46 | And in here you just enter
your account information.
| | 00:47 | For example, with Google Calendars you
would enter google.com as the server and
| | 00:52 | then enter your Google username and password.
| | 00:55 | Change the Description field if you like,
I'll leave mine as is, then tap Next.
| | 01:01 | If your iPhone or iPod Touch was able
to connect your calendar you'll see it
| | 01:04 | appear under Accounts.
Now I'll go back to my Calendar.
| | 01:07 | I'll press the Home button, open the
Calendar app, and in here I will tap
| | 01:13 | the Calendars button.
| | 01:15 | This gives me a list of all the
calendar categories I have on my iPhone.
| | 01:18 | These categories can't be created
on the iPod Touch or the iPhone;
| | 01:22 | they instead come from your computer's
calendar program when you sync it with your
| | 01:24 | device or they appear when you subscribe to a
calendar like I just did with Google Calendars.
| | 01:28 | Here I can see that lynda.com
work is one of my Google Calendars.
| | 01:34 | I can limit my view of events to just
that calendar by tapping it, and if I go
| | 01:38 | to List View I can see three events
on the Google Calendar I subscribe to.
| | 01:41 | The great thing about subscribing to a
CalDAV Calendar is that it's a two-way
| | 01:45 | connection, meaning I can add events or
make changes to existing events on the
| | 01:48 | calendar and they will be uploaded
back to Google, so I or anyone else with
| | 01:52 | access can see them if viewing
the calendar from a computer.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Setting Time Zone support| 00:00 | This movie is for anyone who uses the
Calendar app and travels across time zones
| | 00:04 | or schedules appointments
with people on other time zones.
| | 00:06 | To use my own real-life example, I live
and work on the East Coast most of the
| | 00:10 | time, but lynda.com's home
office is on the West Coast.
| | 00:12 | I am frequently participating in
conference calls with the home office and I
| | 00:17 | just have to remember
that I am three hours ahead.
| | 00:19 | So if get an e-mail saying that a
meeting is happening at noon on the West Coast
| | 00:22 | I'll enter it into my
Calendar app as the 3:00 PM.
| | 00:25 | But what happens to my event
times when I fly out to California?
| | 00:28 | Does my meeting time stay in my Calendar
at 3:00 PM or does it adjust itself to noon?
| | 00:33 | The answer depends on how you have
one particular setting selected on your
| | 00:36 | iPhone or iPod Touch.
| | 00:37 | I am going to go to Settings > Mail,
Contacts, Calendars, and in here I am going
| | 00:43 | to scroll down to the Calendars
section where I'll find Time Zone Support.
| | 00:47 | By default, Time Zone Support is ON and
you can read here the Time Zone Support
| | 00:50 | always shows events, dates and times
in the time zone selected for Calendars.
| | 00:55 | So if Time Zone Support is On and my
Time Zone setting here is set to New
| | 00:58 | York City, my 3 o'clock appointment will always
show as 3 o'clock even when I am in California.
| | 01:02 | and the meeting time is actually noon.
| | 01:04 | But by turning Time Zone Support Off
now my events will shift around on my
| | 01:08 | Calendar and adjust for the time zone I am in.
| | 01:11 | Now if you are using an iPhone, it
will automatically adjust its time when it
| | 01:14 | detects what time zone you are in.
| | 01:16 | But if you are using an iPod Touch,
which doesn't have cellular connectivity,
| | 01:20 | which is how the iPhone figures out the
local time, you'll have to go into the
| | 01:23 | Settings on your iPod Touch, to
General and locate Date & Time.
| | 01:29 | This is where you'll choose the time zone
you are currently in by tapping Time Zone.
| | 01:36 | In here you can type-in the name
of a major city in your time zone.
| | 01:39 | I'll start typing Los Angeles.
| | 01:44 | You can see it offers me several
suggestions, I'll tap Los Angeles, and when
| | 01:48 | you tap your city the time will
automatically update, and if you have Time Zone
| | 01:51 | Support turned Off, the events in
your calendar will then shift to coincide
| | 01:54 | with where you are.
| | 01:56 | If you don't travel out of your time
zone much, you don't need to worry about
| | 01:58 | this, but if you do travel a lot,
it's essential to turn Time Zone Support
| | 02:02 | off so you don't end up being really
late or in some cases really early for
| | 02:05 | your appointments.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| The Clock app| 00:00 | In this movie, I want to take a look at
the iPhone and iPod Touch's Clock app,
| | 00:04 | which is actually four different
mini apps all-in-one. Let's open it up.
| | 00:08 | The first function of the
clock app is the World Clock.
| | 00:11 | Here, you can add and view the time for
cities and time zones all over the world.
| | 00:14 | This is particularly handy if you
frequently have dealings with people on the
| | 00:17 | opposite coast, in Europe, or in any
other time zone where you need to take time
| | 00:21 | differences into consideration.
| | 00:23 | The default clock here is Cupertino, which
just happens to be where Apple is headquartered.
| | 00:27 | To add another city, tap the plus
button and then type the name of the city.
| | 00:32 | For the most part, only
major cities are tracked here.
| | 00:34 | So, if the city looking for isn't
listed, just type the name of a major city
| | 00:38 | in the same time zone.
| | 00:39 | For example, I'll start typing
Wellington and Wellington, New Zealand pops
| | 00:44 | up as a suggestion.
| | 00:45 | I'll tap it to select it, and now I have
a clock for Wellington in my world clocks.
| | 00:50 | Conveniently, in addition to the time,
I can see that it's tomorrow over there,
| | 00:54 | which can help me keep my dates straight
when I am sending an e-mail or calling
| | 00:57 | my contacts in New Zealand.
| | 00:59 | You can add as many additional
cities as you like. Let's add London.
| | 01:08 | Notice its clock is black, which is an
indicator that it's nighttime over there.
| | 01:11 | You can tap the Edit button to
rearrange the order of your clocks.
| | 01:16 | Maybe I want to drag London up to the
top of the list. Or you can tap the Delete
| | 01:21 | button to remove a clock.
| | 01:24 | So, that's the World Clock.
| | 01:25 | You can tap Done when you're done.
| | 01:28 | Next, we have Alarm.
| | 01:31 | This is for setting an audible alarm,
which is especially valuable if you have
| | 01:34 | to travel and your hotel room doesn't
have an alarm clock or if you just want to
| | 01:37 | set a secondary backup alarm.
| | 01:39 | To set the alarm, tap the plus button.
| | 01:41 | Before, you set the time for your
alarm you have four options to choose from.
| | 01:45 | Repeat lets you set the alarm to
repeat on certain days of the week.
| | 01:48 | For example, if you need to get up
at 7am every weekday, you can Monday
| | 01:52 | through Friday here. Then tap back.
| | 01:56 | Notice the Repeat field now says weekdays.
| | 01:59 | If you'd chosen only say Monday and Wednesday.
| | 02:01 | You would only see those
days listed in the Repeat field.
| | 02:04 | Next, choose the sound
you'd like the alarm to play.
| | 02:07 | Your choices are the ringtones
installed on your iPhone, including any custom
| | 02:10 | ringtones you might have had installed.
| | 02:12 | You have the same choices
available on the iPod Touch.
| | 02:15 | Just pick one that you think will
wake you up or get your attention.
| | 02:17 | Alarms don't have to be for waking up.
(Honk honk honk. Alarm sounding)
| | 02:19 | You might set an alarm to remind
yourself to pull a cake out of the oven or to
| | 02:22 | go pick up your kid from baseball practice.
| | 02:24 | I'll leave the default sound.
(Wooden chimes)
| | 02:30 | Next, what would any good alarm
clock be without a Snooze function?
| | 02:33 | With this option on, when the alarm goes
off, you'll see a Snooze button up here.
| | 02:37 | Tap it and the alarm will stop and
then start again nine minutes later.
| | 02:41 | The next field is Label, where you
can type a custom message to appear when
| | 02:44 | the alarm goes off.
| | 02:45 | For example, you might type pickup dry-
cleaning to remind yourself why you set
| | 02:48 | the alarm in the first place.
| | 02:50 | Although for events like that you
might want to consider creating an event in
| | 02:52 | the Calendar app with an alert instead of
creating an alarm here, but it's your choice.
| | 02:58 | After all that we have the dials
for setting the actual time the alarm
| | 03:00 | is supposed to go off.
| | 03:01 | Just spin the dials to the
time you want and then tap Save.
| | 03:11 | That adds your alarm to the
alarm list and it's set to on.
| | 03:15 | Notice the tiny clock icon that
appeared in the upper right-hand corner of the
| | 03:17 | screen. This starts to remind you that you set
an alarm even when you're not in the Clock app.
| | 03:21 | You can also create
multiple alarms if necessary.
| | 03:25 | Maybe you are on the road and you
have one alarm set to wake you up in
| | 03:27 | the morning, and another alarm to remind
you to call the home office every afternoon.
| | 03:31 | To add additional alarms just have
the plus button again, but I won't add
| | 03:34 | another one right now.
| | 03:35 | Also, I should mention here that the
alarm will play even if you have the
| | 03:38 | iPhone set to silent, which could be a good
thing or bad thing depending on your situation.
| | 03:43 | Okay, the next app we have is the Stopwatch,
which is exactly what its name says it is.
| | 03:48 | The Stopwatch is for timing an event:
| | 03:50 | how long it takes you to walk a lap
around the block, how long you have been on
| | 03:53 | hold with tech support and so on.
| | 03:54 | All you have to do here is
tap Start to begin timing.
| | 03:57 | While, the timer is going, you can
tap the Lap button to record the time at
| | 04:01 | that particular moment.
| | 04:04 | So, if you're walking or running
around a track, you tap Lap and that time
| | 04:08 | immediately appears below.
| | 04:10 | Each time you tap Lab, it will record the
time while keeping the main stopwatch moving.
| | 04:19 | Tapping Lap also resets the smaller
counter at the top of the screen, which
| | 04:22 | gives you the time for the current lap.
| | 04:26 | When you are done timing,
whatever it is your timing, tap Stop.
| | 04:28 | This is more of a Pause button though,
because you can then tap Start again to
| | 04:33 | start the stopwatch from where you left off.
| | 04:37 | I'll stop it again.
| | 04:41 | You can use the Reset button to clear
all the times and start from 0 again, and
| | 04:45 | just so you know, the times in the stopwatch
stay recorded even if you close the Clock app.
| | 04:49 | So, if you've timed something and then
you need to check your times later after
| | 04:52 | you've closed a clock, you can reopen
clock, go to Stopwatch, and your time
| | 04:56 | will still be there.
| | 04:57 | But if you tap Reset,
your times will all be gone.
| | 05:00 | The last app here is Timer, which I
can think of as a reverse stopwatch.
| | 05:05 | This is a countdown timer where you enter a
starting time, which then counts down to 0.
| | 05:08 | I use this during Thanksgiving to
countdown the time between Turkey bastings.
| | 05:12 | Just select the amount of time you want
and pick a sound you want to hear when
| | 05:19 | the timer reaches 0.
| | 05:21 | Notice the top option here is to Sleep iPod.
| | 05:23 | This is pretty cool, because instead of
playing a sound when the Timer ends, it
| | 05:27 | will turn off any music or
video you might be playing.
| | 05:29 | You might want to set this option if
you like falling asleep to music or
| | 05:32 | while watching a video.
| | 05:34 | But otherwise just pick a sound and tap Set.
| | 05:38 | Then tap Start and the countdown begins.
| | 05:41 | The Timer will continue to countdown
even if you're not in the Clock app.
| | 05:44 | So, if you need to do something
else with your iPhone or iPod,
| | 05:47 | you don't have to worry about the
timer stopping when you close it.
| | 05:50 | When it reaches 0, it
will play your chosen sound.
| | 05:52 | Like the Alarm, the Timer will still
play your selected sound even if you have
| | 05:56 | the iPhone set to silent.
| | 05:58 | So, there you have the Clock app,
four incredibly useful apps, all bundled together.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
11. Taking NotesThe Notes app| 00:00 | Since you most likely carry around your
iPhone most of the time or possibly even
| | 00:03 | your iPod Touch, it makes sense that
they should have built-in apps to jot down
| | 00:07 | notes and reminders for yourself.
| | 00:09 | The Notes application is great for
keeping text notes, or shopping lists, to-do
| | 00:12 | lists, and any ideas that
suddenly pop into your head.
| | 00:15 | Tap Notes to open the app.
| | 00:16 | If you have never used it before
you'll see a message that says No Notes.
| | 00:20 | If you have used before you'll either
see your list of notes or a specific note.
| | 00:24 | Either way to create a new
note tap the plus symbol.
| | 00:27 | That opens up a New Notes page, which
looks like a yellow legal pad and the
| | 00:31 | keyboard appears at the bottom of the screen.
| | 00:32 | Notes also supports Landscape View so
if you want to see the bigger keyboard
| | 00:36 | turn the iPhone or iPod Touch on its side.
| | 00:39 | The downside is you'll be able to see
fewer lines of text, and the only thing
| | 00:42 | there is to do here is type. There
is font formatting, no changing of the
| | 00:45 | background or customizing of anything else.
| | 00:50 | When you are done typing tap Done. To create
a new separate note tap the plus button again.
| | 00:58 | I actually keep many of my various
rental car and hotel member numbers in Notes,
| | 01:02 | so I don't have to carry
around all the individual cards.
| | 01:06 | Tap the Notes button in the upper left-hand
corner to view the list of all of your notes.
| | 01:08 | Tapping the note opens it.
| | 01:11 | When viewing a note you can continue
adding to it by just tapping to place a
| | 01:14 | cursor where you want to add text.
| | 01:19 | At the bottom of the note you can move
from note to note using the arrow buttons.
| | 01:26 | A particularly useful
feature is the e-mail button.
| | 01:30 | That opens up a new e-mail message and
places the first line of your note as the
| | 01:33 | subject and the text of
your note as the e-mail's body.
| | 01:36 | You can make any changes or additions.
| | 01:48 | Add an address in the To field.
| | 01:55 | And send it off.
| | 01:57 | And then you're popped back into the Notes app.
| | 01:59 | As you build up your collection of
notes over time, you might need to search
| | 02:02 | through them to find a
reminder you left for yourself.
| | 02:05 | Go to the main list of Notes and
drag it down to reveal the Search bar.
| | 02:09 | Here type the word or phrase you're
looking for, and the note or notes
| | 02:15 | containing the word will be displayed.
| | 02:18 | If you use Mac OS X Mail on your Mac
or Outlook on your PC you can also sync
| | 02:22 | your notes through iTunes.
| | 02:24 | With the iPhone or iPod Touch
connected, go to the Info tab and make sure
| | 02:28 | Sync notes is selected.
| | 02:29 | The next time you sync your device with
iTunes you'll find your notes in mail if
| | 02:33 | you are on a Mac or in
Outlook if you are on Windows.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| The Voice Memos app| 00:00 | Although the Notes app is great for
jotting down quick notes and lists, some
| | 00:03 | people prefer to speak their thoughts
and ideas instead of typing them out.
| | 00:07 | For one thing, speaking is much faster
than typing on the iPhone keyboard and it
| | 00:10 | lets you get your thoughts out faster.
| | 00:12 | So for those times when you'd
rather speak them type, you can use the
| | 00:15 | included Voice Memos app.
| | 00:17 | Now using the Voice Memos does require
you to have a microphone, which isn't a
| | 00:20 | problem for the iPhone because it has a
built-in microphone and also ship with
| | 00:23 | the ear-bud headset, which
also includes a microphone.
| | 00:26 | But if you have an iPod Touch, you'll
need to purchase a headset with a built-in
| | 00:29 | microphone from Apple or another
vendor or you can buy one of several tiny
| | 00:32 | microphones to plug into
the headset jack of the iPod.
| | 00:35 | These mics are usually under $20 or
so and produce surprisingly decent sound
| | 00:39 | recordings, at least in terms of
the quality you need for Voice Memos.
| | 00:42 | But again, if you have an iPhone, you don't
have to worry about purchasing a microphone.
| | 00:45 | So to use Voice Memos tap its icon.
| | 00:49 | Voice Memos are great when you have a
sudden idea or if you need to record an
| | 00:52 | interview or lecture or even when
your kid says his or her first words.
| | 00:55 | Let's make sure your iPhone is hearing you,
by speaking a few words like "Check 1, 2."
| | 01:01 | The little VU Meter at the bottom of
the screen should move as you speak.
| | 01:04 | As long as it moves and it doesn't
hit the red, which is a good indication
| | 01:07 | that you're recording will probably be
distorted, it will capture what you are recording.
| | 01:11 | Tap the red Record button to record
and start speaking or just point the
| | 01:14 | microphone towards
whatever it is you are recording.
| | 01:19 | (Uh-hum. Clears throat.)
| | 01:20 | It turns out the boss' wife's name is Stephanie
not Dianne. Let's remember that in the future.
| | 01:26 | You can tap the Record button again at
anytime to pause the recording, whether
| | 01:29 | it's to gather your thoughts or
during a break in the interview.
| | 01:33 | When you tap Record again, the
recording will pick up right where you left off.
| | 01:41 | And when you have done
recording tap the Stop button.
| | 01:43 | You can view and review all your
recordings by then clicking what was previously
| | 01:46 | the Stop button. It's icon currently
looks like a short list. Here tap on the
| | 01:50 | recording to listen back.
| | 01:52 | The recording you just made should
playback right away.
| | 01:54 | (Uh-hum. Clears throat.)
| | 01:55 | (Recording: It turns out the boss' wife's name is
Stephanie not Dianne. Let's remember that in the future.)
| | 02:00 | If it doesn't or you want to play another
recording you've made just, tap the recording.
| | 02:03 | You probably also want to tap Speaker
unless you want to listen through your
| | 02:06 | iPhone's earpiece speaker.
| | 02:08 | The iPod Touch doesn't have the
Speaker button because it only has a built-in
| | 02:11 | speaker or no earpiece and all sounds
will come out of that speaker unless you
| | 02:14 | have headphones plugged-in.
| | 02:16 | So let's play the recording.
| | 02:18 | (Uh-hum. Clears throat.)
| | 02:19 | (Recording: It turns out the boss' wife's name is
Stephanie not Dianne. Let's remember that in the future.)
| | 02:24 | Now, I cleared my throat at
the beginning of that recording.
| | 02:27 | Fortunately, you can trim your
recordings to edit out noises like that, at least
| | 02:30 | if they are at the beginning or end of the memo.
| | 02:32 | Tap the blue arrow next of
the memo to view the details.
| | 02:34 | And here you can tap Trim Memo.
| | 02:36 | All you do here is drag the beginning or
end handles of the recording in to trim
| | 02:39 | the beginning or end off.
| | 02:41 | So I'll drag the
beginning handle in a few seconds.
| | 02:45 | Use the Play button
to preview the edit.
| | 02:48 | (Recording: It turns out the boss'
wife's name is Stephanie not Dianne.)
| | 02:52 | Once it's trimmed properly tap Trim Voice Memo.
| | 02:54 | While we are in here I'll mention that
you can tap the memo details to tag the
| | 02:58 | memo with a label. I'll select Memo
and now when I click the Info and Voice
| | 03:03 | Memos button to go back to the list
of memos, you'll see the label has been
| | 03:06 | applied to that voice memo.
| | 03:07 | Once you've made a voice memo it's not
locked on to your phone. You can move it
| | 03:11 | off your device in a couple of different ways.
| | 03:13 | With your memo selected tap the Share button.
| | 03:16 | If you choose E-mail the memo will be
attached to a new e-mail message as an
| | 03:19 | M4A audio file, which any recipient will be
able to playback with iTunes or QuickTime.
| | 03:24 | Choose MMS to send the file
as a Multimedia Text Message.
| | 03:28 | Again, the recipients then will
need to be able to play QuickTime
| | 03:30 | compatible audio files.
| | 03:32 | If they have an iPhone, they'll
definitely be able to play the file.
| | 03:35 | And when you sync your phone or iPod to
iTunes, a playlist called Voice Memos will be
| | 03:39 | created in iTunes so you will be able to
listen to your voice memos through your
| | 03:42 | computer, even when your device isn't attached.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
12. The Other Included AppsThe Stocks app| 00:00 | As you know, your iPhone comes with a
number of pre-loaded applications and
| | 00:04 | whether you want them or not, you're
stuck with them since they can't be removed.
| | 00:07 | So you might as well get to know them.
| | 00:09 | We've already looked at many of the pre
-loaded apps in earlier movies, and in
| | 00:12 | this chapter we're going to take a look
at a couple of apps that didn't really
| | 00:14 | fit anywhere else in this course.
| | 00:16 | This is not to say these apps are
worthless, far from it, but they are so
| | 00:19 | individual in their purposes and
uses that it made sense to just put them
| | 00:22 | together in this one chapter.
| | 00:24 | The first app we are going to look at is
the Stocks app and as its name implies,
| | 00:28 | this app keeps track of stocks.
| | 00:30 | Stocks tracks a couple of
different stocks when you open it, including
| | 00:33 | Apple, Google and Yahoo!
| | 00:34 | Here we can see the current share price
and how much that price has gone up or
| | 00:37 | down during the day.
| | 00:39 | The green box indicates the price went up
and the red box indicates the price went down.
| | 00:43 | Tap a stock to display its price
graph at the bottom of the screen.
| | 00:46 | The buttons above the graph let you
adjust the timescale, so for instance you
| | 00:49 | can see how the stocks performed over
the past year, the past six months, the
| | 00:53 | past week and so on.
| | 00:57 | If you flip the iPhone or iPod Touch
into Landscape mode, the graph fills
| | 01:01 | out your entire screen.
| | 01:02 | Here in Landscape you can flick
through to see the graphs for each of the
| | 01:06 | stocks you are following.
| | 01:09 | If you switch back to Portrait
orientation, flicking the graph area brings up a
| | 01:13 | list of the stocks' info, including the
opening and closed prices, the 52-week
| | 01:18 | highs and lows and the average volume,
and another page links to various news
| | 01:22 | stories if any on the company
whose stock you are following.
| | 01:24 | Of course you'll probably want to edit
the stocks being tracked unless by some
| | 01:27 | coincidence these are the exact
stocks you have an interest in.
| | 01:30 | To change the stocks being followed or
to add a hot new stock you just bought,
| | 01:33 | click the i button in the
lower right-hand corner.
| | 01:36 | If you want to delete a stock, tap the
Red button next to it and then tap Delete.
| | 01:40 | To add a stock press the plus button,
then type in either the company, market or
| | 01:44 | index name, or if you know it,
the symbol, and hit Search.
| | 01:47 | Maybe I just bought some of SanDisk
so I'll type SanDisk and hit Search.
| | 01:54 | And there it is.
| | 01:55 | Once you find your stock, select it, and
will be added to the list you can use the
| | 01:59 | handles to change its
position in the list if you like.
| | 02:02 | Once back on this list screen you can
choose the information you want displayed
| | 02:05 | on the main stock page.
| | 02:07 | You can choose the percentage change in the
stock, the current price, or the market cap.
| | 02:12 | I'll leave Price selected.
| | 02:15 | Once you got your stocks and info set, tap Done.
| | 02:17 | Now, on the Stock page now you
can track all of your stocks.
| | 02:21 | Be aware that the stock prices are
usually delayed by about 20 minutes.
| | 02:25 | If you need to find even more stock
information, you can click the Y symbol in
| | 02:29 | the bottom left-hand corner and the
Yahoo! Finance page will open in Safari.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| The Calculator app| 00:00 | The Calculator app is exactly
what you think it is, a calculator.
| | 00:05 | Upon launch all your expected
calculated functions are there:
| | 00:08 | addition, subtraction, multiplication,
division, plus/minus, and the memory addition,
| | 00:13 | subtraction, recall and clear buttons.
| | 00:15 | However, turn your iPhone to
landscape mode and the calculator expands to a
| | 00:19 | scientific calculator, adding geometric,
trigonometric and logarithmic functions,
| | 00:24 | as well as calculations working
with exponents, roots, and factorials.
| | 00:27 | This is another huge advantage of the
iPhone and iPod Touch's virtual keyboard.
| | 00:31 | Apps are not limited by physical keys,
so including a scientific calculator is a
| | 00:35 | relatively easy task for a developer
when you can create the position of the
| | 00:38 | buttons anywhere you like.
| | 00:39 | Now, I am not going to go into the
function of each and every button here.
| | 00:42 | But if you ever need to run a
calculation that's of a complexity between
| | 00:45 | figuring out to tip at dinner and
predicting when a rogue comet is going to
| | 00:48 | hit the Earth, chances are you
can use the iPhone Calculator.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| The Nike+ app| 00:00 | Back in 2006, Apple and Nike announced
the partnership in which they released the
| | 00:04 | Nike+ iPod Sport Kit, which consists
of a small sensor that you place into a
| | 00:08 | specially designed Nike+ shoe.
| | 00:11 | The sensor transmits to a receiver
that's attached to the dock port of a Nike+
| | 00:14 | enabled iPod, allowing the user to then
track the distance and pace of a walk or run
| | 00:19 | while listening to music or
other audio tracks on the iPod.
| | 00:21 | This still remains a great system,
especially for people with older iPods, but
| | 00:26 | if you have an iPhone 3GS or an iPod
Touch built after 2008, you have the Nike+
| | 00:30 | receiver functionality built-in.
| | 00:32 | So you don't need to plug any
additional devices into the dock port.
| | 00:35 | All you need is the sensor, which is
available from Apple, Nike, and most major
| | 00:40 | sports or running stores,
and a pair of running shoes.
| | 00:42 | Now, as you can see, Nike+ running
shoes have a special recessed area in the
| | 00:47 | sole built-in to house the
sensor, which fits snugly in there.
| | 00:52 | But this doesn't mean you're
limited to using only Nike+ shoes.
| | 00:55 | There are lots of third-party products
available for attaching the sensor to the
| | 00:58 | shoes of your choice.
| | 00:59 | These are usually pouches or hard plastic
containers that you attach to your shoes laces.
| | 01:04 | I use this inexpensive
pouch called the Bean Pod.
| | 01:08 | The Nike+ sensor works
by sensing your footfalls.
| | 01:10 | So, as long as the sensor is firmly
attached to your shoe in the proper
| | 01:12 | orientation, so it doesn't jerk around, you
can continue using whichever shoes you prefer.
| | 01:17 | So, if you're a runner or a walker
with iPhone or iPod Touch, you should
| | 01:20 | definitely give the Nike+ iPod system a try.
| | 01:24 | You can activate it by going to Settings >
Nike+ iPod, and tapping to turn it on.
| | 01:31 | While you're here, you can make some
other choices for other preferences.
| | 01:34 | The PowerSong feature is for picking the
song in your iPod library that you find
| | 01:37 | particularly motivating or inspirational.
| | 01:39 | It's a song you can pick up at any
point in your workout, when you need that
| | 01:42 | extra little bit of help
to get you through your run.
| | 01:45 | Just tap PowerSong and find the song you want.
| | 01:47 | In just a little while, I'll show you how
to bring up PowerSong during your workout.
| | 01:51 | Next, we have Spoken Feedback.
| | 01:56 | The Nike+ system will give you audible
messages, telling you how far you've run,
| | 01:59 | how much distance remains,
your time, your pace, and so on.
| | 02:03 | You can choose a male or female
voice, or if you prefer not to hear
| | 02:06 | any feedback, tap Off.
| | 02:10 | Next decide whether you want
distances to track in miles or kilometers.
| | 02:15 | Enter your current weight, which helps
the system calculate how many calories
| | 02:18 | you burned in your workout.
| | 02:21 | Now, many people use armbands for
their iPhone or iPod Touch, so they can be
| | 02:24 | worn on the bicep during the workout.
| | 02:26 | Depending on which direction you place
the device on your armband and on which
| | 02:29 | arm you wear it, you want to lock the
screen in a specific orientation, so you
| | 02:33 | can easily see and control Nike+ while
you're in the middle of your workout.
| | 02:36 | For example, I wear my iPhone on my left
arm with the headphone jack facing down.
| | 02:40 | So, I lock the screen with landscape right.
| | 02:42 | It can be a little confusing until you
put the iPhone on your own arm, so just
| | 02:46 | remember that this is where you
set your preferred orientation.
| | 02:50 | The sensor setting is
probably the most important setting.
| | 02:53 | This is the way you tell your iPhone or
iPod Touch which sensor you want it to
| | 02:56 | receive information from.
| | 02:58 | Each Nike+ sensor has a unique ID
number, so the iPhone won't get confused if
| | 03:01 | there are other people nearby with
Nike+ sensors in their shoes too.
| | 03:06 | My iPhone is asking me to walk
around so it can find my sensor.
| | 03:09 | After a moment, the sensor appears.
| | 03:11 | That should be the only time you
have to do this until the battery in the
| | 03:14 | sensor dies, which could be weeks, months, or
over a year, depending on how much you use it.
| | 03:19 | Apple says the battery has over
1000 active hours, but it can obviously
| | 03:22 | vary depending on use.
| | 03:24 | If you plan on wearing you shoes at
times when you're not using the Nike+ system
| | 03:27 | to track a workout, take the
sensor out to conserve the battery life.
| | 03:30 | The battery in the sensor is not
replaceable, so you have to buy a new one
| | 03:33 | when the time comes.
| | 03:35 | At that point, you'll need to pair your
new sensor with your iPhone, which you
| | 03:37 | can do by tapping Link New,
and then walking around again.
| | 03:41 | Lastly, the Remote setting is for a
remote-controlled accessory worn like a watch,
| | 03:45 | which lets you control your iPhone or
iPod, so you don't have to fumble with it
| | 03:48 | while you're working out.
| | 03:49 | If you have one of these, follow the
instructions that came with it to pair it
| | 03:52 | with your iPhone or iPod Touch.
| | 03:53 | Once you've done making your
selections here, press the Home button.
| | 03:56 | You'll then see the Nike+ app.
| | 03:59 | When you open the Nike+ app, you're
presented with a choice of four different
| | 04:03 | types of workouts, Basic,
Time, Distance, and Calorie.
| | 04:08 | The Basic workout is for when you're not
sure how long or far you're going to go.
| | 04:11 | So, all you have to do here is choose
whether you want to play a playlist of
| | 04:14 | music you've previously created, play
a random assortment of songs from your
| | 04:18 | library, or not listen to any music at all.
| | 04:21 | Under Time, you can choose for how long
you want to work out by tapping a preset
| | 04:24 | time or choose Custom to set a custom duration.
| | 04:27 | In this mode, the Nike+ app will audibly tell
you how much time you have left in your workout.
| | 04:32 | Similarly, under Distance, choose a
preset distance to run or walk or create a
| | 04:36 | custom distance goal.
| | 04:38 | In this mode, you'll hear updates on how
much further you need to go to reach your goal.
| | 04:43 | Lastly, if your goal is to burn off
those donuts you ate for breakfast, you
| | 04:46 | can tap Calories and again choose from a
set amount or enter a custom calorie count.
| | 04:49 | Remember that your current weight
needs to be entered under Settings for the
| | 04:53 | calorie count to be accurate.
| | 04:55 | Now bear in mind that no matter what
setting you choose, the distance, time and
| | 04:59 | calories burned are not
going to be perfectly exact.
| | 05:01 | Again, the Nike+ system works based on
footfalls, and it works those in with an
| | 05:05 | average length of a runner or walker's stride.
| | 05:06 | You'll generally find the system to be
fairly accurate right out of the box, but
| | 05:11 | depending on your size and the
distance you run or walk, you might find the
| | 05:14 | system's reading to be a little off.
| | 05:16 | In those cases, you can calibrate your
system by tapping Calibrate and then
| | 05:19 | choosing whether you're going to walk or run.
| | 05:21 | Then you can choose how far you
want to run to calibrate the sensor.
| | 05:25 | The default is 400 meters, but the
further you run, the more accurate the
| | 05:28 | calibration will be.
| | 05:30 | You should run or walk at least a
mile to get an accurate calibration.
| | 05:33 | I like to go out to the local high
school's track where it's very easy to run an
| | 05:36 | exact mile, but again, be aware
that it's most likely never going to be
| | 05:39 | completely accurate and the readings
will vary based on your gait and the
| | 05:42 | surface you're running on. Okay.
| | 05:45 | So, those are the types of workouts you can do.
| | 05:46 | Now, if you often do the same workout,
for example, if every Monday you run 4
| | 05:50 | miles while listening to a particular
playlist, you can save this workout so
| | 05:53 | you don't have to go
through all these menus each time.
| | 05:56 | Just tap My Workouts.
| | 05:58 | Click plus to create a new workout.
| | 05:59 | Choose your workout settings.
| | 06:03 | Give it a name.
Then tap Save.
| | 06:08 | Once you have a custom workout saved, you
just have to tap it once and start running.
| | 06:13 | Okay. Now, let's take a look at
the Nike+ app in action.
| | 06:16 | For this run, let's choose Time,
and we'll select 30 minutes.
| | 06:22 | For this example, we won't have
any music playing, so I'll tap None.
| | 06:25 | Now we just have to move around a bit
until the sensor in the shoe is found.
| | 06:31 | Then press the Play
button to start your workout.
| | 06:35 | (Female voice: Beginning workout)
| | 06:37 | As you can see, the display is showing
elapsed time, distance run, and pace.
| | 06:42 | While you're running, you may want to
press the Lock button to turn off the
| | 06:44 | display and conserve your battery.
| | 06:46 | The display will also automatically turn
off based on your screen lock settings.
| | 06:53 | At any time during your workout, press
the Home button to see your stats, and to
| | 06:56 | hear audible feedback.
| | 06:57 | (Female voice: 22 seconds completed.
Distance .03 miles)
| | 07:02 | Here, I can pause my workout even
without sliding to unlock the screen.
| | 07:05 | What's unique about the Nike+ app is that
it works even when your phone is locked.
| | 07:09 | If I do unlock the screen, I can
still access the rest of my iPhone.
| | 07:12 | The Nike+ app can run in the background,
so if you're on a walk, for example,
| | 07:15 | and you want to check your e-
mail, just click the Home button.
| | 07:18 | Notice the area at the top of the screen that
says you can tap it to return to the workout.
| | 07:24 | If you need to pause your workout,
maybe you have to wait at a streetlight or
| | 07:27 | you run into a friend, you end up
talking to for a while, just tap Pause.
| | 07:32 | When you start up again, Nike+
will pick up where you left off.
| | 07:37 | Notice the PowerSong button, which
will play whichever song you designated
| | 07:40 | as your PowerSong.
| | 07:41 | If your screen is locked, you can
also press the Home button twice to
| | 07:44 | access your PowerSong.
| | 07:47 | When you finished your workout,
tap End Workout.
| | 07:52 | (Female voice: Workout completed.
Workout distance .14 miles.)
| | 07:57 | You'll hear an audible summary of your
workout and see the stats on the screen.
| | 08:01 | After your workout, connect your
iPhone or iPod Touch to your computer.
| | 08:05 | Under the Nike+ tab in iTunes,
you'll see your workout history.
| | 08:08 | This includes information on your
last workout, as well as the number of
| | 08:12 | workouts you've done using this
particular sensor, the farthest you've gone,
| | 08:15 | your total distance, total time, total calories.
| | 08:18 | It's a nice way to keep track of
all the work you've been doing.
| | 08:21 | You also have the option of sending
your workouts to Nike's Web site where you
| | 08:23 | can register for a free account.
| | 08:25 | Once you've created an account, you can
visit the Nike+ site by clicking Visit Nike+.
| | 08:35 | There you can sign in, and here you can
see graphs of your most recent run, as
| | 08:40 | well as add information and notes to journal
your performance and your thoughts about it.
| | 08:45 | Probably most motivational to me, you
can build up this graph of all of your runs.
| | 08:49 | It can really make a huge difference
just being able to see your progress
| | 08:52 | visually represented like this as
you become a stronger walker or runner.
| | 08:56 | All the information you've tracked
with each run remains with that run.
| | 08:59 | So, you can roll over any of these bars
to see when you ran that particular run,
| | 09:04 | how you felt that that day,
what the weather was like.
| | 09:07 | I can click any of these to see the details.
| | 09:09 | So, I can track my progress and my
performance at different points during my run.
| | 09:16 | So, that's the Nike+ app
built into iPhone and iPod Touch.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| The YouTube app| 00:00 | If you've spent any time on the Web in
the past several years, you've heard of
| | 00:03 | YouTube, the most popular
video sharing site on the Web.
| | 00:06 | You iPhone or iPod Touch's YouTube app,
lets you find and view not all but
| | 00:10 | almost all of the content found on YouTube.
| | 00:12 | When you first open the YouTube app,
you can sign in to your account by tapping
| | 00:15 | the Sign In button on the top-left of
either the Favorites or the More sections.
| | 00:19 | That will give you access to any
account settings you set up through
| | 00:22 | the YouTube.com site.
| | 00:24 | But it's not a requirement to sign in,
so I'm just going to cancel for now.
| | 00:27 | There are several ways to find
videos through the YouTube application.
| | 00:30 | The default choices on the main
app screen are Featured, Most Viewed,
| | 00:36 | Search, and Favorites.
| | 00:39 | Under the More tab, you can also
search the most recent and top-rated
| | 00:43 | videos, browse your view history,
subscriptions, and playlists, and see
| | 00:46 | videos you've uploaded.
| | 00:48 | You can also change the default
set of options on the main page.
| | 00:51 | Select Edit on the More page,
and all the viewing options appear.
| | 00:56 | To make a change, simply drag the option
you want to the item you want to replace.
| | 00:59 | If you don't have any favorites, but
you want your viewing history to be
| | 01:02 | more readily accessible, just drag History
over Favorites and the change is instantaneous.
| | 01:08 | I'll tap Done, and now I'll go to
the Search tab to look for a video.
| | 01:11 | I'll do a search for the band The Jellybricks.
| | 01:27 | To play a search result, just tap it.
| | 01:30 | YouTube videos will always play in
Landscape mode, so you have to rotate your phone.
| | 01:33 | (Music Playing)
| | 01:41 | I'm going to bring back the onscreen
controls by taping the screen once, and now
| | 01:45 | I'll tap the Pause button to pause the
playback, so it's not playing while I'm
| | 01:48 | trying to show you the interface.
| | 01:50 | Now the YouTube Player looks almost
identical to the iPhone's video player
| | 01:54 | found in the iPod app or to the video player
on the iPod Touch, with two main differences.
| | 01:59 | First, to the left of the Rewind button,
there is a button to add to your video
| | 02:01 | to your YouTube Favorites.
| | 02:03 | Just tap it to add the video to
your list of Favorites. Keep in mind,
| | 02:06 | you need to be signed in
for this function to work.
| | 02:08 | But once you add it to your Favorites
on your iPhone, it will also appear in
| | 02:11 | your Favorites when you sign in to
your YouTube account on a computer.
| | 02:14 | Another added feature in the
YouTube app player is the e-mail button.
| | 02:17 | If you find a video you want to share,
or if you're not signed in to YouTube and
| | 02:20 | you want to keep the video link, you
can just tap the e-mail icon on the right
| | 02:24 | side of the player, and the Mail
application will launch with the video's
| | 02:27 | address in the body of the e-mail.
| | 02:29 | Tap Done on the video player when
you're done or just to close the video.
| | 02:33 | That takes you to the Info screen
where you can read more about the video you
| | 02:35 | just watched, as well as
rate or comment on the video.
| | 02:39 | Tap More Videos to see additional
videos submitted by the same user.
| | 02:43 | Now, just so you know, the default
format for videos on YouTube is Flash video,
| | 02:47 | which is not supported on the iPhone,
but YouTube provides alternate videos in
| | 02:51 | the H.264 format for most of their
videos, which the iPhone can play.
| | 02:56 | But if you can't find a video through
your iPhone's YouTube application that
| | 02:59 | you've seen on your computer,
it may be that the video has not yet been
| | 03:02 | converted to a format playable by the iPhone.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| The Weather app| 00:00 | The included Weather app on the
iPhone or iPod Touch is a great simple
| | 00:03 | application that lets you check the
weather in up to 20 different locations.
| | 00:07 | This is particularly useful if you
travel a lot or need to know what to pack on
| | 00:11 | a multiple-city trip.
| | 00:12 | When you first launched the Weather
app the default city is Cupertino,
| | 00:15 | California, which is not
coincidentally the location of Apple's headquarters.
| | 00:19 | Here you will see the current
temperature as well as the 5-day forecast.
| | 00:23 | At the top of the screen an image of the
current weather situation is displayed.
| | 00:26 | Depending on the weather, you might
see clouds, sunshine, rain or snow.
| | 00:31 | If it's currently nighttime in the
city you are checking out, the current
| | 00:33 | moon phase will also be displayed,
which is a nice touch if you care to know
| | 00:36 | about that sort of thing.
| | 00:38 | To change to another location, simply
tap the I at the bottom of the screen.
| | 00:42 | Here press the Plus button, then
type either the city or zip code of the
| | 00:45 | location you're looking for.
| | 00:47 | The Weather function works
internationally, so typing say Bethlehem we will get
| | 00:51 | results for cities in the West Bank
Palestine as well as in Pennsylvania.
| | 00:54 | I will choose the one in Pennsylvania.
| | 00:55 | Once you find the city you're looking for,
simply select it from the list and it
| | 01:00 | will appear on the page with the
rest of the cities you've chosen.
| | 01:02 | Use the handles to change the order of
the cities or press the Delete button to
| | 01:07 | delete any cities you no longer want to track.
| | 01:09 | You can also change the
temperature from Fahrenheit to Celsius here.
| | 01:13 | Once you've got your cities and
temperatures set the way you want, click Done.
| | 01:17 | And now to switch between cities,
just swipe from side to side.
| | 01:21 | Lastly, while the Weather app packs a
good amount of information on the screen,
| | 01:24 | if you want an expanded weather forecast,
you can click the Y Yahoo! logo at the
| | 01:28 | bottom left-hand corner, and the
Yahoo! Weather page will launch in Safari.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
13. The App StoreBrowsing the App Store from iTunes| 00:00 | Unless you don't pay much attention to
TV or magazine ads, you are probably well
| | 00:04 | aware of the App Store.
| | 00:05 | The one stop, only game in town place to
browse, purchase, and download apps for
| | 00:09 | your iPhone or iPod Touch.
| | 00:11 | Yes, the iPhone and iPod Touch come
with some great and incredibly useful
| | 00:14 | built-in applications, but let's face it.
| | 00:16 | These devices are really mini-handheld
computers and are capable of so much more
| | 00:20 | than just what they do out of the box.
| | 00:22 | And thousands of developers have created
over 150,000 apps and counting for the iPhone.
| | 00:27 | We've reached to the point where if
you can think of something you wish the
| | 00:29 | iPhone or iPod Touch could do and it's
within the realm of possibility for it to
| | 00:33 | do so, chances are that one or more
developers have thought of the same idea and
| | 00:37 | have created an app for it.
| | 00:38 | It's just a matter of hitting the
App Store and performing a search.
| | 00:41 | You can find apps for getting up-to-the
-minute news and weather reports, for
| | 00:45 | coordinating travel plans, for
managing your finances, for finding new
| | 00:49 | restaurants, for working out, and
of course you'll find a ton of games.
| | 00:53 | And that doesn't even come close to
doing justice to the range of applications
| | 00:56 | you can find in the App Store.
| | 00:56 | Now, there are two ways to browse,
purchase, and install apps from the App Store.
| | 01:01 | You can do it from iTunes on your
computer or from your iPhone or iPod Touch
| | 01:05 | itself, kind of like how you can browse
and purchase music and videos from the
| | 01:08 | iTune Store in both iTunes or from your device.
| | 01:11 | There are advantages and disadvantages to each.
| | 01:13 | So let's take a look at the process
starting with iTunes on the computer.
| | 01:17 | Begin by selecting the
iTunes Store in your source list.
| | 01:19 | Once the storefront appears, click
the App Store at the top of the screen.
| | 01:26 | On the main App Store page you'll
always find several lists of featured
| | 01:29 | applications from new and noteworthy to
staff favorites to top 10 lists of the
| | 01:33 | most popular paid and free apps.
| | 01:35 | This is a good place to start if
you're just browsing and not looking for
| | 01:38 | anything in particular.
| | 01:39 | If you know what sort of app you are
looking for, you can narrow down your
| | 01:42 | choices by clicking the arrow next to the
App Store button at the top of the window.
| | 01:45 | From here you can select
from several categories of apps.
| | 01:48 | Selecting any one takes you to a
page featuring just those types of apps.
| | 01:52 | So there is Business apps,
Medical, Photography, and so on.
| | 02:01 | Typically, the top paid and top free
apps in the category is like a listing
| | 02:05 | of the rest of the apps sorted by release date.
| | 02:08 | You can use the Sort By menu to redisplay
the apps in the order of popularity or by name.
| | 02:13 | Some apps are so popular and plentiful,
like games, that they have their own mini
| | 02:18 | page laid out a lot like the main apps
or homepage where you will find new and
| | 02:22 | noteworthy games, what's hot.
| | 02:24 | And if I scroll down, you can see
under More Games, you can click on over a
| | 02:28 | dozen different game
genres to continue your search.
| | 02:30 | Well, let's say I am
interested in a fitness related app.
| | 02:33 | I could go to Healthcare & Fitness and
then browse my way through the hundreds
| | 02:38 | or thousands of apps in this category,
but since I am looking for something
| | 02:41 | specific, I probably want
to perform a search instead.
| | 02:43 | Let's say I am looking for an app
that will help me track my runs.
| | 02:46 | So up in the Search bar, I will type Running.
| | 02:48 | That gives me results for podcasts,
albums, and music as well as apps.
| | 02:55 | But I'm only interested in apps, so I will
click Apps under the Filter By Media Type area.
| | 02:59 | Now I see six featured and popular
apps, but I can also click See All to
| | 03:03 | see all of my results.
| | 03:04 | Now, unless you have a specific app you
want to check out, you're still probably
| | 03:08 | going to have to browse through several
apps to narrow down your selection, but
| | 03:11 | you can check out the
details of any app by clicking it.
| | 03:13 | I will click this one called Runmeter GPS.
| | 03:17 | So this is the detail screen for this app.
| | 03:19 | Every app has the detail screen, we can
read the app description, what's new in
| | 03:23 | the latest version of the app, you can
see screenshots from the app itself to
| | 03:26 | get a sense of what it actually looks
like, and here you can just scroll through
| | 03:29 | the screenshots, and under
that you will find User Reviews.
| | 03:34 | These are generally reviews from people who
have downloaded and used the app themselves.
| | 03:38 | It's a really useful way to get a sense
of how good the app is beyond what the
| | 03:41 | developer puts in the description themselves.
| | 03:44 | Apple does screen every app that
appears in the store, but that's mostly for
| | 03:47 | technical issues and to make sure
the app doesn't violate any policies.
| | 03:50 | So many sub-par apps do make it into the store.
| | 03:53 | The customer review is going to be a
good defense against purchasing a poorly
| | 03:56 | functioning or just plain bad app.
| | 03:59 | But if after reading the description
and checking out the reviews, you're
| | 04:02 | interested enough to download the app,
scroll back to the top of the screen.
| | 04:05 | This is where you will find the button
to purchase the app. It will either be
| | 04:08 | labeled with the app's price, in this
case $4.99 and you see Buy App, or it will
| | 04:13 | say Free App, if the app you are
looking at is free, and many of them are.
| | 04:17 | Now, we'll look at the purchasing and
downloading process in its own upcoming movie,
| | 04:20 | but for now, that's the basics
of browsing the App Store through iTunes.
| | 04:23 | In an upcoming movie, we will take a
look at how the process works on your
| | 04:26 | iPhone or iPod Touch.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Browsing the App Store from your device| 00:00 | Overall, it's probably easier and
more efficient to browse and shop the App
| | 00:03 | Store from iTunes, because you can use
a mouse, a real keyboard and you have
| | 00:07 | more screen real estate to browse with.
| | 00:09 | But I've probably bought the majority
of my apps for my iPhone simply because
| | 00:12 | I've had it with me while waiting
for a plane or sitting in a hotel lobby
| | 00:15 | waiting to meet someone.
| | 00:17 | Now this isn't to say the browsing for apps
is difficult on the iPhone either.
| | 00:20 | It's a smaller screen interface but you
can still find the exact same apps and
| | 00:23 | see the exact same details for
each app as you can through iTunes.
| | 00:25 | So to browse the App Store from your
iPhone or iPod Touch, tap the App Store icon.
| | 00:31 | Across the bottom of the screen,
you'll see five buttons that offer different
| | 00:34 | ways for browsing through the store.
| | 00:35 | And for once, the buttons are the
same on the iPhone and the iPod Touch.
| | 00:39 | The first item is Featured.
| | 00:41 | This is where you'll find the apps
that Apple is currently recommending.
| | 00:44 | Whether this recommendation is based
on an app's popularity, its unique use of
| | 00:47 | the platforms capabilities or some other
combination of factors I can't say, but
| | 00:51 | this list is updated often and it's a
good area to get a broad scope of many
| | 00:54 | types of different applications.
| | 00:57 | At the top of the Featured
section are three categories:
| | 00:59 | New, which shows you the newest apps to
hit the store, What's Hot, which shows
| | 01:04 | you some of the most
currently popular apps, and Genius.
| | 01:07 | In iTunes, the Genius feature examines
a song of your choice and then creates a
| | 01:10 | playlist of similar songs automatically.
| | 01:13 | In the App Store the Genius feature
examines the apps you've previously
| | 01:15 | downloaded and then makes
recommendations for other apps you might like, but in
| | 01:19 | order to protect your privacy,
Genius is off by default.
| | 01:22 | Some people don't like the idea of
sharing information about what apps they've
| | 01:24 | purchased, but all Genius really does
is look at what you've purchased and
| | 01:27 | offer recommendations based on the purchases of
other people who've also bought the apps you have.
| | 01:31 | So you can tap Turn On Genius to turn it on.
| | 01:34 | You'd be prompted to enter
your iTunes password, so do so.
| | 01:42 | If this is the first time you're
authorizing Genius, you'll have to read through
| | 01:46 | the Terms of Service and then tap Agree.
| | 01:48 | You'll see message is saying, you
successfully turned on Genius for apps,
| | 01:53 | tap Done and then you'll see
a list of apps you might like.
| | 01:58 | And one really nice touch is you are
told exactly on what other app this
| | 02:00 | recommendation is being made.
| | 02:02 | Okay, so that's the Featured area.
| | 02:04 | Next we have Categories and this is where
you can search for apps based on category.
| | 02:09 | Just like you can do from
the App Store button in iTunes.
| | 02:12 | Just tap any category to see what's available.
| | 02:14 | Once you're inside a Category, you'll
find they are divided into three areas.
| | 02:18 | Top Paid, which lists the top apps
that cost money, Top Free, which lists the
| | 02:22 | top apps that don't cost anything,
and Release Date for viewing the newest
| | 02:26 | apps in this category.
| | 02:28 | In each of these areas, you'll
get a list of 25 apps at a time.
| | 02:32 | When you scroll down and reach the
bottom of the list and you want to see more,
| | 02:35 | you can tap Twenty Five More to
load the next items in that list.
| | 02:38 | The next action in the App Store is Top
25 and this shows you all the top apps
| | 02:42 | across all categories divided again,
into Top Paid, Top Free and in this case
| | 02:47 | Top Grossing, which shows the apps
that have earned the most money.
| | 02:51 | Again, you can scroll down to the bottom of
any of these lists to reveal the next 25 apps.
| | 02:56 | The fourth section here is Search, and
this works a lot like the Search bar in
| | 02:59 | iTunes, only instead of searching the
entire store, the Search bar here only
| | 03:02 | searches the App Store, which makes
sense since you are obviously looking for
| | 03:06 | apps if you're in the App
Store on your iPhone or iPod Touch.
| | 03:09 | Just type your search term, for
example running, and after a moment you'll be
| | 03:15 | offered some suggestions of apps
that match what you're searching for.
| | 03:18 | You can either tap one of these
suggestions to search that term or tap the
| | 03:21 | Search button on the keyboard to
search for the word or phrase you've typed.
| | 03:24 | After a moment your search results
appear and you can tap any one of these to
| | 03:27 | see its details, and that goes for
checking out apps and any of the other areas
| | 03:30 | we looked at so far, Featured,
Categories and Top 25. In each case just tap the
| | 03:35 | app to check out its details.
| | 03:36 | Now if you watched the earlier movie
on browsing the App Store in iTunes,
| | 03:40 | this is the same app I looked at in
that example and here we are seeing the
| | 03:43 | exact same information we did in
iTunes, only it's laid out a little
| | 03:46 | differently on the iPhone screen.
| | 03:47 | You can still scroll through to see the
description. Next you see a selection of
| | 03:53 | screenshots. When you come to the
screenshots, you can flick horizontally to
| | 03:57 | browse through them and then continue
scrolling vertically to see below them.
| | 04:03 | Next you can see how many customer
ratings have been left for this app, and you
| | 04:07 | can tap the ratings to read the reviews.
| | 04:10 | Tap the Info button to return back to
the main description page and then you can
| | 04:14 | continue scrolling
vertically to see below the ratings.
| | 04:17 | At the very bottom of the details
screen, you have buttons to Tell a Friend.
| | 04:20 | So if you come across and app do you
think of friend of yours would like,
| | 04:23 | you can send him or her an e-mail
with the link directly to the app on the
| | 04:25 | App Store and you have the Report a
Problem button which you can need to send
| | 04:29 | feedback to Apple if you find what you
think is a bug or if you find the app
| | 04:32 | offensive for some reason.
| | 04:33 | I am guessing these are the two most
common reasons people contact Apple about apps,
| | 04:37 | since they are the only choices
other than My concern is not listed here.
| | 04:40 | If that's the case, you can type in the
comment field to say anything else you
| | 04:43 | like and then tap Report to send it off.
| | 04:44 | I have nothing bad to say
about this app, so I'll tap Cancel.
| | 04:47 | Now the last section at the
bottom of our screen is Updates.
| | 04:51 | Most developers release frequent
updates to their apps, usually to fix bugs or
| | 04:55 | to add new features.
| | 04:56 | In the Updates area, you'll find any apps
you've installed that have updates available.
| | 05:00 | You can read about the updates if you
want to know about what's new or changed
| | 05:03 | by tapping on the app, here you will
see a list of what's new, and you can
| | 05:07 | install the apps on an app by app basis by again
tapping on the app and tapping the Free button.
| | 05:13 | Most updates usually are free or
if you want to have all of your apps
| | 05:16 | up-to-date, just tap Update All.
| | 05:18 | If you haven't done so recently you'll
be prompted to enter your password and
| | 05:21 | then the App Store will close and
you'll be scrolled over to the page
| | 05:24 | containing the first app you are updating.
| | 05:26 | You can keep an eye on the progress
bar on the app's icon to see how the
| | 05:29 | download is coming along.
| | 05:30 | And you don't need to leave your
device's screen on during this process.
| | 05:33 | The update will continue
even if you lock your screen.
| | 05:35 | So that's just the gist of browsing the
App Store from your iPhone or iPod Touch.
| | 05:39 | Coming up, we'll take a look at how to
purchase and install apps once you find
| | 05:42 | something you'd like to try out.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Purchasing and installing apps| 00:00 | Once you found an app you want to have
on your iPhone or iPod, the next step is
| | 00:03 | to purchase it, if it's not a free
app, and install it on your device.
| | 00:07 | Whether an app costs money or whether
it's free, the process for acquiring
| | 00:10 | the app is the same.
| | 00:12 | You can purchase and install on either the
iPhone or iPod or from iTunes on your computer.
| | 00:16 | Let's look at both ways, starting with
the iPhone or iPod Touch. Hey, look!
| | 00:19 | I found the lynda.com app on the App Store.
| | 00:21 | Let's tap it to see the details.
| | 00:25 | So again, on the Details page, you can
read about the app, see some screenshots,
| | 00:30 | and read some reviews.
| | 00:31 | Also note at the bottom of the Details
page, you can see how large an app is,
| | 00:35 | which is handy for seeing how much space it
will take up on your iPhone or iPod Touch.
| | 00:39 | As I am recording this movie, any apps
that are over 20 megabytes in size cannot
| | 00:42 | be downloaded without a Wi-Fi connection.
| | 00:44 | So if you are on an iPhone and your
only current connection to the Internet is
| | 00:47 | the AT&T 3G network and you try to
download an app over 20 megabytes, you'll get
| | 00:52 | a message saying it's not allowed
and to connect to a Wi-Fi network or to
| | 00:55 | download the app through iTunes.
| | 00:57 | iPod Touch users won't see this
message because Wi-Fi is the only way to get
| | 01:00 | the iPod Touch online.
| | 01:02 | Speaking about the iPod Touch, be
aware that some apps especially those that
| | 01:05 | take advantage of the iPhone 3G's GPS
capabilities might not work with or be
| | 01:09 | designed for the iPod Touch.
| | 01:11 | Be sure to read the details of apps
carefully to make sure they work with the Touch.
| | 01:15 | If you have doubts, contact the
developer before spending money on an app you
| | 01:18 | might not be able to use.
| | 01:20 | But if you know the app will work and
it's under 20 megabytes if you are using
| | 01:23 | an iPhone, scroll back up to the top.
| | 01:26 | The button here is either going to have
a price in it if you have cost money or
| | 01:29 | will say Free, as this one does.
| | 01:32 | Tap the button once and it turns into an
Install button, which basically acts to
| | 01:36 | confirm that you really meant to
tap the button. Then tap Install.
| | 01:40 | Next you are prompted to
enter your iTunes password.
| | 01:43 | Regardless of whether it's a free
or paid app, you have to enter your
| | 01:45 | account information.
| | 01:47 | First, this prevents unauthorized
installation of apps on your device and
| | 01:50 | second, it lets iTunes to keep track
of your purchases, which among other
| | 01:53 | things lets you re-download and install them
later in case you lose your device or get a new one.
| | 01:59 | So I'll enter my password here.
| | 02:01 | Then you're taken back out of the App
Store and you'll see the icon for your new
| | 02:04 | app appear on your device.
| | 02:05 | Depending on the size of the app and
the speed of your Internet connection,
| | 02:08 | it could take anywhere from a few
seconds to several minutes for your
| | 02:11 | download to complete.
| | 02:12 | Once the progress bar disappears from
the app's icon, the program has been
| | 02:15 | installed and you can run
immediately by tapping it.
| | 02:18 | So app purchases made from your iPhone
or iPod Touch are immediately installed.
| | 02:22 | Now, let's look at the purchasing and
installation process from iTunes on your computer.
| | 02:28 | Here in iTunes, I'm in the App
Store and I found an app I would like to
| | 02:30 | install on my iPhone.
| | 02:32 | This is Google Earth, a very cool
mobile version of the Google Earth program,
| | 02:36 | which lets you see sites
from all over the world.
| | 02:38 | This is also a free app, so here in
iTunes I just click where it says Free App.
| | 02:42 | You can see it's downloading over here.
| | 02:47 | Once its done, if I go to
Applications, I'll find it sitting here in the
| | 02:54 | Applications portion of my library.
| | 02:57 | Now when you go to purchase or download
your app, you may be prompted to enter
| | 03:00 | your username and password if
you haven't done so recently.
| | 03:02 | I had actually just entered my username
and password, so I wasn't asked for it
| | 03:07 | and the download just
started happening right away.
| | 03:10 | So this is where you will find all the
applications you've downloaded in iTunes,
| | 03:13 | or if you've already synced your
iPhone to your computer before and you have
| | 03:16 | made purchases on your iPhone or iPod,
you'll find the purchases you made stored
| | 03:19 | here in your iTunes library as well.
| | 03:22 | But the Google Earth app has not
yet been installed on my iPhone.
| | 03:25 | To install it, I first need to
plug my iPhone into my computer.
| | 03:33 | Then select the Phone and under
Applications, I want to make sure Sync
| | 03:39 | Applications is checked, which in this
case it was and you can see before I even
| | 03:44 | did anything Google Earth has been
checked and have been added to my iPhone.
| | 03:48 | Over here on the right-hand side, I am
seeing a representation of the screens on
| | 03:52 | my iPhone, and you can see the Google
Earth app has been added right here.
| | 03:55 | Although technically, it will not be
added until I click Sync, but basically
| | 03:58 | what I am seeing is what my iPhone
will look like once I click Sync.
| | 04:02 | But before I do so, I am free to rearrange my
apps anyway I like from right here in iTunes.
| | 04:07 | So you can basically grab any of these
applications and just drag them around to
| | 04:11 | rearrange them on screen however you like.
| | 04:13 | Maybe I want to make sure the two music
applications are together, so I can do that.
| | 04:17 | I'll make Google Earth the last
application on the second screen.
| | 04:21 | And if you ever want to uninstall an
app, and you most likely will because
| | 04:25 | you'll most likely run into some
stinkers eventually, just roll your mouse
| | 04:28 | over the app, click the X button, and it will
be installed the next time you sync your phone.
| | 04:32 | Now this only holds true for the apps
that you have purchased or downloaded
| | 04:36 | from the iTune store.
| | 04:37 | The apps that come built into your
iPhone or iPod Touch cannot be deleted.
| | 04:40 | So if instance if I never use my Stocks
app, notice an X doesn't appear above it
| | 04:45 | when I roll my mouse over it.
| | 04:46 | So I can't delete Stocks.
| | 04:48 | But what you might want to do is take
all of your unused apps and just move them
| | 04:51 | to the last screen of your device.
| | 04:53 | So I can grab Stocks, drag it over here to
what's number three and it'll appear there.
| | 04:58 | Maybe I never use Voice Memos for that matter.
| | 05:00 | You can drag that over.
| | 05:02 | Basically, I am just clearing the room on my
Home screen for the apps that I do use most often.
| | 05:06 | So once you have your device setup
exactly the way you want it to look with all
| | 05:09 | with all the apps you want to install
arranged where you want them, click Apply.
| | 05:13 | If you have deleted any applications,
you maybe asked to make sure that you
| | 05:16 | want to delete them.
| | 05:17 | I am going to click Remove.
| | 05:20 | Notice also that iTunes has found
purchases on my iPhone that are not present
| | 05:23 | in my iTunes library.
| | 05:24 | I have just installed the lynda.com app,
which is not available over here in My
| | 05:28 | Library, and if I want to make sure
it's backed up, I'll click Transfer.
| | 05:31 | You can see the lynda.com app is now
appeared and you can see here it says now
| | 05:39 | installing Google Earth.
| | 05:41 | And now all the applications that were
on my iPhone or here in iTunes are now
| | 05:45 | perfectly synced together.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Finding App settings| 00:00 | Like most computer applications, iPhone
apps generally have some collection of
| | 00:04 | preferences or settings to
customize how they look and behave.
| | 00:07 | Sometimes these settings are stored
and controlled in the apps themselves but
| | 00:10 | sometimes they're controlled elsewhere.
| | 00:11 | It really depends on the app and the developer.
| | 00:14 | But you can easily find out which apps
have external preferences by going to the
| | 00:17 | Settings on your iPhone or iPod Touch.
| | 00:19 | In here, just scroll down and at the
bottom of the screen below all the built-in
| | 00:24 | system settings, you'll find the list
of all the apps that use this location to
| | 00:27 | store their preference settings.
| | 00:28 | Just tap any one to access that app's settings.
| | 00:32 | Again, not all apps
store their preferences here.
| | 00:34 | But if you don't find them
here they're in the app itself.
| | 00:36 | So you shouldn't have any trouble
finding them in one place or another.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
14. Important SettingsAirplane mode| 00:00 | In this chapter, we're going to look
at some of the important settings and
| | 00:02 | preferences that we either didn't
cover in earlier chapters or that we didn't
| | 00:06 | look at very closely.
| | 00:07 | Let's tap Settings.
| | 00:08 | The first setting on the iPhone is
Airplane mode, which doesn't appear on the
| | 00:12 | iPod Touch because it has to
do with your phone settings.
| | 00:14 | So if you have an iPod
Touch you can skip this movie.
| | 00:17 | Airplane mode simply turns off your
iPhone's GSM, Wi-Fi and Bluetooth radios.
| | 00:22 | Notice how the Wi-Fi Setting now says Off.
| | 00:24 | And if I scroll-down a little, the
Phone setting has faded back and it
| | 00:28 | also says Airplane mode.
| | 00:30 | The other indicator that I'm in Airplane
mode is the little airplane icon in the
| | 00:33 | upper left-hand corner, which stays
there as long as you're in airplane mode.
| | 00:36 | So Airplane mode means that your iPhone
is not transmitting data of any kind and
| | 00:41 | can't connect to the Internet or receive calls.
| | 00:43 | This is useful not only if you believe
that cell phone signals interfere with
| | 00:46 | airplane communications and other
functions, but also if you want to save battery
| | 00:49 | power on a long cross-country plane ride.
| | 00:52 | If you're out of range of a cell phone
tower and you will be if you're 30,000 feet,
| | 00:55 | your iPhone will keep searching for a
signal, which will quickly drain the battery.
| | 00:59 | Airplane mode basically tells your
phone to give up the search and you can save
| | 01:02 | the battery for watching videos,
playing games, or taking pictures of the other
| | 01:06 | people on the plane.
| | 01:07 | It's important to note that once you
turn Airplane mode On, which again shuts
| | 01:11 | down Wi-Fi among other things,
you can then turn Wi-Fi back on.
| | 01:15 | Many airlines offer in-
flight Wi-Fi networks these days.
| | 01:17 | So if you want to be able to connect
to the Wi-Fi network on your plane but
| | 01:20 | staying compliance with federal
regulations about keeping your phone turned off,
| | 01:24 | just turn on Airplane mode
and then turn Wi-Fi back on.
| | 01:27 | And you don't have to be on an
airplane to use Airplane mode.
| | 01:30 | Again, turn it on to conserve your
battery or when you don't want to be
| | 01:33 | disturbed while you're watching
a video or listening to music.
| | 01:35 | Anything that doesn't rely on
connecting to the Internet or the phone part of
| | 01:38 | the iPhone will still work in Airplane mode.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Wi-fi| 00:00 | Back in the first chapter, we looked at
the basics of how to connect your iPhone
| | 00:03 | or iPod Touch to a Wi-Fi network and get online.
| | 00:06 | Now I'd like to cover a couple of
important things to know about using
| | 00:09 | Wi-Fi with your device.
| | 00:10 | As I mentioned in the first chapter,
your device will remember networks you've
| | 00:13 | previously connected to and
automatically reconnect to them.
| | 00:17 | This is a convenience so you don't
have to constantly go through a series of
| | 00:19 | menus to connect to a
network you've already been on.
| | 00:22 | If the Wi-Fi network has a
unique name this is just fine.
| | 00:25 | But if you're guilty of leaving your Wi-
Fi router's name at its default setting,
| | 00:28 | for example, you can almost be certain
to find multiple Wi-Fi networks with the
| | 00:32 | name Linksys or even Wireless, your
iPhone won't be able to tell the difference
| | 00:35 | between one Wi-Fi network named Wireless
and another and will happily connect to
| | 00:39 | any router with that name
whenever you're within range of one.
| | 00:42 | In some cases that will be okay and
you'll just end up leeching off someone
| | 00:45 | else's network with the same name.
| | 00:47 | But occasionally the iPhone or iPod
Touch will connect to an identically named
| | 00:50 | Wi-Fi network that has other settings,
which might not let you connect to the
| | 00:53 | Internet even though it allowed you
to connect to the Wi-Fi network itself.
| | 00:58 | In those cases, it can be confusing
when you see a strong Wi-Fi connection
| | 01:01 | indicated on your device while being
completely unable to open a Web page or check
| | 01:05 | your e-mail or connect
to the Internet in any way.
| | 01:08 | If you run into this problem, open
your Wi-Fi Settings by going to Settings >
| | 01:11 | Wi-Fi and check which network
you're currently connected to.
| | 01:14 | You'll see a checkmark next to its name.
| | 01:17 | You might recognize a network name
identical to the one you normally connect to
| | 01:20 | at home or elsewhere.
| | 01:22 | If one's available, select a different
network and try getting online again.
| | 01:25 | Another option is to tap the blue
arrow next to the network that's giving you
| | 01:28 | problems and then tap Forget this Network.
| | 01:32 | That makes your iPhone or iPod
Touch stop automatically connecting to
| | 01:35 | networks with this name.
| | 01:36 | So if you are used to connecting to a Wi
-Fi network named Wireless while you're
| | 01:39 | at home and you run into another
network named Wireless that your iPhone keeps
| | 01:42 | trying to connect to, tap Forget this Network.
| | 01:45 | You'll have to reconnect to your own
network again once you get home but at
| | 01:48 | least your phone won't keep
automatically connecting to the wrong one while
| | 01:50 | you're on your trip.
| | 01:51 | Another scenario in which you might
find it useful to forget networks is if
| | 01:55 | you've ever paid for Wi-Fi in a public place.
| | 01:57 | For example, in some businesses like
hotels and coffee shops you have to first
| | 02:01 | connect to a Wi-Fi network, which then
redirects you to a page where you have to
| | 02:04 | enter a credit card
number to purchase access time.
| | 02:07 | If you do this on time in a hotel,
the next time you're in the same hotel or
| | 02:10 | even in another property from the same
chain that has the same Wi-Fi network name,
| | 02:14 | your iPhone or iPod touch will
automatically connect to that network and
| | 02:17 | you'll be unable to access the
Internet without paying again.
| | 02:20 | But if you're on an iPhone and you
just want to use the cellular network to
| | 02:23 | quickly check your e-mail, go into
your Wi-Fi Settings and tap Forget this
| | 02:26 | Network to make your phone
stop trying to connect to it.
| | 02:29 | Or alternately turn Wi-Fi off, which
will make your Internet connection default
| | 02:32 | to the cellular network.
| | 02:34 | Another behavior you might find
annoying when you're out and about with your
| | 02:37 | iPhone or iPod Touch is that by
default, it will always give your list of
| | 02:41 | nearby Wi-Fi networks anytime you try to do
something that requires an Internet connection.
| | 02:45 | Now in an iPod Touch that might not
be so bad since Wi-Fi is the only way
| | 02:49 | for you to get online.
| | 02:51 | But on an iPhone, especially when you're
in a major city where there are dozens
| | 02:54 | of Wi-Fi signals everywhere and most of
them locked and unavailable, having your
| | 02:58 | iPhone ask you to join one of these
networks each time you try to do something
| | 03:01 | Internet related can get
really annoying, really quickly.
| | 03:04 | In those cases, go into your Wi-Fi
settings and turn off Ask to Join Networks.
| | 03:09 | That way your iPhone or iPod Touch
will still connect to any networks it
| | 03:12 | recognizes but it won't keep bugging
you to join other networks it detects.
| | 03:16 | So although connecting to a Wi-Fi
network is actually very easy, there are a lot
| | 03:20 | of important things to know about how
the iPhone and iPod Touch deal with Wi-Fi
| | 03:23 | in order to make sure your
experience as a smooth one.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Notifications| 00:00 | Here's another setting that's only
found on the iPhone, Notifications.
| | 00:04 | Notifications are Apple's way of
allowing the iPhone to receive updates from an
| | 00:07 | application when that
application is not currently in use.
| | 00:10 | To adjust your Notification settings,
go into Settings and tap Notifications.
| | 00:15 | Now if you haven't installed any apps
that use Notifications, you won't have the
| | 00:18 | Notifications option to adjust.
| | 00:20 | But I have installed a couple
of apps and I can see them here.
| | 00:23 | And here is the toggle switch
to turn Notifications off and on.
| | 00:27 | Once Notifications are turned on,
you'll see all your applications that use
| | 00:31 | Notifications for updates and alerts.
| | 00:33 | Chances are when you installed certain
apps, they asked for permission to send
| | 00:36 | you notifications of information related to
them and you either allowed or disallowed it.
| | 00:40 | So this is where you come to change
your mind or to check your settings.
| | 00:44 | If you only want notifications from
certain apps, you can go through each and
| | 00:47 | customize your notifications as
well as forms of notifications.
| | 00:50 | Say you want updates from Facebook but
don't want everyone around you knowing
| | 00:54 | you're getting Facebook updates.
| | 00:55 | You would tap Facebook and you
can keep Alerts on but Sounds off.
| | 01:00 | So you'll still receive a pop-up
message when you receive updates but you won't
| | 01:04 | receive an audible alert.
| | 01:06 | If you leave Badges on, a number and a
red circle will appear in the Application
| | 01:09 | icon letting you know how many
notifications you have in that app.
| | 01:13 | Notifications are a great way to keep
track of what's going on inside your
| | 01:16 | applications, stay up-to-date with
things like sports scores and games you're
| | 01:19 | playing with other iPhone users, and
making sure you have the latest version
| | 01:22 | of your applications.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Brightness| 00:00 | Adjusting the brightness of your
iPhone or iPod Touch is easy to do and can
| | 00:03 | serve a variety of functions.
| | 00:05 | To adjust brightness, tap the
Settings icon then select Brightness.
| | 00:09 | Then adjust the Brightness slider to
your preferred level of illumination.
| | 00:13 | If you're say in a darkened movie
theater, you might want to turn the
| | 00:15 | Brightness down to be less conspicuous
and don't forget to turn the ringer off
| | 00:19 | while you're at it.
| | 00:20 | If you're outside on a sunny day,
you want the Brightness to be higher to
| | 00:23 | fight the power of sun.
| | 00:24 | Lowering the Brightness will
also help save some battery power.
| | 00:27 | Now we also have the Auto-
Brightness option, which is on by default.
| | 00:31 | With Auto-Brightness on, your iPhone
or iPod Touch will sense the amount of
| | 00:34 | light and adjust the
screen brightness accordingly.
| | 00:36 | The effectiveness of this function has
been debated and many users don't seem
| | 00:40 | to notice any significant change in
brightness when stepping from indoors to outdoors.
| | 00:43 | So your results may vary.
| | 00:44 | I actually use the Brightness slider a
lot myself especially indoors at night.
| | 00:49 | I find dragging the brightness nearly
all the way down is a lot easier on my
| | 00:52 | eyes especially if I'm reading
those last few e-mails in bed.
| | 00:54 | But you can play around with the
levels on your own and find what works best for you.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| About| 00:00 | Now let's start looking at some of the
settings found under Settings > General.
| | 00:04 | The first item here is About.
| | 00:07 | The About setting in your iPhone is
basically an inventory that tells you most
| | 00:10 | of the important information you'll ever
need to know about your iPhone or iPod Touch.
| | 00:13 | From hard drive space and the number
of songs, photos, and videos you have to
| | 00:17 | your cellular provider info and
software and hardware information.
| | 00:20 | Say you are in Apps Store on your
iPhone and you need to know if you can
| | 00:23 | download a new game.
| | 00:25 | The About area will tell you if you
have enough storage space, how many
| | 00:28 | applications you already have, and
if your version of the iPhone OS is
| | 00:31 | compatible with the game you're downloading.
| | 00:32 | Now let's say you're downloading
application that's 30 MB in size. You'll need a
| | 00:36 | Wi-Fi connection to do that.
| | 00:38 | If you're at a friend's house and he's
got a Mac address filter on his router,
| | 00:41 | you'll need your Wi-Fi address to
add your phone to his filter list.
| | 00:45 | Wi-Fi address is the iPhone's way of
saying Mac address, which is the unique
| | 00:49 | number of your iPhone or
iPod Touch's Wi-Fi device.
| | 00:51 | And this information as you can
see is found in the About section.
| | 00:55 | Other useful information found in the
About section includes your iPhone serial
| | 00:59 | number and model number, should you
need to follow warranty or repair claim, or
| | 01:03 | if you're just keeping
records of all your gadgets.
| | 01:06 | On many mobile phones a lot of
information is usually placed on stickers or
| | 01:09 | engraved beneath the battery.
| | 01:10 | Of course, since the iPhone does not
have a removable battery or any opening
| | 01:14 | compartments, a lot of the information
you're going to find under the battery
| | 01:17 | and other phones is located in the About area.
| | 01:20 | This information includes the IMEI
number, which is your iPhone's unique
| | 01:23 | identification code used to identify
your phone to a GSM mobile station.
| | 01:27 | If your phone is ever stolen or lost, you
could use the IMEI Number to stop the phone
| | 01:31 | from being used to place calls.
| | 01:33 | The number is not related to the
phone SIM card and cannot be changed by
| | 01:36 | swapping out SIM cards.
| | 01:38 | Other info includes the ICC ID number,
which is the 20 digit serial number for
| | 01:42 | your iPhone SIM card, and your
iPhone's modem firmware number, which usually
| | 01:46 | shouldn't concern you unless you're
doing some serious iPhone hacking.
| | 01:49 | Lastly, you'll also find Apple's
copious legal notes as well as the
| | 01:53 | regulatory information for the various
countries and regions that the iPhone
| | 01:56 | is legally available.
| | 01:57 | For U.S. users the FCC ID is found here as
well as on the back of the iPhone itself.
| | 02:02 | Obviously, since the iPod Touch is not
a phone you won't find any of the phone
| | 02:06 | related categories here, but you'll
find all the other information found in
| | 02:09 | the iPhone's About section here on
your iPod's About section. Chances are
| | 02:13 | you'll rarely need to look in here
unless you're having trouble with your
| | 02:15 | phone and you're on the tech support
call with an operator who need stuff like
| | 02:19 | your IMEI number or the like.
| | 02:20 | But now you know where to find
this info if you ever need it.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Usage| 00:00 | Now, let's go to Settings > General
and take a look at the Usage area.
| | 00:04 | This is an area pertaining to your phone usage
so you won't find this area on the iPod Touch.
| | 00:10 | If you have an iPhone 3GS, the first
option on the Usage page is the Battery
| | 00:13 | Percentage indicator.
| | 00:15 | The default setting on your iPhone is
to display your remaining battery life
| | 00:18 | with a green or white bar filling in the
battery icon in the upper-right side of the screen.
| | 00:22 | If you want a more precise measure,
you can turn on the Battery Percentage
| | 00:26 | indicator, which will give you a
slightly better idea of how much battery
| | 00:29 | power you have left.
| | 00:30 | You can see the little percentage
indicator next to the battery icon.
| | 00:34 | Again, if you don't have an
iPhone 3GS, you won't see the Battery
| | 00:36 | Percentage option at all.
| | 00:38 | Moving down the screen, the Usage field
lets you know the amount of time your
| | 00:41 | iPhone screen has been unlocked and
in use since the last full charge.
| | 00:45 | The Standby field lets you know how
much time your iPhone has been locked but
| | 00:48 | turned on since last full charge.
| | 00:50 | If you've plugged in your iPhone but
not reached the full charge, there will be
| | 00:53 | an indicator that says "iPhone has
been plugged in since last full charge,"
| | 00:56 | beneath those two lines.
| | 00:58 | When you do fully recharge your
battery, the numbers here are reset.
| | 01:01 | This is useful if you're trying to
get a good idea of your phone's battery life,
| | 01:03 | or if your parents trying to keep
track of your child's iPhone or iPod touch usage.
| | 01:08 | Under Call Time, you've got the amount
of time you spend on phone calls for the
| | 01:11 | current period and for
the lifetime of your iPhone.
| | 01:14 | If you've never rest the statistics on
your iPhone these numbers will be identical.
| | 01:18 | Below that you'll find the Cellular
Network Data, which tells you how much data
| | 01:21 | you've transmitted over your
mobile carrier's data connection.
| | 01:24 | This does not include data transferred
over Wi-Fi so this is a good way to track
| | 01:28 | your data use if you do not
have an unlimited data plan.
| | 01:30 | You can reset the data
statistics anytime you want.
| | 01:32 | So, if you want to keep track of your
data, just reset it every billing cycle.
| | 01:36 | To reset all the statistics simply
hit the Reset Statistics button at the
| | 01:40 | bottom of the screen.
| | 01:41 | Below the button, you'll see an
indicator of the last time you reset
| | 01:44 | your statistics.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Date and time settings| 00:00 | Now, let's go to Settings
> General > Date & Time.
| | 00:05 | The Date & Time settings on the
iPhone and iPod Touch can be tweaked to a
| | 00:08 | certain degree through these preferences.
| | 00:10 | Here you can set the time to display
in standard 12-hour format, which is the
| | 00:13 | default or 24-hour or military format.
| | 00:17 | It's all a matter of preference.
| | 00:19 | This might be particularly useful if say
you lived in the extreme north or south
| | 00:22 | where it could be bright and sunny
at midnight or pitch black at 2 PM.
| | 00:26 | If you wake up from a nap and your
iPhone said 1:38, it could be hard to assume
| | 00:30 | AM or PM, or you could just be
someone who prefers 24-hour time.
| | 00:33 | On the iPhone, you also have
the option to turn off the Set
| | 00:36 | Automatically option.
| | 00:37 | Normally, the iPhone automatically
sets the current date and time by using
| | 00:40 | information from cellular signals.
| | 00:43 | But say you're one of those people
that tries to be early for appointments by
| | 00:45 | setting their clock slightly faster.
| | 00:47 | With the Set Automatically option
set to off, you can set the date and time
| | 00:51 | manually as well as set the time zone.
| | 00:54 | This is important since different
time zones have different rules as far as
| | 00:56 | Daylight Savings Time.
| | 00:57 | So if you're setting the time manually,
the time will still automatically adjust
| | 01:01 | the Daylight Savings Time or
Standard on the appropriate date.
| | 01:04 | The iPod Touch is not able to set the
date and time automatically, so you'll see
| | 01:08 | the Time Zone and set Date &
Time settings here by default.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| International settings| 00:00 | Another great customization tool
available on the iPhone and iPod Touch is the
| | 00:04 | International Settings.
| | 00:05 | Locate those preferences under
Settings > General > International.
| | 00:11 | Here you can set the default languages
for typing as well as for voice commands.
| | 00:15 | If you're multilingual for example,
you could set the display Language to
| | 00:18 | English, which will keep all the labels and
words on the iPhone and iPod Touch in English
| | 00:22 | but maybe you want to set the Voice
Control to your native tongue say Dutch.
| | 00:25 | So you could then use Dutch commands
to dial the phone or control your music.
| | 00:29 | Alternately, maybe you're studying a
foreign language and you want to see if
| | 00:32 | your German is good enough for the
phone to understand it when you say "play
| | 00:35 | next song in German."
| | 00:37 | When you invoke Voice Control by
holding down the Home button, you'll even see
| | 00:40 | the available commands fly by
in the language you selected.
| | 00:43 | Personally though, I think the
Keyboard Setting is the coolest part of the
| | 00:46 | International Settings.
| | 00:47 | Here you can turn on over three dozen
keyboards in different languages giving
| | 00:51 | you access to letters and special
characters that might not be found on the
| | 00:54 | standard English keyboard.
| | 00:55 | For instance, I could come in here and
in addition to the English keyboard I
| | 00:59 | could turn on the Greek keyboard, and
let's also scroll all the way down and
| | 01:02 | turn on Chinese (Traditional), which
in turn has three types of keyboards.
| | 01:06 | I'll turn on the Handwriting one which is
very cool if you know how to write Chinese.
| | 01:10 | Now, I'll press my Home button
and go to Notes and open a new note.
| | 01:15 | Notice the globe button that's
appeared next to the Spacebar on the keyboard.
| | 01:18 | Tapping this button cycles through
all the keyboards you've enabled.
| | 01:21 | So I tap once and there is my Greek
keyboard, and type a couple of Greek characters.
| | 01:27 | I tap again, and here's
the Chinese handwriting pad.
| | 01:30 | Since Chinese letters are pictographs,
it's sometimes easier to just draw the
| | 01:34 | words with your finger.
| | 01:35 | They won't come out looking too
pretty, but notice suggestions for words
| | 01:38 | appear to the right.
| | 01:40 | I can tap the correct word
to place it into my document.
| | 01:42 | Let's go back to the
International Settings again.
| | 01:46 | The final setting here is Region Format.
| | 01:49 | This determines how your date, time,
and other numbers are displayed.
| | 01:52 | For example, down below you can see
how dates, times, and phone numbers are
| | 01:56 | usually displayed in the United States.
| | 01:58 | If I select another region, we can see how that
same information is displayed in that country.
| | 02:03 | Of course if you don't dabble in
languages other than your own, you'll most likely
| | 02:07 | never need to come in here.
| | 02:08 | But for multilingual users, the
International settings open up a world of
| | 02:11 | possibilities for writing and
controlling your iPhone or iPod Touch in several
| | 02:15 | different languages.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Restrictions| 00:00 | Another customization option
available on your iPhone or iPod touch is the
| | 00:03 | Restrictions area, located in
Settings > General > Restrictions.
| | 00:10 | To enable Restrictions, you must
first enter a four-digit passcode.
| | 00:14 | This can, and probably should be, a
passcode different than your passcode to
| | 00:17 | unlock your phone, if you set one of those up.
| | 00:19 | You'll have to type it again to confirm it.
| | 00:21 | Once you've selected your passcode,
you can decide what your iPhone or iPod
| | 00:25 | touch can be used for.
| | 00:26 | You can turn off Safari, YouTube, iTunes,
Installing Apps, the Camera, FaceTime
| | 00:32 | and the Location feature.
| | 00:34 | With the exception of FaceTime and
Location, which aren't apps, the icons for
| | 00:38 | all of these other apps will be
completely unavailable until you turn them back on.
| | 00:42 | If you disable FaceTime, you won't be
able to see its button during calls, and
| | 00:45 | disabling Location prevents a phone from
using services like Maps or Geotagging Photos.
| | 00:50 | The Restrictions panel is mostly
targeted for parents, but may also be useful
| | 00:53 | for businesses that don't want
employees using their company-issued iPhones to
| | 00:56 | surf YouTube videos, or
Install Apps from the Apps Store.
| | 00:59 | Besides turning off functions, you can
also specify what content you'll allow on
| | 01:03 | your iPhone or iPod touch.
| | 01:05 | You can turn off In-App Purchases.
| | 01:07 | Some apps allow you to purchase
additional content from within the app itself.
| | 01:10 | For example, your kid could buy an
additional level to the game he or she
| | 01:13 | is currently playing.
| | 01:15 | You can turn off In-App
Purchases to disallow that.
| | 01:18 | You can also select
Ratings For particular countries.
| | 01:20 | Different countries have
different ratings for movies and music.
| | 01:23 | For example, an R-rated movie in
the US might be rated 18 in England.
| | 01:27 | The choice you make in here will
be reflected in the Movies and TV
| | 01:30 | Shows section below.
| | 01:31 | So notice with United States selected,
if I tap Movies, I see G, PG, PG-13, R,
| | 01:38 | NC-17, or even Don't
Allow Movies and Allow Movies.
| | 01:41 | If I change my Ratings to United Kingdom,
Movies now shows U, Uc, PG, 12, 12A and so on.
| | 01:50 | I'm going to switch mine back to United States.
| | 01:55 | Under Music & Podcasts, you can decide
what content to allow for Music & Podcasts.
| | 02:00 | That way you can leave the iTunes
option on but block any items in the iTunes
| | 02:03 | Store listed as containing explicit content.
| | 02:06 | Under Movies, as we just saw, you
can decide what movies can be allowed
| | 02:09 | by selecting Ratings.
| | 02:10 | Similarly, you can set Rating Restrictions in
the TV Shows area, as well as the Apps area.
| | 02:18 | Bear in mind that it's vitally
important to remember your password, as you'll
| | 02:21 | need it to turn Restrictions on and off.
| | 02:23 | If you do forget your password, you're
going to need to restore your iPhone or
| | 02:26 | iPod touch, which basically means
wiping the entire device clean and restoring
| | 02:30 | it back to its factory settings.
| | 02:32 | Now if you regularly sync and backup
your iPhone or iPod touch, that's not a
| | 02:35 | big deal because you have backups in iTunes,
but it's still going to be time-consuming.
| | 02:39 | So it's just better to
remember your four-digit passcode.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
15. Protecting Your iPhoneAuto-Lock| 00:00 | In this chapter, we are going to look at
a couple of ways to protect your iPhone
| | 00:03 | from being accidentally dialed or used,
or from being accessed by people you
| | 00:06 | haven't authorized, as well as some
things you can do to increase the chances
| | 00:10 | that you will get your phone back, if
you ever misplace it or if it's stolen.
| | 00:13 | The first feature I want to look at is Autolock.
| | 00:16 | The Autolock feature refers to the
iPhone and iPod Touch's default behavior of
| | 00:20 | turning the screen off after
a minute or so of an activity.
| | 00:23 | This is to guard against you
accidentally typing an icon or dialing a number
| | 00:26 | from the iPhone while it's in your pocket.
| | 00:28 | It also acts as a battery conservation feature.
| | 00:31 | Go to the Settings > General > Autolock.
| | 00:35 | Here you can choose to allow anywhere
between 1 to 5 minutes of inactivity
| | 00:38 | before the phone or iPod locks the screen.
| | 00:40 | Making it so you have to press the Sleep/
Wake button and slide the unlock slider
| | 00:44 | to use your device again.
| | 00:45 | There is also the option of choosing
Never, meaning the screen will stay on
| | 00:49 | indefinitely until you lock it yourself
with the Sleep/Wake button or until your
| | 00:52 | entire device runs out of battery power.
| | 00:54 | One quick note here. If you have a
mail account setup on a Microsoft Exchange
| | 00:58 | Server, you won't see the Never option in here.
| | 01:01 | In order to see Never, you will have to
disable the Exchange accounts on your device.
| | 01:04 | But really I can't think of many
reasons, you would want to have the
| | 01:07 | Never option selected.
| | 01:08 | I think the default one minute
setting is a good one to go with.
| | 01:11 | If you haven't touched your device in
a minute, you probably aren't actively
| | 01:14 | using it, so let it go to sleep.
| | 01:16 | Waking the phone is a simple matter
anyway, so you might as well choose the
| | 01:18 | option that will do the most
to conserve your battery power.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Passcode Lock| 00:00 | If you keep personal information on
your iPhone or iPod touch, or if you just
| | 00:04 | want to make sure that no one will be
able to use your device just by picking it
| | 00:07 | up, or if it's been lost or stolen, it's
a good idea to use the Passcode feature
| | 00:11 | found in Settings > General > Passcode Lock.
| | 00:15 | Let's start looking at the settings
here, starting with the Turn Passcode
| | 00:19 | On button at the top.
| | 00:21 | When I tap that button, I'm
prompted to enter a four-digit passcode.
| | 00:25 | This is a four-digit code of your choosing.
| | 00:26 | Type one in, and then type it again to
confirm that you typed it in correctly.
| | 00:32 | Now at this point, it's important to stress
that you have turned on the Passcode option,
| | 00:35 | meaning that if you now lock your
screen and then go to wake up the phone
| | 00:39 | again, you're going to be prompted to enter
your passcode before you can access your phone.
| | 00:43 | So it's very, very, very important
that you don't forget what this code is.
| | 00:47 | If you forget your passcode, the only
way to access your phone or iPod touch
| | 00:50 | again is to restore in iTunes, which
involves completely wiping the device and
| | 00:53 | restoring it back to factory settings.
| | 00:56 | Now if you regularly sync your iPhone
or iPod touch, you have a backup copy of
| | 00:59 | mostly everything on your phone.
| | 01:01 | But when you have to restore, you might
still loose text messages, old e-mails, and so on.
| | 01:05 | So avoid having to restore your
device by remembering your passcode.
| | 01:08 | So I'll type in my code
to access my phone again.
| | 01:12 | Now once you have your Passcode Lock
turned on, to get back into your Passcode
| | 01:15 | Settings, you have to re-
enter your passcode again.
| | 01:18 | Working our way down, the next
option here is Change Passcode.
| | 01:21 | So if you're not sure your current
passcode is secure, maybe a friend or a
| | 01:24 | co-worker guessed it, you
can come in here to change it.
| | 01:27 | First, type your old passcode,
then enter a new one, and confirm it.
| | 01:35 | That dumps you back into your Passcode Lock
settings, and your new passcode is now in effect.
| | 01:39 | Again, don't forget it.
| | 01:41 | Next, we can determine how soon after
locking your phone or iPod you want it to
| | 01:44 | require the Passcode.
| | 01:45 | The default is immediately, and we just
saw that once I locked my screen, I had
| | 01:49 | to enter my passcode right away
when I tried to wake it up again.
| | 01:52 | But you can choose 1, 5, or 15
minutes, or even 1 or 4 hours.
| | 01:56 | Note that shorter times
are going to be more secure.
| | 01:59 | Also, note that if you set up a
Microsoft Exchange Server account on your
| | 02:02 | device, you'll only have the 1, 5,
and 15 minute options available here.
| | 02:06 | But you can choose 1, 5 or 15
minutes, or even 1 or 4 hours.
| | 02:10 | Note that shorter times are more secure.
| | 02:12 | Also, if you set up a Microsoft Exchange
Server account on your device, you will
| | 02:16 | only have 1, 5, and 15
minute options available here.
| | 02:19 | If you want to choose the 1 or 4 hour
option, you'll have to disable the Exchange
| | 02:22 | account on your iPhone or iPod touch.
| | 02:24 | So for this example, I'll choose 1 minute.
| | 02:27 | That way, if I put my iPhone to sleep,
and then change my mind, I can just wake
| | 02:30 | it up immediately without
having to enter the passcode.
| | 02:32 | Notice I can now put the phone to
sleep and then wake it up without having
| | 02:36 | to enter the passcode.
| | 02:37 | Let's go back to Passcode Lock settings.
| | 02:41 | In that case, I do have to enter my passcode.
| | 02:44 | The next option, which is on
by default, is Simple Passcode.
| | 02:47 | A simple passcode is the four-digit
number system we've been using so far.
| | 02:51 | But if you're really serious about
keeping your iPhone secure, you might want to
| | 02:54 | consider a more secure password.
| | 02:56 | So slide Simple Passcode to off.
| | 02:58 | Then enter your old passcode, and now
you're free to enter an alpha-numeric
| | 03:04 | passcode, meaning you're not
just limited to four numbers.
| | 03:07 | You can now have a passcode with letters,
numbers, and even special characters.
| | 03:10 | I'm just going to cancel this for
now and leave my simple Passcode on.
| | 03:16 | On the iPhone, the next option is Voice Dial.
| | 03:18 | By default, you can use the iPhone's
voice dialing commands, even when the screen
| | 03:22 | is asleep and locked.
| | 03:23 | So technically, even if your screen
is passcode-protected, someone who knew
| | 03:26 | about voice dialing could pick it up,
hold the Home button down to invoke voice
| | 03:29 | dialing and make a call with your phone.
| | 03:31 | If you want to prevent that from
happening, you can turn Voice Dial off.
| | 03:34 | The last option here is the really serious one.
| | 03:37 | If your phone or iPod is stolen and you
have it passcode-protected and you have
| | 03:41 | Erase Data turned on, your device will
automatically erase itself of someone
| | 03:45 | unsuccessfully tries to
unlock your phone 10 times.
| | 03:48 | Now some people have asked, well, what
would if my kid picks up my phone and
| | 03:50 | just starts playing with it?
| | 03:51 | If he's just typing numbers on the
Passcode, he could erase my phone.
| | 03:55 | There are actually significant safeguards
built into to prevent this sort of thing.
| | 03:58 | After six unsuccessfully attempts at
entering the Passcode, you must wait one
| | 04:02 | minute before the iPhone or
iPod touch will let you try again.
| | 04:05 | After that, the waiting period
increases each time to 5 minutes, 15 minutes,
| | 04:10 | an hour and 4 hours.
| | 04:11 | So you have to deliberately trying to
break into the iPhone or iPod before you
| | 04:15 | hit 10 attempts, and the phone is erased.
| | 04:17 | There's a very little chance
of that happening accidentally.
| | 04:19 | But if the feature still makes you
nervous, you can always leave Erase Data off.
| | 04:22 | Lastly, if you don't think you'll need
the passcode protection and want to turn
| | 04:25 | it off, just scroll back up to the top
of Settings and tap Turn Passcode Off.
| | 04:29 | You'll be prompted to enter your
passcode once more to confirm it's you, and
| | 04:33 | then your iPhone or iPod touch
will be un-passcode-protected.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Displaying contact information| 00:00 | In a previous movie, we looked at the
Passcode feature, which let's you set up
| | 00:03 | a four-digit code to prevent your iPhone
or iPod touch for being accessed by others.
| | 00:08 | It can be a great tool against anyone
who steals your phone or picks it up and
| | 00:11 | tries to play around with it, but it
can also prevent a more honest person from
| | 00:14 | returning the phone to you.
| | 00:17 | If someone finds your phone, they won't
be able to any of your contacts or begin
| | 00:19 | any kind of search to figure out who
the phone belongs to because they will be
| | 00:22 | locked out of the phone.
| | 00:23 | So, what some people have started doing
is embedding contact information onto
| | 00:27 | their iPhone or iPod touch's wallpaper.
| | 00:29 | We've previously looked at how to
customize your device's wallpaper, including
| | 00:32 | the fact that you can do a Google search
for iPhone wallpaper templates to find
| | 00:36 | templates created by other generous
iPhone users that you can then use to
| | 00:39 | precisely size and position your images,
so the important parts aren't obscured
| | 00:43 | by the iPhone's overlaid displays and buttons.
| | 00:45 | I have one such example open here in
Photoshop, and I've dragged my own image into
| | 00:49 | this template that I've
downloaded, as you can here.
| | 00:51 | So, if you know how to use Photoshop,
or some other image editing program, you
| | 00:56 | can find one of these
templates to lay out your wallpaper.
| | 00:58 | What I've done here is I've created
some text that says If found, please call,
| | 01:02 | and I've provided a number here.
| | 01:04 | You might want to include your name
or some emergency contact information.
| | 01:07 | Obviously, don't use your
iPhone number as your contact number.
| | 01:10 | Some people even put their allergies or
other medical conditions on their wallpaper.
| | 01:15 | Using this template, I was able to size
and position this text over my custom image.
| | 01:18 | Once I am done, I can turn off the guides
and then export the image, just as you see here.
| | 01:22 | After that, I can sync the image to my
iPhone, and after I sync the image to my
| | 01:27 | iPhone, I can find it in my Photo Library.
| | 01:29 | Then I just tap the button in the lower
left-hand corner and choose Use as Wallpaper.
| | 01:34 | I don't even have to move and scale this
image at this point because I took care
| | 01:38 | of all that on my computer.
| | 01:39 | So, I'll click Set. Then I'll choose
to Set this as my Lock Screen because
| | 01:43 | that's the screen people will see if
they pick up the phone and press the Home
| | 01:45 | or Sleep/Wake button.
| | 01:46 | So, now if I put the screen to
sleep and then wake it up, I can see my
| | 01:51 | contact info right there.
| | 01:53 | So, now anyone who finds my phone will have
the number to call me so I can get it back.
| | 01:58 | Now, if you don't have image editing
software, or don't feel comfortable creating
| | 02:01 | a contact wallpaper on your own, you
can always head over to the iTunes App
| | 02:04 | store, where you will find apps like
Emergency Info Plus, or ICE, or ICE Screen;
| | 02:11 | ICE stands for In Case of Emergency,
and there are many similar apps like these
| | 02:15 | which set up your contact wallpaper for you.
| | 02:18 | Many of these apps offer other
services, like being able to store all of your
| | 02:21 | contact info or medical needs in one place.
| | 02:23 | But again, these are all just ways to
help increase the likelihood that you will
| | 02:26 | get your iPhone or iPod touch back,
in the event you lose or misplace it.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Find My iPhone with MobileMe| 00:00 | The release of the iOS 4.2 update in
November 2010, Apple made its Find My
| | 00:05 | iPhone service available for
anyone who has an iPhone 4, iPad or a
| | 00:09 | fourth-generation iPod touch.
| | 00:11 | That's the iPod touch
that has a built-in camera.
| | 00:13 | There's even a workaround for making it
function on pre-2010 iOS devices, which
| | 00:17 | I'll explain how to do in this movie as well.
| | 00:20 | Previously Find My iPhone was only
available for subscribers to Apple's
| | 00:23 | MobileMe service and if you're a
MobileMe subscriber, you still have the same
| | 00:26 | access to Find My iPhone and it will
work on all iPhones, iPads, and iPod
| | 00:31 | touches running iOS 4 or later.
| | 00:33 | Let's face it, iOS devices aren't cheap.
| | 00:35 | And if you keep a lot of sensitive
information and important points on your
| | 00:38 | device, Find my iPhone is a great
security measure to have in place, and now
| | 00:42 | that it's free for owners of all
current iOS devices, there is really no reason
| | 00:45 | to not set it up, because it offers
you the ability to locate your missing or
| | 00:49 | stolen device on a map as well as to
perform remote functions like passcode
| | 00:53 | locking it or even remotely erasing
it, all from a regular Web browser.
| | 00:56 | Let's take a look at how this works.
| | 00:58 | First we need to set up the
device to use Find My iPhone.
| | 01:01 | Again bear in mind that if you want to
use a free account, this can only be set
| | 01:05 | up using iPhone 4, an iPad, or
a fourth-generation iPod touch.
| | 01:09 | If you have an earlier device you can
either pay for a MobileMe subscription
| | 01:12 | or just keep watching and you'll see
how you can use Find My iPhone for free as well.
| | 01:16 | Start by tapping Settings,
then Mail, Contacts, Calendars.
| | 01:22 | If you're already a subscriber to
MobileMe and have previously set up your
| | 01:25 | account, select your MobileMe account.
| | 01:27 | Depending on how long you've had
your service it might be called .Mac or
| | 01:30 | MobileMe, or me.com.
| | 01:32 | And in here just make sure
that Find My iPhone is set to On.
| | 01:36 | Then tap Allow to
confirm you want to turn it on.
| | 01:39 | And that's all you need to do if
you've already set up a MobileMe account.
| | 01:42 | Now let's see how to activate
Find My iPhone if you don't have a
| | 01:45 | MobileMe account.
| | 01:46 | Again start by tapping Settings and
then going to Mail, Contacts, Calendars.
| | 01:52 | Tap Add Account and then select MobileMe.
| | 01:57 | Here you can enter your Apple ID and password.
| | 02:00 | Again, if you already have a MobileMe
account you can just enter it here and
| | 02:03 | then turn on Find My iPhone.
| | 02:05 | If you're not a MobileMe
subscriber, you need enter your Apple ID.
| | 02:07 | Now if you've ever purchased anything
on the iTunes Store or ordered anything
| | 02:11 | through Apple's online store, or if
you ever bought an app on your iPhone,
| | 02:15 | you have an Apple ID.
| | 02:16 | Just enter the same information here.
| | 02:18 | If you don't have an Apple ID,
you can tap to Create Free Apple ID.
| | 02:21 | Let's go ahead and create a new account.
| | 02:23 | On this page, tap Location and select
the country you're currently residing in.
| | 02:30 | And then enter your date of birth.
| | 02:38 | Tap Done and then Next.
| | 02:42 | And on this page enter your email
address, your name, and create a password.
| | 02:53 | Then scroll down the page
and tap Security Question.
| | 02:56 | You can either choose one of the
questions here or write your own question and
| | 03:00 | then type the answer.
| | 03:08 | And then tap Next.
| | 03:11 | You have to agree to the terms of
service, so scroll through, read through if
| | 03:15 | you need to, and tap Agree and Agree again.
| | 03:20 | Next you'll see a message asking
you to verify your account at your
| | 03:22 | email address.
| | 03:26 | So check your email for the
confirmation message and then click Verify Now.
| | 03:29 | That will take you to Apple's website
where you'll want to enter the Apple
| | 03:33 | ID you just created.
| | 03:36 | And then click Verify Address.
| | 03:38 | If you typed everything correctly,
you'll see the message telling you the e-mail
| | 03:41 | address was verified, and now
you can go back to your iPhone.
| | 03:44 | If your device didn't automatically
verify the account you just created in
| | 03:48 | Mail, Contacts, Calendars, select
the account and that will cause the
| | 03:52 | verification to happen.
| | 03:54 | And then you'll see the Find My iPhone switch.
| | 03:56 | Notice when you use a free account,
Find My iPhone is the only service you have
| | 03:59 | access to, while full MobileMe
subscribers have many more features.
| | 04:03 | But in here just turn on Find
My iPhone, and then tap Continue.
| | 04:06 | You'll see a message telling you
what turning on Find My iPhone does.
| | 04:11 | Basically, it includes the ability to
show the location of the iPhone on a
| | 04:14 | map so tap Allow.
| | 04:15 | And that's how you set up a free account.
| | 04:17 | Now if you're not a MobileMe subscriber
and you have an older iOS device running
| | 04:21 | at least iOS 4.2, you can
still use Find My iPhone.
| | 04:25 | What you have to do though is find a
friend or coworker who has an iPhone 4, an
| | 04:29 | iPad, or a fourth-generation iPod touch,
and set up an Apple ID or login with an
| | 04:33 | existing Apple ID on the borrowed device.
| | 04:36 | And you can basically follow
the exact same steps we just saw.
| | 04:38 | Then on your pre-2010 device create a
new MobileMe account normally by going
| | 04:42 | into your Settings, Mail, Contacts
and Calendars, and choose Add Account,
| | 04:48 | and MobileMe.
| | 04:50 | Then you want to sign in with
the same Apple ID you used on your friend's device.
| | 04:53 | And at that point, you can turn on
Find My iPhone and you're all set.
| | 04:57 | However you're going to want to
make sure you delete your account from
| | 04:59 | your friend's iPhone.
| | 05:00 | Otherwise they'll be able
to track your every move.
| | 05:02 | All right, so if it ever happens
that you lose your iPhone or even simply
| | 05:07 | mislace it somewhere in your home or
office, go to me.com in your web browser
| | 05:11 | and login to your MobileMe account.
| | 05:16 | So if you're using a free account
you'll be taken right to Find My iPhone.
| | 05:19 | If you're a paid MobileMe me subscriber,
you're going to want to click an icon
| | 05:22 | that will appear in the upper left
corner, that will give you access to a set
| | 05:25 | of icons including Find My iPhone, but
I just logged in with a free account so
| | 05:29 | I'm seeing this.
| | 05:30 | And after a moment, a map will
appear giving you the approximate location
| | 05:33 | of your iPhone.
| | 05:34 | If you have multiple devices being
tracked they'll be listed on the left side of
| | 05:37 | the screen and you can
select the one you want to locate.
| | 05:40 | So if you have or, if you lost it,
had an iPhone 3GS or an iPhone 4, the
| | 05:44 | location should be just as accurate as
when you get your location on the Map
| | 05:47 | program on the phone.
| | 05:49 | First generation iPhones and the
iPhone 3G will be slightly less accurate but
| | 05:52 | you still should be able to get the
general idea of where iPhone is within a
| | 05:56 | radius of a few blocks.
| | 05:57 | Especially if it's in a location
with lots of WiFi and cellular signals.
| | 06:01 | And with the Mac, you might even be
able to tell if your iPhone is misplaced at
| | 06:03 | home with you or somewhere else.
| | 06:05 | You can click the Refresh button in the
upper right hand corner to have MobileMe
| | 06:08 | search for your phone again, which
might be useful if someone stole your iPhone
| | 06:11 | and they're driving around with it.
| | 06:12 | You could potentially let the
police know the approximate location of
| | 06:14 | your phone.
| | 06:15 | And there have been several reports of
Find My iPhone leading the police right
| | 06:19 | to the person who stole the phone.
| | 06:21 | You can click on your iPhone's
name to reveal three other options.
| | 06:25 | The first one is Display Message or Play Sound.
| | 06:27 | The lets you send a command to your
iPhone which makes it play a loaned pining
| | 06:31 | sound and the great thing about this
is that it works even if you left your
| | 06:34 | iPhone in silent mode.
| | 06:35 | Additionally you can have a message
accompany the sound so if a stranger finds
| | 06:38 | your iPhone you can send a message that
gives them your contact information so
| | 06:41 | they can get your phone back to you.
| | 06:43 | So just click Display Message
and type in a short message.
| | 06:45 | So I might type something like "If
you found this phone call Garrick Chow
| | 06:55 | at 1.888.33.lynda."
| | 06:57 | Then check Play a sound for two minutes
with this message, if you want the phone
| | 07:00 | to emit that loud pinging sound.
| | 07:02 | I can't tell you how many times I've
used this feature just to find where I left
| | 07:05 | my iPhone in my house.
| | 07:06 | Then click Send.
| | 07:08 | As long as your phone is on, the message will arrive
a few seconds later and the phone will start beeping.
| | 07:11 | (Beeping)
| | 07:17 | Anyone finding the phone
can then read your message and tap OK to
| | 07:20 | stop the beeping.
| | 07:21 | Tapping OK on the iPhone also triggers
the phone to send you an email message
| | 07:25 | letting you know that the message was received.
| | 07:27 | So if I were to check my email, here
you can see that I received a message
| | 07:31 | from my phone telling me exactly when
the message was received and what the message was.
| | 07:35 | Now if your phone happens to be turned
off at the time you send the message, the
| | 07:40 | message will still appear the
next time the phone is turned on.
| | 07:42 | Not a great solution if you just
misplaced your phone in your house but if
| | 07:45 | you actually lost it and some honest
stranger picks it up and turns it on,
| | 07:49 | they'll see your message and you'll
receive an email saying that someone got your message.
| | 07:52 | Now the next option here is Lock.
| | 07:54 | This lets you turn on the passcode
option we looked at earlier in this chapter.
| | 07:58 | So if you're not in the habit of
passcode protecting your phone and you lost it,
| | 08:01 | you can remotely lock it from here.
| | 08:03 | Just click the numbers to enter a passcode.
| | 08:06 | Click Next and reenter that passcode.
| | 08:10 | Then click Lock.
| | 08:11 | That immediately locks your phone
even if it's in use at that time.
| | 08:15 | So if I try to unlock my iPhone right
now, I'm prompted to enter my passcode.
| | 08:21 | Again if you don't normally passcode
protect your iPhone, this should be the
| | 08:24 | first thing you do when you
realize you've lost or misplaced it.
| | 08:27 | Because anyone who knows how iPhone's
work and has the intention of stealing
| | 08:30 | your phone or information can just go
into Settings and turn off Find My iPhone
| | 08:34 | and you'll no longer be able to locate
your phone on a map or send it messages.
| | 08:37 | So make sure you passcode protect your
phone to prevent anyone from turning off
| | 08:41 | the Find My iPhone service.
| | 08:42 | The last option here is Wipe.
| | 08:45 | This is for pretty much when you've
exhausted all your other options and just
| | 08:48 | want to make sure that whoever found
the iPhone or stole it can't get any of
| | 08:51 | the data stored on it.
| | 08:52 | When you click Wipe you'll see his
message telling you that you will permanently
| | 08:55 | erase all the date on this device and
you do have to check that you understand
| | 08:58 | you cannot undo this action.
| | 09:00 | So be sure you really want or need to do this.
| | 09:02 | I'm just going to cancel this
because my phone is currently sitting safe
| | 09:05 | and sound next to me.
| | 09:07 | Now the semi-good news is that even
after you've wiped your iPhone if you
| | 09:11 | happen to find it or it gets returned
to you, you can still sync it to your
| | 09:14 | computer again and the backup that was
created the last time you synced will be
| | 09:17 | copied back to your phoe.
| | 09:18 | It's also worth mentioning here that if
you have one or more iPhones you might
| | 09:22 | want to download the free
app called Find My iPhone.
| | 09:25 | This is an app from Apple that
offers the same services available through
| | 09:27 | the MobileMe website.
| | 09:29 | But here it's offered in handy app form.
| | 09:30 | And this will run on your iPhone,
your iPod touch, or your iPad.
| | 09:34 | So you can install this on any one
of your devices and start the app.
| | 09:39 | Enter your Apple ID and password and
then you'll see a list of all the icons and
| | 09:44 | iPads registered to your MobileMe account.
| | 09:46 | Just tap one of the devices
to see its location on a map.
| | 09:49 | Tap the blue arrow to access the same
features we just looked at on the MobileMe
| | 09:53 | site for displaying a message or playing
a sound, remote locking your device, or
| | 09:57 | remotely wipe your device.
| | 09:58 | So as you can see, you can get the same
functionality in this app as you can do
| | 10:01 | on the MobileMe website.
| | 10:03 | But this is a nicer interface to use
when you're on an iPhone and it's a free app.
| | 10:07 | So it's worth downloading on your
devices if you have more than one iPhone.
| | 10:09 | Of course, if you only have one
iPhone there's no point installing the app,
| | 10:12 | since if you lose your phone, it
obviously won't matter if it has the app
| | 10:15 | installed on it or not.
| | 10:16 | So that's a rundown of the Find My
iPhone service, now available for free on all
| | 10:21 | devices running iOS 4.2 or later.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
16. Accessibility on the iPhoneAbout accessibility on the iPhone and iPod Touch| 00:00 | Probably some of the least touted
capabilities of the iPhone and iPod Touch
| | 00:04 | are their Accessibility options.
| | 00:06 | In this context, the term
accessibility refers to the ability of people with
| | 00:09 | vision or hearing disabilities to use the device.
| | 00:12 | Now it would seem illogical that phone
with no buttons could be used by a blind person,
| | 00:16 | but the key lies in the device's
ability to speak whatever you happen to
| | 00:19 | be touching at any given moment.
| | 00:21 | The Accessibility options are off
by default, so, if you have a vision
| | 00:24 | disability, you might have to get
someone to turn them on for you.
| | 00:27 | You can get to the Accessibility
options by going to Settings > General and
| | 00:33 | scrolling down to find Accessibility.
| | 00:34 | So as you can see here, we have about half
dozen accessibility features we can activate.
| | 00:39 | Again, these are mainly targeted
towards those with vision or hearing
| | 00:42 | disabilities, but a couple of the
options like Zoom and Mono Audio might
| | 00:46 | occasionally come in handy for anyone.
| | 00:47 | In the rest of the chapter, we will
look at each one of these items in their own movies.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| VoiceOver| 00:00 | Now we are going to start going through
each one of the accessibility options on
| | 00:03 | the iPhone and iPod Touch one by one.
| | 00:06 | Again, we get to the settings by
selecting Settings > General > Accessibility.
| | 00:13 | The first option here is VoiceOver and
VoiceOver is really the most important
| | 00:17 | feature for people with vision disabilities.
| | 00:19 | In that when you turn this feature on
your iPhone or iPod Touch will read out
| | 00:23 | loud everything and I mean
everything on the screen to you.
| | 00:26 | Let's tap VoiceOver to go to its setup screen
and all we really have here is an On/Off switch.
| | 00:32 | But before I turn it on let's review
these instructions that appear below.
| | 00:36 | Basically with VoiceOver turned on
controlling your iPhone or iPod Touch
| | 00:39 | requires modified versions of
the gestures you are familiar with.
| | 00:43 | The way this works is your device will
speak any item you touch on the screen.
| | 00:46 | So for example if you touch the
Calculator icon on your home screen, you'll hear
| | 00:50 | the word calculator
spoken by your iPhone or iPod.
| | 00:52 | But what this means is that single
tapping items no longer activates them,
| | 00:57 | because that action is
now reserved for VoiceOver.
| | 00:59 | With VoiceOver on you now have to
double tap items to open them, kind of like
| | 01:03 | double-clicking icons on your computer.
| | 01:05 | Also note that to scroll you need to
flick three fingers across your screen
| | 01:09 | because if you only needed one or even
two fingers to scroll your iPhone or iPod
| | 01:13 | might get confused as to whether you
want to speak an item you are touching, or
| | 01:16 | if you're only touching it because it
happens to be under your finger while
| | 01:18 | you're performing a flick.
| | 01:20 | So that's why you need
three fingers to do a scroll.
| | 01:23 | Okay let's turn VoiceOver on.
| | 01:25 | (VoiceOver: VoiceOver on. Settings.
Accessibility button. Alert.)
| | 01:28 | (VoiceOver: Important. VoiceOver changes the gestures
used to control iPhone. Are you sure you want to continue?)
| | 01:34 | If this is the first time you are
turning on VoiceOver you'll see this important
| | 01:37 | message reminding you that VoiceOver
changes the gestures used to control your
| | 01:40 | device and as you just heard it
also reads the message to you.
| | 01:44 | This message is actually your
first introduction to the new controls.
| | 01:47 | So notice if I tap OK once it only highlights?
(VoiceOver: OK button.)
| | 01:51 | And I hear VoiceOver say OK button.
| | 01:53 | So to actually use a button I
have to select it by tapping it once
| | 01:56 | (VoiceOver: OK button.)
And then double tap it.
| | 01:59 | (VoiceOver: OK button.
Settings. Accessibility button.)
| | 02:02 | So now VoiceOver is turned on.
| | 02:03 | Notice we have a Practice
VoiceOver Gestures button down here.
| | 02:07 | I'll tap it once to select it.
(VoiceOver: Practice VoiceOver Gestures button.)
| | 02:11 | And double tap it to use it.
| | 02:13 | (VoiceOver: Practice VoiceOver
gestures in this area.)
| | 02:15 | (VoiceOver: Select the Done button in the
top right corner and double tap to exit.)
| | 02:19 | So this is basically a big blank area
where you can try different gestures and
| | 02:22 | your iPhone or iPod Touch will tell
you what gestures you are performing.
| | 02:26 | Basically you can use this area
to confirm that you are doing the
| | 02:28 | gestures correctly.
| | 02:29 | For example I'll drag three
fingers down the screen.
| | 02:33 | (VoiceOver: Three finger flick
down. Scroll up one page.)
| | 02:35 | And my iPhone confirms that
I did a three finger flick down
| | 02:38 | and that doing this will scroll up one page.
| | 02:40 | Now before I do the next
gesture let me explain it first.
| | 02:43 | I am going to do a two finger double tap.
| | 02:46 | This is sort of a universal gesture to
start and stop all kinds of actions and events.
| | 02:50 | You can use it to answer or hang up
a phone call, to start and stop music
| | 02:53 | you are listening to, to take a
picture with the camera on the iPhone, and
| | 02:57 | several other actions.
| | 02:58 | Now when I do the practice gesture here
my iPhone will explain all of this to me
| | 03:01 | and it will take several
seconds to say everything.
| | 03:04 | I'm going to want it to stop talking
before it finishes reading everything.
| | 03:06 | So I am going to do a two finger single
tap while it's reading. Okay let's try it.
| | 03:10 | Here is the two finger double tap.
| | 03:12 | (VoiceOver: Two finger double tap.
Stop and start the current action.)
| | 03:15 | (VoiceOver: Two finger single tap.
Pause or continue speech.)
| | 03:18 | Okay let's leave this practice
area and try using VoiceOver for real.
| | 03:22 | I'll tap Done once to select it.
(VoiceOver: Done. Selected button.)
| | 03:25 | And then double tap it to use it.
(VoiceOver: Done. Selected Accessibility button.)
| | 03:30 | And let's just go back to the home
screen by pressing the Home button.
| | 03:34 | (VoiceOver: Home. Messages. Double tap to open.)
| | 03:38 | So VoiceOver always reads
the first icon on the screen.
| | 03:41 | I am going to do a three finger flick to
the left to view the second page of icons.
| | 03:45 | (VoiceOver: Page 2 of 2. Contacts. Double tap to open.)
| | 03:48 | My iPhone tells me which page number I
am on out of my total number of pages.
| | 03:52 | Now holding a single finger on my screen
my iPhone will read everything I touch.
| | 03:57 | (VoiceOver: Remote.
NPR News. Nike + iPod. Contacts.)
| | 04:04 | (VoiceOver: Double tap to open.)
| | 04:04 | So if I really couldn't see my iPhone
screen at all I could just keep sliding my
| | 04:07 | finger around until I
hear the app I want to open.
| | 04:10 | Okay let's say I want to open my Weather app.
| | 04:12 | (VoiceOver: Page 1 of 2. Settings. Double tap to open.)
| | 04:15 | Now just as with buttons, I have to
double tap an icon to open the app.
| | 04:19 | But here is a shortcut.
| | 04:20 | With your index finger held down on the
app or button you want to use, tap once
| | 04:24 | with your second finger.
| | 04:26 | So I'll hold down my
finger on the Weather app.
| | 04:29 | (VoiceOver: Weather. Double tap to open.)
| | 04:30 | Without releasing it I am going
| | 04:31 | to tap my second finger on my screen.
| | 04:34 | (VoiceOver: Weather. Cupertino. High 69
degrees Fahrenheit. Low 48 degrees Fahrenheit.)
| | 04:39 | So that's the equivalent of
double tapping a selected item.
| | 04:42 | And I think it's faster and it's nice
that it doesn't require you to be double
| | 04:45 | tapping your screen all time.
| | 04:46 | So the Weather app is opened and it
read me the first line of weather.
| | 04:50 | To have it read more to me I just
move a single finger around onscreen.
| | 04:54 | (VoiceOver: Friday. Sunny. High 69
degrees Fahrenheit. Low 48 degrees Fahrenheit.)
| | 05:00 | (VoiceOver: Sunday. Partly cloudy. High 74
degrees Fahrenheit. Low 49 degrees Fahrenheit.)
| | 05:05 | And of course I can use the three finger
flick to check out the weather in another city.
| | 05:08 | (VoiceOver: Showing city 2 of 2. New York. High
60 degrees Fahrenheit. Low 51 degrees Fahrenheit.)
| | 05:15 | Here is another useful gesture.
| | 05:17 | If you like your device to read everything
onscreen to you, flick up with two fingers.
| | 05:20 | (VoiceOver: New York. High
60 degrees Fahrenheit. Low 51 degrees Fahrenheit.)
| | 05:25 | (VoiceOver: Thursday. Cloudy. 55 degrees Fahrenheit.
Friday. Raining. High 60 degrees Fahrenheit.)
| | 05:31 | (VoiceOver: Low 51 degrees Fahrenheit.
Saturday. Raining. High?)
| | 05:35 | And again, a single two-finger tap
always stops VoiceOver from reading.
| | 05:39 | Let's press the Home button again.
| | 05:41 | (VoiceOver: Home. Weather. Double tap to open.)
| | 05:45 | Here is another cool thing
you can do with VoiceOver.
| | 05:47 | If your eyesight doesn't let you see
the screen very well there is not much
| | 05:50 | reason to have the screen on at all.
| | 05:51 | You are just wasting battery power
on the display you're not looking at.
| | 05:54 | So you can go into what's called
screen curtain mode by triple tapping
| | 05:57 | with three fingers.
| | 05:58 | (VoiceOver: Screen curtain on.)
| | 06:01 | Now the iPhone is still on and active.
| | 06:02 | And I am still perfectly able to slide
my finger around on screen and still hear
| | 06:06 | VoiceOver reading things to me.
| | 06:08 | (VoiceOver: Weather. Calculator.)
| | 06:11 | (VoiceOver: Clock.)
| | 06:12 | (VoiceOver: Notes. Double tap to open.)
| | 06:15 | Even if you have perfect eyesight this
could be a very cool and useful feature.
| | 06:19 | First it allows you to save your battery.
| | 06:21 | And with headphones on I could be
checking my e-mail or having Web pages read to
| | 06:24 | me with the screen completely blank.
| | 06:26 | I have to admit I have actually used
this in a movie theater so I could hear
| | 06:29 | who e-mailed me without my bright iPhone screen
coming on and annoying all the people around me.
| | 06:33 | So I'll just slide my finger
around until I find the Mail app.
| | 06:36 | (VoiceOver: Weather. iTunes. Mail.)
| | 06:39 | And while still holding down my index
finger, I'll tap once with my second
| | 06:43 | finger to open Mail.
| | 06:44 | And in this way I can navigate
to my inbox and open a message.
| | 06:48 | And in here I'll slide my finger down
until I hear my phone start reading the
| | 06:51 | body of the e-mail to me.
| | 06:52 | (VoiceOver: Keep learning at lynda.com.)
| | 06:55 | Now come on. How cool is that?
| | 06:57 | Okay to turn Screen Curtain off just
triple tap again with three fingers.
| | 07:01 | (VoiceOver: Screen Curtain off.)
| | 07:03 | And let's go Home again.
| | 07:04 | (VoiceOver: Home.
Messages. One tap to open.)
| | 07:09 | I am going to press the Sleep/
Wake button to lock the screen.
| | 07:13 | Now to wake the phone we can either
press the Sleep/Wake button or the home
| | 07:16 | button just like always.
| | 07:18 | (VoiceOver: 1:31.)
| | 07:19 | Now the big difference here is that with
VoiceOver on you don't slide to unlock.
| | 07:23 | You first select the slider bar then
double tap it to unlock your screen.
| | 07:27 | (VoiceOver: Unlock button. Double tap to unlock.)
| | 07:31 | So just be aware of that if you didn't
listen to your phone clearly telling you
| | 07:34 | that you need to double tap to unlock the
phone, which I missed the first time I did this
| | 07:37 | and then couldn't figure out
how to get back into my phone.
| | 07:40 | Now this is really just the tip of the iceberg.
| | 07:42 | There are many, many more
VoiceOver commands and capabilities.
| | 07:45 | Apple has published an in-depth
accessibility guide that goes into additional
| | 07:48 | details about all the VoiceOver features.
| | 07:50 | You can read more about these at
apple.com/accessibility/iphone.
| | 07:55 | But for now that should give you a
pretty good idea and a handle on what you can
| | 07:58 | do with the built-in VoiceOver
feature of your iPhone or iPod Touch.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Zoom| 00:00 | Now let's take a look at another
accessibility feature that can be helpful for
| | 00:03 | anyone of poor vision.
| | 00:04 | Now I still have the VoiceOver
feature turned on from a previous movie.
| | 00:07 | But you can't have both VoiceOver
and Zoom activated at the same time.
| | 00:11 | Watch what happens if I try to turn Zoom on.
| | 00:14 | Using the gestures that are required
when VoiceOver is on, I select Zoom and
| | 00:18 | double tap it to go to its settings.
| | 00:20 | And now I'll turn it on.
| | 00:22 | (VoiceOver: Alert. Important. VoiceOver
and Zoom cannot be used at the same time.)
| | 00:27 | So I get this dialog box telling me
that I can't use VoiceOver and Zoom at the
| | 00:30 | same time and I need to choose
which feature I want to have on.
| | 00:33 | So in this case, I'll choose Zoom.
(VoiceOver: Zoom button. VoiceOver off.)
| | 00:35 | And that turns off VoiceOver.
| | 00:40 | All right, so now Zoom is turned on.
| | 00:42 | And as you can see here this
feature magnifies the entire screen.
| | 00:45 | We have three basic commands to know here.
| | 00:48 | First one is double tap with
three fingers to zoom in and out.
| | 00:50 | While you are zoomed in, use three
fingers to drag around the screen so you
| | 00:55 | can see other areas.
| | 00:57 | If you only drag with one finger,
you'll make the screen scroll left and right
| | 01:00 | or up and down.
| | 01:03 | Now it's not exactly comfortable to drag
three fingers around the screen all the time.
| | 01:07 | But as long as you initially touch
the screen and start dragging with three
| | 01:09 | fingers, you can then lift your
third finger off the screen and continue
| | 01:12 | dragging with just two.
| | 01:15 | If you'd like zoom in more or less,
double tap with three fingers and keep your
| | 01:19 | fingers on the screen on the second tap.
| | 01:21 | You can then drag up and down
to zoom in closer or zoom out.
| | 01:27 | You can also lift two of your fingers off the
screen once you've started zooming in or out.
| | 01:32 | You can go up to 500% of your original size.
| | 01:35 | And to zoom back out just
double tap with three fingers again.
| | 01:37 | It can be especially helpful if you
have trouble recognizing or reading the
| | 01:41 | labels of the icons on your home screen,
or if an e-mail or Web site you are
| | 01:45 | reading has a really tiny text.
| | 01:48 | All the icons and buttons will still function
exactly as they do when you're not zoomed in.
| | 01:52 | They are just easier to
see and tap at this size.
| | 01:56 | And just remember that a triple
finger double tap will always take you back
| | 02:00 | out of zoom.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Setting the display to Large Text| 00:00 | A new Accessibility feature introduced
with IOS4 operating system is Large Text.
| | 00:05 | Simply put, this feature lets you
increase the default size of text in your
| | 00:08 | Contacts, Mail, Text Messages and Notes.
| | 00:11 | Just click Large Text and select a
size, and that's all there is to it.
| | 00:16 | Now if I open, say, Mail, notice
all the text is at the selected size.
| | 00:26 | The same goes for my Text
Messages, my Notes and My Contacts.
| | 00:29 | So if you have trouble reading
text at the default size, visit your
| | 00:32 | Accessibility Settings and pick a
large text size, or return there to turn
| | 00:37 | Large Text off again.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Setting the display to White On Black | 00:00 | Now let's take a look at the third and
final accessibility feature for iPhone
| | 00:03 | and iPod Touch users who have eyesight issues.
| | 00:06 | This one is white on black, and it's a
simple On/Off switch. Let's turn it on.
| | 00:13 | This turns the iPhone's display
into a much higher contrast display,
| | 00:16 | specifically designed so it's much easier
to tell one item or object from another.
| | 00:19 | Let's go to the Home screen.
| | 00:21 | So here instead of the usual black
background, the background is white and the
| | 00:25 | colors on all the app
icons are all reversed as well.
| | 00:28 | This is a lot like looking at a photo
negative of your screen, if you are old
| | 00:31 | enough to remember what those are.
| | 00:32 | And this is a global effect across
every screen and app on your device,
| | 00:36 | including photos and videos.
| | 00:37 | Now if you have decent eyesight, you
probably don't have much reason to use
| | 00:42 | this feature, but if you have trouble
with colors or low contrast displays,
| | 00:45 | this feature should help you out a
lot and let you use your iPhone or iPod
| | 00:48 | Touch much more efficiently.
| | 00:51 | To turn off White on Black just go back
to Settings > General > Accessibility,
| | 00:57 | and while I am doing this, notice
how much easier it is to see all these
| | 01:00 | different menus, and in here, we
can just switch White on Black to Off.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Mono Audio| 00:00 | If you have issues with your hearing
and especially if you are deaf in one ear,
| | 00:03 | it can be frustrating to listen
to music, audio books, and other audio
| | 00:07 | files that have stereo mixes, especially if
there is extreme stereo panning in the audio file.
| | 00:11 | For example if you know the music of
the Beetles, in a lot of their early work
| | 00:15 | in stereo recording, they experimented
with putting entire instruments in just
| | 00:19 | the left or right channel.
| | 00:20 | So if you can only hear one side of a
stereo mix, you might miss an entire
| | 00:23 | guitar line or drum track.
| | 00:25 | The Mono Audio feature found in the
Accessibility Settings of iPhone or iPod
| | 00:29 | Touch can really come in handy if you
can only hear well out of one ear or
| | 00:32 | even if you are sharing your ear buds with a
friend and you both have one bud in one ear.
| | 00:36 | Just tap Mono Audio to On and your
iPhone or iPod touch will combine the
| | 00:40 | left and right channels from all audio from
your device into a single mono audio output.
| | 00:44 | So the same exact sounds will
be coming out of both ear buds.
| | 00:48 | This isn't really any kind of
groundbreaking feature but it's nice to have if
| | 00:50 | you have been frustrated with not being
able to hear your music in its entirety.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Speak Auto-text| 00:00 | The final accessibility feature under the
Accessibility settings here is Speak Auto-text.
| | 00:05 | We saw in earlier chapters that when
you are typing on the iPhone or iPod
| | 00:08 | Touch's keyboard, you will get
suggestions for replacing of words you are either
| | 00:11 | misspelling or for words
you've only partially typed out.
| | 00:14 | If you have Speak Auto-text on,
your iPhone or iPod Touch will read the
| | 00:17 | suggestion out loud.
| | 00:19 | This serves the purpose of letting you
keep your eyes on the keyboard instead of
| | 00:21 | on the words you are typing, and it
can also help you know what's being
| | 00:24 | suggested in case you are using the
Zoom feature and you can't see the
| | 00:27 | suggestions because of the
zoom level you are using.
| | 00:29 | This feature will work with
either Voice Over or Zoom on or off.
| | 00:32 | So now we have got speak Auto-
text on, let's see how it works.
| | 00:35 | Let me go back to my Home screen and
open Notes, and I will create a new note.
| | 00:43 | So let's type the letters Im.
| | 00:44 | (VoiceOver: I'm)
So my iPhone just audibly suggested I'm.
| | 00:48 | If I am okay with that suggestion,
I just press Space and it's added.
| | 00:52 | Let's continue typing.
I want to say "I'm not contagious."
| | 00:56 | I will type n-o-t, and let's do a
horrible spelling of contagious.
| | 01:09 | (VoiceOver: Contagious.)
| | 01:10 | So that's clearly a typo and my
iPhone has read |
|
|
